User Manual
Doc-To-Help
Standard Manual
by Robelle
Solutions Technology Inc.
Program and
manual copyright © 1981-2015 Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
Permission is
granted to reprint this document (but not for profit), provided that
copyright notice is given.
Qedit and Suprtool are trademarks of
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. Oracle is a trademark of Oracle Corporation,
Redwood City, California, USA. Other product and company names mentioned herein
may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
Suite 372, 13711 – 72nd
Avenue,
Surrey, B.C. Canada V3W 2P2
Phone: 604.501.2001
Support: 289.480.1060
E-mail: sales@robelle.com
E-mail: support@robelle.com
Web: www.robelle.com
Table of Contents
Table of Contents 3
Welcome to Suprtool 19
Introduction......................................................................................................... 19
Suprtool Components............................................................................................ 19
Database Editing....................................................................................... 20
Speed Demon - Replacing DBGET Mode-2................................................... 20
STExport - Data Export Utility................................................................... 20
Suprlink - Multidataset Access.................................................................... 20
Suprtool2 - Interface Routine....................................................................... 21
Documentation..................................................................................................... 21
Notation.............................................................................................................. 21
Highlights 23
Highlights in Suprtool 5.7...................................................................................... 23
Highlights in
Suprtool 5.6...................................................................................... 23
Highlights in
Suprtool 5.5...................................................................................... 23
Highlights in
Suprtool 5.4...................................................................................... 23
Highlights in
Suprtool 5.3...................................................................................... 24
Highlights in
Suprtool 5.2...................................................................................... 24
Highlights in
Suprtool 5.1.02................................................................................. 24
Installing Suprtool 26
Overview............................................................................................................. 26
Ecometry Users..................................................................................................... 26
Instructions.......................................................................................................... 26
Getting a Quick Start with Suprtool 27
How to Run Suprtool............................................................................................ 27
What is a Task?................................................................................................... 27
Copying Files...................................................................................................... 28
Copying One File..................................................................................... 28
Appending to a File................................................................................... 28
Concatenating Two Files............................................................................ 28
Fields in Data Files............................................................................................... 28
What is a Self-Describing File?................................................................... 28
Creating an SD File................................................................................... 29
Define Fields in a Data File......................................................................... 29
Create an SD File from a Data File............................................................... 29
Repeating Commands............................................................................................ 30
Repeating a Command............................................................................... 30
How to Save On-line Commands to a File..................................................... 30
Selecting Database Records..................................................................................... 30
Select All Records..................................................................................... 31
Select a Random Sample............................................................................ 31
Look at the First Few Records..................................................................... 31
Selecting by Criteria.............................................................................................. 31
Simple Criteria......................................................................................... 31
Complex Criteria...................................................................................... 31
String of Digits......................................................................................... 32
Selecting by Date.................................................................................................. 32
Select by Today's Date............................................................................... 32
Select by Particular Date............................................................................. 32
Select by Year.......................................................................................... 33
Select Prior Month.................................................................................... 33
Selecting by Lists of Values.................................................................................... 33
Finding Data Based on a List...................................................................... 33
Finding Data Based on a File...................................................................... 34
Finding Data Based on Another Dataset's Criteria........................................... 34
Finding Data in a Data File......................................................................... 35
Comparing against a Key and Data............................................................... 35
Sorting Database Records....................................................................................... 36
Sort Records............................................................................................ 36
Sort Records in Descending Order................................................................ 36
Sort by Multiple Keys............................................................................... 36
Deleting Records................................................................................................... 36
Updating Records.................................................................................................. 37
Duplicate Records................................................................................................. 37
Report without Duplicate Records................................................................ 37
Report Only the Duplicate Records............................................................... 38
Report Only the Unique Records.................................................................. 38
Report Only the Duplicates and Their Originals.............................................. 39
Deleting Duplicate Database Records............................................................ 39
Deleting Non-Unique Duplicate Database Records........................................... 40
Deleting Duplicate Data File Records............................................................ 41
Sorting IMAGE to KSAM...................................................................................... 42
Loading a Dataset.................................................................................................. 42
Decimal Places..................................................................................................... 42
Converting Numbers.............................................................................................. 43
Counts and Subtotals............................................................................................. 43
Count and Subtotal on Sort Keys................................................................. 43
Sort by Count or Subtotal.......................................................................... 44
Total by Field.......................................................................................... 44
Running Totals........................................................................................ 44
Running SubTotals................................................................................... 44
Listing Records.................................................................................................... 45
Changing the Output Record Format........................................................................ 45
Producing a Condensed Dataset Listing..................................................................... 46
Simple Reports..................................................................................................... 46
Your First Report...................................................................................... 46
Printing a Report...................................................................................... 47
Specifying Your Own Title......................................................................... 47
Column Headings..................................................................................... 47
Printing Mailing Labels............................................................................. 48
Running Suprtool under MPE 49
How to Run Suprtool............................................................................................ 49
How to Xeq a Suprtool Task................................................................................... 49
Info= for Commands.............................................................................................. 49
Son Process......................................................................................................... 50
Combining Info= and Son Process........................................................................... 50
Exit with Verify.................................................................................................... 51
Preventing Suprtool from Suspending....................................................................... 51
Stdin and Stdlist Files........................................................................................... 51
Input and Output Files........................................................................................... 52
Using CREATEPROCESS.................................................................................... 52
Duplicating Files.................................................................................................. 52
Job Control Word................................................................................................. 52
Suprmgr Configuration File.................................................................................... 53
Using Suprtool in Batch......................................................................................... 53
SuprtoolOutCount JCW......................................................................................... 53
SuprtoolFullCount Variable.................................................................................... 54
Summary of Parm= Values..................................................................................... 54
Suprtool Issues and Solutions 55
A Suprtool Task................................................................................................... 55
Input Choices........................................................................................... 55
Processing Selections................................................................................. 55
Output Choices......................................................................................... 55
Suprtool and Allbase............................................................................................. 56
Data-Types.............................................................................................. 56
Date and Time Types................................................................................ 57
Restrictions.............................................................................................. 57
Suprtool and IMAGE............................................................................................. 57
Reading Datasets....................................................................................... 57
Serial vs. Keyed Access.............................................................................. 58
When to Use Suprtool with IMAGE............................................................. 58
TurboIMAGE Compatibility....................................................................... 59
Locking of IMAGE Datasets........................................................................ 59
Database Maintenance (Delete, Put).............................................................. 60
B-trees.................................................................................................... 61
Master Dataset Expansion (MDX)................................................................ 61
Jumbo Datasets and Large Datasets............................................................... 61
Suprtool and KSAM Files...................................................................................... 62
Locking Output KSAM Files...................................................................... 62
Locking Input KSAM Files........................................................................ 62
Compatibility Mode KSAM/V Files............................................................ 63
Reorganizing KSAM/V Files...................................................................... 63
KSAM/XL Files....................................................................................... 64
Loading KSAM/XL Files........................................................................... 64
How Do I Convert CM Ksam to NM KSAM?............................................... 64
Reuse option and KSAM/XL Files............................................................... 65
Suprtool and MPE Files......................................................................................... 65
Buffered and NOBUF File Access................................................................. 65
Message Files........................................................................................... 66
Circular Files........................................................................................... 66
RIO Files................................................................................................ 66
Temporary Files....................................................................................... 67
Lockwords............................................................................................... 67
Copying User Labels................................................................................. 67
SDUnix Utility..................................................................................................... 68
SDUnix Parameters................................................................................... 68
LF vs. NOLF........................................................................................... 68
Examples................................................................................................. 68
Link vs. Query......................................................................................... 69
Suprtool and Self-Describing Files........................................................................... 69
Create an SD File from a Dataset.................................................................. 69
Create an SD File from a Data File............................................................... 69
SD Files as Input...................................................................................... 70
Listing SD Files....................................................................................... 70
Decimal Places and Date Formats................................................................. 70
Restrictions of SD Files............................................................................. 70
Creating KSAM SD Files........................................................................... 71
HowMessy Loadfile................................................................................... 72
Notes on SD Files..................................................................................... 72
Convert an SD File to a Disc File................................................................ 72
Suprtool and Sorting Files...................................................................................... 72
Fast Sorting............................................................................................. 73
Native Language Support............................................................................ 73
With Reduced Disc Space........................................................................... 73
Suprtool and Tape Files......................................................................................... 74
Labelled Tapes......................................................................................... 74
Multiple Files.......................................................................................... 75
Notes...................................................................................................... 75
File User Labels........................................................................................ 75
Suprtool and Remote File Access............................................................................. 76
Network Services (NS)............................................................................... 76
Suprtool and MPE/iX............................................................................................ 76
Calling Suprtool in Native Mode................................................................. 76
User XL Files........................................................................................... 76
When Errors Occur.................................................................................... 77
Sorting with Suprtool/iX............................................................................ 77
Suprtool and CI Variable Substitution...................................................................... 77
Example.................................................................................................. 77
Batch Requires Indent................................................................................ 78
Avoiding Double Resolution....................................................................... 78
Suprlink and STExport.............................................................................. 79
Suprtool and User Prompting.................................................................................. 79
Example.................................................................................................. 80
Resolving Variables................................................................................... 80
Suprtool and Personal Computers............................................................................ 80
Downloading to the PC.............................................................................. 81
Decimal Places......................................................................................... 81
Spreadsheets............................................................................................. 81
Suprtool and PowerHouse Applications..................................................................... 81
Suprtool with Quiz/QTP............................................................................ 81
Step 1: Create
a Subfile with Quiz............................................................... 82
Step 2: Output
Erase in Suprtool................................................................ 82
Step 3: Report
with Quiz........................................................................... 82
Using QTP to Create Subfiles..................................................................... 83
Creating Subfile with Command File............................................................ 83
Suprtool and PowerHouse Data-Types.......................................................... 85
Suprtool Definitions - QSCHEMA............................................................... 87
Notes on QSHOW Output.......................................................................... 88
The Quiz Report....................................................................................... 89
Quiz: Generating Suprtool Commands.......................................................... 90
Generating Suprtool Commands from Quick.................................................. 90
Suprtool and Application Systems........................................................................... 91
Third-Party Indexing................................................................................. 91
Z-type TPI-keys........................................................................................ 91
Omnidex without TPI................................................................................ 92
OmniQuest.............................................................................................. 93
Suprtool with TRANSACT........................................................................ 93
XSORT and RPG..................................................................................... 94
QUERY Program...................................................................................... 94
SRN Chronos Dates.................................................................................. 95
Year 2000 Solutions with Suprtool.......................................................................... 95
What If I Have Four-Digit Years?................................................................. 95
What does Set Date Cutoff do?.................................................................... 96
Stddate and Set Date Cutoff......................................................................... 96
What does Set Date ForceCentury do?.......................................................... 96
What If I Have Two-Digit Years?................................................................. 96
What Is Wrong with Two-Digit Years?........................................................ 97
How Do $Today and $Date Work?.............................................................. 97
Will Suprtool Generate an Error for Two-Digit Year
Dates?.............................. 98
How Do I Use $Today and $Date with yymmdd Dates?................................... 98
aammdd Date Format................................................................................. 98
Invalid Dates............................................................................................ 99
Can Suprtool Convert Two-Digit Years to Four Digits?.................................. 99
Case 1:
Converting a J2 Date from yymmdd to ccyymmdd.............................. 99
Case 2: X6
yymmdd Data to X8 ccyymmdd................................................ 101
Case 3:
Different Date Formats X6 MMDDYY Data to X6 YYMMDD............. 102
Year 2000 Testing................................................................................... 103
Performance Issues............................................................................................... 104
Native Mode and Compatibility
Mode........................................................ 104
CPU-Bound?.......................................................................................... 104
Sort Speed............................................................................................. 105
Analyzing Performance Data...................................................................... 105
Suprtool Performance Hints....................................................................... 106
Obtaining Accurate Measurements.............................................................. 106
Performance Summary.............................................................................. 107
Suprtool Functions.............................................................................................. 107
UC4/Scripting and Functions................................................................................ 107
String/Byte Functions.......................................................................................... 108
$TRIM (Works on byte type fields)........................................................................ 108
If Usage:................................................................................................ 108
Extract Usage (target: Byte type fields)........................................................ 108
Example:............................................................................................... 108
Data Examples Before and After:................................................................. 109
$LTRIM (Works on Byte type fields)..................................................................... 109
If Usage:................................................................................................ 109
Extract Usage (target: Byte type fields)........................................................ 109
Example:............................................................................................... 109
Data Examples before and after:.................................................................. 109
$RTRIM (Works on Byte type fields)..................................................................... 109
If Usage:................................................................................................ 110
Extract Usage (target: Byte type fields)........................................................ 110
Example:............................................................................................... 110
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 110
Data Result............................................................................................ 110
$UPPER (Works on Byte-type fields)..................................................................... 110
If Usage:................................................................................................ 110
Extract Usage (target: Byte type fields)........................................................ 110
Example:............................................................................................... 110
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 110
$LOWER (Works on Byte-type fields).................................................................... 111
If Usage:................................................................................................ 111
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 111
Example:............................................................................................... 111
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 111
$PROPER (Works on Byte-type fields)................................................................... 111
If Usage:................................................................................................ 111
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 111
Example:............................................................................................... 111
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 111
$SPLIT (Works on Byte-type fields)....................................................................... 112
If Usage:................................................................................................ 112
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 112
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 112
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 112
$FINDCLEAN (Works on Byte-type fields)............................................................. 112
If Usage:................................................................................................ 112
$CLEAN (Works on Byte-type fields)..................................................................... 112
If Usage: (Not commonly used).................................................................. 113
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 113
Example:............................................................................................... 113
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 113
$TRANSLATE (Works on Byte-type fields)............................................................ 113
If Usage:................................................................................................ 113
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 113
Data Examples: (Using above code)............................................................ 113
$ETOA............................................................................................................. 113
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 114
$ATOE............................................................................................................. 114
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 114
String Addition................................................................................................... 114
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 114
Example:............................................................................................... 114
Data Result:........................................................................................... 114
Numeric Functions.............................................................................................. 114
$TRUNCATE.................................................................................................... 114
If Usage:................................................................................................ 115
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 115
$ABS................................................................................................................ 115
IF Usage:............................................................................................... 115
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 115
$TOTAL........................................................................................................... 115
IF Usage:............................................................................................... 115
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 115
$SUBTOTAL.................................................................................................... 115
IF Usage:............................................................................................... 115
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 116
Example of $TOTAL and $SUBTOTAL..................................................... 116
$COUNTER...................................................................................................... 116
IF Usage:............................................................................................... 116
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 117
$SUBCOUNT.................................................................................................... 117
IF Usage:............................................................................................... 117
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 117
Examples for $counter and $subcount:......................................................... 117
$SIGNED.......................................................................................................... 118
IF Usage:............................................................................................... 118
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 118
Arithmetic Operations.......................................................................................... 118
+ - * / mod............................................................................................ 118
If Usage:................................................................................................ 118
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 118
Conversion/Formatting......................................................................................... 118
$NUMBER........................................................................................................ 118
If Usage:................................................................................................ 119
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 119
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 119
$EDIT............................................................................................................... 119
If Usage:................................................................................................ 119
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 119
Data Examples:....................................................................................... 119
Other Functions.................................................................................................. 119
$LOOKUP......................................................................................................... 119
If Usage:................................................................................................ 120
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 120
$READ............................................................................................................. 120
If Usage:................................................................................................ 120
Date Functions.................................................................................................... 120
$TODAY........................................................................................................... 120
If Usage:................................................................................................ 120
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 120
$DATE............................................................................................................. 121
If Usage:................................................................................................ 121
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 121
$INVALID......................................................................................................... 121
If Usage:................................................................................................ 121
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 121
$STDDATE....................................................................................................... 121
If Usage:................................................................................................ 121
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 121
$DAYS............................................................................................................. 122
If Usage:................................................................................................ 122
Extract Usage:......................................................................................... 122
Suprtool Commands 123
General Notes..................................................................................................... 123
Abbreviating........................................................................................... 123
Uppercase or Lowercase............................................................................ 123
Multiple Commands per Line.................................................................... 123
Continuation.......................................................................................... 124
Comments on Command Lines.................................................................. 124
STREAMX............................................................................................ 124
MPE Commands..................................................................................... 125
MPE/iX Commands................................................................................ 125
Calculator.............................................................................................. 125
Control-Y Interrupt.................................................................................. 125
Error Recovery........................................................................................ 126
Add Command
[AD]........................................................................................... 127
Base Command
[BA].......................................................................................... 128
Before Command
[B].......................................................................................... 131
Chain Command
[C]........................................................................................... 133
Clean Command
[CL]......................................................................................... 136
Removing Bad Characters......................................................................... 136
Define Command
[D].......................................................................................... 137
Delete Command
[DEL]...................................................................................... 142
Do Command [DO]............................................................................................ 144
Duplicate Command
[DU].................................................................................... 145
Edit Command
[ED]........................................................................................... 150
Exit Command
[E]............................................................................................. 151
Export Command
[EXP]...................................................................................... 153
Extract Command
[EXT]..................................................................................... 154
Constants............................................................................................... 154
Dates..................................................................................................... 156
Range of Fields....................................................................................... 158
Numeric Expressions................................................................................ 160
$SubTotal Function................................................................................. 162
$Total Function...................................................................................... 162
$Counter Function................................................................................... 162
String Expressions................................................................................... 163
Splitting Variable
Length Strings............................................................... 164
Cleaning your Data.................................................................................. 166
Clean Command
Syntax........................................................................... 166
Setting the Clean
Character....................................................................... 166
Cleaning a Field...................................................................................... 166
Cleaning your data................................................................................... 167
Extract from a Table................................................................................. 167
Data Conversion...................................................................................... 168
$Number Function................................................................................... 170
Numeric to Byte
Conversion..................................................................... 171
$Edit Function........................................................................................ 171
Placeholders and
Format Characters............................................................ 171
Byte-Type
Formatting.............................................................................. 171
Z-placeholder for
byte-fields....................................................................... 172
Overflow and
limits................................................................................. 172
Numeric field
edit-masks........................................................................... 173
Signs.................................................................................................... 173
Decimal Places........................................................................................ 174
Data and Edit
mask:................................................................................. 174
Currency and
Dollar signs......................................................................... 174
Overflow and
floating dollar....................................................................... 175
Set CurrencySymbol................................................................................ 175
Overflow and
limits................................................................................. 175
Form Command
[F]............................................................................................ 178
Get Command [G].............................................................................................. 183
Help Command
[H]............................................................................................ 186
If Command [IF]................................................................................................ 187
Expressions............................................................................................ 187
Constants............................................................................................... 190
Subscripts.............................................................................................. 191
Numeric Expressions................................................................................ 192
String Expressions................................................................................... 194
Date Selection......................................................................................... 198
Long Expressions.................................................................................... 204
Input Command
[I]............................................................................................. 207
Item Command
[IT]............................................................................................ 210
Date Formats.......................................................................................... 210
Decimal Places........................................................................................ 213
Notes.................................................................................................... 214
Key Command [K]............................................................................................. 216
Link Command
[LIN]......................................................................................... 218
List Command
[L].............................................................................................. 219
Format.................................................................................................. 219
LaserJet Listings..................................................................................... 220
Headings in Listings................................................................................ 221
Simple Reports....................................................................................... 222
List Device............................................................................................. 223
Listredo Command
[LISTREDO].......................................................................... 225
Numrecs Command
[N]....................................................................................... 226
Open Command
[OP].......................................................................................... 228
Output Command
[O]......................................................................................... 229
Put Command [P].............................................................................................. 236
Q Command [Q]................................................................................................ 238
Redo Command
[REDO]..................................................................................... 239
Reset Command
[R]........................................................................................... 242
Select Command [SEL]........................................................................................ 243
Set Command [S]............................................................................................... 244
Allbase.................................................................................................. 246
Arithmetic.............................................................................................. 246
Baseclose............................................................................................... 246
Blocksize............................................................................................... 246
Buffer.................................................................................................... 246
CleanChar.............................................................................................. 247
CurrencySymbol..................................................................................... 247
Date Cutoff............................................................................................. 247
Date ForceCentury................................................................................... 249
Date IfYY2000Error................................................................................. 249
Date MapToPHDate8............................................................................... 249
DecimalSymbol...................................................................................... 250
Defer..................................................................................................... 250
DumpOnError......................................................................................... 250
EditStopError......................................................................................... 250
Eofread.................................................................................................. 251
FastRead................................................................................................ 251
Filecode................................................................................................. 251
Filename................................................................................................ 252
Firstrec.................................................................................................. 252
Hints..................................................................................................... 252
Ifcheck................................................................................................... 252
Ignore.................................................................................................... 253
InitExtents............................................................................................. 253
ItemAbbreviateDate.................................................................................. 253
ItemLock............................................................................................... 253
Interactive.............................................................................................. 254
LabelledTapeRewind................................................................................ 254
Limits................................................................................................... 254
List....................................................................................................... 255
List Date................................................................................................ 255
List PCL............................................................................................... 256
List Time.............................................................................................. 257
Lock..................................................................................................... 257
MakeAbsent........................................................................................... 258
NLS...................................................................................................... 258
NumBug................................................................................................ 259
Openmode.............................................................................................. 259
Oracle Rows........................................................................................... 259
Oracle OpenFix....................................................................................... 259
Oracle Integer.......................................................................................... 259
Oracle PassShift...................................................................................... 259
Oracle ZeroNull....................................................................................... 260
Pattern................................................................................................... 260
Prefetch.................................................................................................. 260
Privmode............................................................................................... 261
Progress................................................................................................. 261
Prompt.................................................................................................. 262
RealMap................................................................................................ 262
Recover................................................................................................. 262
Redo..................................................................................................... 262
Sortfast.................................................................................................. 263
Squeeze................................................................................................. 264
Statistics................................................................................................ 264
Subsystem............................................................................................. 264
Suspend................................................................................................. 265
ThousandSymbol.................................................................................... 265
Userlabels.............................................................................................. 265
Varsub................................................................................................... 266
VarsubCompat........................................................................................ 266
VarsubDebug.......................................................................................... 266
Warnings............................................................................................... 266
Xltrim................................................................................................... 267
Sort Command
[SO]........................................................................................... 268
Table Command [TA].......................................................................................... 270
Adding Individual Values to a Table........................................................... 270
Adding Values from a File........................................................................ 271
TRanslate Command [TR].................................................................................... 275
Total Command [T]............................................................................................ 277
Update Command
[UP]....................................................................................... 279
Use Command [U].............................................................................................. 280
Userpause Command
[USER]............................................................................... 282
Verify Command
[V]........................................................................................... 283
Xeq Command [X]............................................................................................. 284
Calculator Command [=]...................................................................................... 285
Suprtool Errors and Warnings 288
Two Types Of Messages....................................................................................... 288
Errors................................................................................................................ 288
Warnings........................................................................................................... 289
Welcome to STExport 291
Welcome to STExport......................................................................................... 291
Installing STExport............................................................................................. 291
Built-In File Names............................................................................................. 291
Accessing STExport 293
How To Run STExport........................................................................................ 293
How to Xeq an STExport Task.............................................................................. 293
Son Process........................................................................................................ 293
Suprtool Export Command................................................................................... 294
Preventing MPE Commands................................................................................. 294
Exit with Verify.................................................................................................. 294
Preventing STExport from Suspending.................................................................... 294
Job Control Word............................................................................................... 295
Using STExport in Batch..................................................................................... 295
Summary of Parm= Values.................................................................................... 295
STExportOutCount JCW..................................................................................... 295
STExportFullCount Variable................................................................................. 296
Introduction to STExport 297
Importing Data.................................................................................................... 297
Input File........................................................................................................... 297
Data-Types......................................................................................................... 297
Formatting Commands......................................................................................... 298
Commands......................................................................................................... 298
Performance Considerations................................................................................... 298
CI Variable Substitution....................................................................................... 299
STExport Commands 301
General Notes..................................................................................................... 301
Abbreviating........................................................................................... 301
Uppercase or Lowercase............................................................................ 301
Comments on Command Lines.................................................................. 301
STREAMX............................................................................................ 302
MPE Commands..................................................................................... 302
MPE/iX Commands................................................................................ 302
File Names............................................................................................. 302
Calculator.............................................................................................. 303
Control-Y.............................................................................................. 303
Before Command
[B].......................................................................................... 304
Clean Command
[CL]......................................................................................... 306
Removing Bad Characters......................................................................... 306
Columns Command
[C]...................................................................................... 307
Date Command
[DA].......................................................................................... 308
Decimal Command
[DEC]................................................................................... 310
Delimiter Command
[DE].................................................................................... 311
Do Command [DO]............................................................................................ 312
Escape Command
[ES]........................................................................................ 313
Exit Command
[E]............................................................................................. 314
Exit Abort [EA]...................................................................................... 314
Exit Suspend [ES]................................................................................... 314
Exit Xeq [EX]......................................................................................... 315
Floating Command
[FL]...................................................................................... 316
Form Command
[F]............................................................................................ 317
Heading Command
[HEA]................................................................................... 319
Help Command
[H]............................................................................................ 321
HTML Command
[HT]....................................................................................... 322
Input Command
[I]............................................................................................. 324
Listredo Command
[LISTREDO].......................................................................... 325
Output Command
[O]......................................................................................... 326
Quote Command
[Q]........................................................................................... 327
Redo Command
[REDO]..................................................................................... 328
Reset Command
[R]........................................................................................... 329
Set Command [S]............................................................................................... 330
CleanChar.............................................................................................. 330
Mapped................................................................................................. 330
Redo..................................................................................................... 330
Statistics................................................................................................ 331
Varsub................................................................................................... 332
VarsubDebug.......................................................................................... 332
Warnings............................................................................................... 332
Xmltagchar............................................................................................. 332
ZonedFix............................................................................................... 333
Sign Command
[SI]............................................................................................ 334
Spaces Command
[SP]........................................................................................ 335
Use Command [U].............................................................................................. 336
Verify Command
[V]........................................................................................... 337
Xeq Command [X]............................................................................................. 338
XML Command
[XML]...................................................................................... 339
Zero Command
[Z]............................................................................................. 342
Example of STExport Output 343
Example............................................................................................................ 343
Limits Within STExport 347
Maximums......................................................................................................... 347
Welcome to Dbedit 348
Introduction........................................................................................................ 348
Restrictions........................................................................................................ 348
Functions of Dbedit............................................................................................. 348
Performance of Dbedit........................................................................................... 349
Field Lists......................................................................................................... 349
Database Locking................................................................................................ 350
Decimal Points................................................................................................... 350
Critical-Item Update............................................................................................. 350
Dbedit Commands 353
General Notes..................................................................................................... 353
Abbreviating........................................................................................... 353
Uppercase or Lowercase............................................................................ 353
Continuation.......................................................................................... 353
Control-Y.............................................................................................. 354
Comments on Command Lines.................................................................. 354
MPE Commands..................................................................................... 354
MPE/iX Commands................................................................................ 354
Calculator.............................................................................................. 354
Example Database.................................................................................... 355
Prompting for Search Criteria..................................................................... 355
Command Parameters........................................................................................... 355
File Parameter......................................................................................... 355
Option Parameter..................................................................................... 356
Numeric-Value Option.............................................................................. 356
All Option............................................................................................. 356
Key Option............................................................................................ 356
Limit Option.......................................................................................... 357
Related Option........................................................................................ 357
Under Option.......................................................................................... 357
Updatekey Option.................................................................................... 358
Subcommands.................................................................................................... 358
Add Command [A]............................................................................................. 360
Before Command
[B].......................................................................................... 361
Change Command
[C]......................................................................................... 362
Delete Command
[D].......................................................................................... 363
Do Command [DO]............................................................................................ 364
Exit Command
[E]............................................................................................. 365
File Command
[F].............................................................................................. 366
Form Command
[FO]......................................................................................... 367
Help Command
[H]............................................................................................ 368
List Command
[L].............................................................................................. 369
Listredo Command
[LISTREDO].......................................................................... 370
Modify Command
[M]........................................................................................ 371
Q Command [Q]................................................................................................ 372
Redo Command
[REDO]..................................................................................... 373
Set Command [S]............................................................................................... 374
LP........................................................................................................ 374
Prompt.................................................................................................. 374
Quiet..................................................................................................... 374
Reset..................................................................................................... 374
Underline............................................................................................... 375
Verify.................................................................................................... 375
Use Command [U].............................................................................................. 376
Verify Command
[V]........................................................................................... 377
Welcome to Suprlink 378
Welcome to Suprlink........................................................................................... 378
Installing Suprlink............................................................................................... 378
Built-In File Names............................................................................................. 378
Accessing Suprlink 380
How To Run Suprlink......................................................................................... 380
How to Xeq a Suprlink Task................................................................................. 380
Son Process........................................................................................................ 380
Suprtool Link Command...................................................................................... 381
Preventing MPE Commands................................................................................. 381
Exit with Verify.................................................................................................. 381
Preventing Suprlink from Suspending..................................................................... 382
Job Control Word............................................................................................... 382
Using Suprlink in Batch....................................................................................... 382
Summary of Parm= Values.................................................................................... 382
SuprlinkOutCount JCW....................................................................................... 382
SuprlinkFullCount Variable.................................................................................. 383
Introduction to Suprlink 385
How Report Programs Work................................................................................. 385
Input Files......................................................................................................... 385
Link Files.......................................................................................................... 386
Output Files....................................................................................................... 386
Sort Keys........................................................................................................... 386
Selection Logic................................................................................................... 386
A Link Example.................................................................................................. 387
A Join Example.................................................................................................. 387
Performance Considerations................................................................................... 389
Another Example................................................................................................. 389
Illegal Digits...................................................................................................... 390
Selecting Non-Matches......................................................................................... 390
Linking MPE and KSAM Files............................................................................. 391
CI Variable Substitution....................................................................................... 392
Suprlink with Quiz/QTP...................................................................................... 393
Suprlink Commands 396
General Notes..................................................................................................... 396
Abbreviating........................................................................................... 396
Uppercase or Lowercase............................................................................ 396
Continuation.......................................................................................... 396
Comments on Command Lines.................................................................. 397
STREAMX............................................................................................ 397
MPE Commands..................................................................................... 397
MPE/iX Commands................................................................................ 398
File Names............................................................................................. 398
Calculator.............................................................................................. 398
Control-Y.............................................................................................. 398
Before Command
[B].......................................................................................... 399
Do Command [DO]............................................................................................ 401
Exit Command
[E]............................................................................................. 402
Exit Abort [EA]...................................................................................... 402
Exit Suspend [ES]................................................................................... 402
Exit Xeq [EX]......................................................................................... 402
Form Command
[F]............................................................................................ 404
Help Command
[H]............................................................................................ 406
Input Command
[I]............................................................................................. 407
Join Command
[J].............................................................................................. 408
Link Command
[L]............................................................................................. 410
Listredo Command
[LISTREDO].......................................................................... 412
Output Command
[O]......................................................................................... 413
Redo Command
[REDO]..................................................................................... 414
Reset Command
[R]........................................................................................... 415
Set Command [S]............................................................................................... 416
Mapped................................................................................................. 416
Redo..................................................................................................... 416
Statistics................................................................................................ 417
Varsub................................................................................................... 417
VarsubDebug.......................................................................................... 417
Use Command [U].............................................................................................. 419
Verify Command
[V]........................................................................................... 420
Xeq Command [X]............................................................................................. 421
Example Suprlink Output 422
Example............................................................................................................ 422
Limits Within Suprlink 425
Maximums......................................................................................................... 425
Welcome to Speed Demon 427
Welcome to Speed Demon.................................................................................... 427
MPE V.............................................................................................................. 427
MPE/iX............................................................................................................. 427
Conditions of Use................................................................................................ 427
Speed Demon vs. Suprtool.................................................................................... 428
Fourth-Generation Languages (4GLs)...................................................................... 428
Caveats for Privileged Mode Users.......................................................................... 428
SPDEPREFETCH JCW...................................................................................... 428
Installing Speed Demon 431
Compatibility and Native Mode Versions................................................................ 431
System SL Installation......................................................................................... 431
User XL Installation............................................................................................. 432
Group or Pub SL Installation................................................................................. 433
Netbase.................................................................................................. 433
Pub SL.................................................................................................. 433
Group SL............................................................................................... 434
Accessing Speed Demon 435
Accessing Speed Demon....................................................................................... 435
Original Program Using DBGET........................................................................... 435
Modified Program Using Speed Demon................................................................... 436
How to Use Speed Demon.................................................................................... 438
SPDEDBINIT and the Control Record.................................................................... 438
Error Handling.................................................................................................... 438
MPE/iX............................................................................................................. 439
Speed Demon Intrinsics 441
The Intrinsics..................................................................................................... 441
The Status Array................................................................................................. 441
SPDEEXPLAIN Intrinsic...................................................................................... 442
SPDEDBINIT Intrinsic........................................................................................ 443
SPDEDBSCAN Intrinsic...................................................................................... 445
SPDEDBSHUT Intrinsic...................................................................................... 446
The Demon Program 447
The Demon-stration Program................................................................................. 447
Reading with Speed Demon (Parm=0)..................................................................... 447
Reading with DBGET (Parm=1)............................................................................ 447
Reading All IMAGE Blocks (Parm=3).................................................................... 448
Verifying Version Numbers................................................................................... 448
Examples of Calling Speed Demon 449
Copying the Examples......................................................................................... 449
COBOL Example................................................................................................ 449
Pascal Example................................................................................................... 454
Speed Demon Error Messages 459
Error Messages and Numbers................................................................................. 459
Assertion Errors.................................................................................................. 461
Welcome to Calling Suprtool 462
Calling Suprtool................................................................................................. 462
Suprtool2 Routine............................................................................................... 462
Importance of the Exit Command........................................................................... 462
Control Record................................................................................................... 463
Compiling and Linking on MPE V........................................................................ 464
Compiling and Linking on MPE/iX....................................................................... 465
Suprtool Run Parameters...................................................................................... 466
Lockwords on Suprtool........................................................................................ 467
Examples of Calling Suprtool 469
Copying the Examples......................................................................................... 469
COBOL Example................................................................................................ 469
FORTRAN Example........................................................................................... 473
TRANSACT Example......................................................................................... 476
SPL Example..................................................................................................... 479
C Example......................................................................................................... 484
Pascal Example................................................................................................... 486
SPEEDWARE Example....................................................................................... 488
Calling Suprlink 491
The Suprtool2 Interface......................................................................................... 491
Restrictions........................................................................................................ 491
COBOL Example................................................................................................ 491
Installing the Suprtool2 Interface 497
Compatibility Mode Installation............................................................................ 497
Installing into the System SL................................................................................ 497
Suprtool2 Error Messages 498
Error Numbers.................................................................................................... 498
Glossary of Terms 500
Commonly-used Terms........................................................................................ 500
Special Characters................................................................................................ 505
Index 510
Welcome to version 5.4 of Suprtool — the HP e3000 handyman for
Image and Allbase databases, MPE files, and KSAM files. Suprtool provides fast
batch reporting on your HP e3000. With Suprtool, you can select records from a
file (IMAGE, Allbase, KSAM, or MPE) to feed into your report program.
Typically, Suprtool enables you to produce the same report five times faster.
Suprtool performs best when you are selecting less than 50% of the
entries. Once selected, you can rearrange, sort, print, or total them. You need
to modify your report program to read a file instead of a dataset.
In addition, Suprtool solves dozens of other problems. The Dbedit
subsystem allows convenient, interactive editing of databases, the Suprlink
subsystem allows multiple dataset access, and the Speed Demon intrinsics allow
a user program to improve the speed of serial DBGET calls by a factor of five.
Use STExport to convert fields from a self-describing input file to an output
file that can be imported into other applications. The interface routine
Suprtool2 allows your application programs to invoke Suprtool.
The Suprtool commands are:
|
Add
|
EDit
|
ITem
|
Q
|
Use
|
|
BAse
|
Exit
|
Key
|
REDO
|
USERpause
|
|
Before
|
EXPort
|
LINk
|
Reset
|
Verify
|
|
Chain
|
EXTract
|
List
|
SELect
|
Xeq
|
|
Clean
|
Form
|
LISTREDO
|
Set
|
:MPE or HP-UX command
|
|
Define
|
Get
|
Numrecs
|
SOrt
|
=expression
|
|
DELete
|
Help
|
OPen
|
TAble
|
|
|
DO
|
IF
|
Output
|
Total
|
|
|
Duplicate
|
Input
|
Put
|
UPdate
|
|
The minimum abbreviation of each command is shown in capital
letters.
The Suprtool package consists
not only of Suprtool, but also of other programs that perform useful database
functions. These other programs are Dbedit, Speed Demon, STExport, Suprlink,
and Suprtool2.
Dbedit is a separate
module of Suprtool that permits the user to add, change, list, or delete
individual records or "chains" of records from an IMAGE database. You
enter Dbedit via the Edit command of Suprtool, after specifying a database with
the Base command. The Dbedit prompt character is #, not >, and the commands
are:
|
Add
|
File
|
Q
|
:mpe command
|
|
Before
|
FOrm
|
REDO
|
=expression
|
|
Change
|
Help
|
Set
|
|
|
Delete
|
List
|
Use
|
|
|
DO
|
LISTREDO
|
Verify
|
|
|
Exit
|
Modify
|
|
|
One part of the Suprtool
package is Speed Demon, a set of intrinsics that you call in your programs
instead of DBGET mode-2 to read serially through a dataset; it should be about
five times faster.
While Speed Demon lacks Suprtool's ability to extract fields or
select and sort records, it has the advantage that it delivers the records
directly into your program. Speed Demon/V is about 50% slower than Suprtool,
but there is no need to read an output file, as with Suprtool. Speed Demon/iX
runs at the same speed as Suprtool. With Speed Demon, your application program
is responsible for selecting records and sorting them (e.g., using the Sort
verb in COBOL).
Application programs should invoke Suprtool when they expect to
select a small percentage of the
records (i.e., when the overhead of reading the output file will be minimized).
Application programs should call Speed Demon when they expect to select a large percentage of the records.
STExport converts fields
in a self-describing input file into an output file that can be imported into
different applications.
Use STExport to produce a formatted output file that can be used to
import data into databases and applications.
Other databases have different requirements for the format of input
data. You will have to experiment with the various STExport formatting options
to find a format that your particular database tool accepts.
Suprlink is a program that
works with Suprtool to add "multidataset" capability to Suprtool.
Suprlink is not a set of callable routines. To use it, you must :run
Suprlink.Pub.Robelle or use Suprtool's Link command.
Rather than take the regular path to multiple datasets -- random
retrieval via IMAGE keys -- with its well-known performance problems, we have
chosen to follow a different path: fast serial extracts plus a very efficient
merge. The tests that we have performed indicate that this method is often
significantly faster than the "official" IMAGE method of chasing down
chains and hash synonyms.
To understand what Suprlink does, think of the process of writing a
report. Your report program (written in COBOL, RPG, PowerHouse, or some other
language) hunts all over the database with DBFIND and DBGET to collect your
data.
It would be faster if the report program could just read a sorted
disc file with a big record containing all the data necessary for the report,
and this is Suprlink's function. Suprtool can extract the desired fields from
the desired records of the sales detail dataset and put them in a disc file.
Then Suprtool can extract the desired fields from the customer master dataset
and write them to a second disc file. If Suprtool sorts both files by customer,
Suprlink can "link" them together, producing a third file whose
composite record consists of the related fields from both files. This file is
just what we need to feed into the report program. For example, a sales report
program might read a disc file whose records consist of sales transactions plus
customer information. This file has been sorted by customer number and date. If
there are several sales for the same customer, the customer information is just
repeated in each record. The report program reads the records, checks for level
breaks, and formats and prints the records.
How would a user
application program invoke Suprtool to perform a desired task? Robelle provides
an interface routine that runs Suprtool for a user program, passing commands
from the program to Suprtool (the same commands you would type into Suprtool).
This routine (or procedure, subroutine, intrinsic) allows user programs to call
Suprtool. A typical use of this interface would be for a COBOL program to ask
Suprtool to extract a selected subset from a large IMAGE dataset and write it
to a disc file, which the COBOL program would then read and format into a
report. User programs written in COBOL, TRANSACT, Speedware, SPL, FORTRAN,
Pascal, COBOL/iX, FORTRAN/iX, or Pascal/iX can call Suprtool2.
The user manual contains
the full description of all the Suprtool suite of products including Suprlink,
STExport, Dbedit and Suprtool2, as well as usage tips and commands for each.
The manuals are up-to-date with all the latest changes. To see only the changes
in the latest version, see the "What's New" section of the manual, or
see the change notice.
You can download our
manuals in PDF format or HTML format and even order printed (hardcopy) manuals
from our web site at:
http://www.robelle.com/library/manuals/.
The
Suprtool documentation uses a common notation in describing all commands. Here
is a sample command definition:
EXTRACT field [(subscript)] [=value]
[,...]
1.
UPPERcase letters - literal
symbols to be used in the command as they appear (e.g., EXTRACT).
2.
Lowercase, underlined or italic
- "variables" to be filled in by the user (example: field). Each such "variable"
is defined elsewhere in terms of literal symbols (consult the index). In the
help file, underlining and italics are not available and variables appear
simply in lowercase.
3.
Brackets - enclose optional fields
(example: [(subscript)]).
4.
Braces - enclose comments in
examples. For example, >INPUT ACTREC {input from a data file}. Braces can be used for comments in actual
Suprtool commands.
5.
Up lines - separate
alternatives from which you select (example: Set Ignore [On|Off]); sometimes,
the alternatives are shown listed on several lines.
6.
Dot-dot-dot (...) - indicates
that the variable may be repeated many times in the command.
7.
Other special characters -
literal symbols that must appear in the command as they are shown in the format
(example: the comma above). Some commas in Suprtool are optional.
In examples, there is an implied carriage return at the end of each
line.
Examples
The examples in this manual use the revised STORE database described
in the IMAGE/3000 Handbook.
·
STExport now has a “suprmgr”
file similar to Suprtool. STExport will process all the commands found in
STEXPMGR.PUB.SYS.
·
Suprlink now has a “suprmgr”
file similar to Suprtool. Suprlink will process all the commands found in
LINKMGR.PUB.SYS.
·
Suprtool now has the
$proper function which will shift the first character in a string and any first
character after a space or ampersand.
·
Suprtool now has the
Translate command and a $translate function to obfuscate test data or any byte
field from being readable.
·
Suprtools' extract command
now has three special keywords to help with extract using a range, which is
designed to make your Suprtool scripts more easily maintained. Suprtool now has
$all, $first and $last which respectively means all fields, the first field or
the last field. Note that $first and $last may only be used in a range extract.
·
$subcount has been added to
keep a running count for a given sort break.
·
·
Set XLTRIM On now tells
Suprtool to close a file and release the disc space between EOF and the Flimit.
STExport's Escape command has been
re-engineered to fix some corner cases that didn't work previously
·
Bradmark's DbGeneral can
produce Jumbo datasets that are a single chunk, Suprtool did not handle these
single chunk master jumbo datasets properly as the last block calculation was
done only after opening the last chunk itself. We have adjusted the logic in
making sure the calculation is done for this case earlier. Adager does not
create these single chunk jumbo datasets. There is an un-documented $control
directive in dbschema called $forcejumbo, which will produce one of these
single chunk jumbos so we are supporting it in Suprtool 5.3.11.
·
The Output command now has the
Else verb which will send records that do not qualify with the if command to a
temporary "ELSE" file.
·
There are no visible
changes in this production version of Suprtool. Internal changes have been made
for future enhancements.
·
STExport
now has Set ZonedFix On, this setting can be used to zero out any zoned fields
that were unable to be converted from zoned to byte and typically have a
"?" in the result. This is often caused by hidden characters or bad
data.
·
Suprtools $edit function now
accepts the colon character as a delimiter character in order for edit masks
for time fields.
·
Suprtools if command would not
allow a field name starting with SPECIAL if it was on the right side of the
equation.
·
STExport
did not handle files with 256 fields in an SD file.
·
Suprtool can now execute the if
and extract expression $stddate($days(a) + 10) in one task.
·
Suprtool now supports
stand-alone zoned decimal keys.
·
Suprlink has had internal
changes in terms of how it manages its data structures.
·
If the data item used in data
portion of a $lookup function was 8
bytes or greater in length, type display or byte, the if command would fail
with an arithmetic stack error.
·
Set VarsubDebug has been added
to print the line after variable substitution has occurred.
·
Suprtool now reads NM KSAM files with MR NOBUF if an IF command is
specified.
·
STExport XML command did not convert compound items (2)..(n)
properly.
·
Multiple literal compares now work
in the IF command
·
If $lookup can now return the data portion loaded into a table to
use in a comparison.
·
STExport HTML command did not calculate the maximum record size
properly in some cases.
·
Suprtool default prefetch value has been changed from 2 to 0.
·
Suprtool chain command now
handles J2 TPI keys in Master datasets.
·
The $edit function would replace
a number with a colon if the edit mask had a different number of decimal places
than the item had and the last number to be rounded was a nine.
We have two types of
Installations, Tape and Download. We provide links to the Installation
instructions on our web site for each type of
Install.
Users of the Ecometry
application need to use the installation instructions supplied by Ecometry
Corporation. Those instructions have extra steps for updating the Ecometry code
accounts.
You will find the
Ecometry version of these instructions at http://www.robelle.com/ecometry/
Types of installations,
tape, download combined qedit and suprtool tape.
If you received a
production release tape from Robelle, then you can install using the
instructions on this web page:
http://www.robelle.com/support/install/tape/stprod.html
If you downloaded the
Suprtool production release from our web site then the instructions can be
found here for the ftp download method:
http://www.robelle.com/downloads/install-stprod-ftp.html
and here for the WRQ
download method:
http://www.robelle.com/downloads/install-stprod-wrq.html
Use the following command
to access Suprtool:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
SUPRTOOL/Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1981-2001.
(Version 5.4) SUN, JUN 17,
2007, 11:47 AM Type H for help.
Today's Hint. To see ALL of the options available in Suprtool,
use >VERIFY ALL.
>
Suprtool prints its version number and the current time right after
a banner Suprtool then prompts with ">". Press Return after typing
each command. For example, if you type the help command:
Suprtool prints some help text and a keyword list. Type a keyword or
press Return to leave Help.
To exit Suprtool, type "Exit" at the Suprtool prompt.
Tasks are the building
blocks with which Suprtool helps you to solve data processing problems. In a
task, Suprtool reads information from a file or database, selects and processes
some information, and writes out the result. You can visualize a Suprtool task
like this:
The examples that follow all consist of Suprtool tasks. Simple
solutions require only one task. Complex solutions consist of several tasks,
often with the output of one task becoming the input for the next task.
Use the Input command to
specify a data file.
>input file1
>output result
>xeq
The Output command creates the file called "result", which
is a copy of the input file.
To append to an existing file, use the Append option in the Output
command.
>input file2
>output result,append
>xeq
To concatenate two files, you have to tell Suprtool two things:
1.
The size of the resulting file.
2.
Not to truncate the empty space
at the end of the resulting file.
Once you've done this, concatenating two files is just like copying
a file, then appending to a file.
>:file result;
disc=50000 {maximum
50,000 records}
>set squeeze off {don't
truncate space}
>input file1 {copy
the first file}
>output result
>xeq
>input file2 {append
the second file}
>output result,append
>xeq
A self-describing (SD)
file is a file that contains field information. These files have the advantage
of behaving like data files, which can provide field information to Suprtool
without you having to Define all the fields.
To create an SD file, use the Link option in the Output command.
>get d-sales
>output result,link
>xeq
Now the data file "result" has the same field names as the
dataset d-sales. Suprtool can read this data file and know about the fields
automatically.
>input result
>if
sales-total>20000 and product-price<5000
>output custlist
>xeq
A regular data file does
not have any field information associated with it. If you need to work with the
fields in a data file, you need to tell Suprtool about the fields using the
Define command. For example, say you have a data file with lines that look like
this:
12345678John Rutherford <32>
98765432Catherine Smith <29>
| | | |
Account
First name Last name Age
8-byte 12-byte
16-byte 2-byte integer
Use these Define commands to tell Suprtool about the fields:
>input datafile
>define account, 1, 8, byte
>define first-name, 9, 12, byte
>define last-name, 21, 16, byte
>define age, 37, 2, int
| |
| |
field name |
Length |
Start Data-type
position
Now you can use the field names "account",
"first-name", "last-name", and "age" to refer to
the corresponding parts of the line, just as if this were a database record.
>input datafile
>define ...
>if age>65
>ext account, last-name
>output result
>xeq
To create an SD file from a data file, follow these steps:
1.
Define the fields that you want
to include in the SD file.
2.
Extract the fields in the order
you want.
3.
Use the Link option in the Output command to create the SD file.
>input datafile
>define account, 1,
1, byte
>define first-name, 9, 12,
byte
>define last-name, 21, 16,
byte
>define age, 37,
2, int
>extract account, age, first-name, last-name
>output result,link
>xeq
Use the Listredo command
to see a list of your most recent commands. Use the Do command to repeat a
command, or use the Redo command to modify a command before repeating it.
>listredo {20
most recent commands}
>listredo input {most
recent Input commands}
>input result
>...
>xeq
>do input {repeat
previous Input command}
>input result
>if quantity > 10000
>...
>redo if
{modify
previous If command, then repeat}
If you have used two commands that begin with the same letter, you
have to be careful when repeating those commands. Make sure you use enough
letters to identify each command distinctly from the other. In the following
example, if you wish to repeat the Input command instead of the If command, you
need to use "do i s" instead of just "do i".
>i somefile
>if <expression>
>...
>xeq
>do i s {repeats
previous Input command}
After you have performed a task on-line, you can save the commands
you've used to a file. You can edit this file to help you create Suprtool batch
jobs.
>listredo all;unn;out=somefile
These examples show you how to get records
from an IMAGE dataset. It assumes you have opened the demo database with the
Base command. The results are written to a data file called "result",
which can be read either by a program or by a report writer.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store.demo.robelle , 5 , READER {read access}
This example extracts all the records from the dataset. Note that we
didn't specify any selection criteria, so Suprtool selects all the records.
>get d-sales {input
dataset}
>output result {output
file}
>xeq {Xeq
command performs the task}
Sometimes you may need to select a random sample from your dataset
to test a new report or program. You can easily do this by adding a #count parameter to the Get command. The
#count value tells Suprtool to select
only every nth record. The example shows you how to select 5% of your database.
>get d-sales(#20) {every
20th record is 5%}
>output result
>xeq
If you want to look at the first few records of a dataset, use the
Numrecs command. This command tells Suprtool to extract at most the number of
records specified. Then, instead of sending the result to a file, send it to
the screen with "output *,ascii". The example shows you how to look
at the first 10 records in your dataset.
>get d-sales
>numrecs 10 {first
10 records}
>output *,ascii {output
to screen, format numbers}
>xeq
To tell Suprtool to choose
records based on certain criteria, use the If command. Think of the If command
as a shorthand for "Select all records that have...". In this example
Suprtool extracts all records with a sales-total value greater than 20000 from
the d-sales dataset.
>get d-sales
>if sales-total >
20000 {select}
>output result
>xeq
To choose records using more complex criteria, combine several
simple criteria using AND, OR, NOT, and parentheses. In this example Suprtool
extracts all records that have a sales-total value greater than 20000 and a
product-price value less than 5000 from the d-sales dataset.
>get d-sales
>if
sales-total>20000 and product-price<5000
>output result
>xeq
If you have a byte-type
field that consists entirely of digits, and you want to use this field as a
numeric field, you need to define a new display field on top of the existing
field. For example, suppose your data looks like the following, where the
customer account number is stored in the 8-digit byte-type field at the start
of the record:
20476789...rest of customer record...
To find all customers with an account greater than 20470000, you
would do the following:
>get dataset
>define accountnum, account, 8, display
>if accountnum >
20470000
>output result
>xeq
Because IMAGE doesn't
provide a built-in date type, most databases store dates as numeric or
character fields.
Before Suprtool can use a date field, it has to know the format of a
particular date field. Use the Item
command to specify the format. For example, to tell Suprtool that the item
purch-date is a date field with a format of yyyymmdd (e.g., 20010319), you
would use:
>item purch-date, date,
yyyymmdd {date
format}
In the following date examples, we show the Item command in each
example. In practice, however, you only need to use the Item command once per
date field, not once per task.
For this example, select
all the sales records whose purchase date is today. Note the use of $today in
the If command to indicate today's date.
>get d-sales
>item
purch-date,date,yyyymmdd
>if purch-date =
$today {select
today's date}
>output result
>xeq
Other tricks with $today
>if purch-date =
$today(-1) {yesterday}
>if purch-date =
$today(+1) {tomorrow}
To specify a particular
date, use the $date function in the If command. The $date function has the form
$date(year /month /day). This example
selects all the sales transactions for August 12, 2000.
>get d-sales
>item
purch-date,date,yyyymmdd
>if purch-date =
$date(2000/08/12)
>output result
>xeq
Suppose we want to select
all the sales transactions for 2000. Suprtool does not have a short-hand for
specifying "everything in that year". To specify an entire year, use
a date range from January 1st to December 31st.
>get d-sales
>item
purch-date,date,yyyymmdd
>if purch-date >=
$date(2000/01/01) and &
purch-date <=
$date(2000/12/31)
>output result
>xeq
In the $date function, use
a * to indicate the current year, month, or day. Similarly, a *-1 means the
previous year, month, or day. For this example, select all the sales
transactions for the prior month. Note the use of the special keywords
"first" and "last" to indicate the first and last day of
the month.
>get d-sales
>item
purch-date,date,yyyymmdd
>if purch-date >=
$date(*/*-1/first) and &
purch-date <=
$date(*/*-1/last)
>output result
>xeq
Sometimes you want to find
records based on criteria contained in another file or dataset.
Suppose we want to find all orders for the customers
"1234", "9876", and "5555." We simply use a list
of values after the equal sign in the If command. A match is made if a customer
matches any one of the values in the list.
>get ord-details
>if cust-no =
"1234", "9876", "5555"
>output orders
>xeq
If we wanted to find orders for all customers except
"1234", "9876", and "5555", we would simply
change the equal sign in the If command to a not-equal sign. A match is made if
a customer does not match any values in the list.
>get ord-details
>if cust-no <>
"1234", "9876", "5555"
>output orders
>xeq
If you have a large list
of values in a file, you can load them into Suprtool and select data based on
this list. First use the Table command to load values from an external file
into a table. Then use the function of
the If command to match data to the table.
Suppose our list is in a file called Custlist. The table we create
is called cust-table.
>get ord-details
>table cust-table,
cust-no, file, custlist
>if $lookup(cust-table,
cust-no)
>output orders
>xeq
If you want to find all customers not on the list, just negate the
If condition.
>if not
$lookup(cust-table, cust-no)
You can also compare both a key value and data using the Table data
feature.
>get ord-details
>table cust-table,
cust-no, file, custlist,data(state-code)
>if $lookup(cust-table,
cust-no, state-code) = state-code
>output orders
>xeq
What the above code does is load a table with key values and data,
then as you are reading serially thru the database, Suprtool looks up the key
value in the table and retrieves the associated data and returns it and
compares against the field on the right hand side of the equation. If no entry
is found in the table then Suprtool returns spaces for byte type fields and
zero for numeric fields. This means of course that in our example that if a
cust-no did not exist in the table, the state-code returned would be blank and
if the state-code was blank in the ord-details dataset the record would
qualify.
If you don’t want to have any values returned from the table lookup,
you just preface the if with a standard lookup.
>get ord-details
>table cust-table,
cust-no, file, custlist,data(state-code)
>if
$lookup(cust-table,cust-no) and &
$lookup(cust-table,
cust-no, state-code) = state-code
>output orders
>xeq
When using $lookup to return data, the $lookup must always be on the
right side of the equation. If not Suprtool will stop with an error:
If id-field=$lookup(mytable,char-field,id-field)
Error: $lookup in this
context (data comparison) must be on left side
Sometimes you need to find data from one
dataset based on conditions from another dataset. This is a typical example:
you want to find all of the pending orders for those customers whose accounts
receivable balance is 0.
First we find the customers with an AR balance of 0, and extract
their customer numbers to a file.
>get cust-ar
>if ar-balance = 0
>ext cust-no
>output custlist
>xeq
Now we can find information by loading a file of customer numbers
into a table and then applying the $lookup feature.
>get ord-details
>table cust-table,
cust-no, file, custlist
>if
status="PENDING" and $lookup(cust-table,cust-no)
>output orders
>xeq
So far, the examples have looked up data from a database. If you
want to look up information in a data file, you need to tell Suprtool about the
fields. Use the Define command to do this.
The following example gives you some idea of the byte-size of one
kind of record in a data file.
John Smith 12345678
Anna-May Richardson 98765432
12-bytes 16-bytes 8-bytes
If you want to look up customers based on a list of customer numbers
in the file Custlist, use the following task. Notice how the start position and
number of bytes is entered into the Define command. This defines the position
within the input file, not the table file.
>input flatfile
>define cust-no, 29, 8, byte
>table cust-table,
cust-no, file, custlist
>if $lookup(cust-table,
cust-no)
>output result
Suprtools can use the “data” loaded into a Table in a
comparison operation. The $lookup function will return the data value from the
table to compare against another field or literal.
In file1sd
Table mytable,char-field,data,tabfile,data(id-field)
If $lookup(mytable,char-field,id-field) = int-field
So what Suprtool will do
in this case is read a record, lookup the record in the table and retrieve the
data item in the table. If Suprtool does NOT find an entry in the table, a zero
will be returned if the data type is numeric and spaces will be returned if it
is a byte type.
So using the case above,
if no entry is found in the table, zero is returned, and if int-field is equal
to zero, then the record will qualify.
If you don’t want to have any values returned from the table lookup,
you just preface the if with a standard lookup.
>get ord-details
>table cust-table,
cust-no, file, custlist,data(state-code)
>if $lookup(cust-table,cust-no)
and &
$lookup(cust-table,
cust-no, state-code) = state-code
>output orders
>xeq
When using $lookup to return data, the $lookup must always be on
then left side of the expression. If not Suprtool will stop with an error:
>if id-field=$lookup(mytable,char-field,id-field)
Error: $lookup in this
context (data comparison) must be on left side
This extracts all records
from the dataset d-sales into a data file called "result". The
records are sorted by the field cust-account. Use the Sort command to do
sorting.
>get d-sales
>sort cust-account {sort
by cust-account}
>output result
>xeq
This extracts all records
from the dataset d-sales into a data file called RESULT. The records are sorted
by the field sales-total in descending order (i.e., show highest totals first).
Use the Desc option in the Sort command to do this.
>get d-sales
>sort sales-total
desc {descending
order}
>output result
>xeq
This extracts all records
from the dataset d-sales into a data file called "result". The
records are sorted by the field cust-account, then by sales-total in descending
order. Use two Sort commands to do this, since the Sort command only accepts
one field at a time.
>get d-sales {input}
>sort cust-account {first
sort key}
>sort sales-total
desc {second
sort key}
>output result {output}
>xeq
To delete records safely
from a database, you need two Suprtool tasks. The first task backs up the data
to be deleted; the second task deletes the records. You can interrupt and
restart the two-task method without harming your records. It may be faster to
combine the two tasks, but it can present problems: if you abort the task
part-way through, your database will be partially deleted, but you will not
have a backup of the deleted records.
The first task copies the data to a backup file:
>get d-sales
>if
trans-date>=000101 and trans-date<=001231
>output archives
>xeq
The second task deletes the entries:
>get d-sales
>if trans-date>=000101
and trans-date<=001231
>delete
>output $null
>xeq
To update records you can
specify the fields to be updated with the Extract command(s). The Update
command must be entered before the Extract command. You can Update part of a
field by defining a portion of the field with the define command and using the
defined field in the Extract command.
You can update critical fields (IMAGE search or sort fields), by
specifying the Ciupdate option on the Update command. CIUPDATE must be turned
on or Allowed in the database. This can be turned on from within the DBUTIL
utility.
You can also update using Arithmetic Expressions:
>get d-sales
>update
>extract total = price * qty + tax
>xeq
You can update critical fields:
>get d-sales
>update ciupdate
>if product-no =
12345677
>ext product-no =
12345678
>xeq
In the following examples,
the key field is in the first four bytes of the record.
"Duplicate-ness" is based on records having the same key value. In
any group of records with the same key value, the first record is considered to
be the "original", and the rest are considered to be the
"duplicates".
This is an example of filtering out duplicated records (the original
remains). This is done by using the None option of the Duplicate command.
Input Result
1111
a 1111 a
2222
b 2222 b
2222
c 3333 e
2222
d
3333
e
>get dataset
>sort keyfield
>dup none keys
>output result
>xeq
This is an example of
keeping only the duplicated records (the original is not kept). This example is
the opposite of the previous example. Use the Only option of the Duplicate
command to do this.
Input Result
1111
a 2222 c
2222
b 2222 d
2222
c
2222
d
3333
e
>get dataset
>sort keyfield
>dup only keys
>output result
>xeq
This example shows how to report only those records without duplicates.
That is, if the records have duplicates, both the originals and their
duplicates are omitted from the report.
Input Result
1111 a
1111 a
2222 b
3333 e
2222 c
2222 d
3333 e
You have to use two Suprtool tasks to accomplish this. The first
task creates an intermediate file Dupfile that contains the keys of the
duplicate records. The second task creates the desired output file Result that
contains only the unique records.
>get dataset
>sort keyfield
>extract keyfield
>dup only keys
>output dupfile
>xeq
>get dataset
>table dup-table,
keyfield, sorted, dupfile
>if not
$lookup(dup-table, keyfield)
>output result
>xeq
This performs the opposite function to the one outlined above. It
keeps only the duplicates and their originals.
Input Result
1111 a
2222 b
2222 b
2222 c
2222 c
2222 d
2222 d
3333 e
Once again, you have to use two Suprtool tasks to accomplish this.
The first task creates an intermediate file Dupfile that contains the keys of
the duplicate records. The second task creates the output file Result that
contains only duplicate files and their originals.
>get dataset
>sort keyfield
>extract keyfield
>dup only keys
>output dupfile
>xeq
>get dataset
>table dup-table,
keyfield, sorted, dupfile
>if $lookup(dup-table,
keyfield)
>output result
>xeq
The method shown here assumes that each record
can be distinguished from each other, even though they have duplicate keys. You
cannot use just one task to delete duplicates. To do the job safely, you need
three tasks.
1.
Identify which records to
delete.
2.
Archive those records.
3.
Delete those records.
Task 1: Identify which records to delete.
>get dataset
>define rec,1,length of
your record
>sort key1 {sort
enough keys to uniquely …}
>sort key2 {…
identify all the duplicates}
>dup only keys
>out dupfile
>xeq
Task 2: Write records to archive.
>get dataset
>table duptab, rec,
sorted, dupfile, hold
>if $lookup(duptab,
rec)
>output archive
>xeq
Task 3: Delete the records.
>get dataset
>if $lookup(duptab,
rec)
>delete
>xeq
If you need to delete
duplicates that cannot be uniquely identified (i.e., the entire record is a
duplicate), use the following set of four tasks:
Task 1: Get a list of the duplicates.
>get dataset
>define rec,1,length of
your record
>sort rec
>dup only record
>out dupfile
>xeq
Dataset Dupfile
Dupfile2
a a
a a
a c
b
c
c
Task 2: Get a unique list of the duplicates.
>input dupfile
>dup none record
>output dupfile2
>xeq
Dataset Dupfile
Dupfile2
a a a
a a c
a c
b
c
c
Task 3: Delete the duplicate records, including the original.
>get dataset
>table duptab, rec,
sorted, dupfile2
>if $lookup(duptab, rec)
>delete
>output archive
>xeq
Dataset Dupfile
Dupfile2
b a a
a c
c
Task 4: Restore one copy of the original duplicates.
>input dupfile2
>put dataset
>xeq
Dataset Dupfile
Dupfile2
a a a
b a c
c c
This is a similar procedure to deleting database records. The main
difference is that you use the Input and Output commands instead of the Get and
Delete commands. You also need to define your sort fields.
Task 1: Identify which records to delete.
>input datafile
>define key1,1,8
>define key2,13,12
>define rec,1,length of
your record
>sort key1
>sort key2
>dup only keys
>out dupfile
>xeq
Task 2: Write records to archive.
>input datafile
>table duptab, rec,
sorted, dupfile, hold
>if $lookup(duptab,
rec)
>output archive
>xeq
Task 3: Delete the records.
>input datafile
>if not $lookup(duptab,
rec)
>output result
>xeq
Here is how to extract all
customer numbers from a master dataset, sort them, then write them to an
existing KSAM file, erasing the KSAM's previous contents. Please note that this
gives you sorted access to your IMAGE data if used properly.
>base store.data
Password > {password
is not echoed}
>get m-customer
>sort cust-account
>out keycust,key,erase {keycust
was built with KSAMUTIL}
>exit {xeq
implied, then leave Suprtool}
To load records into an
IMAGE dataset from a disc file, use these commands:
>base store.data {specify
which database}
>input transfile {input
is from a disc file}
>put d-sales {add
each record to the D-SALES dataset}
>xeq {execute
the current task}
The layout of the input file must have the exact same format as the
target.
Data in files and databases
often have an implied number of decimal places. For example, dollar amounts
usually have two implied decimal places for the cents. In this case, the number
stored is scaled by a factor of one hundred (e.g., you would enter 10000 to
represent $100.00).
>get d-sales
>if total-sales >
99900 {find
sales > $999}
>out result
>xeq
You can use Suprtool's Item command to identify defined fields or
database items that have an implied number of decimal places.
You can use Suprtool's Item command to identify defined fields or
database items that have an implied number of decimal places. Once you do this,
you can then enter regular, unscaled numbers. For example, to enter five cents,
use 0.05; to enter $100.00, use 100. If a field is a dollar and cents amount
scaled by 100, use the following to tell Suprtool about the decimal place:
>item total-sales, DECIMAL, 2
With the Item command, the previous example becomes more
understandable:
>get d-sales
>item total-sales, decimal, 2
>if total-sales > 999 {find
sales > $999}
>out result
>xeq
There are several ways to
convert binary numbers (e.g. I2, P8) into human-readable ASCII form. You can
use STExport's Output,ASCII or Output,DISPLAY if you want to convert all
numbers.
If you want to convert only some of your numeric fields, you can use
Suprtool's numeric conversion feature to convert the binary fields to display
fields.
define mynumber,1,6,display
get dataset
ext some-fields...
ext mynumber = binary-number
output filename
xeq
Note that this technique also works for converting a number from one
numeric type to another numeric type.
You may also convert from binary to ASCII directly by using the
$edit function.
define mynumber,1,6,byte
get dataset
ext some-fields...
ext mynumber = $edit(binary-number,"999999")
output filename
xeq
This example counts the
number of sales transactions for each customer and produces the total sales for
each customer. We use the Count and Total options of the Duplicate command.
Note that we made the output file self-describing so we can easily work with it
later.
>get d-sales
>ext cust-account
>sort cust-account
{need
to sort by key}
>item sales-total,decimal,2 {decimal
places}
>dup none keys count total
sales-total
>list standard
>out result, link
>xeq
The output file contains three fields. The first field is the
cust-account that we extracted. Suprtool created two new fields at the end of
each output record: st-count and st-total-1. St-count contains the number of
times each cust-account occurred, while st-total-1 contains the total sales for
each cust-account.
When Suprtool counts or
subtotals, the output is sorted according to the key fields. If you want your
output file to be sorted by the count or by a total, you must process the
output file with a second task. The following example sorts the previous file
of totals by ST-COUNT. We choose a descending sort sequence, so that we can see
first the customers with the largest number of orders.
>input result {input
from previous task}
>sort st-count, desc {highest
counts appear first}
>list standard {produce
a simple report}
>xeq
If you want to get a
single total for a field, without caring about subtotals on sort breaks, you
can use the Total command. Total prints out the result on $stdlist. For
example, to compute the total sales value for 2000 transactions, use these
commands:
>get d-sales
>if
purch-date>=000101 and purch-date<=001231
>total sales-total
>output $null
>xeq
You can get a running
total on a field using the $total function.. The target data must be a packed field with 28 digits, in order
to help avoid overflow issues. A sample use of the total function could be:
>def mytotal,1,14,packed
>get orders
>ext mytotal = $total(sales-amount)
>xeq
Suprtool has the ability
to keep a running subtotal for any numeric field based on a given sort key. The
target data must be a packed field with 28 digits, in order to help avoid
overflow issues.
A sample use of the
$subtotal function could be:
>def mytotal,1,14,packed
>get orders
>sort order-number
>ext order-number
>ext part-number
>ext description
>ext sales-amount
>ext mytotal = $subtotal(sales-amount,order-number)
>out sales,link
>xeq
This would result in a
file containing a running subtotal in the field mytotal for a given
order-number. You could then generate a simple report with the simple Suprtool
commands:
>in sales
>list standard
>xeq
The basic syntax for the
$subtotal function in the extract command is:
extract targetfield =
$subtotal(field,sort-field)
You must specify the
sort command before referencing the sort-field in the $subtotal function. You
can subtotal up to ten fields per task.
You can print selected
input records either formatted or with the Octal, Hex, Decimal, or Character
representations. To dump all sales records with a negative amount, use these
commands:
>get d-sales
>if sales-total < 0
>list lp
>xeq
This finds the entries that meet the selection criteria and prints
them to the default line printer, showing field names and field-values
converted to ASCII. If you suspect that your data is bad, you can dump the
records in Octal/Char format instead:
>get d-sales
>if sales-total < 0
>list octal,char
>xeq
If you want the listing in column format, use List Standard:
>get d-sales
>if sales-total < 0
>list standard lp
>xeq
You can change the output
file record format by using the Extract command. The Extract command causes
Suprtool to assemble Output records by stringing together fields extracted from
Input records. You would use the following to extract two of the nine fields
from the customer records:
>get m-customer {input
from a dataset}
>extract cust-account {extract
the key value and …}
>extract credit-rating {…
one other field}
>output out1 {output
file will have two fields}
>xeq
You can easily insert data into the middle of a record, again using
the Extract command. Define the first and second halves of the record as two
big chunks. Now Extract the first part, note the constant you wish to insert,
then Extract the second part.
>input myfile {95
bytes wide}
>define part1,1,60,byte {first
60 bytes}
>define part2,61,35,byte {remaining
35}
>extract part1, "constant", part2 {extract
an 8-byte constant}
>output newfile {103
bytes now}
>xeq
When debugging test
databases, it is often desirable to produce a condensed listing of a dataset on
$stdlist. The following example combines the Extract command with the ASCII
output option (i.e., all binary and packed-decimal data is converted into
readable ASCII characters). For readability, each data value is prefixed with
an abbreviated field name. This listing is more compact than the one produced
by the List command.
>get m-customer
>extract "Account=",cust-account," "
>extract "C/R=",credit-rating
>output *,ascii {*
implies $stdlist}
>xeq
The output would look like:
Account=04598921 C/R=
500000
Account=44657844 C/R=
2000000
Account=98753198 C/R=
300000
You can produce simple
reports with Suprtool's List command. You select the records for the report
with the If command and the fields for the report with the Extract command.
Reports can include running headings with the date, title, and page number and
an optional line of column headings. Suprtool can produce default titles and
headings.
>get m-customer
>item
credit-rating,decimal,2
>extract cust-account
>extract credit-rating
>list standard
>xeq
The output would look like this:
Feb 16, 2000 Base STORE
Set M-CUSTOMER Page 1
CUST-ACCO CREDIT-RATING
4598921 5000.00
44657844 20000.00
98753198 3000.00
Our report selects all customers in California, sorts the records by
city, and reports on the city, account number, and name of each California
customer:
>get m-customer {input
dataset}
>if state =
"CA" {California
customers}
>sort city {sort
by city name}
>extract city {city
first on each line}
>extract cust-account {followed
by account#}
>extract name-first {and
first name}
>extract name-last {and
finally last name}
>list standard {produce
a quick report}
>xeq
These commands produce a report with four columns. The title consists
of the Store database and the m-customer dataset. The column headings are the
name of each field that we extracted.
By default, the List
command writes output to $stdlist, where lines are folded as necessary to fit
within 78 columns (to prevent line overflow).
To write the report to a system line printer, use the following
:file command before using the List command:
>:file suprlist;dev=lp;rec=-132
If you are writing a report to a LaserJet, we suggest that you add
this command to your task. It selects 175 column output in Landscape mode.
If you don't like
Suprtool's default title, you can override it with your own:
>list standard,title "Customers in California"
Column headings default to
uppercase field names. The names are truncated if they are longer than the
field itself. One space is inserted between fields.
Suprtool does not automatically align user-specified headings with
the data columns. We suggest specifying heading strings with the same length as
the fields they represent, while taking into account the space between the data
columns.
In our example, we enter one column heading per line (using
Suprtool's continuation character "&"):
>list standard,heading
&
{----+----1----+----2}
"City " & {field
is X12}
"Account "
& {field
is Z8}
"First Name
" & {field
is X10}
"Last
Name" {field
is X16}
We included one space between fields. Note that an extra space was
needed for the Account heading (it is an
8-digit field, but we used 10 characters). Because cust-account is a
zoned-decimal field, an extra space is required for the sign.
You can print mailing
labels by combining the Extract command with the List Oneperline command. We
assume that each mailing label starts with two blank lines, followed by the
customer name and address, followed by another blank line. The Suprtool
commands to produce the labels are as follows:
>get m-customer {input
customers}
>extract " " {first
field}
>extract " " {second
field}
>extract customer-name {name
first}
>extract street-address(1) {three
lines of address}
>extract street-address(2)
>extract street-address(3)
>extract " " {last
blank field}
>list oneperline,
noname, noskip, norec
>xeq
The extract " " line creates a single field that consists
of a blank space. Each of these blank fields results in a blank line on our
mailing labels, since the List command puts one field on each output line.
If you want to combine two fields on one line, you would first have
to create an output file with the combined fields and use this file as input to
List Oneperline.
To access Suprtool, type
the "run" command:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
SUPRTOOL/Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1981-2001.
(Version 5.4) SUN, JUN 17,
2001, 11:47 AM Type H for help.
>
Suprtool prints its version number and the current time right after
a banner. It also prints the name of the company that has licensed this copy of
Suprtool.
Suprtool then prompts with ">". Press Return after
typing each command. For example, if you type the help command:
Suprtool prints some help text and a keyword list. Type a keyword or
press Return to leave Help.
Normally, you enter a series of commands. These commands specify the
input source, the output destination, and any special processing that is
required. Finally, you enter an Xeq or an Exit command. This begins the actual Suprtool extraction task.
If you entered the Exit command, Suprtool finishes the current task,
then returns you to MPE. If you entered the Xeq command, Suprtool finishes the
current task, then prompts you for another task. This continues until you enter
the Exit command. If you wish to terminate Suprtool immediately (perhaps you
are confused), enter Exit Abort, which immediately returns you to MPE without
attempting any task. If you :Run Suprtool from another process (e.g., Qedit),
you can suspend execution without executing the current task with the Exit
Suspend option.
If you run Suprtool with
Parm=4, Suprtool processes up to 80 characters of command input specified via
Info=.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=4;info="I ABC;O ABC2;E"
Suprtool terminates only if the Info= string contains an E command.
Otherwise, it prompts for more commands after processing the Info= command
string. A warning is printed if you accidentally specify an Info= string longer
than 80 characters.
You may want to combine one of the more useful Suprtool commands
with the Info= option to standardize certain Suprtool operations. One
restriction of the Info= string is that it may only be 80 characters long. You
may need to have many Suprtool commands executed. For example, suppose that the
file SUPRUSE contained commands to set up a standard Suprtool extract, but the
selection criteria changed with each use. Invoke Suprtool with:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=4;info="USE SUPRUSE"
The user can enter the If
command and an Exit command, all of the other options could be in the Supruse
file. An advantage of this method over using :RUN SUPRTOOL;STDIN=XXX, is that
the input file Supruse can be a Qedit file. With the STDIN= option, the file
must be an unnumbered /Keep file.
If you run Suprtool within
Qedit or SELECT, you can retain the Suprtool process and re-activate quickly
later.
:run qedit.pub.robelle
/:r suprtool.pub.robelle
>... {suprtool
commands}
>exit
SUPRTOOL.PUB.ROBELLE is still alive. Okay to HOLD ? Y
/...
{qedit
commands}
/:activate
SUPRTOOL.PUB.ROBELLE
>... {more
suprtool commands}
>exit
Program Held. Use
:ACTIVATE/:RUN;HOLD to re-run.
/... {more
qedit commands}
Normally, when you
re-activate Suprtool from a HELD state, Suprtool ignores the original Info=
string. However, if you run Suprtool with Parm=8, it re-processes the Info=
commands every time you activate it. One application of Parm=8 is with
usefiles. You can hold Suprtool suspended and have it execute a usefile each
time you awaken it. By changing the usefile between activations, you can make
Suprtool do any task you like:
:run qedit.pub.robelle
/... edit file named DOIT, of suprtool commands
/:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=8;info="USE DOIT"
... suprtool executes
commands from DOIT
>exit {return
to Qedit}
/... edit DOIT
/:activate
{returns
to Suprtool, executes Info= again}
... executes new commands in DOIT
Some users find that they
Exit from Suprtool inadvertently. To require Suprtool to get user approval on
Exit, run Suprtool with Parm=64.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=64
>e
Okay to exit [no]:
>
If you run Suprtool from
within HPDesk (and some other programs), Suprtool suspends on Exit but HPDesk
does not notice. The next time you run Suprtool you will get a new copy of
Suprtool. Eventually you will have many suspended copies of Suprtool hanging
from HPDesk, consuming system resources. Turning Set Suspend Off forces
Suprtool to terminate on Exit rather than suspend. You can force Set Suspend
Off by running Suprtool with Parm=32.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=32
Suprtool reads command
lines from $stdinx, the MPE predefined name for the standard job input file.
This is usually the terminal or the stream file. You can redirect the input by
using an option of the :Run command. For example:
:comment kcommand created
with editor
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;stdin=kcommand
You can also use the I/O redirection capabilities of MPE/iX to
achieve the same goal.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle<kcommand
This file must not be numbered; use /Keep xxx,unn in EDIT/3000 or
use /KQ in Qedit. The maximum record width of this input file is 256 characters.
Note: the Stdin file must not be a Qedit workfile.
Suprtool prints all ASCII
output messages to $stdlist, the MPE predefined name for the standard job
listing file. This is usually the terminal or the line printer, but it can be
re-directed with the :Run command. For example:
:comment throw away the
output from suprtool.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;stdlist=$null.
As with SORT/3000, it is
possible to specify both the input file and the output file using :File
commands, and then specify only the Key fields as Suprtool commands. Only one
task is allowed per RUN with this method:
:file input=oldxx
:file output=newxx
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
Suprtool/Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1981-2001
(Version 5.4)
>key 1,10
>key 20,5
>exit
Since both command input
and message output are under user control, it is possible to run Suprtool as a
"son process" from within an application program (see the MPE Manual
for CREATEPROCESS). You can check the Job Control Word to see if Suprtool
called Quit and terminated in an error state. See the Suprcall user manual for
a complete description of a working interface that is available to all Suprtool
users.
One of the most common
reasons for using Suprtool in a SESSION is to duplicate a disc file quickly.
Accordingly, Suprtool has a special option to facilitate this function. If you
:RUN the Suprtool program with Parm=16, a file copy is implied from Input to
Output and no commands are needed. :File commands are used to specify the names
of the files. For example:
:file input = xxx
:file output = xxxnew
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=16
:reset input
:reset output
With the User Defined Command facility (UDC) of MPE, you can reduce
all of this to a single command,
:dup xxx,xxxnew.
The Info= parameter is ignored in this mode.
Note that the MPE/iX Copy command is faster than Suprtool for simple
file duplication.
Suprtool sets the system
job control word JCW to a fatal state when Suprtool fails in a batch job.
Suprtool sets only the high-order bit of the JCW job control word. That is, it
adds 32,768 to the existing JCW value. HP subsystems use the other bits of the
JCW job control word, so Suprtool does nothing to them.
Each time that you run
Suprtool, Suprtool attempts to open and "use" a disc file named
Suprmgr in Pub.Sys. It does this to check whether the System Manager has
specified any default configuration values. The Suprmgr file may be an Editor
/Keep file,UNN or a Qedit workfile. No more than 256 characters per record are
processed.
Because Suprtool treats the Suprmgr file exactly like a usefile,
Suprmgr can include any Suprtool commands. Use Set commands in the Suprmgr file
to establish custom defaults for the shop.
Dbedit Set values can also be changed from within the Suprmgr file.
You must use the Edit command, enter the Dbedit Set commands, and then Exit
back to Suprtool. If you forget the Exit, each execution of Suprtool leaves you
in Dbedit. An example Suprmgr file might be:
set dumponerror off {don't
print error records}
set varsub on {enable
variable substitution}
edit {enter
Dbedit}
set quiet on {print
shorter messages}
exit {return
to Suprtool}
Suprtool operates in
"session" mode or "batch" mode. In batch usage, any
"error" message causes Suprtool to quit, setting the Job Control Word
to flush the remainder of the JOB. Warning messages do not cause an abort.
In batch mode, Suprtool
does not prompt for missing information as it does in session mode. Instead, it
attempts to choose the alternative that has the least chance of destroying
valid data. For example, if the output file is a duplicate file name in batch
mode, Suprtool saves the new output file with a "made up" name
(Outputnn, where nn is from 00 to
20), prints a warning message, and aborts. Another example is that of missing
database passwords. In session mode, Suprtool prompts for the password; in
batch mode, it uses the CREATOR password instead.
When Suprtool closes the
output file, it sets a JCW named SuprtoolOutCount with the number of output
records. This is the same number reported in the total line (i.e., OUT=). You
can use this JCW to control job stream execution by checking if the
SuprtoolOutCount JCW is non-zero. If there are more than 65,535 output records,
Suprtool sets SuprtoolOutCount to 65,535.
You can use the :Showjcw command to see the value of a JCW. For
values greater than 16K, Showjcw displays either the word WARN, FATAL or SYSTEM
followed by some digits. These words correspond to the following values:
|
Word
|
Value
|
|
WARN
|
16384
|
|
FATAL
|
32768
|
|
SYSTEM
|
49152
|
Add the value of the word to the number that appears with it for the
true value of SuprtoolOutCount. For example,
:showjcw suprtooloutcount
SUPRTOOLOUTCOUNT = WARN8616
16384 + 8616 = 25000
The MPE/iX :Showvar command can also be used to see the value of a
JCW. Showvar displays the full, correct number (e.g., 25,000) up to the maximum
of 65,535.
Suprtool also sets two other JCWs: SuprtoolOutCount1 and
SuprtoolOutCount2. These communicate the full OUT= value to the Suprtool2 interface.
On MPE/iX, when Suprtool closes the output
file, it also sets a variable named SuprtoolFullCount with the number of output
records. This is the same number reported in the total line (i.e., OUT=). The
advantage of the variable is that if more than 65,535 records are written to
the output file, the value of the SuprtoolFullCount variable is not truncated.
|
Value
|
Meaning
|
|
4
|
execute Info string once
|
|
8
|
execute Info string on each re-activation
|
|
16
|
duplicate Input file to Output file
|
|
32
|
don't suspend, terminate completely
|
|
64
|
check with user before Exiting
|
Values may be combined by
adding them together. For example, Parm = 96 means "check with me before
exiting, then when I do actually exit, terminate Suprtool completely instead of
suspending".
Suprtool's primary
function is to extract data quickly; its focus is batch extraction. The key
principle is: the bigger the input data
source and the smaller the subset of data selected, the more performance
improves.
Your aim is to replace serial reads and selection with Suprtool. To
do this, break your task into components: an input choice, some processing
selections, and the output choice.
Suprtool can read input
from an MPE or KSAM file, an IMAGE dataset, or a tape file. Using :File commands,
any MPE file with fixed-length records can be read by Suprtool. Your first
action is usually to select a database with the Base command. Then, use the
Chain or Get command for input from a dataset, and the Input command for all
other input choices.
Often you select a subset of the input records using the If command.
Only selected records are passed to the processing stage and the output choice.
If you do not specify any
processing, the input records are quickly copied to the output choice. Some of
your processing choices are
1. Sort the records into ascending or descending
sequence (Sort or Key). No records are output until all of the selected input
records have been sorted.
2. Total one or more input record fields
(Total).
3. Remove or select duplicate records
(Duplicate).
4. Delete the records from an IMAGE dataset
(Delete).
Usually you wish to
extract a subset of your records to feed into a report program, so the default
output file is a data file. The default output file format matches the input
file format, unless you use the Extract command. The output choice can be an
MPE or KSAM file, an IMAGE dataset, or a tape file. You can use :File commands
to create almost any fixed-length MPE file from Suprtool (including $stdlist).
You can specify different formats for the output file by qualifying the Output
command. To have readable ASCII output, use "output xxx,ascii". To
produce "self-describing" files, use Output xxx,Link.
By default, every output record is identical to the corresponding
input record. The Extract command assembles output records by stringing
together fields extracted from the input records. With the Extract command you
can insert constant values into the output record.
Each output record is written to the output choice. You can also see
a formatted listing of each record with the List command. Records can be added
to an IMAGE dataset just before being written to the output file (use the Put
command). By default, Suprtool builds a new file, unless you specify Append or
Erase. You would use Erase to write to a Quiz subfile (for details, see "Suprtool and PowerHouse
Applications" on page 81).
Specify an Allbase
database with the Open
command. Once Suprtool has opened the database, use the Form command to obtain
information about the tables in the database. Use the Select command to choose
what data to read from your Allbase database.
We have tested the Allbase module with Allbase version G.1.13 for
MPE. We believe that it will be compatible with future versions of Allbase. We
have not tested Suprtool with any of the F versions of Allbase. Allbase access
is available as a seperate add-on module to Suprtool.
When you specify a Select command, Suprtool figures out how to
translate the Allbase internal data-types into ones that Suprtool can process.
Not all Allbase data-types can be processed by Suprtool. The following table
lists the Suprtool data-type that corresponds to the Allbase data-type:
|
Allbase Data-Type
|
Suprtool Data-type
|
|
Integer
|
Double
|
|
Smallint
|
Integer
|
|
Binary
|
Not Supported
|
|
Char
|
Byte
|
|
Varchar
|
Byte
|
|
Real
|
Ieee-32
|
|
Float
|
Ieee-64
|
|
Decimal
|
Packed
|
|
Numeric
|
Packed
|
|
TID
|
Not Supported
|
|
Date
|
Byte
|
|
Time
|
Byte
|
|
Datetime
|
Byte
|
|
Interval
|
Byte
|
|
Varbinary
|
Not Supported
|
|
Long binary
|
Not Supported
|
|
Long varbinary
|
Not Supported
|
Allbase has four types of
fields that are associated with dates and times. These fields are converted to
byte-type data and are returned with specific lengths.
The date and time fields are returned with the following byte
lengths:
|
Data-Type
|
Length
|
|
Date
|
10
|
|
Time
|
8
|
|
Datetime
|
23
|
|
Interval
|
8
|
Suprtool cannot currently
handle all Allbase database concepts. The current restrictions are:
1.
Suprtool requires that the
ownername be specified when selecting a particular table in the following
manner:
>select
* from purchdb.orders
In this example the owner is purchdb and the tablename is orders.
2. Suprtool does not currently handle the
Allbase date format. You can convert the Allbase date format to something that
Suprtool can handle with the TO_CHAR function in the Select statement. For
example:
>select qty,TO_CHAR(date,'YYYYMMDD') from manufdb.testdata
>def mydate,date[1],8 {redefine
testdate }
>item mydate,date,yyyymmdd {define
the date format}
>if mydate<=$today(-900)
You specify an IMAGE
database with the Base
command. Once Suprtool has opened the database, all IMAGE item, set, and field
information is available. To identify an IMAGE item as a date-field, use the
Item command. Suprtool has facilities to Get, Put, and Delete database records.
For Suprtool to read a
dataset, it must have read-access to every field in the dataset. If you have a
database with item-level security, you must be careful to choose a database
password that gives access to all of the fields in the dataset. The Creator
password always gives you full-read
access to every dataset.
By default, Suprtool opens databases in mode-1. You may use any
other mode except mode-7. If you use the Delete or Put commands, you must open
the database with a mode that permits changes to the database. If Set Defer On
has been specified, the database must be opened in mode-3.
The Get command provides
serial access to a dataset; for chained access use the Chain command. This
leads to some results that seem obvious, but are easily overlooked. If you
specify input with the Get command and sort an IMAGE dataset by a search field
value such as custnum, Suprtool does a serial scan of the entire dataset. It
does not read down the chains for each custnum value. Therefore, if the
resulting sort file contains entries with identical sort values, they are
sorted in the order they were found in the serial scan, not in the order they
had on the chains. It is good practice to ensure that implicitly sorted paths
can also be explicitly sorted, without benefit of the IMAGE chains. If you
specify date as a sort field, don't overlook the possibility of two entries
with the same custnum and date values. Do they have an implied order, perhaps
by trans-type?
Suprtool is a solution for
those programs that serially read and select data from large IMAGE datasets.
Suprtool performs best when you are selecting less than 50% of the entries from
the dataset (also see the Speed Demon User
Manual). To replace a serial scan of a dataset, use the following steps:
1.
Use the Get and If commands of
Suprtool to scan and select your entries.
2.
Optionally, sort the records
with Suprtool.
3.
Use the Output command to put
the selected records in an MPE file.
4.
Change the application program
to read the MPE file instead of the IMAGE dataset. Each record in the file has
exactly the same layout as a record from the dataset.
Suppose that your program scans the d-sales dataset to produce a
report of all d-sales records with a sales-total greater than $10,000.00.
Currently, your program looks like this:
10-read-and-report
section.
perform 10-10-get-d-sales
if not end-of-d-sales then
if dsa-sales-total
> 10000 then
perform
20-report-d-sales
thru
20-report-d-sales-exit.
go to 10-read-and-report-exit.
10-10-get-d-sales.
*Use DBGET to read a
d-sales record into buffer-d-sales.*
10-read-and-report-exit.
exit.
Assuming that only a small percentage of the d-sales dataset have a
sales-total greater than $10,000.00, you would replace this scan with the
following:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store,5 {open
for read access}
>get d-sales {scan
the d-sales dataset}
>if sales-tot > 1000000 {note
implied decimal}
>output dsales {output
to an MPE file}
>exit
You would modify your application program to read the dsales MPE
file:
10-read-and-report
section.
read sales-file into
buffer-d-sales at end
move true to
end-of-sales-flag.
if not end-of-sales then
perform
20-report-d-sales
thru
20-report-d-sales-exit.
10-read-and-report. exit.
Suprtool is compatible
with TurboIMAGE and TurboIMAGE/XL. Suprtool automatically adjusts for a Turbo
database; you do not need different versions of Suprtool for different versions
of IMAGE. Suprtool handles all of the limits introduced with TurboIMAGE.
Suprtool calls DBDELETE,
DBPUT, and DBUPDATE for the Delete, Put, and Update commands. If the database
is not open in mode-3 or mode-4, Suprtool must lock the dataset when adding or
deleting dataset records. The locking strategy is determined by the value of
Set Lock.
Locking for the
Entire Task
Specifying Set Lock 0
forces Suprtool to lock either the Put and Delete datasets or the Update
dataset for the entire task. The lock is done after the Xeq command. Suprtool
uses a lock descriptor and one call to DBLOCK to lock two datasets in the same
database. If both a Delete and a Put were specified to different databases,
Suprtool locks them both, first the input dataset in one database, and then the
output dataset in the second base. After the task finishes, the Put and Delete
datasets or the Update dataset are unlocked.
Set Lock 0 provides the best performance, but other users cannot
change the database during the entire Suprtool task. The reason for improved
performance is twofold:
1.
The database only needs to be
locked once.
2.
If Suprtool is reading the
database with DBGET, it does not have to reget records and ensure that they
have not changed with each lock.
Locking for Each
Transaction
Set Lock 1 (the default),
causes Suprtool to lock and unlock around every DBDELETE, DBPUT, and DBUPDATE
transaction. This provides the least contention with other users of the
database, but may not be the best choice for large overnight runs where
exclusive access to the database is available.
Locking Once in
a While
Any other value of Set Lock causes Suprtool to lock and unlock the
datasets every n transactions, where n is the value of Set Lock. A
transaction is either a DBDELETE, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE -- it is not the number of
input records read. After the Xeq command, Suprtool does not lock the datasets
until the first DBDELETE, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE. After unlocking the datasets,
Suprtool does not do another lock until a further DBDELETE, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE.
Record Changed
Before It Could Be Deleted
If you are deleting or
updating records when Set Lock is not zero, it is possible that a record will
be modified, removed, or a different record added in its place while Suprtool
has the database unlocked. Suprtool checks for this by retrieving the database
record once the database is locked and checking it against the original record
read. If any changes have occurred, Suprtool reports an error. If Set Ignore is
Off, Suprtool stops the current task when the error occurs. If Set Ignore is
On, Suprtool displays the records that were changed (with Set Dumponerror On)
and continues processing.
Control-Y with
Locks and Dbedit Locking
If you type Control-Y
during a Put, Delete, or Update, the dataset locks are still in effect. Do NOT
walk away from your terminal without answering YES or NO to the
"stop" question. The Edit command uses its own locking strategy. For
complete details on database locking with Dbedit, see the Dbedit manual.
The Delete and If commands
of Suprtool give you a powerful facility for archiving data without writing
COBOL programs. Be careful when using the Delete and Put commands. It is better
to break up a Suprtool "run" into multiple passes in order to make
the job more fail-safe. For example, we might like to archive all of the 2000
transaction records to a disc file and have them deleted from the database. The
obvious way to achieve this is
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base actrec.data
>get artrans
>if trans-date>=000101 and trans-date<=001231
>delete
>sort trans-date; sort cust-number
>output archives
>exit
What happens if this "run" is aborted part way through?
You must :Restore your database and do a recovery. Any aborts will leave the
database partially deleted.
If we break up this operation into two parts, archive first and
delete later, we can easily restart the job in the case of an abort.
First, we read and sort the data into the archive file:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base actrec.data
>get artrans
>if trans-date>=000101 and trans-date<=001231
>sort trans-date; sort cust-number
>output archives
>xeq
Second, we read and delete the entries. This method takes slightly
longer, but it can always be
restarted:
>get artrans
>if trans-date>=000101 and trans-date<=001231
>delete
>output $null
>exit
Warning: there is a window of vulnerability here -- if any qualified
records are deleted or added by other jobs or sessions, the Delete pass may not
delete the same records as written to the file in the first pass. In many
applications, you might be able to use the extract file from the first pass to
load a table in the second pass, then use Chain or If $lookup to delete the
exact same records.
HP has provided a generic
search and partial key retrieval feature to IMAGE/SQL by attaching B-trees to a
master dataset key item. This feature is available in versions of IMAGE/SQL
C.07.03 and later. To determine the version number of IMAGE, run Query (:Run
Query.Pub.Sys) and enter the Version command.
:run query.pub.sys
>version
Similarly, you can also run Dbutil.Pub.Sys, type Help, and look for
the Addindex command.
B-trees are built only on the key item of a manual or automatic
master dataset. However, if the path into a given detail dataset has an
attached B-tree, you can implicitly take advantage of the B-tree by using a
partial-key lookup on the associated detail.
Suprtool can take advantage of these B-trees via the Chain command.
Suprtool also shows any B-trees that it can utilize through the Form command.
In newer version of
IMAGE/SQL, master datasets can expand while records are being put into the
database. This new capability is similar to the Detail Dataset Expansion (DDX),
which was made available with MPE/iX 5.0.
Details on a dataset with MDX enabled are documented in the Form
Command.
On newer versions of
MPE/iX, IMAGE/SQL supports Jumbo datasets, which can store data in one or more
MPE files. By spanning files, you can have more than 4Gb of data in a single
dataset.
In versions of Image prior to version C.07.14 the maximum size of a
Jumbo dataset is 40Gb.
The maximum size of a Jumbo dataset was increased to 80Gb in IMAGE
version C.07.14 and later.
In the C.09.02 version of Image, and later, the limitation is now
based on 2 billion entries.
Limitations
Due to file system
limitations, Suprtool can extract and sort more than 4Gb of data only on MPE/iX
6.5 and higher. In prior versions of MPE/iX Suprtool is limited to 4Gb. Due to
limitations in MPE/iX Suprtool cannot open a remote Jumbo dataset.
Large File DataSets
Large File DataSets or
LFDS are Image datasets that are single files which can be greater than 4Gb. Due
to issues with the implementation of LFDS,
Suprtool does not support them specifically, nor does it refuse to read them.
We do not recomment using Large File DataSets nore will we support them.
Notes
If Set Stat is On and Set Prefetch is greater than zero, then each
time a file in a jumbo dataset is closed, you receive a prefetch summary for
each file. This could appear in the middle of a >List, if you are listing to
$stdlist.
Suprtool reads and writes
both compatibility mode and native mode KSAM files. One exception is
variable-length records, which Suprtool cannot handle. Use the Input command to
read from a KSAM file. Use the Erase or Append option of the Output command to
write selected input records to a KSAM file. When writing to a KSAM file, the
input source can be an IMAGE dataset, a KSAM file, or an MPE file. You must
build the KSAM file first as Suprtool, unlike FCOPY, cannot create new KSAM
files.
Suprtool uses different methods for accessing compatibility-mode
KSAM files versus native mode KSAM files. In our discussion of KSAM files, we
designate compatibility-mode KSAM files by KSAM/V and native mode KSAM files by
KSAM/XL.
Access to KSAM files is
controlled with :File commands. After opening an output KSAM file, Suprtool
checks to see what access was granted. If the KSAM file has share and lock
access, Suprtool must lock the output file whenever it writes an output record.
This provides the least contention with other users, but it slows down Suprtool
(one lock per write).
By default, Suprtool opens Input KSAM (/V and /XL) files with lock-access
for application reasons. We assume that application programs will likely want
to write to KSAM files, and in order to write to any KSAM file the file must be
opened with locking.
To override this default you can specify the ;nolock option on a file command:
>:file ksamin;nolock
>input ksamin
>output mycopy
>xeq
Suprtool uses high-speed
NOBUF/MR access to quickly read input KSAM/V files. Suprtool is typically five
times faster than FCOPY when reading KSAM/V files. Suprtool writes output
records to KSAM/V files one record at a time. This ensures that the KSAM/V key
information is updated correctly. Suprtool runs at the same speed as FCOPY when
writing to KSAM/V files.
Suprtool must always have Shared, Lock, and Read access to all
KSAM/V files. Suprtool briefly locks the KSAM/V file to check the physical EOF.
If the EOF is wrong, Suprtool reopens the file with Locking and Inout access,
in order to update the physical EOF. After checking and updating the physical
EOF, Suprtool unlocks the KSAM/V file and leaves it unlocked while reading the
file.
You should be aware of the following:
1.
A user program that opens the
KSAM/V file without Locking fails if Suprtool has the file open. You should
specify Locking on all KSAM/V opens, even if you do not plan to lock the file.
2.
A user program that opens the
KSAM/V file with exclusive access will fail if Suprtool has the file open.
3.
Suprtool cannot read KSAM/V
files that user programs have open with exclusive access.
Suprtool ignores the KSAM/V key file; it reads the data file only. If a data record has a binary -1
in the first two bytes, Suprtool ignores the record. Your user programs must guarantee that a binary -1 does not
appear in the first two bytes of any record, except those that have actually
been deleted. If you wish to read the deleted records, use Set Recover On.
Suprtool can be used to
reorganize an existing KSAM/V file. Assuming that you have a KSAM/V file with a
10-byte key starting on the third byte, the following Suprtool commands sort
the file along the primary key, remove any deleted records, and leave the
KSAM/V file in an optimal state. Warning: OUTPUT =INPUT cannot be restarted if it is aborted.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>in ksamdata
>key 3,10,byte
>output =input
>exit
The above Suprtool run is dangerous because it cannot be restarted
if it is aborted for any reason. The following Suprtool run can be restarted,
even if the run is aborted.
:purge tempfile
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>in ksamdata
>out tempfile
>xeq
>in tempfile
>key 3,10,byte
>output ksamdata,erase
>exit
Starting with MPE/iX 4.0,
HP provided a new mechanism for tools like Suprtool to access KSAM/XL files.
This mechanism allows Suprtool to work the same for either KSAM/V or KSAM/XL
files. Some of the advantages are:
1.
Suprtool is fifteen times
faster than tools like FCOPY when reading a KSAM/XL file.
2.
Suprtool reads the input file
in chronological order.
3.
Set Recover On works for
KSAM/XL. Note that if you build the KSAM/XL file with the reuse option, the
space from your deleted records may be reused. In this case, Suprtool may not
be able to recover your records.
Suprtool will revert to slower method of reading KSAM/XL files if
using selection criteria, in other words an if command.
If you are writing records
to a KSAM/XL file, you can dramatically improve the speed of Suprtool by
writing to a temporary KSAM/XL file and saving it at the end of the task.
Temporary files are not attached to the MPE/iX transaction manager, which
results in faster writes. If the system fails while Suprtool is writing records
to the temporary KSAM/XL file, the temporary file is lost. You want to ensure
that you can safely restart the task if the system fails (e.g., you don't want
to copy records to a temporary KSAM/XL file as you delete them from a dataset).
:build myksam;temp;rec=-128,1,f,ascii;disc=40000;&
: ksamxl;key=(b,1,10,dup)
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input file.data
>output myksam,temp,erase
>xeq
>exit
:save myksam
Suprtool can't create a
new NM KSAM file for you, but you can create the new NM file first using the
MPE BUILD command (or some other method, see below), then use Suprtool to copy
the records from the old file to the new file.
But
Suprtool should definitely be able to copy the data *much* faster than MPE's
FCOPY utility could.
The trick,
of course, is getting a new NM KSAM file built correctly first. You could use a
complicated BUILD command or you could do this:
:file n=newfile; disc=
:fcopy from=oldfile;
to=(*n); subset=0,1
That
will create a new NM KSAM file called NEWFILE with the FLIMIT equal to the
FLIMIT of your current CM file, and with all the keys set up correctly, but
will copy only a single record into it. Then use Suprtool:
:suprtool
>in oldfile
>out newfile, erase
>xeq
Finally,
if it's a big KSAM file you may wish to create it as temporary first, then SAVE
it after you're done, to squeeze even more speed out of the process:
:file n=newfile; disc=;
temp <<-- Note the temp designation :fcopy from=oldfile; to=(*n);
subset=0,1
:suprtool
>in oldfile
>out newfile, erase
>exit
:save newfile
The Reuse option forces
deleted record space to be reused in KSAM files. In order to take advantage of
the Reuse option in KSAM/XL files you must specify this option with a file command.
>input file.data
>:file myksam;reuse
>output myksam,append
>exit
Suprtool reads MPE files
as easily as IMAGE datasets, with the single exception of variable-length
records, which Suprtool cannot handle. Instead of using the Get or Chain
command to specify your input source, use the Input command to read from an MPE
file. The default output file is an MPE disc file named "OUTPUT", but
you can control the name and format of that file with the Output command and the
MPE :File command.
You can control the way
Suprtool accesses MPE files through the use of :File commands. Normally,
Suprtool tries to read and write MPE files with NOBUF and multirecord access.
To force Suprtool to read one block at
a time, you would use:
>:file file.input;nomr
>input file.input
>output file.output
>xeq
To force Suprtool to write one block
at a time, you would use:
>input file.input
>:file file.output;nomr
>output file.output
>xeq
If your files have large
block sizes or Suprtool seems to read the file incorrectly, you may want to
force Suprtool to read or write one record at a time (this is what FCOPY does).
To force Suprtool to read one record at
a time, you would use:
>:file file.input;nomr;buf
>input file.input
>output file.output
>xeq
To force Suprtool to write one record
at a time, you would use:
>input file.input
>:file file.output;nomr;buf
>output file.output
>xeq
Message files always have
variable-length records. As such, they are not accepted by Suprtool. Nor can
Suprtool write them. On some releases of MPE, even opening a message file with
APPEND access in Suprtool (e.g., Output msgfile, APPEND), erases the message
file and may make your system run strangely.
Due to limitations in MPE,
Suprtool can read circular files only one record at a time. Suprtool
automatically detects circular input files and adjusts itself accordingly.
Suprtool cannot write out to a circular file with the append option.
You will need to copy the circular file to a flat file and then append to the
flat file, then write back to a new circular file.
Suprtool does copy and
sort RIO files, but normally Suprtool reads deleted RIO records. Use a :File
command to force Suprtool to ignore deleted records. The Input command prints a
warning about deleted records when it opens an RIO file.
You can force Suprtool to read an RIO file as FCOPY does. If you use
the following :File command on the input RIO file, all deleted records are
ignored:
>:file inrio;buf;nomr
>input inrio
Suprtool must use buffered disc I/O when writing to an RIO file.
This is much slower than the standard Suprtool NOBUF/MR disc I/O, but it is the
only reliable way to produce an RIO file. A warning is printed in this case:
Warning: Writing to RIO files
is slow
When the output file is an RIO file, Suprtool must open the output
file with NOBUF/MR access. This causes duplicate file errors if either of the
following :File commands are in effect for the output file:
:file outfile;save
:file outfile;temp
You do not need to specify Save, since that is Suprtool's default.
To create a temporary output RIO file, use the TEMP output option:
>:file outfile;rio
>output outfile,temp
Suprtool reads and writes
temporary files. No special processing must be done if the input file is
temporary; just specify the file name in the Input command. By default,
Suprtool saves the Output file. You must use the TEMP option of the Output
command to save the file as a temporary file. The following sequence of
Suprtool commands causes TEMPFILE to be left as temporary:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>in permfile
>out tempfile,temp
>exit
If TEMPFILE already existed as a temporary file, Suprtool would
prompt you to purge the old temporary file. It you do not want to purge the old
temporary file, Suprtool prompts you for a new name for the temporary file in
exactly the same manner as for permanent files.
If you do not specify a
lockword as part of the file name, MPE prompts for the lockword when Suprtool
attempts to open the file. Because Suprtool must sometimes open the input or
output file more than once, you may be prompted multiple times for the
lockword. To avoid this prompt we recommend that you specify any lockwords as
part of the file name.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input infile/lockword
>output outfile/lockword
>xeq
This is especially important when using the erase or append option
to write to a KSAM/V or KSAM/XL file with a lockword. In this case Suprtool
must open the file more than once (the number of fopens vary). To avoid being
prompted multiple times for the lockword, specify it as part of the output file
name:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input infile
>output outfile/lockword.group,erase
>xeq
Suprtool copies all the
user labels of the input file to the output file, unless you have Set
Userlabels Off. The copying of user labels is done even if the output option is
,DATA or ,ASCII. If you extract fields from a self-describing (SD) file that
has user labels and don't use Output,LINK or Output,QUERY, the output file
still contains all the user labels of the SD file. The filecode of the output
file is not SD, however.
In many instances, the user labels in a file do not interfere with
the processing of the file. However, some MPE tools need specific options to
work with files with user labels. For example, FCOPY needs the Nouserlabels
option when you are copying from a file with user labels to an existing file
without them.
SDUnix is an MPE program
that takes self-describing file information and writes it out to an MPE flat
file. This flat file can then be transferred to HP-UX together with the data
file so that Suprtool/UX can reference the self-describing information about
the fields.
To copy the SD file to the HP-UX machine, it must have an .sd
extension and be in the same directory as the data file. For example, if the
data filename is /usr/local/data/datafile, the SD file must have the name
/usr/local/data /datafile.sd.
The SD file is written out to the same domain (permanent or
temporary) as the input file. The SD file contains only one record with the
necessary length to store all of the label information.
All SDUnix parameters are specified via Info = string. There are three parameters:
input-file sd-file LF | NOLF
The first parameter is the name of an MPE self-describing file. The
second parameter is the name of the .sd file that SDUnix created.
Use the third parameter to specify whether the data file has LF
(line feed) as the record separator, or whether the file does not use a file
separator. If you use FTP to copy the data file to your HP-UX machine, you
should specify the NOLF option and be sure to use a binary mode transfer. If
you are using DSCOPY (with its default options) to copy the data file, you
should specify the LF option.
The following section contains examples of creating an SD file on
MPE, converting the SD information, and finally copying the two files to an
HP-UX machine.
First create an SD file with:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store,5
Database password [;]?
>get d-inventory
>out dinv,link
>exit
Now you can convert the label information to an .sd file using the
SDUnix utility. Note that the data file is the first file passed in the info
string.
Specify LF if you are using DSCOPY.
:run sdunix.pub.robelle;info="dinv dinvsd lf"
Now you can use DSCOPY to copy the files to the HP-UX machine.
:dscopy dinv to
store.dinv :dopey[data:password]
:dscopy dinvsd to store.dinv.sd:dopey[data:password]
Specify NOLF if you are using FTP.
:run sdunix.pub.robelle;info="dinv dinvsd nolf"
Use FTP to copy the files to the HP-UX machine.
:ftp dopey
ftp> binary
ftp> exitonerror
ftp> put dinv /users/data/store.dinv
ftp> put dinvsd /users/data/store.dinv.sd
ftp> quit
Now you can use Suprtool/UX to read the SD file.
$ suprtool
>input store.dinv
>form
File: store.dinv (SD Version B.00.00) No line feeds
Entry: Offset
BIN-NO I1 1
LAST-SHIP-DATE I2
3
ON-HAND-QTY I2 7
PRODUCT-NO Z8 11
SUPPLIER-NO Z8
19
UNIT-COST P8 27
ITEM-DESC1 X20
31
ITEM-DESC2 X20 51
ITEM-DESC3 X20 71
ITEM-DESC4 X20 91
Entry Length: 110 Blocking: 1
>out dinvfile
>xeq
SDUnix and Suprtool/UX can
recognize files created with the ,Query option and from Query. However, they
cannot recognize compound item details or any Item attributes, such as Decimal
or Date type.
A problem with data files
is that there is no field information. Self-describing files solve this problem
by providing field information about the file. Suprtool reads and writes SD
files; Suprlink requires SD files as input and creates an SD file as output.
You request an SD file using the Link option of the Output command.
If you extract fields from the dataset, only the extracted fields appear in the
SD file.
>get d-sales {input
from a dataset}
>output salefile,link {salefile
has all of the fields from d-sales}
>xeq
You must Define and Extract the fields you want
to have in the SD file. Use the Link option of the Output command to create the
file as a self-describing file. Although Suprtool itself allows longer field
names, SD files only store the first 16 characters of a field name.
>input sales.data {input
from a data file}
>define cust-no,1,6,byte
>define invoice-date,7,6,integer
>define sales-qty,13,4,packed
>extract cust-no,invoice-date,sales-qty
>output salefile,link {salefile
has all of the extracted fields}
>xeq
When you specify an SD file as input to Suprtool, all the field
information becomes available. You can select, extract, and total fields
without the Define command.
>input salefile {self-describing
file}
>form {display
the fields in the file}
>if sales-total > 10000 {select
based on a field}
>extract cust-account {only
extract a few fields}
>extract sales-qty
>extract sales-tax
>extract sales-total
>total sales-total {total
a field from the file}
>output newfile,link {create
a new SD file}
>xeq
Suprtool normally lists data files in an Octal/Char format. When
listing an SD file, Suprtool produces a formatted listing with field names and
field values converted into ASCII:
>input salefile {self-describing
file}
>list {produce
a formatted listing}
>xeq
You use the Item command
to identify items with an implied number of decimal places or a date format. If
you create a self-describing file, this information is retained. When you input
such a file, all Suprtool commands are automatically informed about the decimal
places and date formats. The Form command shows these extra attributes as
comments at the end of each field description. For example,
>base store.demo.robelle,5,READER
>item deliv-date ,date
,yyyymmdd
>item purch-date ,date
,yyyymmdd
>item sales-tax ,decimal,2
>item sales-total,decimal,2
>get d-sales
>output newfile,link {creates
SD file with item attributes}
>xeq
>form newfile {shows
decimal pts. and dates}
So far in this section, we
have shown how to create self-describing files using the Link option of the
Output command. The Link option produces a special form of self-describing
file. Not all software can read this form of self-describing file. You can use
the Query option to create an old-style self-describing file. The Query option
has the following restrictions.
Self-describing files were originally created by HP in MPE so that
files could be fed into HPWORD and HP graphics packages. One problem with HP's
definition was that no provision was made for compound fields (e.g., 10J2).
When Suprtool creates an SD file with compound fields via the Query option, it
uses a special data-type. When you input such a file to Suprtool, all compound
fields are treated as byte arrays. Suprtool correctly copies and extracts these
fields, but you can not select with them. The Query option is not capable of
retaining information about decimal places or date formats.
You can use Suprtool to
create a self-describing KSAM file. There are three steps to complete:
1. Compute the number of labels (used in the KSAMUTIL or MPE/iX build
command). The number is the truncated value of this calculation:
labels = ((#fields + 7) / 8) + 11
2.
Build your KSAM/V file with
KSAMUTIL and specify Labels=<the number computed above>. For KSAM/XL, use
the Build command with the userlabel keyword ;ULABEL=x (where x is the number computed above).
3.
Use Output xxx,Link,Erase to
have the SD-information written to the file labels.
The most difficult part is computing the number of labels. You might
want to use the Extract command to ensure that you know exactly how many fields
will be in the output file. For example, we extract eight fields:
labels = ((8 + 7) / 8) + 11
= 12
MPE V:
:run ksamutil.pub.sys
>build file2;rec=-80,16,f,ascii;keyfile=file2k; &
key=i,6,2,,duplicate;labels=12
>exit
MPE/iX:
:build file2;rec=-80,16,f,ascii;key=(i,6,2,dup);ksamxl;ulabel=12
Fill the KSAM file:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base sales
>get d-sales {input
from a dataset
>extract cust-account {but,
we extract all fields explicitly so that …}
>extract deliv-date {…
know exactly how many fields we have}
>extract product-no
>extract product-price
>extract purch-date
>extract sales-qty
>extract sales-tax
>extract sales-total
>output file2,erase,link {must
have both Erase and Link}
>exit
Like regular SD files, when you specify a KSAM SD file as input to
Suprtool, all field information becomes available. The Form command shows the
structure of a KSAM SD file.
HowMessy produces a self-describing file
(called Loadfile) with all of the information from the HowMessy report.
Suprtool is an ideal tool to process the information in this file. For example,
the following Suprtool commands would select all detail datasets with a load
factor greater than 85 percent:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input loadfile
>if datasettype =
"D" and loadfactor > 85.0
>sort database
>sort dataset
>dup none,keys
>list
>xeq
There are two differences
between regular Suprtool output files and SD files: the filecode is not zero
and there are user labels. For most applications this does not make any
difference, but some applications and tools may reject these files.
When creating an SD file,
Suprtool maps J-type integer items into I-type. Functionally, the two are
equivalent.
Once Suprtool has created
a file in its Output,Link format, it always treats the file as an SD file. To
convert the file back to a non-SD disc file:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>in samplesd
>:file flatfile;code=0
>set userlabels off
>out flatfile
>xeq
When Suprtool sorts two
records that have the same key value, the first record read by Suprtool is the
first record on the output file. For data files, this means that input records
with the same key values appear in the same order in the output file.
Suprtool reads only the KSAM/V data file. Records in the data file
are organized by chronological order. If two input records have the same key
value, the one that was first added to the KSAM/V file is the first one in the
output file. To help preserve sorted order in a KSAM/V file, be sure to specify
all of the KSAM/V sort keys as sort keys to Suprtool.
Suprtool/iX uses a set of
fast internal routines for sorting. These routines are twice as fast as the HP
sort routines supplied with MPE XL 3.0, and slightly faster than the HP
routines that come with MPE/iX 4.0 and 5.0.
By default, Suprtool/iX attempts to use the internal sort routines.
If the internal sort initialization fails for any reason, Suprtool/iX prints a
warning and tries to do the sort with HP's sort routines. If Native Language
Support has been set (either automatically via the NLDATALANG JCW or explicitly
via Set NLS), HP's sort routines are used.
The only way to tell which set of sort intrinsics are being used is
to enable Set Stat On. The statistics from Robelle's internal sort routines are
more detailed than HP's sort statistics.
Suprtool determines the
native language of an input source as follows:
1.
The Chain and Get commands use
the language of the database.
2.
Using Input filename=setname uses the language of the
database.
3.
If the input file is a KSAM/XL
file, the KSAM/XL language is used.
4.
If the language from any of the
previous steps is zero (Native-3000), Suprtool uses the language from Set NLS.
The Key and Define commands support a special type: CHARACTER. The CHARACTER type
is used wherever you would use the BYTE type, but CHARACTER fields are
sorted according to the native language determined by Suprtool.
To sort a French data file on the first five characters, you would
use:
>input nlsfile
{file
with Roman-8 characters}
>set nls 7 {sort
in French}
>key 1,5,character {new
character data-type}
>output sortfile
>xeq
If your system is almost
out of disc space, you may find that Suprtool operations are being stopped
because the "Sort Library" cannot build its scratch file, Sortscr. A
common method of overcoming this error is to use the Numrecs command.
By default, Suprtool assumes that the OUTPUT file and the Sortscr
file must be able to contain every input
record. Even though you are reading a dataset of one million records, you may know that only 1,000 records will be
selected. If you do not use the
Numrecs command, Suprtool builds an output file with one million records and
the sort builds a scratch file with one million records.
If your dataset was called ARTRANS, the following Suprtool commands
would be used to read, sort, and select a small subset of the input records,
preventing the out-of-disc space error:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base actrec.data
>get artrans
>numrecs 1000
>if trans-date>=000101 and trans-date<=000131
>sort trans-date ;sort cust-number
>output archives
>exit
You must use a :File
command to specify an input or output file to tape. Suprtool reads or writes
only one file to an unlabeled tape.
Suprtool writes two end-of-file marks on an Output tape to guarantee that any
other software can find the end-of-file correctly.
If you plan to select more
than 10,000 records from a tape file, be certain to specify the maximum number
of records to select in the Numrecs command. The Numrecs command is not necessary
if you are outputting to an existing file with the append and erase options of
the output command.
There is an outstanding bug in MPE that can cause Suprtool to lose
records from an Input tape file. This only happens where there are partial
blocks on the tape that are not the
last block of the tape. Suprtool cannot detect this situation, but the
workaround is to specify NOMR on the input :File command for the tape. For
example:
:file intape;dev=tape;rec=-80,50,f,ascii;nomr
Another recurring problem with MPE and tape files is odd-byte length
records. We suggest that when writing to tape, even-byte length records be
used. These records take exactly the same
amount of space on tape or disc, because MPE always rounds up the record
length to the nearest full word boundary. To read data from an IBM tape where
records start on odd-byte offsets, use the DEBLOCK option of FCOPY.
Suprtool can not read or
write EBCDIC tapes; use FCOPY instead.
Specifying DEV=TAPE on a
:File command causes MPE and Suprtool to create a tape that has one file. If
you need to have multiple files on one tape or if your file takes more than one
reel, you must use labeled tapes.
To use a labeled tape requires a different kind of :File command. A
typical :File command might be:
:file o;dev=tape;label="VOL1",,,next
The string "VOL1" is the name of this volume of tapes.
This name appears on the console. Note that it is possible to specify volume
names in lowercase letters. Never do this, as it becomes extremely confusing
when working with the console.
Use the "NEXT" keyword when writing the first file to the
tape. Be careful with the "NEXT" keyword, because you can overwrite
an existing labeled tape, even though it has not expired.
Use the "ADDF" keyword to add more files to the tape. This
tells MPE to add each file to the end of the tape volume. Use the file name
"*O" with the Suprtool Output command.
You do not need to specify a record size or blocking factor on the
File command. When the file is read back, most of the file attributes will be
remembered. One exception to this is file code. Files read from a labeled tape
always have a file code of 0, unless you use a :File command to specify a
specific file code.
Do the following to store four files to a labeled tape:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>:file o;dev=tape;label="VOL1",,,next
>in a;out *o;x {first
file on the volume}
>:file o;dev=tape;label="VOL1",,,addf
>in b;out *o;x {subsequent
files are added to the end}
>in c;out *o;x
>in d;out *o;x
If all of these files are purged and you want to restore the file
"D", you would do the following:
:file i;dev=tape;label="VOL1",,,4
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>in *i;out d;x
The "4" on the :File command instructs the file system to
restore the fourth file on the tape. If you forget the contents of a labeled
tape, make FCOPY read it as if it were unlabeled:
:file x;dev=tape;acc=update
:fcopy
from=*x;to=;char {displays
the volume and the first file headers}
from=*x;to=;char;skipeof=+3 {displays
the file header for the following file}
You will be asked for permission to scratch the label, but MPE does
not scratch the label unless you write to the tape.
There are two things to remember when working with multiple tapes in
a single volume set. The first tape reel in a volume has the same name as the
entire volume set. Subsequent tapes should have a different name. If you know
that the file you want to read is on the second reel, you can just mount the
second reel.
When copying a file to a
labeled tape, Suprtool attempts to copy any MPE user labels. Because of
restrictions of labeled tapes, the user labels cannot be longer than the record
length of the file. In most cases, Suprtool truncates user labels as they are
copied to or from a labeled tape. When this happens Suprtool prints a warning:
Label length truncated to 80 characters
If the files you are reading from the tape do not have any user
labels, and Suprtool is having difficulty reading the file, you can try this:
>Set Userlabels Off
The Base command allows
you to specify a system name, other
than the logon system. This permits easy access to databases on remote
computers. :File commands can be used to specify input files from remote
computers and to specify output files to remote computers.
Suprtool attempts to handle duplicate file errors on a remote
computer in the same manner as for a local computer. If you are on-line, you
can rename the file as a file on the remote computer. In batch, a duplicate
file on a remote computer results in the Outputnn file being built on the
remote computer.
Due to bugs in MPE, Suprtool cannot always rename files on a remote
computer. We suggest that output files on remote computers be purged before you
enter the Exit or Xeq command.
NS/3000 (Network Services
for the HP e3000) is the replacement for DS over LAN/3000. Suprtool reads and
writes files using NS/3000. The Base, Input, and Output commands do not allow
the node specification to be entered
as part of the file name. Use File commands to specify remote databases and
files. For example,
:dsline mrp.go.hp
:remote hello user.account,group
:file store=store:mrp.go.hp
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store
>get m-customer
>output mcust
>xeq
See "Base Command [BA]" on page 128 for a discussion of
remote database access.
Suprtool is available in
native mode. This section provides details for calling the Suprtool2 interface
in native mode. See the next section for ideas on how to combine MPE/iX
programming features with Suprtool.
The Suprtool2 interface is
available in native mode. Like the compatibility mode version of the Suprtool2
interface, you require PH capability in order to use the Suprtool2 interface in
native mode. The native-mode object code for the interface resides in
ST2XL.Pub.Robelle.
The interface is installed in XL files. The following commands
demonstrate how to compile and link your program to use the native-mode
Suprtool interface.
:cob85xl example.source
:link from=$oldpass;to=example.pub;cap=ph
:run example.pub;xl='st2xl.pub.robelle'
You can add the native-mode Suprtool2 interface to your own XL file.
For example,
:linkedit
-xl xl.pub
-copyxl from=st2xl.pub.robelle;module=suprtool.asm
-exit
:run example.pub;xl='xl.pub'
On MPE V, if you have not installed the Suprtool2 interface, you see
an error message such as:
:run testprog
UNRESOLVED PROGEXTERNAL SUPRTOOL2
UNABLE TO LOAD PROGRAM TO BE RUN.
(CIERR 625)
If you forget to specify the XL file on MPE/iX, you get a similar
error message.
The native mode HP sort
routines do not sort files with records greater than 4096 bytes. Suprtool/iX
uses these native mode HP sort routines with NLS or with Set Sortfast Off. In
all other cases, Suprtool/iX uses its own set of sort routines that have no
limit on the record size.
If you attempt to sort records greater than 4096 bytes with
Suprtool/iX calling the HP Sort, you get the following error message:
Error: Sort record size is
greater than 4096 bytes
The native mode HP Sort intrinsics are not able to sort
records greater than 4096 bytes in length. If you want
to sort records greater than 4096 bytes, use the
compatibility mode version of Suprtool. To improve speed
we recommend using the Object Code Translator on the CM
version of Suprtool:
:hello mgr.robelle,pub
:octcomp suprcm,suproct
:run suproct.pub.robelle
We consider this problem a bug in HP's native mode sort intrinsics,
one unlikely to be fixed. The solution is to use the Object Code Translated
version of Suprtool to sort files with records greater than 4096 bytes.
Suprtool is able to
substitute any CI (command interpreter) variables from almost any command line
source, whether via interactive commands, a usefile, or batch input. In order
to use this feature, first enter the following Set command:
set varsub on
Variable substitution is not enabled, by default, for backward
compatibility.
Because Suprtool is now capable of CI variable substitution, you no
longer need to echo commands out to a file and subsequently use the newly
created file.
The following example varies the sort order of an extract using a CI
variable called "order."
!setvar order 'desc'
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
set varsub on
base test
get dline
sort ord-num,!order
output file3y
exit
The Streams facility (under default setup) replaces any exclamation
mark (!) found in the first column of a job stream. Anytime you want to specify
an entire line through variable substitution, you need to leave a space before
the variable is specified.
!setvar a 'base mydb;get orders;output file3x;exit'
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
set varsub on
!a {indent
this line}
For MPE commands, some variables are resolved twice when passed off
to MPE. A double resolution gives different values if a variable references
other variables.
The following example sets variables at the CI level:
MPEXL:setvar a 10
MPEXL:setvar b "!!a"
MPEXL:showvar [ab]
A = 10
B = !a
Setting the variables within Suprtool with variable substitution
enabled, changes the value of b.
>{different results from MPE CI}
>set varsub on
>setvar a 10
>setvar b "!!a"
>showvar [ab]
A = 10
B = 10
Suprtool does one level of variable substitution before the command
is passed off to MPE. If you are setting variables that reference other
variables, we recommend you set them before running Suprtool or temporarily
disable variable substitution with the Set Varsub Off command.
>{same results as MPE CI}
>set varsub off
>setvar a 10
>setvar b "!!a"
>showvar [ab]
A = 10
B = !a
>set varsub on
Suprtool, Suprlink, and STExport each have their own Set Varsub
command. To do variable substitution in any of these components, you have to
use the Set Varsub On command in the appropriate component.
Because Suprtool automatically looks in the Suprmgr.Pub.Sys file for
any configuration commands, that is a good place to put the Set Varsub On
command. Suprlink and STExport, however, do not use Suprmgr.Pub.Sys and do not
have their own configuration files in which to look. If you run Suprlink and
STExport directly from the command line, you must enable variable substitution
explicitly:
!run suprlink.pub.robelle
set varsub on
One way to ensure that Suprlink and STExport automatically get
variables substituted is to invoke Suprlink and STExport from the Suprtool
command line. In this way, variable substitution is actually done by the
Suprtool command parser before it passes the commands to Suprlink and STExport.
For example, suppose the title of the HTML report is stored in a
variable named "title." Pass commands to STExport using Suprtool's
Export exportcommand syntax:
!setvar title 'Delinquent Accounts'
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
set varsub on
{execute task to create self-describing file foo}
export input foo
export html table title
'!title'
export output ./delinq.html
export exit
exit
Note that the following sequence of commands would not have worked, where STExport is
invoked from Suprtool using the Export command with no parameters. Variable
substitution would not take place in this case:
!setvar title 'Delinquent Accounts'
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
set varsub on
{execute task to create self-describing file foo}
export
input foo
html table title '!title'
output ./delinq.html
exit
exit
Suprtool does not contain
any features for prompting of input values, but it does have support for MPE/iX
variables. Instead of input values, you can use MPE/iX to create a file of
Suprtool commands and run Suprtool with this file as input.
Suppose you have a Suprtool usefile called Suprcmd.Use, which
contains the following:
set varsub on
base store,5,reader
get m-customer
:input credit,"Enter Credit Limit :"
if credit-rating >= !credit
list stan
exit
You can then invoke the command file and subsequent prompting from
within Suprtool with the following command:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=4;info="use suprcmd.use"
You can also prompt for variables using the MPE Input command in any
command file and reference them as long as variable substitution is enabled
with the command:
set varsub on
Suprtool, now has a
setting called Set VarsubDebug on which will print out the line after the
variable substitution has occurred. This setting only works if Set Varsub is on
and Set VarsubDebug is on.
setvar outfile &
:"/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901"
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
SUPRTOOL/iX/Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1981-2007.
(Version 5.4 Internal) TUE,
OCT 30, 2007, 2:58 PM Type H for he
>set varsub on
>set varsubdebug on
>in file1sd.suprtest
vd:in file1sd.suprtest
>output !outfile,link,temp
vd:output
/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123
vd:2345678901,link,temp
The output is formatted
into 74 byte chunks and printed with a preceding “vd:” so the “substituted”
line is clear.
You can format files to be
downloaded to your PC for use in spreadsheets or databases with the PRN option
of the Output command. Suprtool formats your file as a PC structure (a
comma-delimited file). Not all PC applications support the PRN format. For more
precise data conversion, create a self-describing file then use STExport. See
the STExport manual for details. You transfer the Suprtool output file to your
PC and then import it into your PC application.
After you have created a
PRN file using Suprtool, you can use FTP or any of the many terminal emulator
programs available to download the file to the PC. This includes Reflection
from Walker Richer & Quinn. Robelle's text editor, Qedit, is able to
execute Reflection commands from the HP e3000, helping to automate the process
of downloading.
Be sure to specify which fields have decimal places when creating
the PRN file. Suprtool reserves extra space for decimal points that appear in
the PRN output. When formatting numeric fields, Suprtool inserts the decimal
point at the correct place. When you import your file into your PC application,
numeric fields are automatically formatted correctly.
The following procedure allows you to include literal headings in
your spreadsheet using only one file, the size and shape of which is computed
by STExport. We have tested this method with MS Excel; it should work with any
spreadsheet that supports the importing of delimited files.
There are two steps. First, build a self-describing file with
Suprtool, then use STExport to convert it to PRN and add the headings.
1. In Suprtool build a self-describing file:
>input ...
>define items...
>item items...
>extract fields...
>output sdfile,link
>xeq
2. In STExport convert to PRN and add the header line:
$input sdfile
$heading fieldnames
$output pcdata
$exit
The file Pcdata is a variable-length PRN file with both headings and
data.
You can use Suprtool to
significantly speed serial extracts using Quiz and QTP from Cognos. In many
cases the changes to existing applications are minor.
Quiz and QTP are part of
PowerHouse, a popular fourth-generation language sold by Cognos. You can
improve the performance of Quiz reports by using Suprtool to select and sort
the records from a dataset, then pass the selected records to Quiz for final
reporting. To do this you need some way to tell Quiz about the record structure
of Suprtool's output file. Quiz already has the capacity to do this without
making any changes to the PowerHouse dictionary (QSCHEMA).
In the following example, Suprtool extracts entries from the
Custmast dataset, sorts them, and writes them to the Cmasfile MPE file. These
are the records we need for the Quiz report.
The first step is to use Quiz to extract one entry from the Custmast
dataset and write it to a PowerHouse "subfile". Note that you could
also use QTP to build the subfile. This is described shortly.
:purge cmasfile
:quiz
>access custmast
>set report limit 1
>set subfile name cmasfile keep size numrecs
>report summary all
>go
Replace the Numrecs parameter with the number of records that will
be extracted by the Suprtool run. The default Numrecs is 1 when the report
limit is set to 1.
Remove the Keep parameter to create a temporary file instead of a
permanent one. Suprtool can write to temporary files as easily as to permanent
files. Temporary files have the advantage that when multiple batch jobs are
running at the same time and trying to use the same file names, the files won't
interfere with each other. Permanent files, on the other hand, may not have to
be rebuilt every time. The same permanent subfile can be used repeatedly, as
long as the record structure doesn't change. The entire first step of running
Quiz or QTP to create the subfile may be omitted.
The Set Subfile statement
in Quiz creates a PowerHouse subfile. Subfiles are regular MPE files (or
KSAM/XL files, in the case of indexed subfiles) which have user labels
containing their record descriptions, in Cognos' proprietary format. The data
portion of the files is standard, however, and can be read by other
(non-Cognos) products. It is important to ensure that when you read a subfile
with Suprtool, you define the fields correctly so that Suprtool's view of the
data structure exactly matches the PowerHouse description of the records.
Once you have created the PowerHouse subfile, use the Erase option
of the Output command in Suprtool to load the file. This overwrites any data in
the subfile, but it does not touch the PowerHouse mini-dictionary in the user
labels:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base actrec
>get custmast;if cred-limit>=1000000
>output cmasfile,erase
>sort custnum
>exit
The Cmasfile file contains the sorted records for the Quiz report.
Quiz knows the structure of this file because of the initial Quiz commands that
we used to create it. You can now use Quiz to generate the report:
:quiz
>access *cmasfile
>report ...
>go
You can also use QTP
instead of Quiz to create the PowerHouse subfile:
:purge cmasfile
:qtp
>access custmast
>set input limit 0
>subfile cmasfile size numrecs
keep include custmast
>go
There are a number of reasons to use QTP instead of Quiz to create
subfiles:
Quiz subfiles always reflect a record structure based on the lowest
level of redefinition in the dictionary. So if an item is redefined, it appears
once for each redefinition in the dictionary. For example:
Record CUSTOMERS
Item CUSTOMER-NUM character size 6
Item CUSTOMER-NAME character size 40
redefined by
Item COMPANY-NAME character size 40
end
redefined by
Item FIRST-NAME character size 20
Item SURNAME character size 20
end
The customer-name field is redefined twice in the dictionary.
Although the record size of the file is only 46 bytes, a Quiz subfile created
with
>report summary all
would create a subfile with a record length of 86 bytes as follows:
Item CUSTOMER-NUM
character size 6
Item COMPANY-NAME
character size 40
Item FIRST-NAME
character size 20
Item SURNAME
character size 20
A subfile created with QTP, on the other hand, would exactly match
the record structure of the source file. Therefore, it is always safer to use
QTP to create the subfile, as it is more likely to match the structure of
Suprtool's output record.
With QTP's Include parameter, it is easy to include either specific
fields from the record or all of the fields. You can also easily include fields
from other datasets. This is handy when creating a subfile that holds the output
from a Suprlink task.
The process of creating a subfile is essentially the same regardless
of the database and dataset being used. The only things that change are the
subfile and dataset names. The task can easily be automated using the MPE/iX
Makesub command file. This command file can be executed before running
Suprtool, or from within Suprtool.
Here is the simplest form of the Makesub command file:
parm subfile, dataset
echo set report limit 1 >usefile
echo access !dataset >>usefile
echo set subfile name !subfile size 10000 >>usefile
echo report summary all >>usefile
echo go
>>usefile
echo exit >>usefile
run quiz.current.cognos; &
info="auto=usefile
nolist" >$null
Makesub can be invoked from within Suprtool, as shown below:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base actrec
>:makesub cmasfile, d-custmast
>get custmast;if cred-limit>=1000000
>output cmasfile,erase
>sort custnum
>exit
The subfile is created from the single statement :makesub from
within the Suprtool task.
The preceding form of the Makesub command file achieves the goal of
simplifying the Suprtool code, but it can still be improved. A better form
would incorporate a few more features for added flexibility. The following
version of Makesub provides these advantages:
1.
The capacity of the subfile can
be specified.
2.
The subfile can be temporary or
permanent.
3.
The subfile can contain either
all the elements of a file, or selected elements.
QTP is used instead of Quiz so that there are no multiple
redefinitions of any item. This helps ensure that the layout of the subfile
matches the output record that Suprtool creates.
parm subfile, dataset, temp_or_not=" ", flimit=10000
anyparm include=!dataset
if "!temp_or_not" = "TEMP"
setvar keep " "
setvar purgetemp
",temp"
else
setvar keep
"keep"
setvar purgetemp "
"
endif
file s=!subfile,old!temp_or_not
if finfo("*s",0)
purge !subfile !purgetemp
echo Existing subfile has
been purged
endif
echo set input limit 0 >usefile
echo access !dataset >>usefile
echo subfile !subfile size !flimit !keep &
include !include >>usefile
echo go
>>usefile
echo exit
>>usefile
run qtp.current.cognos;info="auto=usefile nolist">$null
purge usefile,temp
echo Subfile has been created
The new-and-improved version of Makesub can be invoked from within
Suprtool, as shown below:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base actrec
>:makesub cmasfile, d-custmast, TEMP, 5000, &
customer-number,
company-name, first-name
>get custmast;if cred-limit>=1000000
>extract customer-number, company-name, first-name
>output cmasfile,erase
>sort custnum
>exit
One of the recurring themes in the Technical
Support calls that we receive involves identifying data-types when defining
fields in Suprtool. This is particularly true of PowerHouse sites, because
PowerHouse views the data through its dictionary definitions, while Suprtool's
vocabulary is based on IMAGE terminology. Because both products read the same
underlying data structures, the problem is only one of semantics. This section
aims to assist the user in correctly declaring data structures that are passed
between Suprtool and PowerHouse processes.
Translation
Table of Data-Types
|
IMAGE Type
|
PowerHouse Type
|
Suprtool Type
|
|
U or X
|
Character
|
Byte (Character for NLS)
|
|
R
|
Float (non-IEEE)*
|
Real or Long
|
|
E
|
Float (IEEE)*
|
IEEE
|
|
K
|
Integer Unsigned
|
Logical
|
|
J
|
Integer Signed
|
Integer or Double
|
|
P
|
Packed
|
Packed
|
|
Z
|
Zoned
|
Display
|
(* IEEE or Non-IEEE depends on whether "float IEEE" or
"float NONIEEE" was declared under System Options in your system
dictionary)
Tip 1: Use QSHOW
to examine PowerHouse data structures.
Many users are familiar with Quiz's Show Items command:
> access d-sales
> show items
INPUT OUTPUT
D-SALES TYPE SCALE SCALE DEC PICTURE
* CUST-ACCOUNT NUM
0 0 0
^^^^^^^^
DELIV-DATE NUM
0 0 0
^^^^^^^^^^
* PRODUCT-NO NUM
0 0 0
^^^^^^^^
PRODUCT-PRICE NUM
0 0 0
^^^^^^^^^^
PURCH-DATE NUM
0 0 0
^^^^^^^^^^
SALES-QTY NUM 0
0 0 ^^^^^
SALES-TAX NUM 0
0 0 ^^^^^^^^^^
SALES-TOTAL NUM
0 0 0
^^^^^^^^^^
This listing shows you the attributes and sequence of the fields,
but doesn't give any clues as to their storage format.
QSHOW gives a much more useful listing:
> show subfile salesub
SUBFILE
DICTIONARY Page 1
SUBFILE RECORD REPORT
Subfile: SALESUB
Type: Permanent
Organization: Direct
Format: 7
Record Size: 38 Bytes
Item Type Offset Size Occurs
CUST-ACCOUNT ZONED UNSIGNED 0
8
DELIV-DATE INTEGER SIGNED 8
4
PRODUCT-NO ZONED UNSIGNED 12
8
PRODUCT-PRICE INTEGER SIGNED 20
4
PURCH-DATE INTEGER SIGNED 24
4
SALES-QTY INTEGER SIGNED 28
2
SALES-TAX INTEGER SIGNED 30
4
SALES-TOTAL INTEGER SIGNED 34
4
Notice that this listing shows the offset of the fields within the
record (with the first field starting at offset 0), the length (size) of the
fields, as well as the storage data-type. In most cases, these map directly
onto the IMAGE/Suprtool data-types. (See Translation Table above.)
For example, the above subfile can be defined in Suprtool as
follows:
>define cust-account,1,8,display
>define deliv-date,9,4,integer
>define product-no,13,8,display
>define product-price,21,4,integer
>define purch-date,25,4,integer
>define sales-qty,29,2,integer
>define sales-tax,31,4,integer
>define sales-total,35,4,integer
Note that PowerHouse's Zoned Unsigned data-type is equivalent to
Suprtool's Display data-type, and that Suprtool's Define offset starts at 1,
which is one higher than the offset in the QSHOW listing.
Tip 2: Where is
the Data Coming From?
When a PowerHouse subfile contains complete records from an IMAGE
dataset, you can have Suprtool read the record structure directly from the
IMAGE Root file:
>base store,1,WRITER
>input salesub = d-sales
>form
Database: STORE.DEMO.ROBELLE
D-SALES Detail Set 5
Entry: Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1 (!M-CUSTOMER)
DELIV-DATE J2 9
PRODUCT-NO Z8 13
(M-PRODUCT)
PRODUCT-PRICE J2
21
PURCH-DATE J2
25
SALES-QTY J1 29
SALES-TAX J2 31
SALES-TOTAL J2
35
Capacity: 602 (14) Entries: 8
Highwater: 8 Bytes: 38
Of course, if the subfile contains only some of the fields, then
you'll need to define them individually. But you can still use Suprtool's Form
command to examine their storage structure in the datasets from which they've
been extracted.
Tip 3: Defined
Fields' Data-Types
In some cases, subfiles may contain fields that were created within
a previous Quiz task, namely:
·
Defined fields
·
Results of summary functions
(Count, Subtotal, etc ...)
Defined fields will have whatever storage type was specified when
they were created. If storage type "numeric" was specified, PowerHouse
will create a Float Size 8 field by default. It is also important to note that
if the Define command is not explicit about the field size, PowerHouse will
assume a size based on the requested number of digits. For example,
define D-PRICE integer*4 = 25
creates a field capable of storing 4 digits (i.e., a 2-byte
integer), while
define D-PRICE integer size4 = 25
will guarantee a 4-byte integer field. When in doubt, use QSHOW to
examine the structure of the subfile.
Tip 4: Fields
Created by Summary Operations
Here is a list of data-types for PowerHouse summary functions
written to subfiles:
|
Data-Type
|
Field
|
|
Count
|
Integer size 4
|
|
Subtotal
|
Float Size 8
|
|
Minimum
|
Float Size 8 for numerics, Character size nn for char fields
|
|
Maximum
|
Float Size 8 for numerics, Character size nn for char fields
|
|
Average
|
Float size 8 subtotal, Integer size 4 count, and an Integer size 4
filler of binary zeros.
|
|
Percent
|
two Float Size 8 subtotals
|
|
Ratio
|
two Float Size 8 subtotals
|
|
Sysname
|
Character size 40
|
|
Sysdate
|
Phdate integer size 2 or 4 (if century included)
|
|
Systime
|
Integer size 2 (HHMM format)
|
You can create Suprtool
field definitions from the record layout information provided by PowerHouse.
Think of the QSHOW output as a list of records that needs only to be translated
into another form. What you do is send the QSHOW report to a disc file, and
process that file with Quiz, turning it into a list of Define commands for
Suprtool.
To capture the output of
QSHOW, you can run QSHOW and redirect the $stdlist. Or, you can set a :File
command for QSHOLIST to a disc file:
:build templist;rec=-80,,f,ascii
:file qsholist=templist,old;dev=disc
:run qshow.current.cognos
Once inside QSHOW, you must Set Report Device Printer so that QSHOW
uses the QSHOLIST file. The advantage of using QSHOLIST is that only the actual
file report is put in the file, not any of the other information printed by
QSHOW (such as the program banner).
PowerHouse subfiles can be processed in the same way as files
defined in the PowerHouse dictionary (QSCHEMA). There is a QSHOW command called
Show Subfile, which works identically to Show File and produces a report with
the same information. Some of the columns are off horizontally, but our Quiz
example program fixes that.
Use the QSHOW command Set Compressed to suppress the page numbers
and other heading information in the QSHOW report.
A sample output from QSHOW would look like this:
Subfile: F184A.PC (Permanent)
Format: 3
Record Size: 138 Bytes
Item Type Offset Size
Occurs
PRONUM CHARACTER 0
18
INSHP FLOAT 18 4
REFNUM CHARACTER 22
10
SONUM CHARACTER 32
10
ARFSC CHARACTER 42
4
TYPNUM INTEGER 46 2
SOES1 CHARACTER 48
30
SOES5 CHARACTER 78
30
BILNAM CHARACTER 108
30
First, we define what the QSHOW reports look like in a dictionary:
File Qshow-Subfile
Organization Direct &
Open QSHOLIST
File Qshow-File
Organization Direct &
Open QSHOLIST
Record Qshow-Subfile
Item Filler1 character size 1
Item Name character size 23
Item Type character size 18
Item Offset freeform size 10
Item ItemSize freeform size 10
Item Occurs freeform size 18
Record Qshow-File
Item Key character size 6
Item Name character size 35
Item Type character size 18
Item Offset freeform size 4
Item ItemSize freeform size 5
Item Occurs freeform size 12
Note that we have two definitions, one for the Show Subfile output
and one for the Show File output. We use the same names for the columns and
adjust the Size to accommodate the differences in horizontal positioning. Note
that Freeform is a number stored in a character field; Quiz automatically
converts it to a number.
It is not essential to use Quiz to do the definition translation; a
COBOL program could be used. The object of the Quiz report is to produce a Suprtool
Define command for each field. The Define command has the following components:
1.
The word "define".
2.
The field name.
3.
The position (starting with
column 1). The QSHOW report gives an offset starting at zero, so the position
is the offset plus 1.
4.
The field size in bytes.
5.
The field type, using the
Suprtool names.
6.
The subcount (Quiz's occurs
column).
We have one Suprtool Define command for each line of the QSHOW
report.
Remember that we mean to define just the lines that represent field
information. Using the above example of QSHOW output, we do not want to process
the first six lines, because they are heading information. For these lines,
however, the column containing the field size does not contain a valid number.
We can simply tell Quiz to select only those records where ItemSize is greater
than zero.
We get the field name from the name already provided in the data
dictionary. To get the field type, we can create a Quiz Define statement which
maps the PowerHouse types into the Suprtool types. Although the PowerHouse type
sometimes has a sign qualifier for numeric fields, in this case it doesn't
matter. We need to check only the first few characters of the type. We convert
a blank in the occurs-column to a subcount of one.
;QUIZ - SUPRTOOL Definitions
Access QSHOW-SUBFILE
;or QSHOW-FILE
Select if ItemSize > 0
;Ignore heading lines
Define Position = Offset + 1
Define SuprType char*8 = &
"integer" if
Type[1:8]="INTEGER" else &
"packed" if Type[1:7]="PACKED" else &
"real" if Type[1:6]="FLOAT" else &
"display" if
Type[1:6]="ZONED" else &
"byte"
Define SuprSubcount char*8 = &
"1" if Occurs = 0
else &
ascii(Occurs)
Report &
tab 1 "DEFINE"
Name pic"^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^" &
"," Position pic "^^^" &
"," ItemSize pic "^^^" &
"," SuprType pic "^^^^^^^" &
"," SuprSubcount
set nohead
set page length 1 report
spacing 1
set report device disc name SUPRDEFS ;send to disk file
go
The output from the above example would look like this:
DEFINE PRONUM
, 1 , 18 , byte
, 1
DEFINE INSHP
, 19 , 4 , real
, 1
DEFINE REFNUM
, 23 , 10 , byte
, 1
DEFINE SONUM
, 33 , 10 , byte
, 1
DEFINE ARFSC
, 43 , 4 , byte
, 1
DEFINE TYPNUM , 47 ,
2 , integer, 1
DEFINE SOES1
, 49 , 30 , byte
, 1
DEFINE SOES5
, 79 , 30 , byte
, 1
DEFINE BILNAM ,
109 , 30 , byte , 1
This represents a simple use of definition processing from the data
dictionary. There are many other uses for this technique. These are some other
examples: to create record definitions for FORTRAN programs (define variables
for each field, and EQUIVALENCE them to the proper element of a buffer array),
for tape file transfers to other machines (create a new file with all numeric
fields converted to type Zoned), and to create PC database structure
definitions for receiving downloaded data (also see "Format Options" on page 231).
Suprtool does not have the
ability to prompt users for selection criteria. You can easily create a short
Quiz procedure to prompt for values and create a file of Suprtool commands.
> define D-PROMPT date format YYMMDD = &
> parm prompt
"Enter selection date: "
> report &
> "base
BASENAME,5" &
> skip "get
SETNAME" &
> skip "if
DATEFIELD = " D-PROMPT pic "^^^^^^" &
> skip "output
OUTFILE" &
> skip "xeq"
> set nohead
> set report device disc name STCODE
> set page length 0
> go
Quiz edits the user's input for a valid date. Note that there is no
ACCESS statement, but Quiz still writes one record to the output file. Execute
the resulting commands as a Suprtool usefile:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=4;info="use stcode"
Alternatively, you could
use Quick to prompt a user for input, to create a file of suprtool commands:
screen test menu temp start-date char*8 temp end-date char*8 temp
prompt char*40 define D-CMD char*80 = "ECHO if Start-date !> " +
start-date &
+ " and end-date !<
" + end-date + " >> mytemp" title "Creating Use File
Demo Screen" centered skip 2 field prompt field start-date field end-date
procedure initialize begin
let prompt = "Enter a
start-date (YYYYMMDD)"
display prompt
accept start-date
let prompt = "Enter an
end-date (YYYYMMDD)"
display prompt
accept end-date
run command "echo base
STORE.DEMO.ROBELLE,1,WRITER > mytemp"
run command "echo get
D-SALES >> mytemp"
run command D-CMD
run command "echo
output OUTFILE,link >> mytemp"
run command "echo exit
>> mytemp"
run command "run
SUPRTOOL.PUB.ROBELLE;parm=40;info='use mytemp'" end build
This doesn't require any special dictionary declarations, as it uses
MPE "echo" commands to create the file.
Suprtool can be used with
fourth-generation languages and other tools.
Omnidex is a product from
Dynamic Information Systems Corporation (DISC). Superdex is a product from
Bradmark Technologies, Inc. Each product provides generic and keyword search capabilities
for IMAGE data. It is necessary to keep their index information up-to-date when
any program, including Suprtool, adds or deletes records from the indexed
database.
In MPE/iX 4.0, Hewlett
Packard has provided an interface that ensures that the Omnidex and Superdex
indexes remain up-to-date. You only need to enable third-party indexing (TPI)
using DBUTIL. Once this is enabled, MPE automatically calls the TPI intrinsics
to maintain the indexes as records are added, delete and modified.
:run dbutil.pub.sys
>>enable mybase for indexing
>>exit
It is important to note that Suprtool accesses third-party indexes
by the Chain command, which in turn invokes DBFIND mode-1 to establish the
chain and DBGET mode-5 to read down the chain. It is important that you follow
whatever rules are required by your indexing product to use its respective
third-party index, as opposed to any IMAGE index that may exist.
For example, with Omnidex you might need to set a JCW used by
Omnidex called IMAGETPI to determine which index or chain is used.
For more detailed information, consult the TurboIMAGE Reference Manual, and the appropriate documentation from
DISC or Bradmark.
Suprtool supports
stand-alone “Z” type keys. Suprtools form command will show the keys that it
can support via the chain command.
The length of a key is
returned by dbinfo-833 and Suprtool will report in the form command the length
of a stand-alone key. (SI-PRODUCT-NO is the path that is now supported)
Superdex has a variable that impacts the length that is returned for a given
key, and that is SICOGNOS. Suprtool will account for the length difference on the
chain command but will show the unadjusted length. Normally Superdexs
dbinfo-833 would show a length of 12 for a Zoned-decimal tpi-key with a length
of 8, if SICOGNOS is set to 1, then Superdex will return 8.
form d-inventory
Database: STORE.SUPRTPIS.GREEN
TPI: SUPERDEX (010566) 4.2.11.2
D-INVENTORY Detail Set# 4
Entry: Offset
BIN-NO J1 1
LAST-SHIP-DATE J2
3
ON-HAND-QTY J2 7
PRODUCT-NO Z8 11
(M-PRODUCT)
<<TPI>>
SUPPLIER-NO Z8
19 (!M-SUPPLIER)
UNIT-COST P8 27
ITEM-DESC1 X20 31
<<TPI>>
ITEM-DESC2 X20 51
ITEM-DESC3 X20 71
ITEM-DESC4 X20 91
Capacity: 464 (8) Entries: 13
Highwater: 13 Bytes: 110
Additional Third-Party
Indexes:
SI-PRODUCT-NO Z8
B
SI-ITEM-DESC1 X20
B
SI-ITEM-DESC1234 X80 B
SHAD X10 B
On MPE V, and on versions
on MPE/iX that do not support TPI, you must access the Omnidex intrinsics via
"call conversion". To use call conversion with Omnidex version
greater than 2.05.03 and less than 3.00, Suprtool.Pub.Robelle must be copied to
the CC group of the DISC account and this copy of Suprtool must be run.
:run suprtool.cc.disc;lib=g
If you use the Suprtool2 interface to invoke Suprtool, you need the
following MPE commands to force Suprtool2 to run the call-converted copy of
Suprtool:
:setjcw suprtool2filecommand = 2
:setjcw suprtool2lib =
2
:file suprtool = suprtool.cc.disc
For Omnidex versions starting with 3.00 you can use call conversion
by running Suprtool in the following manner:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;xl="xl.pub.disc"
If you encounter any difficulties running Suprtool with call
conversion, please call us for assistance.
Dynamic Information
Systems Corporation (DISC) also has a product called OmniQuest, which allows
you to qualify records and prompt the user for selection criteria.
In order to allow OmniQuest to work properly, Suprtool needs to use
only IMAGE Intrinsics. To do this, you just need to put the following Set
command prior to the Base command in your Suprtool and Omniquest command
script.
Due to a conflict between the Robelle sort and the OmniQuest
product, Suprtool's fast sort algorithms must be turned off. This may be done
with the following Set command:
If you encounter any difficulties running Suprtool with OmniQuest,
please call us for assistance. If you do not turn off Set sortfast off, you
will likely receive the error Data Memory Protection Trap.
TRANSACT is one of the
Rapid products sold by HP. A TRANSACT program that serially reads and selects
records from a dataset can easily be modified to use Suprtool. To convert a
TRANSACT program to use Suprtool, follow these steps:
1.
Add a FILE=*SUPRFILE(READ)
statement to the SYSTEM statement.
2.
Remove any MATCH register
statements (use the Suprtool If command instead).
3.
Change the FIND(SERIAL) dataset to FIND(SERIAL) *SUPRFILE.
4.
Use the Suprtool Extract
command to select the fields from the LIST= statement.
5.
Delete any SORT= statements
(use the Suprtool Sort command instead).
6.
Use Suprtool to build the
SUPRFILE.
The following example shows the changes to a TRANSACT program. A
TRANSACT program that serially reads a dataset might look like:
system cust, base=cust.database("READ",5);
<< set up to select
only cust-out = "YES" >>
move (cust-out)="YES";
set(match) list(cust-out);
find(serial) customer-detail,
list=(cust-name,cust-addr,cust-nbr,cust-out),
sort=(cust-nbr),
perform=p100-process-customer;
end cust;
The TRANSACT program is modified to look like:
system cust,
file=*suprfile(read),
base=cust.database("READ",5);
find(serial) *suprfile,
list=(cust-name,cust-addr,cust-nbr,cust-out),
perform=p100-process-customer;
end cust;
If this program is a batch program, you would insert the following
MPE and Suprtool commands before you invoke the TRANSACT program:
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base cust.database,5,read
>get customer-detail
>if cust-out="YES"
>extract cust-name,cust-addr,cust-nbr,cust-out
>sort cust-nbr
>output suprfile
>exit
!run tranprog.pub
If this program is used on-line, you would invoke Suprtool using the
Suprtool2 interface (see the Calling Suprtool user manual). To avoid file name
conflicts, on-line programs should use a job temporary Suprtool output file.
For TRANSACT to read a temporary file, the asterisk in the file name is required.
If you use the LIST= statement, you have to use the Suprtool Extract
command to specify the desired fields. The order of the fields in the Extract
command must match the order of the fields in the LIST= statement. The Extract
may be omitted if the TRANSACT program reads all of the fields in the dataset,
but the program must be recompiled if the dataset is changed.
The Suprtool If command replaces the MATCH register of the TRANSACT
program. You can still use the MATCH register to do further selection (e.g.,
from other datasets).
A FIND(Chain) can be modified to use Suprtool, but you must verify
that your program actually runs faster (in many cases it will not). To change a
FIND(Chain) to use Suprtool, use the same steps as FIND(SERIAL).
XSORT is a program which
simulates the System 34 - #3 sort. XSORT jobs can be converted to use Suprtool
with few or no problems. The following steps must be done to convert from XSORT
to Suprtool:
1.
Change any Omit Record statements to use the Define command and a non-equal
expression in the If command.
2.
Change any Include Record statements to use the Define command and the If
command.
3.
If an Address Sort is used, Set Firstrec 1 and use Output xxx,num.
The Set Firstrec 1 is required with KSAM files. This forces Suprtool
to start record numbers at 1 regardless of the setting in the KSAM Key file.
QUERY can't produce a
report from an MPE file. Because the output from Suprtool is an MPE file, it is
not usually feasible to use Suprtool to improve the speed of QUERY reports.
However, if a small percentage of records are selected, you can use the
following method to improve the speed of QUERY reports:
1.
Create an empty copy of the
database (either build the database using DBSCHEMA or use DBUTIL to empty an
existing copy).
2.
Suprtool extracts the records
and Puts them to the copy of the database.
3.
QUERY reports on all the
entries in the copy database.
Software packages from
Software Research Northwest use a date format known as Chronos, which stores
the date and time in a compressed 6-byte format. In Suprtool, you can specify
this format by using the Srnchronos date attribute:
>item
box-timestamp,date,srnchronos
Once you have used the Item command to identify Chronos dates, you
can do the following:
1. Select on these dates using the $date and $today functions. For
example, to select records with a timestamp before today:
>if box-timestamp < $today
2.
Extract these dates using $date
and $today.
3.
See the date attribute in the
Form command.
4.
Pass the date attribute to
STExport by using the Link option of the Output command.
5.
Format these dates into a
meaningful value by using STExport.
|
For this discussion we'll ignore the fact that the twenty-first
century really only started in 2001. J
|
Suprtool often has to process dates in both the twentieth and twenty-first
centuries. If you include the century in your dates, Suprtool should behave
as most users expect. If you do not include the century in your dates, how
Suprtool behaves will be dependent on your specific application and data.
|
If your dates have
four-digit years, Suprtool should work as expected. Selection based on the
$today or $date features will select dates in both the twentieth and
twenty-first centuries. Dates that do not collate correctly (e.g., mmddccyy)
will not be accepted by Suprtool's If command for relative selection (e.g.,
<, <=, >, or >=). If you have these date formats you can use the
$stddate function, converts any date format to a ccyymmdd type date.
Suprtool, as it has always done, will continue to sort dates based
on their numeric value and not on any implied date order.
In Suprtool 4.0, we introduced some new command parsing features
that let you control how Suprtool parses the year of the $date function. You
can either use two-digit years by applying a cutoff rule or you can force all
years to be specified as four digits.
Date Cutoff tells Suprtool
what century to use when Suprtool generates a constant date value from the
$date function.
Before version 4.0, Suprtool would assume 19 for the century for any
user-specified $date with a two-digit year. For example:
>item date-field,date,ccyymmdd
>if date-field <= $date(40/12/26)
Previously the $date function would convert the user specified $date
to 1940/12/26 in order for it to be compared to the date-field format of
CCYYMMDD. Now with Set Date Cutoff xx, Suprtool assumes 20 for the century if
the two-digit year specified in the $date function is less than the value of
Set Date Cutoff. For example:
>set date cutoff 50
>item date-field,date,ccyymmdd
>if date-field <= $date(40/12/26)
Suprtool in this case assumes the full $date to be 2040/12/26,
because the 40 in $date is less than the 50 in Set Date Cutoff.
The default value of Set Date Cutoff is 10.
When $Stddate has to
convert from a date with only a two-digit year, the conversion to the
four-digit year will use the value of Set Date Cutoff when converting the date.
For example,
>get sales-detail
>set date cutoff 15
>def new-ship-date,1,4,double
>item ship-date,date,mmddyy
>ext order-no / sales-amount
>ext new-ship-date = $stddate(ship-date)
>out salesinfo,link
>xeq
In this example, if any ship-date has a year of 14 or less, then the
century applied to the new-ship-date field will be 20. Ship-dates with a year
of 15 or more will have a century of 19 applied.
Set Date ForceCentury On
will not allow a yy date to be entered in the $date function, it will force the
user to enter a full ccyy date.
>set date forcecentury on
>item date-field,date,ccyymmdd
>if date-field >= $date(98/12/10)
Error: You must specify the century or Set Date ForceCentury off
The default value for Set Date ForceCentury is off.
If you have dates with
two-digit years, there are two main solutions to making your application ready
for the Year 2000:
1.
Convert all of your date data
to use four-digit years and modify your programs to process four-digit years,
or
2.
Assume that certain dates are
in the twentieth century and some in the twenty-first (this is usually called
date windowing).
The first solution requires that you change all Suprtool Item
commands for two-digit years to a four-digit year format. If you have not
already done so, you may want to isolate all of these Item commands in a single
file per input source (e.g., one file for every dataset in every database in
your application or just one file for every database). You can nest use-files,
making this approach even easier (e.g., having one database use-file that then
includes each dataset use-file with a list of Item commands). You may also want
to use Suprtool to assist you in changing your actual data from two-digit years
to four. See "Can Suprtool Convert
Two-Digit Years to Four Digits?" on page 99 for more details.
If you do not include the century in your dates (the second solution
above), you will have the following problems:
1.
Selecting dates in yymmdd
format will not produce the expected results in relative operations (e.g.,
<, <=, >, or >=). You will need to change all of your If commands
to use the $stddate function.
2.
Sorting dates that include both
20th and 21st century dates, will not collate the way most users expect,
whether with Suprtool, the COBOL sort verbs, or HPs sort tools. This is because
Suprtool, and all HP-supplied tools, sort based on the numeric value of a date.
To make this work correctly within Suprtool, you will need to use the $stddate
function in an Extract command to generate a date with a four-digit year, then
sort on this new date field with another Suprtool task.
Currently the date format
of yymmdd collates (sorts) correctly if the date is not beyond December 31,
1999. Given the current date of 981210, numerically this is less than next year
whose date value is 991210.
At the turn of the century dates in the yymmdd format (or yymm) will
no longer sort correctly because the value of December 10, 2000 (001210) is
less than 981210.
Consequently, if we have a date beyond 1999, stored in yymmdd
format, a relative operation such as:
>if date-field >= $date(98/12/10)
will not find the date of December 10, 2000. You will need to use
the $stddate function to make this task work correctly.
>if $stddate(date-field) >= $date(98/12/10)
Suprtool's date functions
($date and $today) are a short-hand method of generating a numeric constant. So
a date selection like:
>item invoice-date,date,YYMMDD
>if invoice-date < $today
is exactly the same as:
>if invoice-date < 980401 {on
1st April, 1998}
Suprtool does record selection on the numeric value of the field and not on the implied date value. If we
move the calendar ahead to January 1, 2000 and do the same commands as above,
the result would the same as if you had typed:
>if invoice-date < 000101 {on
1st January, 2000}
If you have some invoice dates from the previous century (e.g.,
990101 for December 1st, 1999), they will not be selected.
Sometimes.
Because dates beyond 1999 will not collate properly for the YYMMDD
and YYMM formats, starting in version 4.0.11 the If command produces an error
if the year specified in a $date or $today function is greater than 1999 and
the date format is YYMMDD or YYMM, and you are performing a relative operation
(e.g., <, <=, >, or >=).
>item enddate, date, yymmdd
>if enddate >=
$date(*+4/*/*) {21st.
century date}
^
Error: Cannot use a date
beyond 1999 for this format
Suprtool returns this error by default, but you can override it with
the following set command:
>set date ifyy2000error off
This tells Suprtool to allow the previously described relative
operations and suppress the error message. While you can override the error
checking, the behavior of $today and $date is not changed.
If you need to have Suprtool select dates in YYMMDD format with
$Today or $Date, you need to use one of the following solutions:
1.
Change the date storage format
to include the century in all datasets and data files, so you can use the
following item command:
>item
invoice-date,date,CCYYMMDD
2.
Use the $stddate function that
adds the century component to dates in a ccyymmdd format in a J2 container.
Also see "Case 1: Converting a J2 Date from yymmdd to ccyymmdd" on page 99 and "Case 2: X6 yymmdd Data to X8 ccyymmdd" on page 101 for more specific details
on converting two-digit-year date formats into four-digit-year date formats.
The aammdd date format was
developed by James Overman of HP for use in the MM3000 product. This format is
only available for the X6 data-type.
The aammdd format is similar to yymmdd, but the year portion of the
date use a combination of numbers and letters of the alphabet to represent
years beyond 1999.
By substituting a letter of the alphabet in the first position of
the year, we can extend a six-digit date and also ensure that the dates collate
correctly. For example,
|
YY of AAMMDD
|
CCYY
|
|
A0 - A9
|
2000 - 2009
|
|
B0 - B9
|
2010 - 2019
|
|
C0 - C9
|
2020 - 2029
|
Because letters are greater than numbers in the collating sequence
we can ensure that aammdd dates beyond 1999 will order correctly.
Suprtool also supports other date formats with this two-digit year
representation. These formats are aamm, mmddaa and ddmmaa.
The If command has a
$invalid function to find all invalid dates for a particular field. An invalid
date is any number of a particular date format whose date equivalent cannot be
found on the calendar. For example, a date with a month of 99 will be
considered invalid.
>base store.demo
Database password [;]?
>get d-sales
>item deliv-date,date,ccyymmdd
>if $invalid(deliv-date)
>out baddates,link
>xeq
Suprtool is capable of
converting dates from one format to another using a variety of Suprtool
features. We will show how Suprtool can convert common dates without the
century to those that have the century included. While Suprtool can convert
your data, it is up to you to change your programs. Adager, a third-party
program for changing Image database structures, has the ability to change date
fields. Suprtool can convert data in Image databases, flat files,
self-describing files and KSAM files.
The $stddate function can convert six-digit date formats to
ccyymmdd. But what if all the dates are not actually dates, but some dates are
filled with 9s as a flag to an application?
Consider this dataset with two date fields, J2 items and in the date
format yymmdd.
Database: STORE.DB.GREEN
D-SALES Detail Set 5
Entry: Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1 (!M-CUSTOMER)
DELIV-DATE J2 9
PRODUCT-NO Z8 13
(M-PRODUCT)
PRODUCT-PRICE J2
21
PURCH-DATE J2 25
SALES-QTY J1 29
SALES-TAX J2 31
SALES-TOTAL J2
35
Capacity: 602 (14) Entries: 10
Highwater: 10 Bytes: 38
First, we need to know and understand our data. Are there any
invalid dates? If so, does the value have some other logical meaning?
>get d-sales
>item deliv-date,date,yymmdd
>item purch-date,date,yymmdd
>if $invalid(deliv-date) or $invalid(purch-date)
>list
>xeq
>GET D-SALES (9) >OUT $NULL (0)
CUST-ACCOUNT = 10010 DELIV-DATE = 999999
PRODUCT-NO =
50513001 PRODUCT-PRICE = 19220
PURCH-DATE = 999999 SALES-QTY = 2
SALES-TAX = 2691 SALES-TOTAL = 21910
>GET D-SALES (10) >OUT $NULL (1)
CUST-ACCOUNT = 10010 DELIV-DATE = 125213
PRODUCT-NO =
50513001 PRODUCT-PRICE = 19220
PURCH-DATE = 1 SALES-QTY = 2691
SALES-TAX = 21910 SALES-TOTAL = 21910
IN=10, OUT=2. CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=1.
In this example, we see two records that do not contain proper
dates. The first record contains all 9s, which is probably used as some sort of
flag. We may need to add 99 in front of these dates.
But the second record is obviously wrong. We can use Dbedit to
correct this before converting the other dates. We need to know our data to
properly convert to a new date format.
Once all the incorrect dates are fixed, we can start converting. We
can add a prefix of 19 or 20 to all the appropriate dates by using the
following Extract statement. Please note that we are updating this directly. In
case we need to redo this task, we only convert those dates that have not yet
been converted. In this example we set the cutoff year to 30 so any dates before
30 will have 20 as the century and the others will have 19.
>get d-sales
>set date cutoff 30
>item purch-date,date,yymmdd
>item deliv-date,date,yymmdd
>if not $invalid(purch-date) and not $invalid(deliv-date)
>update
>ext purch-date = $stddate(purch-date)
>ext deliv-date = $stddate(deliv-date)
>xeq
We have now converted all the J2 yymmdd dates to a ccyymmdd format
and added the correct century to the date.
The following Suprtool task shows how you can generate a new file to
put into a new database with dates in a different format.
Consider the deliv-date and purch-date fields of the D-Sales
dataset:
Database: STORE.DBOLD.ACCOUNT
D-SALES Detail Set 5
Entry: Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1 (!M-CUSTOMER)
DELIV-DATE X6 9
PRODUCT-NO Z8 15
(M-PRODUCT)
PRODUCT-PRICE J2
23
PURCH-DATE X6 27
SALES-QTY J1 33
SALES-TAX J2 35
SALES-TOTAL J2
39
Capacity: 611 (13) Entries: 15
Highwater: 15 Bytes: 42
You want to convert to a date format with room for a cc at the
beginning of the deliv-date and purch-date:
Database: STORE.DB.ACCOUNT
D-SALES Detail Set 5
Entry: Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1 (!M-CUSTOMER)
DELIV-DATE X8 9
PRODUCT-NO Z8 17
(M-PRODUCT)
PRODUCT-PRICE J2
25
PURCH-DATE X8 29
SALES-QTY J1 37
SALES-TAX J2 39
SALES-TOTAL J2
43
Capacity: 608 (16) Entries: 0
Highwater: 0 Bytes: 46
In order to convert these dates you need to be able to put either a
19 or 20 in front of the yymmdd date, depending on the value of the year.
Before you can do either of these you must confirm, once again, that you have
no invalid dates.
>base store.dbold
>get d-sales
>item deliv-date,date,yymmdd
>item purch-date,date,yymmdd
>if $invalid(deliv-date) or $invalid(purch-date)
>list
>xeq
Once you have confirmed that there are no invalid dates you can
start converting the dates that you have. Because there are two date fields in
this dataset you must be careful to add the appropriate century for the proper
field. For this example, assume that if a year is less than 1950 then the
century should be 20.
You can easily convert each date by processing each field separately
by using an intermediate self-describing file:
>base store.dbold,1
Database password [;]?
>get d-sales
>set squeeze off
>item deliv-date,date,yymmdd
>if deliv-date >= $date(1950/01/01)
>out sales01,link
>ext cust-account
>ext "19"
>ext deliv-date / sales-total
>xeq
IN=15, OUT=14.
CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=5.
Now insert 20 to the century for the appropriate records:
>base store.dbold
>get d-sales
>if deliv-date < $date(1950/01/01)
>ext cust-account
>ext "20"
>ext deliv-date / sales-total
>out sales01,link,append
>xeq
Now you can convert the other field from the flat file, (sales01)
and add a century to the purch-date field:
>reset
>base {close
the open database}
>in sales01
>item purch-date,date,yymmdd
>if purch-date >= $date(1950/01/01)
>set squeeze off
>out sales02,link
>ext cust-account / product-price
>ext "19"
>ext purch-date / sales-total
>xeq
IN=15, OUT=15.
CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=1.
Because you extracted all 15 records you know you do not have any
records with the purch-date field that need to be updated with a
"20".
Now you can insert the records into the new database:
>base store.db
>in sales02
>put d-sales
>xeq
Now you have converted two dates from an X6 format to an X8 format.
The following Suprtool task shows you how to convert a date in a
self-describing file from mmddyy to yymmdd format.
Consider the following self-describing file with the deliv-date and
purch-date fields:
File: SALES04.DATA.ACCOUNT
(SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1
DELIV-DATE X6 9
<<MMDDYY>>
PRODUCT-NO Z8 15
PRODUCT-PRICE I2
23
PURCH-DATE X6 27
<<MMDDYY>>
SALES-QTY I1 33
SALES-TAX I2 35
SALES-TOTAL I2
39
Limit: 115 EOF: 15
Entry Length: 42 Blocking: 97
You want to convert these two dates to a data format of yymmdd
before adding a century in front of the year. This can be easily accomplished
by defining each sub part of the date and extracting those parts in the new
order. You can use string addition to re-order the field in one pass.
>in sales04
>def new-deliv,1,6
>item new-deliv,date,yymmdd
>def deliv-date-mm,deliv-date[1],2
>def deliv-date-dd,deliv-date[3],2
>def deliv-date-yy,deliv-date[5],2
>def new-purch,1,6
>item new-purch,date,yymmdd
>def purch-date-mm,purch-date[1],2
>def purch-date-dd,purch-date[3],2
>def purch-date-yy,purch-date[5],2
>ext cust-account
>ext new-deliv = deliv-date-yy + deliv-date-mm + deliv-date-dd
>ext product-no / product-price
>ext new-purch = ext purch-date-yy + purch-date-mm +
purch-date-dd
>ext sales-qty / sales-total
>out sales05,link
>xeq
You now end up with a file that looks like this:
File: SALES06.DATA.ACCOUNT
(SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1
NEW-DELIV X6 9
<<YYMMDD>>
PRODUCT-NO Z8 15
PRODUCT-PRICE I2
23
NEW-PURCH X6 27
<<YYMMDD>>
SALES-QTY I1 33
SALES-TAX I2 35
SALES-TOTAL I2
39
Limit: 115 EOF: 15
Entry Length: 42 Blocking: 97
You then add the century to these fields as described above.
Testing software to see if
it works in the year 2000 and beyond is difficult. Currently there are three
software tools that change the software date for specific sessions or
applications, making it easier to test software for year 2000 compliance. The
four tools are:
1.
Hourglass from Allegro
Consultants, Inc.
2.
Time Machine from SolutionSoft
Systems, Inc.
3.
Setdate from the HP Jazz
machine on the Web
4.
TimeWarp/3000 from Omnisolutions
All versions of Suprtool work with Hourglass, but versions previous
to 4.0.13 did not work with Time Machine, Setdate, or TimeWarp. This version of
Suprtool now works with all these tools. Note that this change only applies to
non-expiring versions of Suprtool. Expiring versions of Suprtool (such as
trials, pre-releases, and products obtained through VARs) do not work with Time
Machine or Setdate.
HP e3000 sites use
Suprtool because it provides access to their data many times faster than they
are used to, and because Suprtool enables them to perform time-consuming DP
functions easily, with a few simple commands. The typical Suprtool task
consists of extracting some data for a report, then feeding the Suprtool output
file into the final report program. For example, you might fill a Quiz subfile
with the subset of data needed, then report that subfile with Quiz.
Suprtool is available in
native mode for MPE/iX and compatibility mode for MPE V. You can compare
Suprtool's serial read speed for
TurboIMAGE datasets and MPE files against other programs, both NM and CM. On
MPE V systems, Suprtool has always shown a 2 to 10 times performance gain in
such serial reads. On MPE/iX systems, Suprtool can make serial reads up to 8
times faster, but the improvements are typically higher on MPE V than on
MPE/iX. That is because Suprtool can bypass most of the MPE V operating system,
but cannot bypass the MPE/iX virtual page manager.
Here is one MPE/iX test that shows what is possible. The test scans
a large detail dataset that is absent from memory, just looking at each record,
not writing an output file. This measures raw serial read capability. Suprtool
is 2.5 times faster than a standard NM program and uses 1/7th the CPU time.
When the dataset is fully in memory, Suprtool is able to complete the task 9.3
times faster than an NM program calling DBGET mode-2.
Comparison of elapsed
time, dataset not in memory
|
CPU time
|
NM program
|
115 seconds
|
|
|
Suprtool
|
17 seconds
|
|
Wall time
|
NM program
|
120 seconds
|
|
|
Suprtool
|
47 seconds
|
Comparison of elapsed
time, dataset in memory
|
CPU time
|
NM program
|
109 seconds
|
|
|
Suprtool
|
12 seconds
|
|
Wall time
|
NM program
|
112 seconds
|
|
|
Suprtool
|
12 seconds
|
Suprtool uses the technology of multirecord access (NOBUF/MR) to
achieve large reductions in CPU overhead, 1/8th that of serial DBGET in many
cases. On a CPU-bound MPE/iX system, such significant savings mean that you can
run Suprtool when other programs would be an intolerable burden.
Suprtool/V uses the HP
sort intrinsics, so sort times should not show much change. Suprtool/iX uses
its own set of high-speed sort intrinsics, unless one of the following is true:
·
Set Sortfast is Off (the
default is On).
·
Native Language Support is
enabled (either automatically via the NLDATALANG JCW or explicitly via Set
NLS).
·
Any of the sort fields are
defined as type CHAR.
Generally, Suprtool's internal sort algorithm is faster than HP's
sort algorithm.
It is better to test
Suprtool with your own database and your own application needs, rather than
trust to a "generic" performance test. The ideal test is an actual
production report whose bad performance is causing you a problem. Then if you
obtain improvements by using Suprtool you know you can achieve better speed in
practice as well as in tests.
Use Suprtool as a front end to your problem report, producing a
small extract file containing just the fields and records needed for your final
program. Once you get that working, consider linking in data from other files
or datasets using Suprlink. For comparison purposes, run the Suprtool test at
the same time as you would normally run the original program. Comparing a
standalone midnight run against a mid-day run does not give valid results, nor
does comparing two runs in succession (the second run benefits on MPE/iX, since
the files are already in memory at that time).
You have several choices when deciding how to extract the data for
your report. One user had a report that consumed 18 hours on his Series 955.
Since the site had only a short window for batch processing each night, the job
would spill over into the prime shift. By the time the report did complete, it
was a day late and a new report was running. His boss was considering going to
a 960 to reduce the job time. The programmer tried Suprtool as a front end, but
it only reduced the time to 15 hours. When he called Robelle in disappointment,
we investigated his application. He had used the Chain command because he had a
TurboIMAGE search item for his key values and thought following such a search
path would be fastest.
We suggested a serial Get
command instead of a random-access Chain command and the job time fell to 4.5
hours--much easier to schedule. Get was faster than Chain, even though it had
to look at every entry in the dataset. Why? Get reads many contiguous records
with each access to MPE, while Chain must call TurboIMAGE to retrieve each
chain entry. Since the entries on the chain are seldom in the same disc block,
Chain generated many more disc accesses, and they were randomly distributed
over the disc space. In this case, he was selecting 11% of the dataset (261,230
out of 2,307,685 entries). Chain had to do about 424,000 random disc reads,
while Get did only 14,471 serial reads, a reduction of 97%. However, the Chain
command would have been faster if he had selected less than 15,000 entries. You
can use the Set Statistics On command to see how many disc reads a Get command uses; if that is less than the number of entries selected, Get will usually be
faster than Chain.
Not all portions of the
Suprtool product give equal performance boosts. The primary technology of
Suprtool is large NOBUF/MR reads and writes. By asking the operating system for
many records at once, instead of invoking the system software for each record,
Suprtool reduces the CPU overhead of the task dramatically. This technology is
present when you use the Input and Get commands, but not the Chain command (for
some tasks the Get command must revert to using the slower standard database
reads, but it always prints a warning).
The If and Extract
commands are powerful for reducing a large input file into a small output file
that contains just the data desired. They are reasonably efficient, but usually
consume as much processor time as the serial read itself. The If command does
partial evaluation of expressions. Therefore, you should place the tests that
are most likely to fail at the start of the expression, and place the table
lookups (which are slower) at the end. This minimizes overhead. Using Extract
reduces the size of the output record, and greatly improves sort times (if all
sort keys are extracted).
The Delete, Put, and
Update commands are implemented by calling the corresponding TurboIMAGE
intrinsics: DBDELETE, DBPUT, and DBUPDATE. A simple way to improve Delete, Put,
and Update performance is to use Set Lock 0 (see below), but this is rarely
appropriate when on-line users need access to the database. There is another
option that improves the speed of Deletes, Puts, and Updates, but it comes with
many warnings (see "Defer" on page 250).
The Dbedit Subsystem, an
interactive editor for dataset entries and chains of entries, does not use
NOBUF/MR, so is strictly a convenience, not a performance aid.
Suprlink is a tool for
linking together fields from several files by a common key value. It links
sorted files that Suprtool extracts from IMAGE, KSAM and MPE files. It uses
NOBUF/MR techniques and gives you a performance improvement over random
database accesses in many cases. However, if you have to re-sort the data many
times and the records are large, Suprlink may not help you. Performance will be
optimized if you extract only the fields you need from each input source, not
the entire record.
Speed Demon is an
intrinsic library for 3GL programs that provides a high-speed replacement for
TurboIMAGE serial "gets". The NM version returns records at the same
speed that Suprtool does with the same low CPU overhead. The MPE V version has
half the speed of Suprtool at retrieving records. Consider calling Speed Demon
in your programs when you need to process more than 50% of the records in a
file, since you eliminate the need to read Suprtool's output file.
Occasionally we will put performance tips on our web site that are
more timely than what can be achieved in a manual. So please also visit:
http://www.robelle.com/tips/st-performance.html
for the latest performance issue and tips.
The performance results
obtained from Suprtool, like any program, vary depending on the record sizes,
number of records, size of sorts, and the current efficiency of your
application. Measuring performance on any computer system is a challenge, but
especially so on MPE/iX with its demand-paged virtual memory and complex
scheduler. Some tests do not show such a marked improvement as the examples
described here. That is why we recommend that you test Suprtool against your
own database.
Suprtool works best when selecting a small subset of a large
dataset. The larger the dataset and the smaller the percentage extracted, the
better the performance improvement. Once you have selected a task to measure,
you have the difficulty of making a fair comparison. This can be more tricky
than it seems. For example, on MPE/iX if you run your regular task first, then
the Suprtool task, you will almost certainly find the Suprtool task faster,
just because the first task has made most of the data resident in memory.
Here are the guidelines that we follow in order to obtain
performance measurements that we can be confident of:
1.
We do every test at least five
times. It is rare for each test to be identical.
2.
All MPE/iX performance tests
are sensitive to the amount of the file that is in memory. We use the Klondike Nugget (now
available from Lund Performance Solutions) to measure how much of our test
files are in memory before we start each test.
3.
We start each test by flushing
all files out of memory. We do this with the unsupported Fflush tool. This program is
difficult to obtain (we cannot give you a copy) and you probably need a new
version for each new release of MPE/iX. You might try getting a copy from your
HP SE.
4.
Tests are run in the middle of
the night and we ensure that there are no other sessions or jobs running during
each test.
Suprtool is a performance
tool. Not because every Suprtool command is always fast, but because
performance is one of our first concerns when adding new features to Suprtool.
We always look for the fastest way to do any task, even if that means it can't
be quite as flexible as other software tools.
Suprtool supports
environment variable substitution. To use this enhancement you must do a:
Over the years we've grown the if/extract function list, to the
point where it needs it's own documentation for both the if and extract
commands. Functions can be used in both the if and extract commands, however,
some functions were sometimes written to either be specifically used in either
if or extract, but typically have an application in both.
UC4 is a scripting/scheduling/job system found on many platforms and
is common on HP-UX. It also resolves environment variables for you when it runs
your scripts.
Suprtool has a number of functions that require a "$" sign
in front of them making them look like variables. This causes an issue with UC4
as it tries to resolve any variables. So if a script has a $lookup in it and
$lookup is not a variable then the $lookup is removed, for example what would
happen is:
becomes:
In order to rectify this all that needs to happen is you
"Escape Out" the Environment Variable from being resolved by changing
the script to be:
>if \$lookup(mytable,key)
When you do this UC4, (and HP-UX for that matter), now knows that
the $lookup is not a token that needs to be resolved as an environment variable
but the $lookup is a literal.
Suprtool has a number of functions that work on String/Byte type
fields. In all cases the target and source of these functions are byte type
fields and are treated as strings internally to Suprtool.
Purpose is to remove spaces from the beginning and the end of a
field.
>if $trim(last_name) = “ARMSTRONG”
This means that Suprtool will qualify "ARMSTRONG", "
ARMSTRONG", " ARMSTRONG" etc.
EXT byte_target=$trim(byte_source)
DEF lastname,1,16,byte
EXT lastname=$trim(last_name)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = ARMSTRONG
ext lastname=$trim(lastname)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = ARMSTRONG
Purpose is to remove spaces from the left side of the field.
if $ltrim(first_name) = "NEIL "
ext byte_target=$ltrim(byte_source)
DEF lastname,1,16,byte
EXT lastname=$ltrim(last_name)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = ARMSTRONG
ext lastname=$ltrim(lastname)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = ARMSTRONG
Purpose
is to remove spaces from the right side of the field.
if $rtrim(first_name) = "Neil"
extract byte_target=$rtrim(byte_source)
def lastname,1,16,byte
ext lastname=$rtrim(last_name)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = ARMSTRONGbb
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = ARMSTRONG
It
is difficult to show what $RTRIM does in a simple instance, however, it is
perfect for constructing/merging two separate fields into on as in:
ext fullname=$rtrim(first-name) + " " + $trim(last-name)
Neil
Armstrong
Purpose
is to make all relevant bytes "Upper" case.
if $upper(first_name) = "NEIL"
extract byte-target=$upper(byte-source)
def lastname,1,16,byte
ext lastname=$upper(last_name)
>ext lastname=$upper(lastname)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = ARMSTRONG
Purpose
it to make all relevant bytes "Lower" case.
if $lower(first_name) =
"neil"
ext byte_target=$lower(byte_source)
def newfirstname,1,16,byte
ext
newfirstname=$lower(first_name)
>ext lastname=$lower(lastname)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
LASTNAME = armstrong
Purpose
is to make the relevant bytes either Upper or Lower Case in an intelligent
manner. It will Upshift the first character in a field and anything following a
space or dash.
if $proper(first_name) = "Neil"
ext byte_target=$proper(byte_source)
def fullname,1,30,byte
ext fullname=$proper(first_name)
>ext fullname=$proper(fullname)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
FULLNAME = Neil
Armstrong
Purpose
is to extract a string into a byte type field that begins at a certain
character instance and ends and a second character instance. Commonly used to
reformat name fields and read .CSV files.
Not
that commonly used.
extract field=$split(field_from,start_pos,instance,end_pos,instance)
define acct-x,1,12,byte
define fullname,1,30
ext acct-x=$split(record,first,",")
ext fullname=$split(record,",",",")
Source Data of record
acct-x result
123456789,"Neil Armstrong",435 123456789
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
ACCT-X = 123456789
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
FULLNAME = "Neil
Armstrong"
Purpose
is to find any specified character(s) in any byte string fields anywhere in a
given byte field.
clean "^10"
if $findclean(e-mail)
Records
will qualify if a Line Feed is in the e-mail field.
Purpose
was to "clean" and remove unwanted characters from any byte-string
fields in any point in the field. Typically used to removed un-printable
characters from byte fields.
clean "N"
if $clean(first_name)=" eil"
extract byte_target=$target(byte_source)
clean "N"
set cleanchar " "
extract byte_target=$clean(byte_source)
Example,
remove Line Feed from E-mail Address field and shift data to the left:
Clean "^10"
set cleanchar "<null>"
ext e-mail=$clean(e-mail)
Purpose
to translate any character from a byte type field to any defined byte,
primarily to obfuscate data and was primarily designed for the extract command.
translate "A:C"
if $translate(Full_Name)="Neil Crmstrong" { not commonly
used }
translate "A:C"
translate "B:D"
translate "a:f"
extract New-byte-field=$translate(byte-field)
Source Data: Result Data
Barry Armstrong Dfrry
Crmstrong
Purpose
is to convert Ebcidic to Ascii, for a byte type field.
Extract $etoa(char-field)
Purpose
is to convert Ascii to Ebcidic, for a byte type field.
Extract $atoe(char-field)
$etoa
and $atoe cannot be used in if command, nor do they put a result in a field,
they just extract the converted byte-type field.
Suprtool
is capable of doing string addition, again this is with byte type fields, you
can do add various byte type fields together and even the results of various
functions from above.
extract target_byte_field = byte-field1 + " " +
byte-field2
extract FullName = $trim(first_name) + ' ' + $trim(last_name)
extract FullName = $trim(first_name) + ' ' + $trim(last_name)
>IN STRINGS.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
FULLNAME = "Neil
Armstrong"
There
are a number of functions that are used to assist and help perform some
arithmetic operations.
Purpose
is to not round a given result or arithmetic expression or number. Suprtools
default behaviour is to round a result, the $truncate function will change that
behaviour.
if $truncate((qty * price) / 100 = 100
extract new_price=$truncate((qty * price) / 100)
Purpose
is to return the absolute value of a given number.
if $abs(credit-field)=5000
extract
newnum=$abs(credit-amt)
Purpose
is to provide a running total for any numeric field and deposit the result into
a packed-decimal field.
Not commonly used in if
define mytotal,1,18,packed
ext mytotal=$total(sales-amount)
Purpose
is to provide a running total for any numeric field and deposit the result into
a packed-decimal field. The target packed-decimal field is reset to 0 on a
control break on the specified sort field.
Not
commonly used.
define target,1,18,packed
sort sort-field
ext target=$subtotal(fieldtototal,sort-field)
>in file1sd.suprtest
>def mytotal,1,14,packed
>def mysubtotal,1,14,packed
>sort char-field
>ext char-field
>ext int-field
>ext mytotal=$total(int-field)
>ext mysubtotal=$subtotal(int-field,char-field)
>list
>xeq
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (0)
CHAR-FIELD = 11111 INT-FIELD = 1111
MYTOTAL = 1111
MYSUBTOTAL = 1111
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (1)
CHAR-FIELD = 22222 INT-FIELD = 2222
MYTOTAL = 3333
MYSUBTOTAL = 2222
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (2)
CHAR-FIELD = 22222 INT-FIELD = 2222
MYTOTAL = 5555
MYSUBTOTAL = 4444
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (3)
CHAR-FIELD = 33333 INT-FIELD = 3333
MYTOTAL = 8888
MYSUBTOTAL = 3333
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (4)
CHAR-FIELD = 33333 INT-FIELD = 3333
MYTOTAL = 12221
MYSUBTOTAL = 6666
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (5)
CHAR-FIELD = 33333 INT-FIELD = 3333
MYTOTAL = 15554
MYSUBTOTAL = 9999
Purpose
is to provide a running counter starting from 1, and the target/result field is
a double integer.
Not
commonly used.
define mycounter,1,4,double
ext mycounter=$counter
Purpose
is to provide a running counter starting from 1, and the target/result field is
a double integer. The counter is reset when the control-break occurs on the
specified sort field.
Not
commonly used
define mysubcount,1,4,double
sort customer-no
ext mysubcount=$subcount(customer-no)
in file1sd.suprtest
def mycount,1,4,double
define mysubcount,1,4,double
sort char-field
ext char-field
ext mycount=$counter
ext mysubcount=$subcount(char-field)
list
xeq
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (0)
CHAR-FIELD = 11111 MYCOUNT = 1
MYSUBCOUNT = 1
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (1)
CHAR-FIELD = 22222 MYCOUNT = 2
MYSUBCOUNT = 1
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (2)
CHAR-FIELD = 22222 MYCOUNT = 3
MYSUBCOUNT = 2
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (3)
CHAR-FIELD = 33333 MYCOUNT = 4
MYSUBCOUNT = 1
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (4)
CHAR-FIELD = 33333 MYCOUNT = 5
MYSUBCOUNT = 2
>IN FILE1SD.SUPRTEST.GREEN >OUT $NULL (5)
CHAR-FIELD = 33333 MYCOUNT = 6
MYSUBCOUNT = 3
When
the target of an extract conversion is a packed or display- type field,
Suprtool always converts positive values to a neutral number. To ensure that
expressions with positive values have a positive result, use the $signed
function:
Not
commonly used:
extract packed-field=$signed(int-field)
extract display_field=$signed(dbl-field / 10)
Suprtool
has the ability to perform any and all Arithmetic functions on numeric fields.
if sales-total <> (sales_qty * unit_price) + sales_tax
ext sales-total=(sales_qty * unit_price) + sales_tax
Purpose
is to convert a freeform number, to a number that can be put into an actual
numeric field. The target must be numeric and the source field must be a
display type field, even though it can have non numeric characters in it.
if $number(disp-field)=500
define disp-field,byte-field,display
{define byte as display with same length}
define newdouble,1,4,double
ext newdouble=$number(disp-field)
$5.00 ---> 500
Notes:
Suprtool will try and match the decimal places of the defined by the item
command of the numeric target to the decimal places in the actual data and
handle the data properly. For example if the target field has an item command
definition of two decimal places, Suprtool will handle the data Raw data
accordingly:
Raw Data Result of $number
5.1 5.10
5.123 5.12
5.139 5.14
Purpose
is to format a number or byte-string field to a particular format using an
editmask similar to the syntax found in Cobol into a target byte-type field.
Primarily designed to help format data for list and/or reports.
if $edit(somefield,"$$$$.99-")="$5.00" {Not
commonly used}
ext byte-field=$edit(dbl-field,"$$$$.99-")
ext byte-field=$trim($edit(dbl-field,"$$$$.99-"))
500
$5.00
Purpose
is to determine if a key value has been loaded into memory with options to
reference associated data.
if
$lookup is capable of determining if a key value exists and also compare
against a field specified with the data field.
table tablename,key,file,filename
if $lookup(tablename,key)
table tablename,key,file,filename,data(data-field)
if $lookup(tablename,key,data-field) = inputsrcdatafield
table tablename,key,file,filename,data(data-field)
extract target-field=$lookup(tablename,key,data-field)
Purpose
is to expand the command line limit for an if command beyond 256 characters.
if $read
-number=1 and
-number=3 and
-//
Purpose
is to determine the current date.
If date-field=$today(-1)
if date-field=$today
The
date-field and target-date must be defined as having a particular date format
(item command) and in a proper container for that particular date type.
Purpose
is to determine a given date.
if date-field=$date(*/*/*)
ext date-field=$date(*/*/*)
Date-field
must be defined as having a particular date format (item command) and in a
proper container
Purpose
is to determine if a given date is valid or not.
item check-date,date,ccyymmdd
if $invalid(check-date)
Not
typically used in extract.
Purpose
is to convert from any supported Suprtool date in any container to CCYYMMDD in
a double integer container. For date formats with only two digit years Suprtool
will look at the value of Set Date Cutoff in order to determine what century to
convert it to, whether it be 19 or 20.
item my-yymmdd-date,date,yymmdd
if $stddate(my-yymmdd-date) = 20141213
item my-yymmdd-date,date,yymmdd
define new-ccyymmdd-date,1,4,double
ext new-ccyymmdd-date=$stddate(my-yymmdd-date)
Purpose
is to convert any supported Suprtool date to a number of days since 4713BC or
Julian Day format. Main purpose in if is to compare two dates and get the
diffference. Main purpose in extract is to typically transform a date to be so
many days away from the current date value.
if ($days(entry-date) - $days(order-fulfill-date)) >=30
extract new-date=$stddate($days(entry-date) + 10)
the
footer - can be used anywhere
|
Do not enter the > sign when typing commands.
|
When you run Suprtool, it prompts for commands with a
">" character and reads command lines from the standard input
device. Suprtool commands contain a command name which may include one or
more optional parameters that are each separated by commas.
|
In this chapter, we describe the Suprtool commands in alphabetic
order. Each command name is followed by its minimal abbreviation in brackets.
For example: [D] for Define and [DU] for Duplicate.
Most Suprtool commands work within the context of the input file. In
general, the Base, Chain, Get, and Input commands must be entered before other
commands. Once the input source has been specified, commands can be entered in
any order.
You may shorten the
command name to any substring that uniquely defines the command. For example,
Form can be abbreviated as FO or F, since there are no other commands that
start with "F". Duplicate, however, can be abbreviated only to DU,
since there is also a Define command in Suprtool.
>i sdfile {Input
command}
>l {List
command}
>x {Xeq
command}
You can enter the letters in either uppercase or lowercase because
Suprtool upshifts everything in the command line except literal strings within
quotes (e.g., "abc"). These two commands are identical:
>EXTRACT QTY
>extract qty
You can enter several
commands on a single line, if you separate them with semicolons. An entire
"task" can be placed on one input line.
>in old;out new;xeq
>get m-customer;if cust-status<>10,20,30;list;x
Caution: Suprtool cannot distinguish between several commands on one line and
several commands entered on several lines. This is not a problem when using
Suprtool in batch, as Suprtool stops executing when an error occurs. But when
using Suprtool interactively, specifying multiple commands separated by a
semicolon, Suprtool keeps on parsing the rest of the line after it finds an
error. For example, if you misspell the "fldname" when you type the
following,
>get dsetname; if fldname="value";del;out filename;xeq
Suprtool sends you an error message with the typo, but continues
with the rest of the command line. This has the effect of deleting all the
entries in the dataset. It is risky to type Xeq on the same command line as any
other command unless:
1.
You are not concerned with the
consequences if you make a mistake (e.g., any "extract" task should
be safe).
2.
You don't make any mistakes.
The usual reason for putting all the commands on one line, including
the Xeq, is to permit repetition of the task by using the Before command. It is
not necessary to type everything on one line because with the Listredo command,
Suprtool allows you to pick and choose any of your last 1000 commands.
|
The maximum command that may be specified in the Info= parameter
of the Run command is 80 characters.
|
The maximum physical command
line is 256 characters. You may enter commands on multiple input lines by
putting an "&" continuation character at the end of the line.
The maximum total command length is 256 characters. The separating comma in
commands is not optional. Should your If command exceed 256 characters, use
the Table command, or $read.
|
>in sdfile
>if status="20" and & {continue
the If command}
state="AZ","CA","OR" {select
several states}
>output outfile
|
You may also use MPE's :COMMENT command to enter comment lines.
|
Comments may appear at the end of any command line, as long as
they are surrounded by curly braces. Many of the examples in this manual show
comments at the end of command lines. You can enter a comment as the only
item in a Suprtool command line. When you enter continued command lines, the
comment can appear before or after the continuation character:
|
>{The following task extracts all customer records for}
>{ the different
customers we are interested in.}
>in customer
{input self-describing file}
>if status = "10" or & {prepaid status}
status = "20" or
& {current status}
status =
"30" {arrears status}
>output outfile
{output to a disc file}
>exit
{execute the task and exit}
STREAMX is a product from
VESOFT that permits you to build flexible job streams. STREAMX contains a
complete programming language with loops, prompts, and parameter substitution.
A problem arises when trying to enter comments into a Suprtool batch job that
will be submitted with STREAMX. Suprtool uses the {...} pair to delimit
comments. STREAMX uses these same characters for expressions. Similarly,
Suprtool uses question marks as part of pattern-matching in the If command, and
STREAMX uses question marks for questions.
You cannot change Suprtool's comment or pattern-matching characters,
but you can change the expression and question characters in STREAMX. The
following example changes the STREAMX expression characters from {...} to
~...~, and the question character from ? to `:
!job example,user.acct
::setquestion `
::setbraces ~~
::prompt date datevar = "Enter date to select: "
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store {input database}
>get d-sales {and dataset}
>if deliv-date=~datevar~ & {STREAMX substitutes actual date}
>and product-code == "??X?3@"
>output mpefile
>exit
!tell ~hpjobname~,~hpuser~.~hpaccount~;Example done.
!eoj
If Suprtool doesn't
recognize the command you have entered, it tries to interpret it as an MPE
command. Suprtool also interprets any command line beginning with a colon (:)
as an MPE command. Only the commands that MPE allows in "break" are
allowed in Suprtool/V. This feature can be used to establish :File commands for
the input or output files, to :PURGE the output file to avoid a duplicate file
name error, and to include :COMMENT lines. For example:
>:comment sort custfile by custnum
>input custfile
>key 1,10 {no
colon on the next command}
>purge sortcust {make
sure that no duplicate file error occurs}
>output sortcust
>exit
Suprtool/iX executes any
MPE command (e.g., Run), UDCs, and command files. Caution: programs that suspend, instead of terminating, are not
killed by the HPCICOMMAND intrinsic.
Any command line beginning
with an equal sign (=) is treated as a calculator expression. This feature can
be used to compute blocking factors and do other calculations without the need
of an electronic calculator. For help, type =?.
You can interrupt a
Suprtool task with the Control-Y key (hold down Control while striking Y).
Suprtool responds by telling you how much work it has done (IN=,OUT=,etc.) and
asks if you wish to stop. Hit the Return key to continue or type YES to stop
the task. Even though you abort the task, your output file is saved (although
it may be empty if you stop before the sort phase is over).
If you use Control-Y during a Put, Delete, or Update operation, the
database locks are still in effect. Do not walk away from your terminal without
answering YES or NO to the "stop" question. If you are Deleting
records, you should continue the task unless you don't want the output file.
With the output file, you can recover the records back into the dataset by
using the Put command.
When you hit Control-Y,
MPE must fix Suprtool's stack markers so that you resume where the interrupt
occurred. With MPE V, we have received reports of invalid-stack-marker aborts
in Suprtool, when using Control-Y while reading a dataset. This is probably
because the stack-marker format changed in MPE V, and Control-Y has trouble
finding the proper one when Suprtool is in Privileged Mode. There is not much
you can do except to avoid Control-Y while reading a dataset.
There are several errors
that can occur during a Suprtool "task":
1.
The output file fills up.
2.
There are invalid
packed-decimal or zoned-decimal digits in the input record.
3.
There is a duplicate key when
writing to a KSAM file.
4.
An attempt is made to delete a
master dataset entry which still has associated detail entries.
5.
Suprtool tries to Put a record
to a detail dataset that does not have an associated master entry.
6.
An attempt is made to add a
master dataset entry which already exists.
7.
An attempt is made to delete a
dataset record that has changed.
For errors 4 through 7:
If Set Ignore is Off (default), Suprtool prints an error message and
stops processing the input file. For KSAM errors, the standard file information
display is printed. For IMAGE errors, Suprtool prints whatever information is
available on the record that caused the DBDELETE, DBPUT, or DBUPDATE error
(when Set Dumponerror On).
The information from IMAGE errors may include the input record
number, the output record number and the data values of the record. Suprtool
uses the current options of the List command to print the data values. If no
List command was specified, Suprtool uses the List defaults.
To only see a summary of IMAGE errors that occurred, turn Set
Dumponerror Off. To continue processing, even when errors occur, turn Set
Ignore On.
The Add command currently
is available only for Oracle access on HP-UX.
Opens a specified
database. Once you have it open, you can extract data from datasets, delete
entries, load new entries into datasets, use the schema to define fields for
MPE files (Input file = set), and do on-line Editing of the database (Edit
allows add, change, delete, list, modify of individual fields and entries).
To access a remote DS
database, specify the system name in
the Base command. To access a remote NS database, use a :File command.
To close the current
database, use Base without parameters.
BASE [system#]basename [,mode [,password] ]
(Default: system=logon, mode=1, password=Creator)
System is the DS name of a remote HP e3000 (optional). Basename is the name of your database. Mode is the DBOPEN mode that you want
(i.e., mode-1 for shared updates, mode-5 for shared read-only), and password is the DBOPEN database
password. When the password is
included in the Base command, it is always upshifted. Use the ? option to
specify lowercase passwords.
Suprtool opens the Base, which remains open until you do another
Base command, a Reset Base, or a Reset All, even if you do several extracts
from the database.
Examples
The first example shows a typical Suprtool task. A dataset in the
Store database is read and a subset of the entries are sorted into a disc file:
>base store,5,READER
{open
for read access only}
>get d-sales {select
an input dataset}
>if sales-total>10000 {choose
a subset of all entries}
>sort cust-account {sort
by account number}
>output salesout {output
has same structure}
>exit { as the d-sales dataset}
Our next example opens the database with the Creator password (which
is the default). No output file is produced; instead, we produce a formatted
listing of the input dataset:
>base store {use
the Creator password}
>form sets {you
cannot remember the names}
>get d-inventory { of the datasets in Store}
>list {print
the dataset fields formatted.}
>exit { no output file is created}
In session mode, this
command would prompt for the database password. If none is entered, or Suprtool
is not running interactively, the Creator password is used by default (;).
Because the open mode was not specified, the database is opened in mode-1.
Database
Passwords in Batch
In batch mode, it is
necessary to specify a database password without the password being echoed on
the job stream listing. A special database password is provided to allow for
this. When a question mark "?" is used as the database password,
Suprtool prompts for the password on the next physical input line without
echoing. This occurs in batch mode or in session mode. For example:
>base store,5,? {Suprtool
prompts for the password.}
Password > {Password
is on this line, but it won't}
>get d-inventory {show
on job stream listing or terminal.}
>exit
File Commands
You can use a :File command to re-direct a database name to another
group and account in Suprtool. For example:
:run suprtool
>:file dbx=db23.data.test
>base dbx
>get cust-master
Because the remote database feature generates a :File command, you
cannot combine these two features. If you specify a remote system in the Base
command, the specified basename must
be precise. Any existing :File command will have been overruled. When Suprtool
closes a remote database, any :File command for the database is reset.
DS/3000 Database
Access
Suppose that you wished to
obtain the total of the ON-HAND-QTY and the UNIT-COST of the inventory in a
remote DS-database. The following Suprtool example would obtain the totals:
>base newyork#store.data,5,READER {NEWYORK
database}
>get d-inventory
>total on-hand-qty
{produce
a total of this field}
>total unit-cost {total
this field too}
>exit {no
output file is created}
You must have already done
the necessary :DSLINE and :REMOTE HELLO commands. This is the only way to read
from a remote database in Suprtool. You cannot use the "Remote Database
Access" facility of IMAGE. Suprtool does a :File command for the base name
before calling DBOPEN.
:file basename=basename; dev=system#disc.
NS/3000 Database
Access
There are two restrictions
to accessing a database on a remote NS-system:
1.
You cannot use the system name of the Base command.
2.
You cannot specify the NS/3000 node specification as part of the
database name.
The only way to access a database on a remote NS-system is to use a
:File command:
:dsline mrp.go.hp
:remote hello user.account,group
:file store=store:mrp.go.hp
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store
>get m-customer
>output mcust
>xeq
Jumbo Datasets
Due to limitations in
MPE/iX, Suprtool cannot open remote Jumbo datasets. Suprtool will fail with an
error similar to that showed as below:
Error: Unable to open MPE file /ACCT/GROUP/DATASET.001
When trying to access a
database on a remote computer with Suprtool, the Get command may fail with the
error "Privileged File Violation (FSERR 45)". This is the result of
changes made to NS to improve security for remote file access. Apparently, some
customers complained to HP that a program on the local system should not be
permitted to FOPEN a privileged file (such as an IMAGE dataset) on a remote
system unless the user on the remote system has PM capability.
There are three workarounds to this problem:
1.
Set Privmode Off in the
Suprtool task, before the Base command. This forces Suprtool to use slow DBGETs
instead of fast NOBUF/MR access.
2.
Log on to the remote
system as a user with PM capability and proper read/write access to the
database (such as Manager.Sys). Or run a program on the remote system such as
GOD from VESOFT, granting the remote user the required capability and file
access privileges.
3.
Log on to the remote system as
you have done in the past, but run Suprtool on the remote system instead of the
local system. That is, run Suprtool on the same computer as the database
resides, and direct the output file back to the local computer. An added
advantage of this method is that only selected database records have to be
passed across the NS connection.
For many tasks this improves performance dramatically. Suppose you
want to select transactions for one month from a yearly history dataset. If
Suprtool is run on the local system and the database resides on the remote
system, then all the records in the dataset must be passed across the NS
connection, just to have most of them rejected by Suprtool's selection
criteria. On the other hand, if Suprtool is run on the same system as the
database, then only the selected records have to be passed across the NS
connection.
This is the solution that we recommend. If you do not have Suprtool
on all your production systems, you can use one of the other workarounds, or
call us for a right-to-copy license.
Open Modes
Base does not allow mode-7 for exclusive read access, but it does
allow mode-4 for exclusive update while others read. Mode-4 disallows changes
while you are extracting from the database. Mode-3 for fully exclusive access
is tolerated, but causes Suprtool to use slow DBGETs to extract from datasets.
Mode-3 should only be used when you need to do a Delete or Put command with Set
Defer On.
Suprtool allows you to open a second database in the Put command
when you are copying from one database to another.
Repeat any combination of
the previous 1000 command lines, with or without editing.
BEFORE [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default: redo previous
line)
(BQ=redo without change)
The Before command allows you to modify the commands before it
executes them. If you don't need to change them, use BQ or Do.
The Before command uses Qedit-style Control characters for modifying
the commands. The default mode is to replace characters. To delete use
Control-D, and to insert use Control-B. If you prefer HP-style modify (D, R, I,
and U), use the Redo command instead of Before.
Examples
>listf @.soruce {"source"
is not spelled right}
NON-EXISTENT GROUP. (CIERR
908)
>Before {redo
most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last
command is printed}
our {you
enter changes to it}
listf @.source {the
edited command is shown}
{you
press Return}
>listredo -10/
>before 5 {redo
5th command in stack}
>bef 8/10 {redo
8th through 10th}
>b listf {redo
last Listf command}
>b listf temp {redo
"listf temp" command}
>b @temp {redo
last containing "temp"}
>before -2 {redo
command before previous one}
>before -5/-2 {redo
by relative lines}
Modify Operators
If you wish to change any
characters within the line, the modify operators are the regular Control Codes
used in Qedit:
|
Characters
|
Action
|
|
Any printing characters
|
replace the ones above
|
|
Control-D plus spaces
|
deletes columns above.
|
|
Control-B
|
puts you into "insert before" mode.
|
|
Control-A
|
starts appending characters at the end of line.
|
|
Control-A, Control-D, plus spaces
|
deletes from the end.
|
|
Control-T
|
ends Insert Mode, allowing movement to a new column.
|
|
Control-G
|
recovers the original line.
|
|
Control-O
|
specifies "overwrite" mode (needed for spaces).
|
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent file and can therefore be
used from another session. You can use the Set
redo command to specify a filename to save your redo commands. Please see
"Redo" on page 262 for details.
Selects an IMAGE dataset
and a search path as the input source for the next extract. Unlike the Get
command, the Chain command reads records by using the standard IMAGE
intrinsics. For detail datasets, the Chain command does a DBFIND on the
specified search path and uses DBGET mode-5 to read the records. For master
datasets, the Chain command uses DBGET mode-7. You must have read access to all
fields in the dataset entry. Only one Chain, Get, or Input command is allowed
per extract task.
CHAIN setname,search-field=value
[,...]
CHAIN setname,search-field=table-name
When using Chain, the size of the output file defaults to the size
of the Chain dataset. If the dataset is large and the selected subset is small,
you should use the Numrecs command to reduce the size of the output file.
Selection by
Individual Values
Suppose you want to find all the sales records for customer account
"1234". Assuming that cust-account is a search field in the d-sales
dataset, you would use this:
>base store,5,READER {open
for read access only}
>chain d-sales,cust-account="1234" {read
the sales records for customer 1234}
>out out1
>xeq
If you want to select sales records for more than one customer, you
would use:
>chain
d-sales,cust-account="12345","67890","39201"
>out out2
>xeq
Values with
Decimal Places
You can specify values
with decimal places for search fields with implied decimal places. For example,
>item unit-cost,decimal,2 {two
implied decimal points}
>chain d-inventory,unit-cost=10,10.5,10.75
>out out3
{select
records for 1000, 1050, and 1075}
>xeq
Selection with a
Table
You can specify the
records to read using a table. The Table command may appear before or after the
Chain command. Use this option when you have a file of key values to search
for:
>{select the sales records that match the values in custfile}
>chain d-sales,cust-account=sales-table
>table sales-table,cust-account,file,custfile
>out out4
>xeq
Combining Chain
with If
The Chain command selects an input dataset and
a set of key values to search for. To specify additional selection criteria,
use the Chain command to specify the key values and the If command for the
additional selection criteria:
>{select records for customer 1234 where the sales-qty is }
>{ greater than 100}
>chain d-sales,cust-account="1234"
>if sales-qty > 100
>out out5
>xeq
B-trees and
Chain
The Chain command only
takes advantage of B-trees if the BtreeMode1 setting is turned on at the root
level. This setting means that all DBFIND mode-1 calls will utilize the B-tree.
You can turn BtreeMode1 on by doing the following:
:run dbutil.pub.sys
>>set BtreeMode1=on
The Chain command allows the partial key retrieval on X- and U- type
items on the master dataset, and implicitly on any associated detail dataset.
For example,
>base cd.db.data,5,reader
>chain a-songs,song-title="w@"
>list
>xeq
Warning: Using DBGET for the
input records
>GET A-SONGS (289) >OUT $NULL (0)
SONG-TITLE = we only come
out at night
>GET A-SONGS (56) >OUT $NULL (1)
SONG-TITLE = where boys
fear to tread
IN=2, OUT=2. CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=1.
As previously mentioned, we can search a detail dataset by using the
implicit B-tree or the search item that has a B-tree attached to the associated
master.
>chain d-songs,song-title="w@"
>list
>xeq
Warning: Using DBGET for the
input records
>GET D-SONGS (37) >OUT $NULL (0)
CD-NO = 2 CD-TITLE = Mellon Collie
ARTIST = Smashing
Pumpkins SONG-NO = 10
SONG-TITLE = we only come out at night
>GET D-SONGS (28) >OUT $NULL (1)
CD-NO = 2 CD-TITLE = Mellon Collie
ARTIST = Smashing
Pumpkins SONG-NO = 1
SONG-TITLE = where boys fear to tread
IN=2, OUT=2. CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=1.
Third-Party
Indexing
If MPE/iX third-party
indexing is enabled, the Chain command takes advantage of third-party indexes
in the specified dataset. The search-field
parameter can be any IMAGE index or any third-party index. Only X- and
U-type fields are supported. Use the Form command to see which index fields
Chain will accept. The value you
specify is still restricted to the maximum length of the search-field. The following example uses a third-party index to
only match customer entries where the last name starts with the letter
"A":
>chain m-customer,name-last="A@"
>list standard
>xeq
Notes
The Chain command is intended to replace a Get and If combination
where the primary selection is by key value. In many cases, it is still faster
to use the Get command to read the entire dataset than it is to use the Chain
command to use search-paths or third-party indexes. Use Set Stat On to compare
the performance of the Chain and Get commands.
The dataset search field cannot be a R-type item.
The Chain command always reads the chain values in sorted order by
ascending search-value. You do not need to specify a Sort command to have the
output file sorted by the search field.
Specifies what characters
to clean when using the $Clean function.
CLEAN [ SPECIAL |
<string> <range> ]
(Default: None)
Suprtool will "clean" or replace all of the characters
specified in the Clean command from a byte type field when invoked by the
$Clean function. To define what characters that need to be replaced you use the
clean command with the character you want to clean in quotes. Since most of the
characters that you will need to clean are unprintable, you can enter the
decimal equivalent of the character. This is denoted by entering the
"^" character in quotes preceding the decimal number of the character
you wish to clean.
An example of how easy
it would be to clean your database of certain "bad" characters in
byte-type fields would be as follows:
>base mydb,1,;
>get customer
>clean
"^9","^10","^0","^7"
>update
>ext address(1) =
$clean(address(1))
>ext address(2) =
$clean(address(2))
>xeq
The SPECIAL keyword automatically defines Clean characters of
Decimal 0 thru to Decimal 31.
>base mydb,1,;
>get customer
>clean special
>update
>ext address(1) =
$clean(address(1))
>ext address(2) =
$clean(address(2))
>xeq
You can also specify a range of characters with the following
syntax:
>base mydb,1,;
>get customer
>clean
special,"^128:^255"
>update
>ext address(1) =
$clean(address(1))
>ext address(2) =
$clean(address(2))
>xeq
The above task would clean all byte type fields of any characters
from Decimal 0 (Null) to Decimal 31 plus Decimal 128 to Decimal 255.
You can have the Clean
function clean the field, and instead of replacing with a space, the $clean
function will essentially shift characters to the left by Setting the CleanChar
in the following manner:
Suprtool will pad the field that was cleaned with the appropriate
amount of characters with a space at the end of the field.
Defines fields that can be
used in the Duplicate, Extract, If, Item, Sort, Table, and Total commands. With
Define, you can do selection on ordinary data files using the same kind of
readable "expression" that you use with databases. You can also
access data fields that are not actually structured as defined in the database
(e.g., implicit subfields within an IMAGE field).
DEFINE field, definition
field is an identifier up to 32 characters long, must begin with a
letter, and can consist of letters A through Z, digits 0 through 9, or the
following symbols:
+ - * / ? # % & @ _ '
In the case where the field name is written to a self-describing file,
only the first 16 characters are used.
definition can be in two different forms: absolute or relative.
Absolute
Definitions
DEFINE field, byteposition,sublen [,type] [,subcount]
(Default: type=BYTE, subcount=1)
The byteposition is a positive integer giving the byte index where the
field starts. The first byte is always number 1, not 0. The sublen is the number of bytes in the
field. When the subcount is 1
(default), the sublen is the total
number of bytes in the field. When you specify a subcount, the sublen is
the byte-length of each subfield.
See Data-Types below for the definition of type.
>input discfile {input
from a disc file}
>def qty,14,4,double {double
integer (PIC S9(9) COMP)}
>def name,5,6 {character
string of 6 bytes}
>sort name {sort
using the field "name"}
>total qty {total
all the values of the field "qty"}
>exit
Relative
Definitions
DEFINE field, fieldname [ (subscript) ] [ [offset] ]
[,sublen] [,type]
[,subcount]
(Default: sublen/type=same as fieldname)
The fieldname is an IMAGE field from the dataset specified in Chain,
Get, or Input=dataset, or a field
from a self-describing file, or another Defined field. Relative definitions are
similar to COBOL's Redefine verb.
The sublen
and type are optional. They
default to the total byte length and type of the fieldname. The (subscript)
parameter is an optional sub-item index for arrays such as IMAGE compound items
like 5J2 or 4X20. The first sub-item is number 1, and if no subscript is
provided, Suprtool uses the first sub-item. The [offset] parameter is optional and specifies a byte offset from the
position that would otherwise be used. This allows you to define fields
relative to other fields. The [offset] starts
at 1 and not at 0 (i.e., FIELD[1] is the first byte of the field).
To define a field that corresponds to the second street-address of
m-customer, you would use:
>get m-customer
>define city,street-address(2)
>if city="Vancouver"
>list
>xeq
Data-Types
Here are the valid types:
|
Type
|
Description
|
|
BYTE
|
printable ASCII characters
|
|
INT/INTEGER
|
two's complement
|
|
DOUBLE
|
two's complement
|
|
REAL
|
Classic floating-point
|
|
LONG
|
Classic floating-point
|
|
IEEE
|
IEEE floating-point
|
|
PACKED
|
packed-decimal
|
|
PACKED*
|
packed-decimal, last nibble unused
|
|
DISPLAY
|
zoned-decimal numeric field
|
|
LOGICAL
|
unsigned integer
|
|
CHARACTER
|
for Native Language Support
|
For compatibility with Sort.Pub.Sys, the Define command also accepts
Fpoint as the data-type for IEEE numbers.
The following table shows the Suprtool definitions for the IMAGE
data-types:
|
IMAGE Type
|
Number of Bytes
|
COBOL Declaration
|
SUPRTOOL Definition
|
|
I1
|
2
|
S9(4) COMP
|
>define a,1,2,integer
|
|
I2
|
4
|
S9(9) COMP
|
>define a,1,4,double
|
|
I4
|
8
|
S9(18) COMP
|
>define a,1,8,integer
|
|
J1
|
2
|
S9(4) COMP
|
>define a,1,2,integer
|
|
J2
|
4
|
S9(9) COMP
|
>define a,1,4,double
|
|
J4
|
8
|
S9(18) COMP
|
>define a,1,8,integer
|
|
Un
|
n
|
A(n)
|
>define a,1,n,byte
|
|
Xn
|
n
|
X(n)
|
>define a,1,n,byte
|
|
Zn
|
n
|
9(n)
|
>define a,1,n,display
|
|
Pn
|
n/2
|
S9(n-1) COMP-3
|
>define a,1,n/2,packed
|
|
K1
|
2
|
|
>define a,1,2,logical
|
|
K2
|
4
|
|
>define a,1,4,logical
|
|
R2
|
4
|
|
>define a,1,4,real
|
|
R4
|
8
|
|
>define a,1,8,long
|
|
E2
|
4
|
|
>define a,1,4,ieee
|
|
E4
|
8
|
|
>define a,1,8,ieee
|
Data-type Display may have a trailing overpunch sign.
Packed-Decimal
Fields
When defining
packed-decimal fields, you must convert the number of decimal digits into a
byte count. The last digit of a decimal field is always used for the sign. There are two data-types for decimal
fields: PACKED for those that end on a byte boundary and PACKED* for those that
end in the middle of a byte. Here are some example definitions of
packed-decimal fields:
|
Suprtool Definition
|
Description
|
|
>define m,1,2,packed
|
s9(3) COMP-3, P4 in IMAGE, 2 bytes, 4 nibbles, last is sign digit
|
|
>define n,1,2,packed*
|
s9(2) COMP-3, P4 in IMAGE, 2 bytes, 4 nibbles, last digit is
unused
|
|
>define p,1,6,packed
|
s9(11) COMP-3, P12 in IMAGE, 6 bytes, 3 words, 11 digits
|
Data-Type
Warning
The Define command accepts field definitions of any combination of
byte-length and data-type. However, many combinations have limited usefulness
in Suprtool. In these cases, Suprtool prints a warning. For example:
>def field,1,1,integer
Warning: Length of 1 is of
limited use for the data-type INTEGER
Examples
The following examples show the various data-types and combinations
that are available with the Define command:
>define a,11,4,double {J2
or I2, S9(9) COMP}
>define b,21,2,int {J1
or I1, S9(4) COMP}
>define c,3,4,real
{R2,
Classic floating-point}
>define d,5,8,long {R4,
Classic floating-point}
>define e,21,8 {character
string}
>define f,address(5) {fifth
occurrence of address}
>define g,address(5)[3],4 {relative
offset}
>define h,address(5)[4],2,byte {middle
of the address}
>define i,x[6],4 {starts
at sixth byte of X}
>define j,invoice,6,byte {redefine
field as Byte}
Absolute Example
The following example shows the most basic use of the Define command
to create a new field definition at an absolute location in the input record.
{"amt" is an integer that starts at the 11th byte of file}
>def amt,11,2,int
>if amt > 1000 {"amt"
is now a field we can select on}
>output outfile
Absolute Example
with Subcount
IMAGE and Suprtool allow fields to be repeated. In the next example,
we define an amount field that repeats twelve times (e.g., once for each month
of the year). We use a subscript when we want to refer to a specific month.
>def amt,11,2,int,12 {"amt"
is an integer that repeats 12 times}
>if amt(5) > 1000 {we
select on the 5th subfield}
>output outfile
Relative
Examples
Use the simplest form of relative definitions to rename existing
fields.
>def quantity,qty {"quantity"
is a more readable name}
>if quantity = "100 " {selection
on the new field}
The Define command copies the byteposition, sublength, and type to
the new field, but it does not copy the subcount. Define assumes that you want
the first subfield:
>def amount,amt {amt
is 12J2}
>if amount > 1000 {amount
is 1J2 and is the same as amt(1)}
Relative Example
with Subcount
Because Suprtool defaults the subcount to one, you might want to
specify an explicit subcount when giving a new name to an existing field.
>def amount,amt,,,12 {amt
is 12J2; same length and type}
>if amount(5) > 1000 {amount
is 12J2; we are selecting for May}
Relative Example
with Subscript
Use subscripts to define a new field that corresponds to a specific
subfield.
>def may,amt(5) {amt
is 12J2}
>if may > 1000 {may
is the fifth subfield}
Relative Example
with Offset
Many applications define subfields within a larger character field.
A common example is a part-number where the first four digits are the warehouse
location, the second four digits are the bin number, and the last four digits
are a serially assigned number. Use the offset parameter to define new fields
that are relative to the start of the part number. The file INVOICES is a
self-describing file.
>in invoices {part
is 12 bytes}
>def warehouse,part,4 {warehouse
starts at part}
>def bin,part[5],4 {bin
is second four bytes}
>def release,part[9],4 {release
is the last four bytes}
>if bin = "100" {use any
field for selection}
Note that redefining the digits of a larger numeric field only works
when the field is a character field (type X, U, or A).
Relative Example
Combining Subscripts and Offsets
If we have ten part numbers combined into one field (e.g., 10X12) we
can still define a single field that corresponds to the bin number of one of
the parts.
>in invoices {allparts
is 10X12}
>def bin3,allparts(3)[5],4 {we
are checking starting at the fifth byte …}
>if bin3 = "100" {…
of the third part}
Notes
The purpose of the Define command is to tell Suprtool to look at a
portion of the input record in a certain way. For example, if the record
contains ASCII digits in the first ten bytes, Define could be used to assign a
field definition to the first six bytes. In this case, the field must be
defined as data-type Byte, Char or Display.
|
The Extract command may be used for data conversion. See the Data
Conversion section of the Extract command for
details.
|
The Define command cannot be
used to convert data from one format to another. Using the same example, the
Define command could not be used to treat the first six digits of the ten
digit ASCII field as Integer, Packed, Real, or any other numeric data format.
If the input record contains ASCII digits, Define cannot change them to
another data-type.
|
It may be helpful to think of the Suprtool Define command as similar
to a COBOL REDEFINES clause, or a FORTRAN EQUIVALENCE statement.
Deletes all entries
selected from the input dataset.
DELETE
Delete has no parameters, and can be entered only after the source
of input records has been specified using Get or Chain. Delete causes Suprtool
to "delete" the input records after they have been read, either all
of the input records, or a subset defined by the If command. Delete is not
supported for KSAM and MPE files, only for IMAGE datasets.
Examples
>:comment Delete and sort old transactions, write to file.
>base store,1,writer {open
for write access}
>get d-sales {dataset
to delete from}
>if purch-date<980101 {select
which records to delete}
>delete {ask
for deletion}
>sort cust-account {sort
by account and sort}
>sort purch-date { by date}
>output oldsales {output
file with deleted and sorted records}
>exit
Losing Records
Delete can be combined
with other operations, such as select, sort, write to output file, and even a
Put to another dataset. Care must be used when combining operations, because
such combinations cannot be restarted if the Suprtool "run" is
aborted for any reason (including hitting Control-Y and answering
"yes"). See "Suprtool and IMAGE" on page 57 for more details on using
the Delete and Put commands in combination.
Suprtool deletes records during the input phase. This means that
records are deleted before they are sorted. All of the selected input records
are deleted before the first output record is written when sorting the input.
If you press Control-Y and answer "yes" before a delete task has
completed, there may be no way to recover your deleted records.
Improving
Performance of Delete with Deferred Output
Suprtool uses the standard
Image intrinsic DBDelete to remove entries from a dataset. This makes tasks
with a Delete operation slower than the standard MR/NOBUF extracts, but insures
structural integrity of the database and that any Third-Party Indexes are kept
in sync.
You can reduce the time needed to Delete dataset entries by enabling
deferred output for the database. If you open the database in mode-3
(exclusive) and Set Defer On, Suprtool calls DBCONTROL to defer posting of
IMAGE writes to disc. The database creator can enable deferred output
processing for all users of a database with DBUTIL (enable base for autodefer).
Deferred output can make deletes (and puts) faster, but if the
system crashes (i.e., you have a system failure or a nonrecoverable power
failure) while you are using deferred output, you must RESTORE your database
from tape. You do not have to restore the database if Suprtool stops because of
an error or if you abort Suprtool (i.e., break/abort or :abortjob) while deferred
output mode is being used.
Omnidex
If you are deleting from a
dataset with Omnidex keys, you must have MPE/iX third-party indexing (TPI)
enabled in your database, or you must run Suprtool with Omnidex's call conversion
facility. To run with call conversion you must run Suprtool with special
parameters.
For Omnidex version 3.0.00 and greater:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;xl="xl.pub.disc"
For Omnidex version 2.05.03 to 2.09:
:run suprtool.cc.disc;lib=g
Warning Message
When deleting records from
the input dataset, Suprtool asks for permission to delete all records if there
is no If command to select the records to be deleted:
Delete all records from the D-SALES dataset [no]:
Respond Yes for the task to continue.
In batch mode, Suprtool assumes Yes and keep processing.
Note that if there is no If command, but there is some other command
to limit the number of records deleted (e.g., the Numrecs command or a
record-range on the Get command), Suprtool still asks the question, implying
that all records in the dataset will be deleted. In these cases, only the
records that are read, based on the limiting factor, will be deleted.
For interactive approval of each deletion, see the #Delete command
of Dbedit.
Notes
For IMAGE manual master datasets, a DBDELETE call fails if the entry
to be deleted is a "chain-head" with related detail entries still
linked to it. When this happens, Suprtool, by default, prints an error and
stops processing the input data. If Set Dumponerror On, the record is printed
on $stdlist. If Set Ignore On has been entered, Suprtool continues processing
and prints a count of "chain-heads" at the end. Records that cannot
be deleted are not included in the output file.
The Do command repeats
(without changes) any of the previous 1000 commands.
DO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default: repeat the
previous command)
Commands are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered and the last
1000 of them are retained. Use the Listredo command to display the previous
commands. You can repeat a single command (do 5), a range
of commands (do
5/10) or the most recent command whose name matches a
string (do
list). If you want to modify the commands before
executing them, use Redo or Before.
Examples
>listredo {see
the previous 20 commands}
>do {do
previous command again}
>do 39 {do
command line 39 again}
>do 5/8 {do
command lines 5 to 8 again}
>do list {do
most recent List command}
>do show {do
last starting with "show"}
>do showjob job {do
last "showjob job" command}
>do @job {do
last containing "job"}
>do -2 {do
command before previous one}
>do -7/-5 {do
by relative line number}
>do 5/ {do
command lines 5 to "last"}
Notes
The Do command can be abbreviated to ,., as in MPEX
. You cannot use ";" to combine commands on the same line.
By default, Suprtool
copies all selected input records to the output file. The Duplicate command
determines what to do with duplicate output records. Duplicate records can be
discarded, producing an output file without duplicates. Alternatively, you may
be interested in seeing the duplicate records, so you can create an output file
consisting solely of the duplicate records. When deciding whether an output
record is a duplicate, Suprtool either compares the keys only or the entire
output record.
DUPLICATE NONE | ONLY
RECORD
| KEYS [num]
[
COUNT ] [ TOTAL ... ]
None
The None option removes
duplicate records from the output file. Suprtool compares each output record
with the previous output record. If they are not the same, the record is added
to the output file. This option corresponds to the former Nodup and Nodupkey
options of the Output command.
>key 1,4
>duplicate none keys
Input Output
1111 10 1111
10
2222 25 2222
25
2222 35 3333
48
3333 48
Only
The Only option is the
exact opposite of None. Only selects all output records that would not be
written by the None option. When the Only option finds a record that duplicates
a record already in the set, it writes that duplicate to the output file. Note
that the first record is not written to the output file. Here are two examples:
>key 1,4
>duplicate only keys
Input Output Input Output
1111 10 2222
35 1111 10
2222 35
2222 25 2222 25
2222 42
2222 35 2222 35
3333 48 2222 42
Record
Suprtool has two methods for comparing output records: Record and
Keys. The Record option compares the entire output record. This option can be
specified without a sort, but in that case the input file must already be
sorted. Note that there are two data fields in the records in the following
example, so that a comparison of the entire record yields no duplicates.
>duplicate none record
Input Output
1111 10 1111
10
2222 25 2222
25
2222 35 2222
35
3333 48 3333
48
Keys
The Keys option compares only the sort keys to determine whether an
output record is a duplicate. This option requires that at least one sort key
be specified.
>sort agent {sort
by agent}
>duplicate none keys
>output agents {create
roster of agents}
The Keys Num option determines the level at which Suprtool compares
sort keys. This option controls which duplicate records get included in (or
excluded from) the output file.
In the following example we sort by agent and by bill-date (in
descending order), but only check for duplicates at the agent level.
>sort agent {sort
by agent}
>sort bill-date,desc {sort
by date}
>duplicate none keys 1 {only
check for duplicate agents}
>output agents {create
roster of agents}
Count
The Count option causes
Suprtool to produce a new field in the output record with the number of
occurrences of each key value. The count field is called st-count, and is an
I2-type field. The Count option can only be used with Duplicate None Keys.
>key 1,4
>duplicate none keys count
Input Output
1111 10 1111
10 1
2222 25 2222
25 2 {two
records for key value 2222}
2222 35 3333
48 1
3333 48
Total
The Total option allows up to 15 fields to be
subtotaled for each duplicate key. Separate the fields with spaces, not commas.
The Total option can only be used with Duplicate None Keys. A new field is
created at the end of the output record for each total. Each field is called
st-total-n:
>sort customer-no
>extract customer-no
>duplicate none keys total sales-qty sales-amt
The above commands will create a self-describing file with the field
customer-no and the total by each customer of the sales-qty in the field
st-total-1. Similarly the field st-total-2 will contain the total sales-amt by
customer number.
The following data-types are chosen for each total based on the
data-type of the field:
|
Data-Type
|
Total Data-Type
|
|
Real
|
R4
|
|
IEEE
|
E4
|
|
all others
|
P28
|
Please see the P28 Fields section on how to define these fields in
Cobol and PowerHouse programs.
Note that for byte fields, there can be only digits in the field. If
there are other characters such as "+", "-", or
".", then Suprtool reports an error.
You can use the Link output option to easily see the fields that
Suprtool creates. For repeated fields (e.g., 6I2), the first subfield is
subtotaled if you don't provide a subscript. You can combine the Count and
Total options, but the Count option must appear before the Total option. You
cannot combine the Total command with the Total option of the Duplicate
command.
>key 1,4
>def field,5,2,integer
>duplicate none keys total field
Input Output
1111 10 1111
1 10
2222 25 2222
2 60 {25
+ 35 = 60}
2222 35 3333
4 48
3333 48
Deleting
Duplicate Records
There is no direct way to delete duplicate
records. Specifying both the Delete and Duplicate commands does not delete all
duplicate output records. This is because the Delete command occurs in the
input phase, as records are read and selected, but the Duplicate command occurs
in the output phase after the sort has taken place. The Duplicate command is
not part of the selection process; it is the If command that determines what
records are deleted. A common mistake is to specify the Duplicate and Delete
commands without an If command. In this case, Suprtool asks your permission to
delete all input records. Answer
"No" to this question to abort the task.
It may be possible to remove duplicates from an input dataset using
Suprtool, but only through roundabout methods. These are too case-specific to
document here. If you need to do this, call Robelle technical support for
assistance.
Self-Describing
Files
When you are using the
Count or Total options, the sort information is not retained in the output
file. This means that if your output file is in LINK format, there are no sort
keys. If you are going to use this file from Suprlink, use the BY-clause of the
LINK command to manually specify the sort keys.
Non-Self-Describing
Files
If the input file is not a
self-describing file and you are using Count or Total, you also need to extract
all the fields from the file. You can quickly extract the fields by defining a
new field that contains the entire record. For example, if your records are 56
bytes long, then you do the following to extract all the fields:
>define entire,1,56,byte
>extract entire
Output
Restrictions
When you are using the
Count and Total options, the only Output formats that you can use are Data,
Data-Num, Query, and Link. If you want to quickly see the Count or Total
results without using a second pass, use the List Standard command.
>get dataset
>sort key-field
>duplicate none keys count total data-field
>output result,link
>list standard
>xeq
P28 fields in
COBOL and PowerHouse
Some versions of COBOL do
not allow a field greater than 18 digits. To use the P28 field, you must define
the first five bytes of the field as filler. For example,
05 ST-TOTAL01.
10 FILLER PIC X(05).
10 TOTAL-1 PIC S9(17) COMP-3.
PowerHouse users should define this field as follows:
Define Total packed size 14
Notes
The option of Only or None must be specified before the option of
Record or Keys. Reversing the order causes a syntax error in the Duplicate
command.
You cannot combine the Total command with the Total option of the
Duplicate command.
It is important to note
that if the field being sorted is the result of a $function, then you may not
be sorting on the value of the field after the function has transformed the
field. For example the following task may not give you the result you expect:
>base store,5
>get d-sales
>def
cust-accountx,1,6,byte
>ext cust-accountx =
$edit(cust-accout,"zzzz99"
>sort cust-accountx {sorting
on transformed field before it has value from function}
>dup none keys
>output dsales
>exit
In this instance you will not be sorting on cust-accountx as
transformed by the $edit function, but rather the first six bytes of d-sales.
Therefore it is important to note when you are using extract to transform a
field, you will not be sorting on that transformed value.
Therefore the way to do the transformation would be to either divide
into two tasks or if you can logically sort on the field before the
transformation in order to achieve the result, so the task could be:
>base store,5
>get d-sales
>def
cust-accountx,1,6,byte
>ext cust-accountx =
$edit(cust-accout,"zzzz99"
>sort cust-account {Note
sorting on source field}
>dup none keys
>output dsales
>exit
or if two tasks are necessary:
>base store,5
>get d-sales
>def
cust-accountx,1,6,byte
>ext cust-accountx =
$edit(cust-accout,"zzzz99"
>output tempsales
>xeq
>in tempsales
>sort cust-acctx
>dup none keys
>output dsales
>exit
Edits an IMAGE/3000
database.
EDIT
The Edit command of Suprtool invokes an independent module of
Suprtool called Dbedit. This module permits the user to add, change, list, or delete
individual records or "chains" of records from an IMAGE database.
This module should be useful for debugging systems, doing data entry on simple
systems, and quickly prototyping systems. The Edit command uses the database
opened previously by the Base command. Where Suprtool is primarily a serial
tool, the Edit module is primarily a tool for chained or keyed access.
Examples
>:comment Edit the STORE database.
>base store,1,writer {open
for write access}
>edit
{switch
to Dbedit}
#list d-inventory {Dbedit
prompts with "#"}
#exit {returns
control to Suprtool}
> {Suprtool
prompts again}
Notes
An entire user manual has been provided to describe how to use the
Edit feature of Suprtool. See the Dbedit section in the manual for all the
details.
Exit Suprtool in one of
three ways: quit immediately, suspend entry of commands, or execute the current
task then quit.
EXIT [ ABORT | SUSPEND | XEQ ]
(Default: XEQ)
Users are often frustrated when they exit Suprtool after specifying
only part of a task because Suprtool starts processing the task. To exit
Suprtool without executing the current task, use the Abort or Suspend options.
Typing Exit with no parameters means Exit Xeq. Suprtool recognizes
special command names which specify both the Exit command and an exit option
(e.g., ES means Exit SUSPEND).
Exit Abort [EA]
Cancels the current
operation and terminates Suprtool. The Exit command without parameters always
attempts to perform the task currently specified, while Exit Abort cancels the
task and terminates immediately. Thus, Exit Abort is similar to Reset All;Exit
with these differences: should Suprtool be executed as a son process, Exit only
suspends Suprtool, while Exit Abort actually terminates Suprtool. If you use
Exit Abort to terminate Suprtool in a batch job, the MPE Job Control Word is
set to a fatal value which normally flushes the remainder of the batch job. In
batch, use Exit Suspend instead to quit immediately without setting the JCW to
fatal.
Examples
You began to specify a sort, stopped for coffee, and decided to
cancel the task on your return:
>base store
>get m-customer
>sort name-last; sort name-first
...
coffee break ...
>exit abort {cancel
the sort and terminate}
End Of Program
Exit Suspend
[ES]
When running Suprtool as a
son process (e.g., from Qedit), it would be nice to suspend Suprtool without
executing the current task. Exit SUSPEND does this. After returning to
Suprtool, all specifications for the current task are still in effect.
Examples
:run qedit.pub.robelle
/:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store.data
>get d-sales {select
input}
>sort purch-date {start
specifying options}
>exit suspend {return
to Qedit without doing Xeq}
SUPRTOOL.PUB.ROBELLE is still alive. Okay to HOLD ? Y
/...
/:activate suprtool
SUPRTOOL.PUB.ROBELLE
>if sales-total>100000 {continue
specifications}
>output bigtrans
>xeq {execute
the current task}
Exit Xeq [EX]
Signal the end of command
input and the start of an extract operation. After the Suprtool task completes,
Suprtool either terminates, or suspends and awakens a father process (i.e.,
:RUN from within Qedit). Exit Xeq is the default option (i.e., specifying Exit
starts execution of the current task).
Examples
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>exit {no
input was specified}
No action taken.
End Of Program
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input rep23.newprog
>out rep23.program
>xeq {copy
one file}
>input rep24.newprog
>out rep24.program
>exit {copy
and stop}
Notes on Exit Xeq
If you have entered
neither sort keys nor an input source, Exit terminates Suprtool without
performing any task. If you have defined an input source but without any sort
keys, Suprtool does a copy operation prior to stopping. If you have entered
only sort keys and have not defined an input source, Suprtool does a sort from
a file named Input to a file named Output; Suprtool assumes you have defined
Input and Output using :File commands.
Send commands to STExport.
EXPORT [ STExport-command ]
Switching into
STExport
If you enter Export
without parameters, Suprtool executes Stexport.Pub.Robelle. STExport then
prompts you for commands, just as it does when you run STExport from MPE. When
you exit STExport, you are returned to Suprtool.
>export {invoke
STExport}
STExport/Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1995-2001
$input sdfile
$columns fixed
{STExport
prompts for commands}
$output pcfile
$exit {do
task and return to Suprtool}
Passing Commands
to STExport
You can send commands directly to STExport by specifying the
STExport command as part of the Suprtool Export command. STExport executes the
command and returns to Suprtool.
>export input sdfile
>export columns fixed {send
"columns fixed" to STExport}
>export output pcfile
>export exit {exit
from STExport, not Suprtool}
Notes
You can use the Suprtool2
interface and the Export command to "call" STExport. See the Suprcall
User Manual for a complete example of how to use the interface to pass commands
to STExport.
Assembles output records
by stringing together fields extracted from input records. There can be up to
255 extracted fields, and the same field may be extracted more than once.
Constant values may be used instead of the value of the field from the Input
record.
EXTRACT field [(subscript)] [=value |=field2 ]
[,...]
EXTRACT field1 [(subscript1)] \ field2 [(subscript2)]
EXTRACT target-field [=expression]
(Default: subscript=entire field)
Field Parameter
Each extracted field must be an IMAGE field name, an
Allbase column, a field in an SD file, or a Defined field. If the field
requires an Item definition, then the Item command must precede the Extract
command. Extract specifies a rearrangement of the Input data fields to produce
the Output data record; there is no data conversion, unless "output xxx,
ascii" is specified.
The subscript parameter is valid only for compound items. The total
item is extracted if it is compound and no subscript
is specified.
>extract account {extract
the key value and}
>extract rating { one other field}
>output out1 {output
file has two fields}
Cumulative
Extracts
The Extract command is cumulative. If two Extracts are specified in
one run, all fields of the two Extract commands are used.
>extract status,balance,account,purchased
is equivalent to
>extract status,balance
>extract account,purchased
Extracting
Constants
The value part of the Extract command is used to place a constant in
each record of the output file. In this case, the field defines the type and length that the value occupies. The value portion
must match the type of the field.
String values will be extended with blanks to fill the entire field. If the
input data does not have a field of
the correct size and type, you can create one using the Define command.
>ext account {key
value}
>ext rating=0 {place
the value "0" in the "rating" field}
>output out2
The total number of bytes that you can extract for all constants is
5,100 bytes for MPE/iX and HP-UX, and 1,275 bytes for MPE/V.
When extracting
non-negative packed and display constants, Suprtool extracts them as unsigned
unless you use a leading plus sign. For the value zero, you can use a leading
plus or minus sign to get a positive or negative 0.
>def field,1,6,packed
>ext field = 1 {unsigned
1}
>ext field = +1 {signed
1}
>ext field = +0 {positive
0}
>ext field = 0 {unsigned
0}
>ext field = -0 {negative
0}
Decimal Places
If a field has implied
decimal places, Suprtool scales the input values according to the number of
decimal places. For example,
>item tax ,decimal,2 {two
implied decimal pts.}
>item total,decimal,2 {same}
>extract tax = 1.02 {specified
decimal pts.}
>extract total = 100 {value
stored as 10000}
>output out3
Blank Fill
If you want to create an output record that
consists of fifty blanks followed by the customer name, use:
>define filler,1,50
>ext filler=" "
>ext name
String Constants
You can specify a string
constant without referring to a field. For example, to leave a space between
fields, you must do the following:
>extract account," ",rating
>output *,ascii
Suprtool uses the length of the string to determine the size of the
field. The following example extracts the same fields as the previous example,
but each output record identifies the field:
>extract "Customer Account=",account," "
>extract "Credit Rating=",rating
>output *,ascii
The output would look like:
Customer Account=04598921 Credit Rating= 5000
Customer Account=44657844 Credit Rating= 20000
Customer Account=98753198 Credit Rating= 3000
The spaces after "Credit Rating=", before the rating
value, is due to the numeric field Rating being extracted with blanks for its
leading zeros. This is the result of the Ascii option of the Output command.
Repeated Fields
If the field is an IMAGE repeated field (e.g.,
10J1), the Extract command places the value in each of the repeated fields when you do not specify the subscript. If you specify a subscript, only that one repeated field
will have the new constant value.
In this example, Address is a repeated field (2X20). We wish to
extract the data as it exists in the input record rather than forcing it to a
constant value.
>ext account {extract
key value}
>ext address {take
both of the repeated fields}
In the next example, we assume that the Balance field is a repeated
field (12J2). We wish to make each of the 12 repeated fields in the output
record equal to 100:
>extract name
>extract balance=100
If we only wanted to extract the sixth field of BALANCE and set it
to 100 we would do the following:
>extract name
>extract balance(6)=100
Character
Constants
Use the ^-character to
specify any ASCII character. The number (the actual ASCII value), or letter (^A
means control A), must follow immediately after the ^-character. Suprtool
treats character constants as strings. When you extract the constant to a field
longer than one byte, Suprtool pads it with spaces.
>define field,1,1 {byte
field}
>ext field = ^0 {binary
zero}
>ext field = ^G {Control-G
(bell)}
>ext field = ^27 {escape}
>ext field = ^252 {Roman-8
box}
>ext field = ^186 {Euro
currency symbol €}
You can also extract the constant directly without referring to a
defined field. This always produces a one-byte constant with no blank padding.
>ext ^0 {binary
zero}
>ext ^13,^10 {Carriage
Return, Line Feed}
>ext ^M,^J {CR,
LF again}
>ext ^27,"&dB" {escape
sequence}
Extracting
Today's Date
To extract today's date,
use the following:
>item
field,date,ccyymmdd {identify
date format of field}
>extract field=$today {today's
date}
>extract field=$today(-1) {yesterday's
date}
>extract field=$today(+1) {tomorrow's
date}
Use the Item command to qualify the field as a date. Suprtool uses
the date format to determine the output format of the date. The $today function
accepts one optional argument which is the number of days before or after
today. The maximum number of days in either direction is 9999.
Oracle dates include both the date and the time. If you extract an
Oracle date using $today, the time is always 00:00 (i.e., midnight).
Extracting
Relative Dates
The Extract command
provides the same relative date features as the If command (see "Date Selection" on page 198 for a complete
description of the options of $date). You must first use the Item command to
identify the field name as a date. Suprtool uses the field type and length
along with the date format to determine the output format of the date. Note
that the three parts of $DATE are always specified in (year/month/day) order,
regardless of the date format of the field.
>item field,date,mmddyy
>extract field=$date(*/*/*) {today's
date}
>extract field=$date(*/*-1/01) {start
of last month}
>extract field=$date(*/*-1/last)
{end
of last month}
Oracle dates include both the date and the time. If you extract an
Oracle date using $date, the time is always 00:00 (i.e., midnight).
$Stddate
Similar to the If command,
the Extract command is also capable of utilizing the $stddate function. This
will allow for conversion of any of the supported Suprtool date formats to be
converted to a date in the ccyymmdd date format in a double integer container.
For example,
>get sales-detail
>def new-ship-date,1,4,double
>item ship-date,date,mmddyyyy
>ext order-no / sales-amount
>ext new-ship-date = $stddate(ship-date)
>out salesinfo,link
>xeq
Invalid Dates
Because the $stddate must
have a valid date in order to properly convert the date to the ccyymmdd format,
a value of 0 will be returned for any invalid dates. An invalid date is any
number of a particular date format whose date equivalent cannot be found on the
calendar.
This means that if you attempt to extract use the $stddate function
against a value that is not a valid date then the extracted value will be 0.
$Days
As with the $stddate
function, the $days function is also available to the Extract command. You can
convert any supported date to a Julian Day number in the following manner:
>in ordfile
>def ship-days,1,4,double
>def order-days,1,4,double
>def delay,1,4,double
>ext order-no
>ext ship-days=$days(ship-date)
>ext order-days=$days(order-date)
>ext delay=$days(ship-date)-$days(order-date)
>out neword,link
>xeq
IN=15, OUT=15.
CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=1.
Invalid Dates
If an invalid date is
encountered, the extracted value will be zero. Therefore in the example above,
if the order has not yet been shipped (ship-date does not contain a valid date)
the resulting delay value will be negative.
Add and Subtract
Dates
With the $days function,
you can generate a date that is n days
before or after any date. In the
following example, we show you how to get the previous day's date.
>input YOURFILE
>def origdate,1,8
>def yesterday,1,8
>item origdate,date,yyyymmdd
>item newdate,date,yyyymmdd
>ext origdate
>ext yesterday = $stddate($days(origdate) – 1) {or +7
for next week}
>out tmpfile,link
>xeq
Sample output:
ORIGDATE YESTERDAY
19990101 19981231
19991231 19991230
19990301 19990228
Date Limits
The $date function in
Suprtool can generate dates between the years 1583 and 2583. Some date formats
have limits based on their particular format, such as 2027 for a Calendar date
and 2259 for the aammdd aamm, mmddaa, ddmmaa dates.
Extracting a
Range of Fields
You can specify a range of
fields to extract using the following:
Extract Field1 \ Field4
Extract $first \ $last
Extract $All {means $first
\ $last}
This feature only works with IMAGE fields, input files
"equated" to an IMAGE dataset and for self-describing files. If you
specify a range, Suprtool extracts all 4 of the field names between field1 and
field4 inclusive. When specifying a range of a self-describing file that has
been equated to an IMAGE dataset, the IMAGE dataset definition takes
precedence.
>get d-sales {input
is from a dataset}
>ext product-no\sales-qty
>out dsales
>xeq
is exactly the same as:
>get d-sales {input
is from a dataset}
>ext product-no {first
field in the range}
>ext product-price
>ext purch-date
>ext sales-qty {last
field in the range}
>out dsales
>xeq
Extracting a
Range of Subscripted Fields
Suprtool accepts a subscript on either field in a range. You can
even use this feature to extract a range from a single field. For example, if
sales-amt is a 12J2 field:
>get d-sales {input
is from a dataset}
>ext sales-amt(4)\sales-amt(6)
>out dsales
>xeq
is equivalent to:
>get d-sales {input
is from a dataset}
>ext sales-amt(4) {first
subscripted field}
>ext sales-amt(5) {intermediate
subfield}
>ext sales-amt(6) {last
subscripted field}
>out dsales
>xeq
Alternate Syntax
for Extracting a Range
Suprtool accepts a slash "/" in place of the backslash
"\" to specify a range. Use the slash with care, because it is a
valid character in field names. For example,
>extract a/b
would produce the error message:
Error: Item "A/B"
not in the database...
To use a slash in an extract range, surround it with spaces:
>extract a / b
You can also use $first, $last or all in Extracting a range. The
intention is to make your scripts more easily maintained. If you had a script
that you wanted to put a sequence number at the beginning and then extract the
rest of the dataset you could specify the starting field and the ending field.
For example:
base orddb
get customers
def seq-no,1,4,double
ext seq-no=$counter
ext order-no / pst-code
out newfile,link
xeq
If you added any fields to the beginning or end of the dataset and
you used the specific fieldnames you would have to re-write the script.
However, you can use the $all feature in extract range:
base orddb
get customers
def seq-no,1,4,double
ext seq-no=$counter
ext $all
out newfile,link
xeq
You can also write the script using $first / $last as your
preference, but $first and $last are also useful if you need to add data into
the middle of the fields you extract:
base orddb
get customers
def seq-no,1,4,double
ext $first / zip
ext seq-no=$counter
ext tax-code / $last
out newfile,link
xeq
You can specify arithmetic
expressions for any numeric data-type in the Extract command. Arithmetic
expressions involve the operators +, -, *, / and mod. Extract arithmetic
expressions work exactly as If command arithmetic expressions. To extract an
expression, use this syntax,
EXTRACT target-field = expression
Target-Field
The target-field determines the byte-length, data-type, and
repeat-count for the expression. The expression is extracted during the output
phase and cannot be used by other Suprtool commands that accept fields (e.g.,
sort). To avoid confusion, it is best to define a new field name for the target-field instead of using an
existing field name.
Examples
>extract budget99 = actual98 + 1000
>extract total = cost * qty
>extract day = ccyymmdd-date mod 100
In the following example, the field total is used
twice. In the first case, it is used to tell Suprtool how to format the
arithmetic expression. In the second case, it is used in the sort command.
Warning: In this example, the output file is sorted by the value of total as it
appears in the input record. It is not be sorted by cost * qty.
>extract total = cost * qty
>sort total {sort
by input total}
Restrictions
You can only use one expression in each Extract command, and the expression
must be the last item. If you want to extract several expressions or more
fields after an expression, you need to use several Extract commands.
Incorrect
>extract name, i=sales + tips, c=cost + expense, dept
Correct
>extract name, i=sales + commission
>extract c=cost + expense
>extract dept
Constants vs.
Expressions
If you have an arithmetic
expression that starts with a constant, Suprtool assumes that you are
attempting to extract a single constant value and not an arithmetic expression.
To specify an arithmetic expression that starts with a constant, surround the
expression with parentheses. For example,
Incorrect
>extract c = 6000 - cost
Error: Missing comma or
invalid arithmetic expression
Correct
>extract c = (6000 - cost)
The accuracy of arithmetic computations is limited to approximately
sixteen digits. Suprtool may truncate four-word integers (quad), or large
packed-decimal numbers, or display numbers when they are converted to
floating-point. Suprtool does not produce any error or warning in this case.
Division by Zero
Suprtool reports an error
in the input record number if an arithmetic computation results in division by
zero. Use Set Ignore On to force Suprtool to ignore division by zero errors.
With Set Ignore On, the result of division by zero is zero.
The speed of a task decreases when you ask Suprtool to ignore many
division by zero errors. It is better to check for zero in the If expression
before using it in division.
>if qty <> 0 {to
avoid division by zero}
>extract average = total / qty
$Abs function
Suprtool supports an $abs
function, which returns the absolute value of a number. For example, if a field
called Credit contains the value -547.83, the $abs function returns 547.83.
This function will work on a field or even on an expression such as:
>def newcredit,1,4,double
>ext newcredit = $abs(credit / 100 * 1.07)
This function will also work in the If command:
>if $abs(credit / 100 * 1.07) > 500.00
$Truncate
function
Suprtool supports a
$truncate function which returns the number to the left of a decimal place. For
example if the field stddev contains the value 547.83, the $truncate function
will return 547. Note that there is no rounding.
This function will work on fields and expressions. For example,
>def newdev,1,4,double
>ext newdev = $truncate(stddev / 100 * 1.07)
This function will also work in the If command:
>if $truncate(stddev / 100 * 1.07) > 200
Suprtool has the ability
to keep a running subtotal for any numeric field based on a given sort key. The
target data must be a packed field with 28 digits, in order to avoid overflow
issues.
A sample use of the
$subtotal function could be:
>def mytotal,1,14,packed
>get orders
>sort order-number
>ext order-number
>ext part-number
>ext description
>ext sales-amount
>ext mytotal =
$subtotal(sales-amount,order-number)
>out sales,link
>xeq
This would result in a
file containing a running subtotal in the field mytotal for a given
order-number. You could then generate a simple report with the simple Suprtool
commands:
>in sales
>list standard
>xeq
The basic syntax for the
$subtotal function in the extract command is:
extract targetfield =
$subtotal(field,sort-field)
You must specify the
sort command before referencing the sort-field in the $subtotal function. You
can subtotal up to ten fields per pass and the $subtotal function is also
available in the if command, however, by nature it is of limited use.
Suprtool has the ability
to keep a running total for any numeric field. The target data must be a packed
field with 28 digits, in order to help avoid overflow issues. A sample use of
the total function could be:
>def mytotal,1,14,packed
>get orders
>ext mytotal =
$total(sales-amount)
>xeq
You can total up to ten
fields per pass and the $total function is also available in the if command,
however, is of limited use.
For years Suprtool has
had the ability to output a record number to an output file with the num option
of the output command:
>in mysdfile
>out myfile,num,data
The above could would
generate an output file called myfile, however, you would lose the SD
information and you can only put the number at the beginning or the end of the
data. Suprtool now has a counter function that allows you to place a $counter
at any spot as well as preserve the SD information.
>in mysdfile
>def mycount,1,4,double
>ext field1
>ext field2
>ext mycount=$counter
>out myfile,link
>xeq
The file myfile will be
self-describing and contain the fields field1, field2 and mycount. The field
mycount is defined as a double integer, since this is the only field type that
the $counter function can use. Each record will have a unique ascending number
starting with one.
You can combine byte-type
fields together and use the built-in string functions to create new fields out
of existing ones. This can reduce the number of tasks required to provide a
solution. String expressions may involve the + operator and $upper, $lower,
$trim, $ltrim or $rtrim. To extract a string expression, use this syntax:
EXTRACT target-field = expression
Target-Field
The target-field determines
the byte-length for the expression. The data-type must be Byte or Char. The
expression is extracted during the output phase and cannot be used by other
Suprtool commands that accept fields (e.g., Sort).
Examples
>extract id-no = warehouse-no + bin-no
>extract full-name = first-name + last-name
Constants vs.
Expressions
If you have an string
expression that starts with a string, Suprtool assumes that you are attempting
to extract a single string value and not an string expression. To specify a string
expression that starts with a constant, surround the expression with
parentheses. For example,
Incorrect
>extract name = " " + product-desc
Error: Missing comma or
invalid arithmetic expression
Correct
>extract name = (" " + product-desc)
Variable Length
Strings
String expressions use
variable-length strings. Suprtool keeps track of the length of every string,
and all operations are done using the actual string length. For fields, the
length of the string is the length of the field. If you do not want to retain
all the spaces in a field, use one of the built-in trimming functions.
String constants are created with the exact length of the constant.
For example, the string "abc" is three characters long and the string
"a" is one.
When assigning the string expression to the target field, Suprtool
pads the final string value with spaces to fill out the target field. String
expressions longer than the target field generate an error.
>in testfile
>def a,1,10,byte
>ext a="I'm too long for this container"
Error: String is too long for
the specified item
String
Truncation
Suprtool produces an error
if the string expression is longer than the target field. You cannot override
this error with Set Ignore On. To help avoid the error, you may want to trim
the expression of trailing spaces before assigning it to the target field. For
example,
>extract new-field = $trim(a + b + c)
Upshifting
Strings ($Upper)
Use the built-in function
$upper to upshift all the characters of a string expression into uppercase
characters. This function can be used to upshift a single field, a complicated
string expression, or any subpart of an expression. Both ASCII and Roman-8
characters are upshifted by $upper. For example,
>extract city-up = $upper(city)
>extract full-name = $upper(first + last)
Downshifting
Strings ($Lower)
If you want to downshift all
characters of a string expression to lowercase, use the built-in function
$lower. This function can be used to downshift a single field, a complicated
string expression, or any subpart of an expression. Both ASCII and Roman-8
characters are downshifted by $lower. For example,
>extract city-lower-case = $lower(city)
>extract city-state = $lower(city + state)
Trimming Spaces
Using $Trim, $LTrim, $RTrim
Use one of three built-in
string functions to remove leading or trailing spaces from a string expression.
The three functions are:
|
$Trim:
|
Remove leading and trailing spaces from the string expression.
|
|
$LTrim:
|
Remove leading spaces.
|
|
$RTrim:
|
Remove trailing spaces.
|
Suprtool can extract
portions of a byte field based on the occurrence of certain characters.
Consider the following
Data:
Armstrong/ Neil/ Patrick
Green/ Bob/ Miller
Edwards/ Janine/
Armstrong/Arthur/Derek
The $split function can
extract each token into separate fields. The syntax for the $split function is:
$split(Field,Start
Character,Occurrence,End Character,Occurrence)
The following task will
$split the data in the wholename into three separate fields. The below task
assumes that the file namefile is self-describing and has the field wholename
in it:
>in namefile
>define lastname,1,30
>define firstname,1,20
>define middlename,1,20
>extract lastname =
$split(wholename,first,"/")
>extract
firstname=$trim($split(wholename,"/","/"))
>extract
middlename=$trim($split(wholename,"/",2," ",2))
>out names,link
>xeq
The first extract
statement tells Suprtool extract the bytes from the field wholename, starting
at the beginning (first keyword), and stopping at the "/" character.
The second extract statement, tells Suprtool to extract the bytes between the
first occurrence of the "/" character to the next occurrence of the
"/" character, and then that string is trimmed of spaces as it is
nested within the $trim function.
The third and final
extract statement tells Suprtool to extract the bytes beginning with the second
occurrence of the "/" character to the second occurrence of the space
character.
If the target field is
not long enough to hold the data Suprtool will abort with an error. You can
easily prevent this from happening on blank fields by nesting the $split
statement within a $trim or $rtrim function.
The $split function also has a Last keyword, whereby you can split
the field from a given occurrence of a character to the end of the field. So in
the given example from above the extracting out of the middlename could be
coded as such:
>extract
middlename=$trim($split(wholename,"/",2,last))
The above means to extract out all the data from the second
occurrence of the "/", to the end of the field and trim all spaces.
Naturally as noted above we also have the First keyword, which indicates the
start of the field.
Unprintables
You can specify an
unprintable character for Suprtool to use as the character to $split on, using
the following syntax:
>extract
middlename=$split(wholename,^9,2,last)
which means that the split would start at the second occurrence
of Decimal Nine, or the Tab character.
Please note that for specifying unprintable characters you do not put in
quotes.
In this day and age of
migrations we were looking at issues that customers have run into when
importing data into new databases. What came from this investigation where ways
to Clean up your data in any given byte type field.
We have added two
methods to clean your data, you can use Suprtool to clean an individual byte
type field, or STExport to clean all of the byte-type fields for a given file
that you are exporting.
Sometimes un-printable
or extraneous characters get stored in files or databases that have no business
being there. This may be some tab characters in an address field or perhaps and
embedded carriage return or line-feed. Suprtool now supports the clean function
which will replace individual characters for a given byte field.
There are three things
that Suprtool needs to know in order to "clean" a field. Suprtool
needs to know which characters it needs to clean, what character it needs to
change the "bad" characters to, and also what field does it need to
clean.
You can specify special
characters Decimal 0 thru Decimal 31 via the command:
You can also specify a
range or characters by using the following syntax:
Clean
"^0:^31","^240:^255"
The Clean command is
used to tell Suprtool what characters it needs to look for in a given byte type
field. For example:
will tell Suprtool to
replace the tab character (Decimal 9), Line Feed (Decimal 10), and a period to
whatever the Clean character is set to. The CLean command takes both, decimal
notation and the character itself, however, it is probably most convenient to
use the Decimal notation for the characters that you wish to clean. The Decimal
notation is indicated by the "^" character.
By default, Suprtool
will replace any of the characters specified in the clean command with a space.
You can specify what character to use to replace any of the characters that
qualify with the following set command:
This will set the
character to replace any of the qualifying "to be cleaned" characters
to be a period.
You call the clean
function, the same way you normally use other functions available to if and
extract. For example:
ext
address1=$clean(address1)
shows how to clean the
field address1. You do not necessarily need to have the target field be the
same as the source field.
def new-address,1,30
ext
new-address=$clean(address1)
An example of how easy
it would be to clean your database of certain "bad" characters in
byte-type fields would be as follows:
>base mydb,1,;
>get customer
>clean
"^9","^10","^0","^7"
>set cleanchar "
"
>update
>ext address(1) =
$clean(address(1))
>ext address(2) =
$clean(address(2))
>ext address(3) =
$clean(address(3))
>xeq
The above task will look
at the three instances of address and replace the tab, linefeed, null and bell
characters with a space.
If you want to just
remove the characters all you need to do is set the CleanChar in the following
manner:
This means that the $clean function will remove the characters
specified in the clean command, but not replace with any character, which
effectively shifts the text to the left and pad the equivalent amount of spaces
at the end.
Suprtool has the ability
to load data into a table via the Table command, and extract that data out of
the table using the Extract command. The Extract command can utilize the
$lookup function to return data. The syntax for the $lookup function would look
as follows:
>extract target =
$lookup(table-name,key-field,data-field)
The Table name, key-field and data-field are all defined by the
Table command, which must be input before the Extract command. A classic
example: your boss comes to you with a list of new prices for certain parts and
asks you to update the Part-Master dataset.
Just load the new prices into a Table, index by the product number
(prodno), then Extract the price field from each record and replace it with a
$lookup on the table. Here is the code:
>table
newprices,prodno,file,bosslist,data(price)
>get part-master
>if
$lookup(newprices,prodno)
>update
>extract price =
$lookup(newprices,prodno,price)
>xeq
We do the If $lookup to select only the parts which have new prices,
then do Extract with $lookup to replace the existing price with a new one. The
Update command forces a database update on each selected record and must come
before the Extract command.
Now let's see how a Table can be used to add additional useful
information to a record. Let's say we build this table of Canadian provinces
(The file prov-file is assumed to be a
Link, or self-describing, file, created by a previous pass of Suprtool.)
>table
provtab,prov-code,file,provfile,data(prov-name)
At this point the key into the Table is the prov-code item and for
each entry in the Table there is one associated prov-name. To append prov-name
to each output record, we read the
customer dataset, extracting the customer name. We also Define prov-name as a
new field and extract it for the output record, but we fill it with a value
that is based on the prov-code for each customer entry:
>get customers
>ext cust-name
>def full-prov-name,1,30
>ext
full-prov-name=$lookup(provtab,cust-prov-code,prov-name)
>out somefile
>xeq
To update a dataset, you do the same commands, but you insert an
Update command prior to the Extract from a Table. Below is an example that
shows how to update an IMAGE record using data values from a Table.
Let's assume that we have new unit cost information for each
product:
>form newcosts
File: NEWCOSTS.NEIL.GREEN (SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
PRODNO Z8 1
UNIT-COST P8 9
Limit: 13 EOF: 13
Entry Length: 12 Blocking: 64
We load a table with the product number key value (prod-no)and the
new unit cost data value (unit-cost):
>table
prodcost-table,prodno,file,newcosts,data(unit-cost)
We can then select that unit-cost field from the prodcost-table
using the Extract command:
>extract unit-cost =
$lookup(prodcost-table,prodno,unit-cost)
Here is the entire task, keeping in mind that Update must be
specified before the Extract command.
>base store.suprtpis
Database password [;]?
>get d-inventory
>table
prodtable,prodno,file,newcosts,data(unit-cost)
>update
>if $lookup(prodtable,prodno)
>extract unit-cost =
$lookup(prodtable,prodno,unit-cost)
>xeq
If you did not specify the If $lookup, then records that did not
qualify under the $lookup function in the extract field, will result in zeroes
for any numeric field and spaces for any byte type fields.
You can convert numeric
fields from one data-type to another. Any nonbyte field type is considered to
be numeric. You can also lengthen or truncate character fields. The general
syntax for doing conversions is:
EXTRACT target-field = source-field
Target-Field
The target-field determines
the byte-length, data-type, and repeat-count for the expression. The expression
is extracted during the output phase and cannot be used by other Suprtool
commands that accept fields (e.g., Sort). To avoid confusion, it is best to
define a new field name for the target-field
instead of using an existing field name.
The following example shows defining a new target-field as a double integer. The Extract command target-field then takes the definition
from the Define command and extracts data from the source-field (display-field).
>in oldfile
>def salesqty,1,4,double
>ext order-no / order-date
>ext salesqty = display-field
Packed and
Display Fields
When the target of an extract conversion is a packed- or
display-type field, Suprtool always converts positive values to a neutral
packed- or display-value. To ensure that expressions with positive values have
a positive result, use the $signed function:
>extract packed-field = $signed(int-field)
>extract display-field = $signed(dbl-field / 10)
Truncation errors can occur when Suprtool converts from
nonfloating-point to floating-point. See the discussion under Numeric Truncation above.
Byte Fields
Use the Extract command to shorten or lengthen byte-type fields.
This feature is most useful when updating one field in an IMAGE/SQL dataset
with another field.
>get d-sales
>define
part-warehouse-no,part-no[5],4
>extract warehouse-no = part-warehouse-no
>update
>xeq
If the target-field is
longer than the source-field,
Suprtool fills the trailing space in the target-field
with spaces.
Byte to Numeric
Conversion
Suprtool cannot explicitly convert from a byte field to a numeric
field such as a double integer. The Extract command, however, does allow
conversion from a display field to a double integer (or any other numeric
field).
You can define a byte field to be a display field if all of the
characters in the field contain a number. For example if you have a
six-character byte field that looks like this:
012345
you can define it in the following manner:
>def display-field,1,6,display
This field can then be converted to any of the other numeric types
that Suprtool supports.
If the field is six characters and contains blanks, decimal,
currency or a sign symbol in the data then you can utilize the $number
function.
Suprtool now has the
ability to accept free-form "numbers" as display data types. This
means numbers in the form:
1234.45-
-12345
-123.2134
12343
$123.45
can now be accepted and
converted to any other numeric data type. Consider the following data:
Item-number New-Price
12345 +123.45
34563 + 27.5
21312 +
1.545
Suprtool can now read
and convert the data in New-Price using the number function. Let's say we want
New-Price to be a double integer and currently occupies eight bytes starting in
position six. Here is the task you would use to convert the New-Price
free-format number into a double integer.
>in mynums
>def item-number,1,5,byte
>def
new-price-ascii,6,8,display
>def new-price,1,4,double
>item
new-price-ascii,dec,2
>item new-price,dec,2
>ext item-number
>ext
new-price=$number(new-price-ascii)
>out somefile,link
>xeq
The $number function
take the free-format number and make it a valid display number. It will
determine the decimal, sign and add leading zeroes. It will round the number to
the defined number of decimal places.
In the case of 1.545
number, Suprtool will round the value to be 1.55, since the given number of decimal
places is two and the following value is five or greater. If you have a whole
number such as 54, with no decimal point the value becomes 54.00.
Suprtool will not accept
data that has:
More than one sign.
More than one decimal
place.
Spaces in between numbers.
Signs that are in between
numbers.
Characters that are not
over punch characters.
Fields that when edited do
not fit in the defined space for the display field.
You can control the
character that defines the currency, thousand and decimal symbol for other
currencies and formats using the following commands:
>set decimalsymbol
"."
>set thousandsymbol
","
>set currencysymbol
"$"
Suprtool in the above
case will strip the currency and thousand symbols and use the decimal symbol to
determine the number of decimal places. You can set these characters to any
values you want but the defaults for each are used in the above set commands.
The decimal and thousand symbols are only single characters. The currency
symbol allows for four characters.
Suprtool has several ways
to convert binary numbers (e.g., J4, I2, P8) into human-readable ASCII form.
You can use STExport or Suprtool's Output,Ascii or Output,Display commands.
If you want to convert only some of your numeric fields, you can use
Suprtool's numeric conversion to convert binary fields to display fields. For
example, here is a conversion of a J4 field to an Z18 field:
define mynumber
1,18,display
get dataset
extract some-fields...
extract mynumber =
binary-number
output filename
xeq
You can also use the
$Edit function to format and directly convert to byte format.
Suprtool can format
fields using edit-mask features similar to edit-mask features of Cobol.
Suprtool employs two distinct types of edit-masks: one for byte type fields and
the other for numeric fields.
The type of mask
utilized depends on the source type of the field. If the source field is
numeric, then the numeric edit-mask logic is applied, if the source field is
byte type, then the byte edit-mask logic and characters apply.
The target field must
always be a byte type field.
An edit-mask consists of
"placeholder" characters, such as "9" for a numeric column,
and "format" characters, such as "." for the decimal place.
Sometimes an edit-mask character acts as both a placeholder and a format
character, such as the "$" in floating dollar signs.
For Byte type fields
there are two placeholder characters. These are:
X ~ place the data in the matching column for
the X in the edit-mask
Z ~
place the data in the matching column unless the data is a zero; if the data is
a zero, then replace with a space
The format characters
are as follows:
B (space) / (slash) , (comma) . (period) +
(plus) - (minus) * (asterisk)
and a space. Please note
that you can denote a space using two methods, either by putting a
"B" in the mask or a space itself. For example, suppose you have data
that is in ccyymmdd format in an X8 field. Here is how you would use a
"xxxx/xx/xx" mask to format the data:
>in mydate
>form
File: MYDATE.TEST.NEIL
(SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
A X8
1 <CCYYMMDD>
Limit: 10000 EOF: 2
Entry Length: 8
>def formatdate,1,10
>ext
formatdate=$edit(a,"xxxx/xx/xx")
>list
>xeq
>IN MYDATE.NEIL.GREEN (0)
>;OUT $NULL (0)
FORMATDATE = 2003/09/24
>IN MYDATE.NEIL.GREEN (1)
>;OUT $NULL (1)
FORMATDATE = 2003/09/24
As you see in the
example above, the placeholder character is the "x" and the
"/" is the format character. You insert a space either by specifying
a "B" or by putting an actual space character in the edit-mask. An
example of inserting a space might be the formatting of Canadian postal codes
(e.g., V3R 7K1):
>in postal
>form
File: POSTAL.NEIL.GREEN
Entry: Offset
POSTAL-CODE X6 1
Limit: 10000 EOF: 2
Entry Length: 6
>def post1,1,7,byte
>def post2,1,7,byte
>ext
post1=$edit(postal-code,"xxx xxx")
>ext
post2=$edit(postal-code,"xxxbxxx")
>list
>xeq
>IN POSTAL.NEIL.GREEN (0)
>OUT $NULL (0)
POST1 = L2H 1L2 POST2
= L2H 1L2
>IN POSTAL.NEIL.GREEN (1)
>OUT $NULL (1)
POST1 = L2H 1L2 POST2
= L2H 1L2
The Z-placeholder
character works differently for byte-fields than for numeric fields. For byte
type fields, if the Z placeholder and the corresponding data is "0",
then the zero is suppressed, regardless of the position. This is primarily for
suppression of zeroes in byte type date fields:
ext
a=$edit(date-field,"xxxx/zx/zx")
The above edit mask
would then edit a byte type date of 20031005, to be:
An edit mask is limited
to 32 characters in total for both numeric and byte type fields. If data
overflows the edit-mask, by default Suprtool will fill that field with
asterisks. There is an option to have Suprtool stop when it encounters a
formatting overflow:
will force Suprtool to
stop if there is data left over after applying the edit-mask. With byte-type
fields, leading spaces do not cause overflow. Therefore if your data consists
of:
and your edit mask is:
It is not an overflow
since there are only spaces to the left of the "L". If the data was:
an overflow exception
would occur.
Our edit-masks for
numeric fields are patterned after those in COBOL. We provide four placeholder
characters, each with a slightly different effect:
"9" - insert a digit from 0 to 9
in this position
"$" - if you specify more than one
dollar sign, you get a floating dollar sign.
This means that there can be as
many numeric positions as there are dollar
signs, but if some positions are not needed because the value is small,
the $ floats to the right next to the
first digit and the preceding positions are blank.
"*" - if there are enough digits
in the value, the * position is replaced by a numeric digit; if not, an
asterisk is printed. Leading asterisks are often used for check writing, so
that no one can insert a different value.
"z" - insert a numeric digit at
this position; if the rest of the data to the left is a zero then a space will
be placed at this position. For example:
>ext
a=$edit(int-field,"$$,$$$.99-")
>ext
b=$edit(int-field,"99,999.99-")
>ext
c=$edit(int-field,"cr99999.99")
>ext
d=$edit(int-field,"-$9999.99")
>ext
e=$edit(int-field,"**,***.99+")
>ext
f=$edit(int-field,"zz,zzz.99+")
>list
>xeq
>IN FILE1SD.NEIL.GREEN
(0) >OUT $NULL (0)
A =
$11.11- B = 00,011.11-
C = CR00011.11 D
= -$0011.11
E = ****11.11- F
= 11.11-
>IN FILE1SD.NEIL.GREEN
(1) >OUT $NULL (1)
A =
$22.22- B = 00,022.22-
C = CR00022.22 D
= -$0022.22
E = ****22.22- F
= 22.22-
As shown in the example
above, there are also numerous format characters for numeric edits, including
four ways to specify the sign. You can specify a sign, with +, -, or the
typical accounting specification of "CR" and "DB". You will
note in the example above that the "cr" in the mask was up-shifted to
be "CR". This is because the entire mask is up-shifted as the mask is
being parsed.
You can specify more
than one sign in a numeric field edit, although Suprtool will give you a
warning that having two sign edit-mask characters does not really make sense.
Cobol gives a Questionable warning when compiling an edit-mask with two sign
characters. Suprtool, will apply the sign in both places.
Keep in mind that most
data has three states:
1) Postive
2) Negative
3) Neutral
Any neutral data will
not display the sign. If you specify a "+" sign in the edit-mask and
the data is negative, it will of course display a "-" sign.
For numeric-type edits,
Suprtool attempts to adjust the data according to the number of decimal places
in the edit-mask, when compared to the number of decimal places defined in the
field.
For example if the data
field has one decimal place, and the edit mask has two decimal places, then the
data is adjusted:
will result in the final
data being:
Similarly, if the data
has three decimal places and the edit-mask only has two, then the data will be
rounded appropriately with the same rules as outlined in the $number function.
You can specify more
than one decimal place in an edit-mask. However, Suprtool will print a warning
and it will utilize the right-most decimal place for data alignment. The
decimal place character is defined by a set command:
If you define another
character as the decimal symbol, Suprtool will use that character as the point
to align the decimals. If you define a decimal symbol that is not an allowed
edit-mask character with Set Decimalsymbol, Suprtool will assume that the field
has zero decimal places and adjust the data accordingly.
Suprtool edit-masks
support both fixed and floating dollar signs. Logic for floating dollar-signs
will be invoked if more than two dollar signs are defined in the edit-mask.
A floating-dollar edit
mask attempts to put the dollar sign at the left most position of the
significant data. For example if you have the following data and edit mask:
the data would end up
as:
Suprtool will not
however, put the dollar sign to the right of the decimal place. If you had the
same edit mask and the data was, .09, the data would end up being formatted as:
Similarily, the $edit
function will attempt to place the dollar sign correctly in most cases. For
example Suprtool will not format data in the form of:
Suprtool, does attempt
to fixup these cases and would format the data in the following manner:
If the number of digits
in the data is equal to the number of placeholder dollar signs, then the dollar sign is dropped and not added
to the edited field.
would result in:
If Set CurrencySymbol is
not equal to "$", then after the formatting has been applied,
whatever symbol(s) are defined within the set command, are used to replace the
"$" symbol in the data. For example, if you have the Currency symbol
set as "CDN".
>set currencysymbol
"CDN"
Suprtool will replace
the "$" after the edit-mask has been applied with CDN, provided there
is room to the left of the dollar-sign.It is recommended that if you are using
multiple characters for the dollar symbol that you leave enough characters to
the left of the symbol.
For example if the
CurrencySymbol is defined as CDN, then you should leave two spaces to the left
of a fixed dollar sign definition. If there is not enough room, to put in the
currency symbol, then the dollar symbol is blank.
An edit mask is limited
to 32 characters in total for both numeric and byte type fields. If data
overflows the edit-mask, by default Suprtool will fill that field with
asterisks. There is an option to have Suprtool stop when it encounters a
formatting overflow:
will force Suprtool to
stop if there is data left over to place when applying the edit-mask. With
numeric-type fields, leading zeroes do not cause overflow.
Restrictions
You can only use one expression in each Extract command, and the
expression must be the last item. If you want to extract several expressions or
more fields after an expression, you need to use several Extract commands.
Incorrect
>extract name, i=sales + tips, c=cost, dept
Correct
>extract name, i=sales + commission
>extract c=cost
>extract dept
Extracting Bits
The Extract command can be
used to define individual bits from one data item as separate fields.
>def order-shipped,1,2,int
>def order-paid ,1,2,int
>ext order-shipped=status-field.(0:1)
>ext order-paid=status-field.(1:1)
This makes it easier to check the status of certain bits within a
given field.
EBCDIC
Conversions
Use the $etoa or $atoe
functions to convert specific fields from EBCDIC to ASCII or vice versa. Each
of these functions accepts a single parameter that is a byte-type field:
Extract $ETOA(char-field)
Extract $ATOE(char-field)
There are several restrictions on the $etoa and $atoe functions:
·
They do not work with either
the ASCII or PRN output options.
·
You cannot extract an EBCDIC
constant. The following example would produce an error message:
>extract
$etoa(char-field) = 'abcdef'
·
You cannot extract a range of
fields using $etoa or $atoe.
Notes
The Extract command is valid only with
·
Output xxx,data
·
Output xxx,data,num
·
Output xxx,query
·
Output xxx,link
·
Output xxx,ascii
·
Output xxx,prn
The Extract occurs logically after the sort phase, if any, but prior
to the final Output, Put, or List. An If command can refer to fields of the
input record that are not included in the extracted output record. The sort
keys can be fields that are not among those extracted.
If the extracted record length is shorter than the input record
length, Suprtool attempts to speed up sorts by doing the extract before
sorting. Suprtool can only do the extract before sorting if the output option
is DATA (the default), QUERY, or LINK, and all of the sort keys are included in
the Extracted fields.
One advantage of not using
the Extract command is that the output file from Suprtool has exactly the same format as the input
dataset which created the file. You can then use the =setname option of the Input command to define all of the fields in
the output file. Even if you change your database structure, many of your job
streams that use Suprtool and the =setname
option will not have to be changed.
The Form command displays
information about the items and datasets in a database or the fields in a
self-describing file. The Form command is similar to the Form command of QUERY.
FORM [ SETS | ITEMS | PATHS | dataset | data-item | filename ]
(Default: depends)
The Form command displays the structure of a database, dataset,
table or self-describing file. The Form command is also available in Dbedit.
The Query All option is not supported.
When showing the form of an IMAGE dataset or a self-describing file,
Suprtool shows the byte offset of each field after the subcount, type, and
sublength. The first field always appears at offset one. If you have specified
a date format or the number of implied decimal places with the Item command,
these attributes appear as part of the form listing.
Example
>base store,5
>item last-ship-date, date
, yymmdd
>item unit-cost ,
decimal, 2
>form d-inventory
D-INVENTORY Detail Set# 4
Entry: Offset
BIN-NO J1 1
LAST-SHIP-DATE J2
3
<<YYMMDD>>
ON-HAND-QTY J2 7
PRODUCT-NO Z8 11
(M-PRODUCT)
SUPPLIER-NO Z8
19 (!M-SUPPLIER)
UNIT-COST P8 27 << .2 >>
Capacity: 330 (22), 330, 66, 550
Entries: 13 Highwater: 13 Bytes: 30
Database Name
For IMAGE databases,
Suprtool attempts to show the fully qualified database name. It cannot do this
with a remote database, or if the database was opened in mode-3, or if Set
Privmode was Off when the Base command was specified. If the database has
MPE/iX third-party indexing, the third-party product name and version number
are also shown.
>ba store
>fo
Database: STORE.DEMO.APPDEV
TPI: SUPERDEX (15015d) 4.0.39
Set Item
Capa- Entry Load Entry
Sets: Num Type Count
city Count Factor
Length B/F
M-CUSTOMER 1
M 9
211 20 9
% 55 7
M-PRODUCT 2
M 3 307
13 4 %
24 12
M-SUPPLIER 3
M 6 211
3 1 %
49 8
D-INVENTORY 4 DDX
6 550 13
2 % 15
22
D-SALES 5
D 8 602
0 0 %
19 14
Suprtool shows the type of each dataset (e.g., "M" for
Manual master, "A" for Automatic master, "D" for Detail).
If you have enabled dynamic dataset expansion, Suprtool adds "DX" to
the type of the dataset (e.g., "MDX", "DDX").
Detail Datasets
If you request information
about a specific detail dataset, Suprtool prints the path information in
DBSCHEMA format. The path shows the related master dataset and the sort
item-name. When displying the form of an IMAGE/SQL dataset, Suprtool shows the
capacity in a format similar to the one in DBSCHEMA.
>form d-inventory
D-INVENTORY Detail Set# 4
Entry: Offset
BIN-NO J1 1
LAST-SHIP-DATE J2
3
<<YYMMDD>>
ON-HAND-QTY J2 7
PRODUCT-NO Z8 11
(M-PRODUCT)
SUPPLIER-NO Z8
19 (!M-SUPPLIER)
UNIT-COST P8 27 << .2 >>
Capacity: 330 (22), 330, 66, 550
Entries: 13 Highwater: 13 Bytes: 30
The current capacity (e.g., 330) is shown first followed by the
blocking factor in parentheses (e.g., 22). If dynamic dataset expansion (a
feature of MPE/iX 5.0) has been enabled, the initial capacity (e.g., 330), the
increment (e.g., 66), and the maximum capacity (e.g., 550) are shown next. On
MPE/iX 5.0 or later, the highwater mark is shown. The record length in bytes
appears last.
Master Datasets
The Form Sets command
indicates which datasets have MDX enabled. A Form command on these datasets
shows details of their expansion setting.
>form sets
Database: STORE.MDX.DATA
Set Item
Entry Load
Entry
Sets: Num Type Count Capacity Count Factor Length B/F
M-CUSTOMER 1
MDX 9 2009
401 20 % 55
7
M-PRODUCT 2
MDX 3 3012
0 0 %
24 12
M-SUPPLIER 3
MDX 6 2008
0 0 %
49 8
D-INVENTORY 4
D 6 462
0 0 %
15 22
D-SALES 5
D 8 6006
0 0 %
19 14
>form m-customer
Database: STORE.MDX.DATA
M-CUSTOMER Master Set 1
Entry: Offset
CITY X12 1
CREDIT-RATING J2
13
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
17 <<Search Field>>
CUST-STATUS X2
25
NAME-FIRST X10 27
NAME-LAST X16 37
STATE-CODE X2 53
STREET-ADDRESS 2X25
55
POSTAL-CODE X6
105
Capacity: 469 (7), 217, 252, 2009
Entries: 401 Bytes: 110
As you can see, the master dataset summary information for the
Capacity shows the Current Capacity (469), the Blocking Factor (7), the Initial
Capacity (217), the Increment (252) and finally the Maximum Capacity (2009).
The Increment is the number of entries by which the master dataset increases from
the current capacity.
SQL Database
If an Allbase database is
open and no input file has been specified, the default Form command shows all
of the tables in the database. If a Select command has been specified, the
default Form command shows the columns in the Select command. The exact format
of the Form command is different for each SQL database.
Self-Describing
Files
The Link output option produces an SD file with information about
how the file was sorted, what fields are compound, and the date format or the
number of implied decimal places for any fields. The Form command shows all of
this information:
>form custfile
File: custfile
(SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CHAR-FIELD X5
1 <<Sort #1 >>
REPEATED-I1 3I1
6 {compound
field}
DATE-FIELD J2
12 <<YYYYMMDD>>
COST-FIELD J2
16 << .2 >>
Limit: 10000 EOF: 15 Entry Length: 20 Blocking: 64
Third-Party
Indexing
If the database is enabled
for MPE/iX third-party indexing, the Form command shows any third-party index
that corresponds to an IMAGE field. When doing a Form dataset, each field is checked to see if it is a byte-type or
Z-type third-party index. If it is, the comment "<<TPI>>"
is shown. Indexes that have a name other than an Image-item name are shown at
the end of the form listing. The Form command only shows those indexes that can
be referenced by the Chain command.
For example,
>form m-customer
M-CUSTOMER Master
Set# 1
Entry: Offset
CITY X12 1
<<TPI>>
CREDIT-RATING J2
13
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
17 <<Search Field>>
<<TPI>>
CUST-STATUS X2
25
NAME-FIRST X10 27
<<TPI>>
NAME-LAST X16 37
<<TPI>>
STATE-CODE X2 53
<<TPI>>
STREET-ADDRESS 2X25 55
<<TPI>>
POSTAL-CODE X6
105
Capacity: 211 (7) Entries: 20
Bytes: 110
Additional Third-Party
Indexes:
SI-LAST-NAME X16
B
The length shown for keys in the Additional Third-Party Indexes may
vary between versions of Superdex. This is a known situation and does not
affect the operation of Suprtool on these paths.
The length of a key is
returned by dbinfo-833 and Suprtool will report in the form command the length
of a stand-alone key. (SI-PRODUCT-NO is the path that is now supported)
Superdex has a variable that impacts the length that is returned for a given
key, and that is SICOGNOS. Suprtool will account for the length difference on
the chain command but will show the unadjusted length. Normally Superdexs
dbinfo-833 would show a length of 12 for a Zoned-decimal tpi-key with a length
of 8, if SICOGNOS is set to 1, then Superdex will return 8.
B-tree Support
The Form command has been
enhanced to show whether there are B-trees that the Suprtool Chain command can
utilize. Form Sets shows a type of "i" for datasets that have B-tree
indexes. Currently the Chain command utilizes only those B-trees that are type
X or U. The Form command does not show B-trees that it cannot utilize, even if
the B-tree does exist.
The Form command also reports a damaged B-tree.
>form sets
Database: CD.DB.DATA
BtreeMode1 = ON Wildcard character : @
Set Item Entry Load
Entry
Sets: Num Type Count Capacity Count
Factor Length B/F
M-ARTIST 1
M i 2
211 3 1
% 75 4
A-SONGS 2
A i 1
307 41 13 %
20 16
A-CD-TITLE 3
A i 1
211 3 1
% 20 16
D-SONGS 4
D 6 1004
41 4 %
78 4
>form m-artist
Database: CD.DB.DATA
BtreeMode1 = ON Wildcard character : @
M-ARTIST Master
Indexed Set 1
Entry: Offset
ARTIST X30 1
<<Search Field>>
NOTES 2X60 31
Capacity: 211 (4) Entries: 3
Bytes: 150
>form d-songs
Database: CD.DB.DATA
BtreeMode1 = ON Wildcard character : @
D-SONGS Detail Set 4
Entry: Offset
CD-NO J2 1
CD-TITLE X40 5
(!A-CD-TITLE) <<Indexed>>
SUB-TITLE X40 45
ARTIST X30 85
(M-ARTIST) <<Indexed>>
SONG-NO J1 115
SONG-TITLE X40
117 (A-SONGS)
<<Indexed>>
Capacity: 1004 (4) Entries: 41
Highwater: 41 Bytes: 156
Formout File
The Form command writes
all output to the file Formout. This file defaults to $stdlist. You can
redirect this file to a line printer or a disc drive. If you redirect the
Formout file to a disc file, Suprtool assumes a temporary file by default.
>:file formout;dev=lp
>form sets {writes
to line printer}
>:file formout;dev=disc
>form d-inventory {writes
to temporary disc file}
Default Form
If a Chain, Get, or Input
command of a self-describing file has been entered, a Form command without
parameters shows the fields in the current input source. If a Base command has
been specified, but no input source, a Form command without parameters does a
Form Sets.
Form Keywords
The Form command shows
items, paths, and sets before it searches for a dataset or file with these
names. Use a string (e.g., "sets") to display the form of a dataset
or file that matches one of the Form keywords.
>form "paths" {paths
is the name of a dataset}
Selects an IMAGE dataset
from a previously opened Base as the input source for the next extract. You
must have read access to all fields in the dataset entry. Only one Chain, Get,
or Input command is allowed per extract task. Get always reads the dataset
serially.
GET setname [(startrecord/[endrecord]) | (#count)]
(Default: all records)
Dataset Input
The first example shows the most common use of the Get command. An
input dataset is specified as input to Suprtool. We select a subset of the
entire input dataset using the If command:
>base store,5,READER {open
for read access only}
>get d-inventory {serially
read dataset}
>if unit-cost<10000 {the
UNIT-COST field is}
>output out1 { automatically defined by Get}
>xeq
Selection by
Record Number
The (startrecord/endrecord)
parameter permits selection of input records on the basis of the IMAGE record
numbers. These numbers always start with 1, and the endrecord parameter is assumed to be the last record in the dataset
if it isn't specified.
Note that you should use extreme care when you are using the record
number selection option on master datasets. This is because the record numbers
of master dataset entries can be changed as entries are added or deleted from
the dataset. For example, if there are deleted entries in the master dataset,
then you could get fewer records than expected.
|
Numrecs is another way to select only a few records.
|
When debugging software, it is convenient to scan the first few
records of a dataset. Specifying a startrecord/endrecord parameter makes this easy:
|
>get m-product(1/20) {first
twenty records}
>list {produce
a formatted list of each …}
>xeq
{…
record with no output file}
This example gets any records that are in the first twenty IMAGE
locations. This may be fewer than twenty records, if there were deleted or
unused entries in the first twenty record numbers.
Random Selection
The #count parameter selects every "nth" record from the
dataset, where "n" is equal to count.
This option is designed to allow "random" selection from the dataset.
It cannot be combined with the (startrecord/endrecord)
option.
Test databases can be constructed from random samplings of
production databases. Using the #count parameter
and the Put command we build a test dataset:
>base store,5,READER {open
for read access only}
>get d-inventory(#15) {every
15th record is read}
>put d-inventory,test {put
to the d-inventory dataset in …}
>exit {…
Test database}
Using DBGET
By default, Suprtool
always attempts to read the dataset using its own high-speed routines. These
are the cases where DBGET is used instead:
1.
When the database is open with
mode-3.
2.
When you specify the Delete or
Update command and the input source is a master dataset.
3.
When you specify the Delete or
Update command and the input source is a detail dataset, but no If command is
specified.
4.
When Set Privmode Off.
In these cases, Suprtool prints the warning:
Using DBGET for the input records
How Many Records
Does Suprtool Read?
When you Get from a master
dataset, Suprtool reads the capacity of the dataset. When you specify a detail
dataset, Suprtool reads records until the highwater mark.
If Set Eofread is on then, Suprtool will read to the capacity of the
dataset for both master and detail datasets.
To insure that Suprtool reads to the capacity for both Master and
Detail datasets, then you should put Set Eofread On in your Suprmgr.Pub.Sys
file.
If there is a big difference between the number of entries in the
dataset and the highwater mark, Suprtool could take much longer to read the
dataset (this is true for all programs, not just Suprtool).
You can use the Form and Verify commands to determine how many
records Suprtool will read. The Form command shows the number of entries in the
dataset. After specifying a Get command for a detail dataset, use Verify
Numrecs to see how many records Suprtool will read:
>get d-sales {detail
dataset}
>form {shows
#entries}
>verify numrecs {#records
Suprtool will read}
If there is a large difference between the number of entries and the
highwater mark, you may wish to repack the detail dataset. If the dataset is
dynamic with many entries being added and deleted, it is better to let Suprtool
take longer (otherwise you would be continuously repacking the dataset).
For regular monitoring of
all your datasets, use HowMessy which shows both the number of entries and the
highwater mark for detail datasets.
FLIMIT Different
The Get command may print
an error "FLIMIT different than calculated" or a warning "FLIMIT
greater than calculated". Suprtool verifies that the physical MPE file
that corresponds to the dataset matches the information returned by DBINFO.
Suprtool computes the number of records in the MPE file as follows:
#records = (capacity - 1) / blockfactor + 1
where capacity and blockfactor are reported by the Form command.
When this error occurs, Suprtool prints the MPE file name, MPE FLIMIT, dataset
name, dataset number, and the computed FLIMIT:
>get m-test
Error: Dataset with FLIMIT different than calculated!
MPE Filename: TEST01.STORESC.DB
Actual MPE Flimit: 1
IMAGE Dataset: M-TEST (#1)
Calculated Flimit: 2
This error is usually caused by restoring a earlier version of the
dataset from a backup tape.
Remote Databases
When trying to access a
database on a remote computer, the Get command may fail with the error
"Privileged File Violation (FSERR 45)". See the discussion under the
Base command for workarounds to this problem.
Show what commands and
options are available in Suprtool.
HELP [ command | keyword [ ,option ] ]
(Default: browse through
the entire help file)
Command Help
If you specify any parameters, Help first assumes that you want help
on a Suprtool command. If you know the structure of the help file, you can
additionally specify one of the keywords under the command name.
>help ext {help
on the Extract command}
>help ext,notes {Notes
section of the Extract command}
Keyword Help
If Suprtool cannot find any help in the "Commands" section
of the help file, it assumes that you specified one of the outer-level keywords
in the help file. To see this list of keywords, type help with no parameters.
You see a short introduction to Suprtool and then a list of keywords. You can
specify any of these keywords on the Help command. You can also specify a
subkeyword.
>help start {Quick
Start section}
>help start,task {Task
section of Quick Start}
Quick Help - HQ
HQ asks Suprtool to look
under the keyword Quick in the help file. Quick contains the text from the
Suprtool Quick Reference Guide, offering the experienced user a quick review of
the syntax of any command.
>hq input {quick
description of Input}
>hq commands {quick
list of command names}
Notes
If no parameters are
specified, Help allows you to browse through the "help" file. The
Help Command uses the QHELP subsystem to allow you to look at the material in
the file Suprtool.Help.Robelle (which contains most of the user manual). For
"help in help", type "?" when you see the QHELP prompt
character ("?"). The help file is organized into levels. To go back
to the previous level, press Return instead of a key name. If you press F8, you
will exit the QHELP subsystem and return to Suprtool.
Specifies a subset of
records to select from the input source during the next extract task. The If
command supports full logical expressions, with comparisons between all
data-types, between data fields and constant values, or between one data field
and another. The If command also provides partial string compares, bit field
extracts, subscripted IMAGE fields, AND-OR-NOT operators, and parentheses to
override precedence. You can use arithmetic expressions involving any numeric
data-types.
IF expression
Note: The examples below
show multiple If commands. These are for illustrative purposes only. Suprtool
does not permit multiple If commands in a single task. Instead you can combine
multiple conditions using AND and OR.
Alternatives to
the If command
There are a few selection
criteria that the If command cannot perform. In these cases, you need to use
other Suprtool commands. If you wish to select by record numbers, use the
record number options in the Get or Input commands. If you wish to limit the
number of records selected, use the Numrecs command. See also "Chain Command [C]" on page 133 for an alternative to the
Get/If combination of commands.
There Is No Else
Clause
The If command in Suprtool
does not have an Else clause but the output command does. To select the records
that do not match the If criteria, you can use output,else to get both the
selected data and the data that was not selected by an if criteria. See the
output command for details.
>get dataset {this
task is the "If … then"}
>if expression
>output file1,else,link
{file1
and temp file else created}
>xeq
You can also use a second task with the same criteria negated by a
NOT.
>get dataset {this
task is the "If … then"}
>if expression
>output file1,link
>xeq
>get dataset {this
task is the "else"}
>if not (expression)
>output file2,link
>xeq
An expression specifies the logical criteria that Suprtool uses to
select records from the input source.
Simple
Expressions
The simplest expression is
a single comparison between two
fields (e.g., A=B) or a field and a constant (e.g., A="XX"):
field relation field
field relation constant
Fields
A field can be a temporary, Defined field, or a field from a
self-describing file, or an IMAGE field (with possible subscripts; see below).
Each field has a type (see "Key Command [K]" on page 216 for further details). The
constant must match the type of the field. If the field has a byte-type, you must surround the constant with quotes.
>if name="TAMMY ROSCOE" {name
is byte}
>if rating>10000 {rating
is integer}
>if balance=arrears {compare
two fields}
Constants
A constant is a value that
matches the data-type of field.
Constants are either a string constant in quotes, a numeric constant, or a date
constant specified with $date or $today. See the next section about Constants for more details.
|
Constant
|
Type
|
|
"NATHAN ARMSTRONG"
|
string constant
|
|
12345
|
numeric constant
|
|
$date(00/07/09)
|
date constant July 9, 2000
|
Relations
A relation is one of the
size comparison symbols (Suprtool does not use words like "EQUALS" as
in QUERY):
|
Relational operator
|
Means
|
|
=
|
equal to
|
|
>
|
greater than
|
|
<
|
less than
|
|
>=
|
greater than or equal to
|
|
<=
|
less than or equal to
|
|
<>
|
not equal to
|
Complex
Expressions
Complex expressions can be
made by combining the AND, OR, and NOT operators, arithmetic operators (+, -,
*, / and mod), and parentheses. The order of precedence of operators, from
highest to lowest, is
|
Operator
|
Precedence
|
|
( ... )
|
Highest.
|
|
NOT
|
Take the opposite.
|
|
AND
|
Both must be true.
|
|
OR
|
One or the other must be true.
|
|
-
|
Unary minus.
|
|
* /
|
Higher than addition and subtraction.
|
|
+ -
|
Lowest.
|
Use parentheses where necessary to change the order of evaluation.
>if status="1" and amount>100 or
purchased="000115"
>if (status="1" or status="2") and
amount>100
Multiple Values
You can check a data field
for several test values without using the AND and OR operators. After the
equals or not-equals sign, list the alternate values separated by commas.
The OR operator is = (equal sign). Instead of "IF A=5 OR A=6 OR
A=7", use "IF A=5,6,7". This selects a record if A is equal to
5, 6, or 7.
The AND operator is <>. Instead of "IF A<>5 AND
A<>6 AND A<>7", use "IF A<>5,6,7". This
selects a record if A is anything but 5, 6, or 7.
>if field = 5,6,7
>if part =
"12345","67890","39201","92308","14892"
>if delivered <> 981231,990101
This method works well if
you are searching for a small number of values. Use the $lookup function to
check a data field for many test values.
IF $LOOKUP(tablename, fieldname)
The $lookup function returns TRUE, if the specified field name
contains a value from the specified table. You can also look for values that
are not in a table.
IF NOT $LOOKUP(tablename,fieldname)
See the Table command for a complete description of how to combine
tables and the $lookup function.
|
$lookup parameter
|
function
|
|
tablename
|
The name of a table specified in the Table command.
|
|
fieldname
|
A field from the input record. This field cannot be real-type. It
must be exactly the same length as the item used in the Table command.
|
Multiple Values
and Table Data
Suprtools can use the “data” loaded into a Table in a
comparison operation. The $lookup function will return the data value from the
table to compare against another field or literal.
In file1sd
Table mytable,char-field,data,tabfile,data(id-field)
If $lookup(mytable,char-field,id-field) = int-field
So what Suprtool will do
in this case is read a record, lookup the record in the table and retrieve the
data item in the table. If Suprtool does NOT find an entry in the table, a zero
will be returned if the data type is numeric and spaces will be returned if it
is a byte type.
So using the case above,
if no entry is found in the table, zero is returned, and if int-field is equal
to zero, then the record will qualify.
If you don’t want to have any values returned from the table lookup,
you just preface the if with a standard lookup.
>get ord-details
>table cust-table,
cust-no, file, custlist,data(state-code)
>if
$lookup(cust-table,cust-no) and &
$lookup(cust-table,
cust-no, state-code) = state-code
>output orders
>xeq
When using $lookup to return data, the $lookup must always be on
then left side of the expression. If not Suprtool will stop with an error:
>if id-field=$lookup(mytable,char-field,id-field)
Error: $lookup in this
context (data comparison) must be on left side
Performance of
$Lookup
|
Short-circuit evaluation means that the If command does not always
need to evaluate all the parts of the command.
|
Due to the nature of the
$lookup function, it can be, at times CPU intensive, however, since the If
command uses short-circuit evaluation, $lookup should be specified as the
last part of the If command. For example,
|
>if status = "10" and $lookup(cust-table,account)
is faster than
>if $lookup(cust-table,account) and status = "10"
because Suprtool can evaluate status = "10" faster than $lookup. When
the status is not "10" Suprtool knows the record will not be
selected, therefore there is no need to do the $lookup.
$Null(fieldname)
The If $null(fieldname) command selects any rows that
have null values in them. This feature is available only for SQL databases and
only on columns that allow null values:
If you want to find only those values that are not null, you can add
the NOT keyword in front of $null:
>if not $null(SALESTOTAL)
This section describes
numeric and string constants. See also Date
Selection.
Numeric
Constants
Numeric constants are not
enclosed in quotes. Numeric constants may be just simple whole numbers (e.g.,
5, 0, -56, 10004) or they may have a decimal point (e.g., 5., 0.0, -.56, 99.9,
1.4). Real and IEEE numbers may also have a scale factor (e.g., 5E-5, 0.01E+4).
"Over-punches" for the sign are not required, or recognized, in
Suprtool. Always enter -11 as -11, not 1J for a DISPLAY field.
String Constants
String constants are
delimited with double- or single-quote marks. That is, either "VANC"
or 'VANC'. Any characters within quotes are not upshifted. If the constant is
shorter than the field to which it is being compared, the constant is padded
with blanks. String constants are expected for fields of type BYTE, U, or X,
but numeric constants are expected for fields of type Z (zoned decimal).
>if field = " " {check
for all blanks}
>if field = "XX" {double-quotes
are okay}
>if field = 'XX' {so
are single-quotes}
If you want to compare for a quote itself, you include two quotes in
the string for each quote you want.
>if field = "AB""CD" {look
for AB"CD}
Use the ^-character to
specify any ASCII character. The number (the actual ASCII value), or letter (^A
means control A), must follow immediately after the ^-character. Suprtool
treats character constants as strings. When you compare the constant to a field
longer than one byte, Suprtool pads the constant with spaces.
>define field,1,1 {byte
field}
>if field = ^0 {binary
zero}
>if field = ^G {Control-G
(bell)}
>if field = ^27 {escape}
>if field = ^252 {Roman-8
box}
To look for "null
values" or "low values" in byte-fields, it is usually sufficient
to check the first byte for a binary zero:
>define first-byte,bigfield,1,byte
>if first-byte = ^0
Use subscripts to access individual items in repeated fields, or to
access substrings.
Numeric
Subscripts
For repeated numeric fields only one index is
allowed.
If Table has the form 10J2, it holds ten double integers.
·
Table(1) is the first sub-item.
·
Table is the same as Table(1).
·
Table(5) is the fifth sub-item.
>if table(5) = 23
>if table(2) = 20 or table(4) = 30
>if table(8) = 31 and table(9) = 28
Character
Subscripts
Character string fields
may have 1, 2, or 3 subscripts after them. Character string fields are allowed
more than one subscript value.
If ADDR has the form 5X30, it consists of 5 substrings of 30 characters
each.
·
ADDR(1) is the first
30-character sub-item of ADDR.
·
ADDR without subscript is the
same as ADDR(1).
·
ADDR(2) is the second
30-character sub-item of ADDR.
·
ADDR(2,4) is the second
sub-item, starting with the 4th byte and extending for the remainder of the
sub-item, 27 bytes.
·
ADDR(2,4,6) starts at the same
location, but extends for only 6 bytes.
If NAME has the form X50, it is not a repeated field.
·
NAME is the same as NAME(1).
·
NAME(1,4,6) is the first (and
only) sub-item, starting at the 4th byte and extending for 6 bytes.
·
NAME(1,10) is a field that
starts at the 10th byte and implicitly extends to the end of the field (for the
remaining 41 bytes).
>if name(1,4,6) = "HAWAII"
>if addr(3) = "VANCOUVER, B.C."
>if addr(3,11,20) == "@B.C.@" {pattern
matching}
Bit Selections
The If command can extract
and test any series of one or more contiguous bits in a field. Suprtool allows
bit extracts only on Integer or Logical fields of two bytes in length (one
16-bit word). To do a bit extract from another type of field, first use Define
to redefine the data as a two-byte Logical field.
Once Suprtool extracts a bit string,
it always treats it as an Unsigned Integer, a Logical, and never interprets it
as negative. The format for bit extracts calls for a starting bit number and a
bit count. The 16 bits in a computer word are numbered from the left, 0 to 15.
The two bytes to extract from need not be on a "word boundary" (i.e.,
they can start in any byte position). See "Define Command [D]" on page 137 for how to define a
two-byte logical field.
field . (startbit : bitcount)
>define bitfield,name,2,logical
>if bitfield.(4:2)=3
How to Check a Byte
for a Numeric Value
Because Suprtool does not
have one-byte integers, it can be difficult to check a single byte for a
specific numeric value. Use a two-byte integer Define field and the bit-extract
operator to solve this problem:
>define word,transcode,2,integer
>if word.(0:8)=13
See "Character Constants" on page 191 for an alternate method.
Decimal Places
Use the Item command to
specify the number of implied decimal places in an item. If you do not do this,
you must scale all numbers in the If command. For example, let's assume that
you want to find all inventory records with a cost equal to $80.59. If you do
not use the Item command, your If command would look like this:
>if cost = 8059 {no
decimal places}
By telling Suprtool about the number of decimal places in the cost
item, your If command looks more natural (which usually means you will make
fewer mistakes):
>item cost,decimal,2
>if cost = 80.59 {decimal
places included}
Numeric
Conversion
The If command can compare two numeric fields
to each other (not just one field to a constant). All relation operators are
supported: <, <=, =, <>, >, and >=. However, you cannot
compare a byte-field to a numeric-type field.
Suprtool usually converts the field on the left side of a relational
operator to floating-point. Then the floating-point number is converted into
the type of the field on the right side of a relational operator and the
comparison is done. The exceptions to this rule are integer-to-double,
packed-to-packed, and display-to-display comparisons, which use a direct comparison
algorithm.
Truncation errors can occur when Suprtool converts from one field
type to floating-point. See also Accuracy
and Numeric Truncation.
Arithmetic
Expressions
You can specify arithmetic
expressions for any numeric data-type in the If command. Arithmetic expressions
involve the operators +, -, *, / and mod. The Mod operator returns the
remainder between a dividend and a divisor. Arithmetic expressions cannot start
with a numeric constant (e.g., if 2 + a = 10 is invalid). Arithmetic is not
allowed on byte-type fields. If you have a byte-type field that consists
entirely of numeric digits, redefine the field as display type and use the
redefined field name in the If command.
Examples
>if field + 10 = 1115 {numeric
field}
>if cost * qty > 10000
>if total < qty * price + tax
>if yymmdd-date / 100 mod 100 <= 03 {first
quarter}
Division by Zero
Suprtool reports an error
and the input record number if an arithmetic computation results in division by
zero. Use Set Ignore On to force Suprtool to ignore division by zero errors.
With Set Ignore On, the result of division by zero is zero.
Your task executes more slowly if you have a lot of division by zero
errors and you have asked Suprtool to ignore them. A better approach is to
check for zero in the If expression before using it in division:
>if $read
- qty <> 0 and {avoid
division by zero!}
- total / qty > 100
- //
Missing Features
Arithmetic overflow in computations will cause Suprtool to abort.
By default, Suprtool uses floating-point
arithmetic to compute. In some cases, there can be slight inaccuracies due to
rounding errors. Rounding errors are more likely with Classic floating-point
arithmetic (Set Arith Classic). For example, the following expression fails if
you have a single integer field with the value 7 or -7:
>set arith classic
>if integer-field / 10 *
10 = 7
This expression does not fail when using IEEE floating-point (Set
Arith IEEE). If you are developing Suprtool applications for both Classic MPE
and MPE/iX, we suggest that you enable Set Arith Classic in Suprtool/iX to
ensure exactly the same results in both applications.
The accuracy of arithmetic
computations is limited to approximately sixteen digits. Suprtool may truncate
four-word integers (quad) or large packed-decimal or display numbers when they
are converted to floating-point. Suprtool does not produce any error or warning
in this case.
$Abs function
Suprtool supports an $abs
function, which returns the absolute value of a number. For example, if a field
called Credit contains the value -547.83, the $abs function returns 547.83.
This function will work on a field or even on an expression such as:
>if $abs(credit / 100 * 1.07) > 500.00
This function will also work in the Extract command:
>def newcredit,1,4,double
>ext newcredit = $abs(credit / 100 * 1.07)
$Truncate
function
Suprtool supports a
$truncate function which returns the number to the left of a decimal place. For
example if the field stddev contains the value 547.83, the $truncate function
will return 547. Note that there is no rounding.
This function will work fields and expressions:
>if $truncate(stddev / 100 * 1.07) > 200
This function will also work in the Extract command:
>def newdev,1,4,double
>ext newdev = $truncate(stddev / 100 * 1.07)
You can do comparisons
with byte-type fields in numerous ways using Suprtool. These powerful features
minimize the number of tasks you must execute in order to select the data you
need. The fewer the number of tasks, the faster your data is delivered to the
users and applications that need it.
You can combine byte-type fields together and use the built-in
string functions to create string expressions. String expressions involve the +
operator and the other string functions such as $lower, $upper, $trim, $ltrim
and $rtrim.
Fixed vs.
Variable Length Strings
String comparisons are
done using fixed- and variable-length strings. For most users, there should be
no difference between the two types of strings. When doing string comparisons,
Suprtool always pads shorter strings with spaces, with the one exception of
comparing two fixed-length fields (see "Byte Fields" below).
String expressions involving the + operator or the $upper, $lower,
$trim, $ltrim and $rtrim built-in functions are done using variable-length
strings. Suprtool keeps track of the length of every string, and all operations
are done using the actual string length. For fields, the length of the string
is the length of the field. If you do not want to retain all of the spaces in a
field, use one of the built-in trimming functions.
When creating string expressions, string constants are created with
the exact length of the constant. For example, the string constant
"abc" is three characters long and the string "a" is one.
Byte Fields
For historical reasons,
comparing two byte-type fields to each other is a special case. If the two
fields are exactly the same length, Suprtool compares them completely. If one
field is shorter, the comparison is done for the length of the shortest field.
Suprtool does not check for spaces in the trailing characters of the longer
field. For example,
>define short, 1,10 {ten
character field}
>define long ,11,15 {fifteen
character field}
>if short = long
In this example, Suprtool compares the ten bytes in the short field
with the first ten bytes of the long field, but ignores the last five bytes of
the long field. If the expression on either side of the equal sign consisted of
more than one field (using the + operator) or involved any of the string
functions, ($upper, $lower, $trim, $ltrim or $rtrim), Suprtool would have
compared both sides of the equal sign by padding the shorter field with spaces.
It is only the case where you are directly comparing one byte-type field to
another that Suprtool uses the length of the shortest field for the comparison.
You cannot compare a byte-field to a numeric-type field. If you have
a byte-field that consists entirely of numeric digits, redefine the field as a
display-type and use the redefined field name in the If command.
Character Type
Byte-type fields can also
be checked to see whether they contain only Alpha, Numeric, Alphanumeric, or
Special characters. The complete field is compared against the specified
character types.
|
Type
|
Characters
|
|
Alpha
|
A-Z, a-z (52 characters)
|
|
Numeric
|
0-9 (10 characters)
|
|
Special
|
anything else (194 characters, including spaces, punctuation,
Roman-8 letters, binary junk)
|
|
Alphanumeric
|
A-Z, a-z, 0-9 (62 characters)
|
For the test result to be true, all
the characters in the field must be of the specified character type. To
test a substring, use the Define command to define a subfield.
>if field = alpha
>if field <> numeric
Examples:
|
String
|
Class
|
|
"1234"
|
numeric
|
|
"12.3"
|
no class, contains both numeric and special
|
|
"ABCD"
|
alpha
|
|
"B JONES"
|
no class, contains both alpha and special
|
|
" "
|
special
|
|
"A1B2"
|
alphanumeric
|
Pattern Matching
Suprtool can also select
records based on a pattern of characters, rather than an exact string of
characters. For example, use the following to select all records with
"CONNOR" anywhere in the Name field,
The double equals (==) is the operator for pattern matching. The at
signs (@) means anything before or after "CONNOR" is acceptable,
including nothing.
For character fields, there are two comparison operators for
patterns: "==" (matches), and "><" (does not match).
The pattern is specified as a quoted string, using the same special characters
as in the MPE :Listf command. Embedded spaces are allowed in the pattern and
must be matched in the target field.
These are the special characters:
|
Character
|
Meaning
|
|
@
|
Zero, or more, characters of any type.
|
|
#
|
A single numeric character.
|
|
?
|
A single alphabetic or numeric character.
|
|
~
|
Zero, or more, blank characters.
|
|
&
|
Escape character to match the next character explicitly (&@
looks for the @ character).
|
|
^
|
Reserved for future use.
|
|
!
|
Reserved for future use.
|
Any other character must be matched, one for one.
>if name=="@ZANDER@" {does
name contain ZANDER anywhere?}
>if name=='@ZANDER@ARMSTRONG@’ {does
name contain ZANDER, perhaps …}
{…
other characters, then ARMSTRONG?}
>if name><"@#@" {does
name not contain numerics?}
>if name=='@qedit@','@suprtool@' {qedit
or suprtool?}
For more information, see Special
Characters in the Glossary.
Finding Special
Characters
With the $Clean function
you can clean "bad" characters inside of text fields, however the $Clean function does
not report back what records were "cleaned". For this reason we have the $FindClean
function. $FindClean will return true if
it finds a character defined using the Clean command. This makes it extremely
easy to find a set of Special characters that you can define.
>in cleansd
>clean
"^9","^10"
>if $findclean(nonprint)
>list
The above task will list
the record if the field nonprint has a Tab (Decimal 9) or a Line Feed (Decimal
10) anywhere in the field. You can Find and clean the "bad"
characters from a field at the same time:
>in cleansd
>clean "^9:^10"
>if $findclean(nonprint)
>extract
nonprint=$clean(nonprint)
>list
Trimming Spaces
($Trim, $Ltrim, $Rtrim)
Use one of three built-in
string functions to remove leading or trailing spaces from a string expression.
The three functions are:
|
$Trim:
|
Remove leading and trailing spaces from the string expression.
|
|
$LTrim:
|
Remove leading spaces.
|
|
|
$RTrim:
|
Remove trailing spaces.
|
|
Because Suprtool pads shorter strings with spaces when doing
comparisons, trimming spaces is most useful when creating a combined string
with several fields. For example, you might want to combine a person's first
and last name (including a space between the two):
>if $trim(first) + " " + $trim(last) = "Joe
Smith"
Mixed Case
($Upper and $Lower)
By default, Suprtool does
an exact match when comparing two string expressions. If the expressions vary
in the capitalization of characters, Suprtool finds them to be different. To do
caseless string comparisons or pattern matches, use the $upper or $lower functions.
Both ASCII and Roman-8 characters are shifted by $upper and $lower. For
example,
>if $upper(city) = "VANCOUVER"
>if $lower(city) = "edmonton"
Note that if you use the $upper or $lower functions, Suprtool does
not upshift or downshift any constants used in the comparison. You must
explicitly specify the constants in the correct case or you can use $upper or
$lower with the constant:
>if $upper(city) = $upper("vancouver")
Use the $upper or $lower functions for caseless pattern matching. As
with other comparison operators, you must specify constants in the correct case
when doing pattern matching:
>if $upper(city) == "VAN@"
>if $lower(city) == "ed@"
You can use $upper and $lower with string expressions that combine
many fields and string functions as shown in the following example:
>if $read
- $upper($trim(first) +
- "
" +
- $trim(last))
- = "JOE SMITH"
- //
The If command has four
functions to help select records based on dates: $date, $today, $days and
$stddate. The $date function works for any date. The $today function works for
the current date and dates relative to today. The $stddate and $days functions work
for almost any date. To use these date functions, you must first identify the
date format of an item by using the Item command.
The $date function makes
it easier to specify a target date for certain date formats (e.g., PHdate or ASK).
To select records based on a specific date, use this feature:
>if field=$date(year/month/day)
Suprtool checks the date's validity. To select the transactions for
January 1999, you would do the following:
>item trans-date,date,phdate
>if trans-date >= $date(1999/01/01) and &
trans-date <=
$date(1999/01/31)
Relative Dates
You can specify a relative
date using the $date function. Then you can create job streams that don't rely
on hard-coded dates. The general syntax of the $date function is:
$date(year/month/day)
The year can be a specific
number (e.g., 2000) or an asterisk "*" for the current year. To
specify a relative year, you add or subtract years from the one you specified:
>if field=$date(2000/01/01)
{January
1, 2000}
>if field=$date(2000-1/01/01) {January
1, 1999}
>if field=$date(*-1/01/01) {January
1, last year}
The month can be a
specific number (e.g., 6 for June) or an asterisk "*" for the current
month. To specify a relative month, you add or subtract months from the one you
specified:
>if field=$date(2000/06-1/01) {May 1,
2000}
>if field=$date(*/*/01) {start
of current year and month}
>if field=$date(*/*-1/01) {start
of last month}
>if field=$date(*/*-18/*) {exactly
eighteen months ago}
The day can be a specific
number (e.g., 15), an asterisk "*" for the current day, the word
"first" for the first day of the month, or the word "last"
for the last day of the month. You cannot add or subtract relative days; use
$today instead.
>if field=$date(2001/01/first) {January
1, 2001}
>if field=$date(*/*/*) {today's
date}
>if field=$date(*/*-1/last) {last
day of previous month}
Combining these features makes it possible to generate batch jobs
that require no operator input. For example, to select all of the transactions
for last month you would use:
>item trans-date,date,phdate
>if trans-date >= $date(*/*-1/first) and &
trans-date <=
$date(*/*-1/last)
Month End
Suprtool is always expecting a valid date. Suppose that you have a
month-end job that contains the following If command:
>if field = $date(*/*-1/*)
When you run the job on May 31, 2000, if Suprtool were to use the
literal interpretation of $date(*/*-1/*), it would use the date April 31, 2000.
In fact, there is no such date; April has only 30 days. Whenever you specify *
for the day, and the day is greater than the last day of the month you
specified, Suprtool uses the actual last day of the month instead of the
current day of the month. In our example, Suprtool would use April 30, 2000.
Suprtool will take leap years into account when calculating the last day of
February.
Today's Date
To select records based on
today's date, use the following:
>if field=$today {today's
date}
>if field=$today(-1) {yesterday's
date}
>if field=$today(+1) {tomorrow's
date}
Use the Item command to qualify the field as a date. The $today
function accepts one optional argument which is the number of days before or
after today. The maximum number of days in either direction is 9999.
yymmdd and
Beyond 1999
Because dates spanning the turn of the century will not collate
properly for the yymmdd form, you need to use $stddate to compare these dates.
>item ship-date,date,yymmdd
>if ship-date < $date(2000/12/31) {will
not work}
>if $stddate(ship-date) < $date(2000/12/31) {will work}
Finding Invalid
Dates
Use the $invalid function
to find invalid dates. An invalid date is a number in a date format whose date
equivalent cannot be found on a calendar. For example, a month value of 99
would be considered invalid.
>base store.demo
Database password [;]?
>get d-sales
>item deliv-date,date,ccyymmdd
>if $invalid(deliv-date)
>out baddates,link
>xeq
$Stddate
Function
The $stddate function
converts any date format in nearly any data-type container and internally
converts it to the ccyymmdd format in a double integer container.
This allows you to compare dates with dissimilar formats and
data-types. For example,
>in orddets
>item order-date,date,ccyymmdd
>item bill-date,date,mmddyyyy
>if $stddate(bill-date) <= order-date
>output badords,link
>xeq
This feature is also available for dates that have two-digit years.
The century portion of the date will be generated by $stddate, which uses the
normal cutoff rules specified by Set Date Cutoff.
>in invdets
>set date cutoff 20
>item invoice-date,date,yymmdd
>item close-date,date,mmddyyyy
>if $stddate(close-date) <= $stddate(invoice-date)
>out badinvs,link
>xeq
In this case all invoice-date values with a yy portion between 20 and 99 will have a 19 for the century. All
invoice date values with a yy portion
of less than 20 will have 20 for the date generated by the $stddate function.
Invalid Dates
A date must be valid before $stddate can convert it to the ccyymmdd
format. Otherwise, a value of 0 will be returned for any invalid dates. An
invalid date is a number in a date format whose date equivalent cannot be found
on a calendar. This includes dates selected by the $invalid function. We can
eliminate the invalid dates from the above task by changinn Jue If command
slightly.
>get invoice-detail
>set date cutoff 20
>item invoice-date,date,yymmdd
>item close-date,date,mmddyyyy
>if (not $invalid(close-date) &
or not $invalid(invoice-date)) &
and $stddate(close-date) <=
$stddate(invoice-date)
>out badinvs,link
>xeq
In this example, if either the close-date or the invoice-date are
invalid, then they will not be evaluated by the $stddate function and will not
be selected. Although your requirements may be different, you need to remember
that invalid dates evaluated by the $stddate function will return a 0 value.
$Days Function
Suprtool supports a $days
function, which converts any supported date to a Julian Day number (the number
of days since 4713 BC). This allows for Date arithmetic, in which you can
calculate the difference between two dates, even if they have dissimilar
formats.
For example you could find all orders that were not shipped within
30 days of being ordered.
>form ordfile
File: ORDFILE.SALES.MFG (SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
ORDER-DATE X8
1 <<CCYYMMDD>>
SHIP-DATE X8
9 <<MMDDYYYY>>
ORDER-NUMBER X6
17
Limit: 10000 EOF: 15
Entry Length: 22 Blocking: 16
>in ordfile
>if $days(SHIP-DATE) - $days(ORDER-DATE) >=30
>list
>xeq
Invalid Dates
As with the $stddate function, if a date is not a valid date, then
the result of the $days function will be zero. In the example above, if the order
has not yet been shipped, then the SHIP-DATE will likely be blank, or zero, or
some other special value. $Days(SHIP-DATE) will be zero, and the resulting
calculation will be a negative number.
Notes on
Relative Dates
The $date and $today
functions always generate a constant from the date, just as if you had typed
it. For example, when run on February 13, 2001, the follwing task:
>item field,date,yymmdd
>if field > $today
is the same as:
Suprtool normally does no date conversion of the actual dates. Dates
that do not start with the year do not collate correctly, so Suprtool does not
allow relative comparisons with them (<, <=, >, and >=), although
you may still compare for strict equality or inequality. The following examples
will be rejected by Suprtool:
>item trans-date,date,ddmmyy
>if trans-date >= $date(*/*-1/first) and &
trans-date <=
$date(*/*-1/last)
Error: Invalid date format
for the comparison
>input myfile
>define mydate,1,6
>item mydate,date,ddmmyy {e.g.,
301100}
>define ....
>if mydate > $date(00/11/01)
Error: Invalid date format
for the comparison
>if mydate > $date(01/11/00)
Error: Invalid date:
Year = 1 Month = 11 Day = 00
Although you cannot do relative date comparisons against
non-collating dates in their normal format, you can convert the date into
ccyymmdd format using the $stddate function. This date format will collate and,
therefore, you can do relative date comparisons using the $stddate function.
>item trans-date,date,ddmmyyyy
>if $stddate(trans-date) >= $date(*/*-1/first) and &
$stddate(trans-date) <=
$date(*/*-1/last)
If the date format does not allow the specification of a certain
day, such as yymm, ccyymm, yyyymm, aamm, ccyy and mmyyyy, then you do not need
to specify the entire date format, although Suprtool will allow either format
for $date.
>item trans-month,date,yymm
>item purch-date,date,yymm
>if trans-month <= $date(*/*/*) and &
purch-date >=
$date(00/01)
Because dates beyond 1999 in the yymmdd and yymm date types do not
collate correctly, relative comparisons are no longer valid. Suprtool produces
an error in the following case:
>item trans-date,date,yymmdd
>if trans-date >= $date(2001/01/01)
Error: Cannot use a date beyond 1999 for this date format.
You can override this setting by entering the Set Date Ifyy2000error
command:
>set date ifyy2000error Off
>item trans-date,date,yymmdd
>if trans-date >= $date(2001/01/01)
Century and
$Date
Suprtool needs to generate
a $date or $today date in the ccyymmdd format. If you specify a two-digit year
in the $date function, Suprtool needs to assume a century for the given date:
>item trans-date,date,ccyymmdd
>if trans-date >= $date(01/01/01)
Suprtool assumes 20 for the century if the specified year is less
than the Set Date Cutoff value, and 19 if the specified two-digit year is
greater than or equal to this value.
Oracle Dates
Oracle dates contain both the date and the time. The $date and
$today functions check the date, but ignore the time.
Date Limits
The $date function in
Suprtool can generate dates between the years 1583 and 2583. Some date formats
have limits based on their particular format, such as 2027 for a Calendar date
and 2259 for the aammdd aamm, mmddaa, ddmmaa dates.
Non-Collating
Date Types
You can use the $stddate
function to convert the non-collating date format to a J2 data item with a date
format of ccyymmdd.
For example, to select the purchases by the field purch-date for
November 2000 in a ddmmyy X6 field, you would use the $stddate function as
follows:
>item purch-date,date,ddmmyy
>if $stddate(purch-date) >= $date(2000/11/first) and &
$stddate(purch-date) <=
$date(2000/11/last)
Dynamic Date
Selection
|
Using a first pass to generate a Suprtool command dynamically,
then using that command in a second pass, is a powerful technique.
|
You can use the If
command for dynamic date selection. Suppose you have a control file that
maintains the start and end of a range of dates in which you are interested.
You can use the control file to select records from another file or dataset,
based on this date range. This is a two-step process, in which the first
Suprtool pass creates the If command with your dates, and the second pass
does the actual selection from the dataset.
|
>input datecntl {read
the one-line control file}
>define start-date,1,6,byte {start
date is the first six bytes}
>define end-date,7,6,byte {end
date is the next six bytes}
>extract "if sales-date >= '" {assemble
the If command}
>extract start-date
>extract "' and sales-date <= '"
>extract end-date
>extract "'"
>output seldate,temp {write
the If command to a file}
>xeq
This task produces a usefile that looks like this:
if sales-date >= '001101' and sales-date <= '001231'
Now you can use this file to do the actual selection:
>base salesdb,5,password
>get sales-detail
>use seldate {use
the file that has the If command}
>output sdetail
>exit
Adjust Batch
Jobs for Holidays
In automating production
batch jobs, it would be very nice to know, at the MPE command level, whether
today is a holiday (or yesterday or tomorrow). You can use
if hpday = 1 then
to check for Sunday, but you can't use
if hpday = holiday then
Everyone has their own schedule of holidays. Here is how we cope
with this problem in our backup job, using Suprtool to compare yesterday's date
to a list of holidays for the year:
!
!comment Occasionally the
backup is not run. This is
!comment usually because of
holidays, when nobody is in the
!comment office. The file SKIPDAYS.STREAMS.PROD contains a
!comment list of holidays in
YYMMDD ASCII format. Because
!comment the backup job runs
after midnight, it checks if
!comment YESTERDAY's date is
in the SKIPDAYS file. If it
!comment is, the SKIPTODAY
JCW is set to 1.
!
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
input skipdays.streams.prod
define skipdate,1,6
item skipdate,date,yymmdd
if skipdate = $today(-1)
output $null
exit
!setjcw skiptoday = suprtooloutcount
!
!if skiptoday > 0 then
! tellop --- Yesterday was a
holiday. No Backup today.
!else
! comment Insert the BACKUP commands here:
! comment STORE, etc.
!endif
The skipdays file is a regular text file with records in the
following format:
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4
000101 New Years Day
000414 Good Friday
000524 Victoria Day
001009 Thanksgiving
(Canada)
001111 Remembrance Day
001225 Christmas
001226 Boxing Day
010101 New Years Day
010405 Good Friday
010520 Victoria Day
011014 Thanksgiving
(Canada)
011111 Remembrance Day
011225 Christmas
011226 Boxing Day
Long If commands can use
an ampersand to continue the command over several lines:
>if status = "20" and
&
>> state =
"AZ", &
>>
"CA", &
>>
"OR"
{no ampersand on the last
line}
This is awkward to use and, for internal reasons, the maximum length
is restricted to 256 characters. The $read function makes it easier to enter
long If commands. Its maximum length is based on the complexity of the
expression, not on the number of characters.
$Read Function
The $read function reads
the If expression from $stdinx, or from the usefile if the If command is in a
usefile. $Read continues to prompt for input lines until you press Return or
enter "//." You must remember to enter all the necessary parts of the
If expression, including connectors like AND and OR and commas. You do not use
an ampersand (&) to continue from one line to the next when using $read.
>if $read {prompt
for the expression}
-status = "20" and {$read
prompts with "-"}
-state = "AZ", {the
comma is still needed}
- "CA",
- "OR" {no
comma on the last line}
- {blank
line to terminate $read}
Redoing $Read
When prompting for an expression, $read saves each line in the redo
stack and accepts the Before, Do, Listredo, and Redo commands. This provides an
easy way to specify all or part of a previous $read expression.
Error: Data
Overflow
While the $read function
permits long expressions, there are other internal limits within the If
command. The first is a limit on the amount of space for constants. Suprtool
must blank-fill all string constants to their full length. The following
example overflows the data space:
>define char-256,1,256
>if char-256 = "a","b","c"
Error: Data Overflow
In this example, Suprtool attempted to create three 256-byte
constants. There wasn't enough room for the last constant. Solutions to this
problem include:
1.
If possible, define short
fields. If you have long field names, you may want to use the Define command to
define shorter subfields.
2.
Use tables and $lookup for many
values.
3.
Split the extract task into
multiple passes. On the first pass, use an If expression that results in the
fewest possible number of output records. Use the output file from the first
pass as input to the second. Apply the remainder of your If expression during
the second pass.
Error: Code
Overflow
Suprtool translates If
commands to an internal machine representation. There is a limit on the size of
this code. When an error occurs, there is little you can do except use tables
and $lookup wherever possible, and when this fails use multiple passes.
$Read in
Usefiles
When you specify $read in
a usefile, Suprtool expects the If expression to appear in the usefile. This
provides a method for storing and executing complicated If commands.
You can also manipulate Suprtool into prompting
for portions of an If command. When the If command with $read is the last
command in a usefile, Suprtool satisfies the $read from $stdinx. The $read
function can appear anywhere in which a space can appear, so you can use this
to prompt the user for values.
>use prompt.use
>in sdfile {first
line of usefile}
>if status=$read and & {continue
the If command}
state = $read {last
line of the usefile}
-"10" {prompt
for status}
-// {end
of prompt for status}
-"AZ", {prompt
for state}
-"CA", {user
must remember comma}
-"OR" {user
also enters quotes}
-// {end
of the second read}
Notes
Suprtool is not designed to be used by end users. We prefer that you
write intelligent front-ends that understand user applications and hide the
details of Suprtool from end users. We recommend that you use $read from
usefiles only for one-time tasks, or for tasks used by experienced Suprtool
users who do not require a friendly user interface.
$-functions
Some $-functions were originally designed for if command and some are
more suited for the extract command. Because of this some $-functions don’t
work in the if command, such as $edit, and others such as $number have
interesting side effects.
Specifically with $number, when you work on byte type fields, they
will be updated internally to be treated as display:
Get dataset
Def display-field,byte-field,display
If $number(display-field) > 10000
Out somefile,link
xeq
The field byte-field
will have leading zeroes and treated as a display.
Opens the file that will
be the input source for the next extract task. This file can be an MPE disc
file, an MPE tape file, a KSAM file, * for $stdinx, a card file, or some other
MPE file with fixed-length records. Suprtool executes the Input command
immediately -- it does not wait for an Xeq command before opening the Input
file.
INPUT file [=setname] [(startrecord/[endrecord])]
[(#count)]
(Default: all input
records)
Input File
The first example shows
the most common use of the Input command. An input file is specified as the
input source to Suprtool. We select a subset of the input data with the If
command. Before using the If command, we must define a field within the input
record:
>input dinvent {input
is from a disc file}
>define a,11,2,int {"A"
is an integer that starts}
>output outfile { at the 11th byte of Dinvent}
>if a<10000 {records
with field "A" less than}
>xeq { 10000 are written to Outfile}
Dataset Files
The =setname parameter notifies Suprtool that the records have the same
internal data structure as the entries in this IMAGE dataset. You can then
specify sort/select fields by field name instead of by the physical offset
within the record. You must have done a previous Base command, and setname must exist in the database. You
must have read access to all fields in the dataset entry, and the record length
of the file must match that of the dataset entry.
Using the Define command is error-prone, because it forces you to
calculate offsets and lengths of each field in your input record. If you used
Suprtool to create a disc file from an IMAGE dataset, you do not need to use
the Define command:
>base store,5,READER {open
for read access only}
>get d-inventory {input
from a dataset}
>output dinvent {automatically
defined by Get}
>xeq {process
this task and continue}
>input dinvent=d-inventory {same
format as d-inventory}
>if unit-cost<10000
{use
the actual IMAGE field name}
>sort cust-account {again,
the IMAGE field name is used}
>list {list
the selected records with}
>xeq { their field names and values}
Input from
$Stdinx
If file is "*", $stdinx is opened as the source of input
records. To terminate Input from $stdinx, hit Control-Y on your terminal after
the last input record or make ":eod" the last input record in your
batch job. Do not use ":eof:" to end the input data as this causes
the batch job to abort.
The record size of the output file is determined by the record size
of $stdinx. Because this record size varies in terminals and batch jobs, we
recommend that you build the output file first and use the Output xxx,Erase
option.
!job mgr.robelle
!purge outfile {create
the output file}
!build outfile;rec=-80,16,f,ascii
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input * {input
from $stdinx}
>output outfile,erase {output
to an existing file}
>exit {end
of Suprtool commands}
Line 1 of 2. {input
data}
Line 2 of 2.
:eod {end
of input data}
!listf outfile,2
!eoj {end
of the job}
Permanent and
Temporary Files
If you have both a
temporary and a permanent file with the same name, Suprtool tries to open the
temporary file.
Selection by
Record Number
The (startrecord/endrecord)
parameter specifies a range of input records by record number. The default
value for endrecord is the highest record in the file. The first record number
is 0 for MPE files and some KSAM files, or 1 for other KSAM files.
The (startrecord/endrecord) parameter must come after the
=setname parameter, if it is present.
You can check your record selections with the Verify command.
When debugging software, it is convenient to scan the first few
records of a file. The startrecord/endrecord parameter makes it easy to
scan these records:
>input dinvent(0/19) {first
twenty records}
>list {produce
a list of each record}
>xeq { in "OCTAL,CHAR" format}
Random Selection
The (#count) parameter specifies that every "nth" record in the
input file should be selected. This option is designed for random sampling of
the input file. The (startrecord/endrecord) parameter cannot be used with
this parameter. Like (startrecord/endrecord), (#count) must come after the =setname,
if present.
Test files can be constructed from random samplings of production
files. We can build a test file with the #count parameter:
>input dinvent(#15)
{every
15th record is read}
>output dtest {create
an output file with every}
>xeq { 15th record from Dinvent}
Magnetic Tape
Input
For Suprtool to read a
file on magnetic tape, you must do two things:
1.
Issue a :File command for the
tape.
2.
If more than 10,000 records
will be read from the tape, you must specify the Numrecs command.
This example creates a disc file from the records on magnetic tape:
>:file tin;dev=tape {:File
command for the tape drive}
>input *tin {you
must specify "*" on the Input}
>numrecs 30000 {specify
30000 input tape records}
>output tout {we
build the output file with}
>xeq { room for 30000 records}
The Input command is
processed immediately. Suprtool does not wait for an Xeq or Exit command before
opening the Input file. If the session seems to hang after the Input command,
check the console to see whether it is waiting for the =reply.
Notes
Only one Input, Chain, or Get command is allowed per extract task.
The Input command opens the specified file immediately.
The file is held open until the input is reset or the current task completes.
If at least one sort key
has been specified, the Input command is optional, but you can specify the
input file by means of a :File command (:File Input=xxx).
Suprtool first attempts to open the input file as READ, SHARED, NO
LOCKING. If it cannot open the file because someone else has it open with
LOCKING, Suprtool tries again with LOCKING specified. If the input file is a
KSAM/V file, Suprtool eventually closes the KSAM/V file and reopens it with
LOCKING and INOUT access.
If you specify a
self-describing input file with Oracle dates, Suprtool will automatically
recognize the Oracle date attribute.
Use the Item command to
specify the number of implied decimal points or the date format for an item.
The $date and $today functions of the If command work only with dates. The Item
command must precede any If or Extract commands.
ITEM itemname,DATE | DECIMAL,attribute
Itemname
The itemname must be an
IMAGE itemname, an SD field, or a Defined field. If the itemname exists both as
an IMAGE itemname and as a Defined field, the attribute is associated with the IMAGE itemname and the Defined
field is deleted. If the itemname exists both as an IMAGE itemname and as an SD
field, the attribute is only
associated with the IMAGE itemname and a warning is produced. The itemname
cannot be qualified with a subscript.
For dates, the attribute must
be one of the following:
|
Attribute
|
Attribute
|
|
ASK
|
ccyymm
|
|
Calendar
|
ccyy
|
|
ddmmyy
|
aammdd
|
|
ddmmyyyy
|
aamm
|
|
mmddyy
|
mmddaa
|
|
mmddyyyy
|
ddmmaa
|
|
Oracle
|
SRNChronos
|
|
PHdate
|
mmyyyy
|
|
yymm
|
yyddd
|
|
yymmdd
|
ccyyddd
|
|
yyyymm
|
HPCalendar
|
|
yyymmdd
|
JulianDay
|
|
yyyymmdd
|
EDSDate
|
|
ccyymmdd
|
PHDate8
|
Abbreviations
When specifying the Date keyword, you can use a leading subset for
the date attribute. For example, if you want to specify the Calendar date type,
you can specify only CA.
If you do not like this feature, you can turn it off by specifying
the following command in your Suprmgr file:
>set itemabbreviatedate off
Data-Types for
Dates
Each date attribute is
compatible with certain data-types. For more information, see the table on
data-types in the Define command. The following table shows the
compatibilities:
|
Date-Attribute
|
Data-Type Compatibility
|
|
ASK
|
J1 and K1
|
|
Calendar
|
J1 and K1
|
|
ddmmyy
|
X6, Z6, J2, K2, and P8 or greater
|
|
ddmmyyyy
|
X8, Z8, J2, K2, and P10 or greater
|
|
mmddyy
|
X6, Z6, J2, K2, and P8 or greater
|
|
mmddyyyy
|
X8, Z8, J2, K2, and P10 or greater
|
|
Oracle
|
X7
|
|
PHdate
|
J1, K1, J2, and K2
|
|
yymm
|
X4, Z4, J1, and K1
|
|
yymmdd
|
X6, Z6, J2, K2, and P8 or greater
|
|
yyymmdd
|
J2, P8
|
|
yyyymmdd
|
X8, Z8, J2, K2, and P10 or greater
|
|
ccyymmdd
|
X8, Z8, J2, K2, and P10 or greater
|
|
ccyymm
|
X6, Z6, J2, K2, and P8 or greater
|
|
yyyymm
|
X6, Z6, J2, K2, and P8 or greater
|
|
aammdd
|
X6
|
|
aamm
|
X4
|
|
mmddaa
|
X6
|
|
ddmmaa
|
X6
|
|
ccyy
|
X4, Z4, J1, and K1
|
|
SRNChronos
|
X6
|
|
mmyyyy
|
X6, Z6, J2, K2, and P8 or greater
|
|
yyddd
|
X5, Z5, J2, K2, and P8 or greater
|
|
ccyyddd
|
X7, Z7, J2, K2, and P10 or greater
|
|
HPCalendar
|
J2, K2
|
|
EDSDate
|
J2, P8
|
|
JulianDay
|
J2
|
|
PHdate8
|
J1, K1, J2, and K2
|
Date Limits
The $date function in
Suprtool can generate dates between the years 1583 and 2583. Some date formats
have limits based on their particular format, such as 2027 for a Calendar date
and 2259 for the aammdd aamm, mmddaa, ddmmaa dates.
Calendar
The Calendar attribute is provided for users who have
fields containing the 16-bit MPE Calendar date format as an unsigned, logical value with seven bits for the
year of the century (bits 0-6), followed by nine bits for the day of the year
(bits 7-15). The Calendar date format only supports dates up to the end of the
year 2027.
PHdate and
PHdate8
The PHdate and PHdate8 attributes are compatible with the
COGNOS PowerHouse date format. If the data-type
is J1 or K1, the date is stored as a LOGICAL value with seven bits for the
year of the century (bits 0-6), four bits for the month (bits 7-10), and five
bits for the day (bits 11-15). If the data-type
is J2 or K2, the date is stored as yyyymmdd.
PHDate and PHDate8 date formats are similar, however PHDate values
for the year range from 0 - 99, whereas PHDate8 year values are from 0 - 127. A
year of 0 in PHDate could mean either 1900 or 2000 depending on user
applications. A year of 0 in PHDate8 means 1900, and 100 means 2000. The
PHDate8 date format is found in PowerHouse version 8.19 and higher.
ASK
The ASK attribute is compatible with the ASK
manufacturing software. ASK uses a special date format stored as a single
integer or a single logical (i.e., J1 or K1 in IMAGE). This date is relative to
January 1, 1973.
yyymmdd
The yyymmdd attribute is similar to yymmdd, except
that the first digit denotes the century. If the first digit is a 1 (one) then
the century is 19, and if the first digit is a 2 (two) then the century is 20.
Only data-types of P8 and J2 are supported for this date attribute.
This date format is used by some third-party software packages such
as MACS and APS.
EDSDATE
The EDSDATE date format is
similar to the yyymmdd format, in which the first digit represents the century.
The first digit in the EDSDATE is either 0 or 1: a 0 represents a century of 19
and a 1 represents a century of 20.
JulianDay
The JulianDay number is
the absolute count of the days that have elapsed since January 1, 4713 BC on
the Julian calendar.
Typically "Julian Day numbers" refer to an integer number
corresponding to whole days, while the "Julian Date" may mean an
integer plus a decimal value that resolves the Julian count to precise parts of
a day. Suprtool supports the "JulianDay" number and does not attempt
to support an hour or point in the day.
aammdd and
Related Date Formats
The aammdd attribute is similar to yymmdd, except
the aa portion of the date uses a combination of letters and numbers in order
to represent dates beyond 1999.
The aammdd date format was developed by James Overman of HP for use
in their MM3000 product. This format is available only for X6 data-type.
By substituting a letter of the alphabet in the first position of
the year, we can extend a six-digit date and also ensure that the dates collate
correctly. For example:
|
YY of AAMMDD
|
CCYY
|
|
00 - 09
|
1900 - 1909
|
|
90 - 99
|
1990 - 1999
|
|
A0 - A9
|
2000 - 2009
|
|
B0 - B9
|
2010 - 2019
|
|
C0 - C9
|
2020 - 2029
|
Because letters are greater than numbers in the collating sequence
you can ensure that aammdd dates beyond 1999 will order correctly.
Suprtool also supports other date formats with this two-character
year representation. These formats are aamm, mmddaa and ddmmaa.
Oracle
Oracle dates include both
the date and the time. The $date and $today functions only apply to the date
part of Oracle dates.
SRN Chronos
The Srnchronos date format
is used in applications from Software Research Northwest. Like Oracle dates,
this format includes the date and time, but the time portion is ignored by the
$date and $today functions.
DDD Dates
Dates consisting of ddd in
the format name use the ddd to represent the nth day in the current year. This means that January 1 will be day
001, and Dec 31 will be day 365 on non-leap years. Some people refer to these
type of dates as Julian dates.
HPCalendar
The HPCalendar date format
is supported by HP's new HPCalendar intrinsic and consists of a 32-bit integer
number, whereby the first 23 bits represent the year and the last nine bits
represent the day of the year.
The decimal attribute is the number of implied
decimal places in an item. The minimum number of implied decimal places is 0.
The maximum is based on the data-type of the item:
|
Data-Type
|
Maximum Implied Decimal Places
|
|
I1
|
5
|
|
I2
|
10
|
|
I3
|
15
|
|
I4
|
19
|
|
K1
|
5
|
|
K2
|
10
|
|
Pn
|
n-1
|
|
Zn
|
n
|
You cannot specify implied decimal places for byte-, char-, real-,
long-, or IEEE-type items.
Once you define a decimal place, almost every command in Suprtool is
affected. Suprtool accepts numeric values with decimal points or scales
integers according to the number of implied decimal places (e.g., specify two
implied decimal places, then enter 1,000 to represent 1,000.00). All formatting
commands format fields with a decimal point when appropriate.
Constant Values
When specifying numeric
constants for a field with implied decimal places, there are different formats
that you can use. For example, assume that we use the Item command to specify
two implied decimal places for an amount field. The following are examples of
constant values for this item:
|
Constant
|
Interpretation
|
|
0
|
zero value padded as necessary
|
|
1
|
$1.00
|
|
0.01
|
$0.01
|
|
.01
|
also acceptable for $0.01
|
Compound Items
When you specify a compound item, the attribute applies to all
elements of the compound item.
>item monthly-totals,decimal,2 {12
occurrences}
>if monthly-totals(5) > 1000.00
You cannot apply an attribute to only one sub-item of a compound
item:
>item monthly-totals(5),decimal,2
Error: Missing attribute for
the Item Command
When to Specify
the Item Command
The Item command affects almost all other Suprtool commands. It
should be used as follows:
·
For databases, specify it
immediately after the Base command, but before any Extract or If commands.
·
For MPE and KSAM files, it is
best to specify the Define and Item commands immediately after the Input
command.
Usefiles
You can use a usefile as a mini data dictionary for Suprtool. For
databases, it is a good idea to put all the Item commands associated with a
database into a usefile. After the Base command has been specified, the usefile
can describe the items in the database to Suprtool. For MPE files, you can put
both the Define and Item commands in a usefile and execute them right after the
Input command for the file. If you use the Link output option, both date
formats and implied decimal places are saved in the self-describing file so
they never need to be specified again.
Specifies the next sort
field for an extract task, using an explicit byte position in the record, not a
field name. See "Sort Command [SO]" on page 268 for specifying sort
fields by IMAGE field name or Defined field, or by field name in an SD file. Up
to 20 Sort and Key commands may be specified per extract task; the first is the
major sort field.
[KEY] byteposition,bytelen [,type] [,DESC]
(Default: type=BYTE, ASCENDING order).
Parameters
Desc specifies that the
field is to be sorted in Descending order.
The byteposition is a number between 1 and the length of the input
records, specifying where the sort field begins. The bytelen parameter is a number from 1 to the length of the record,
specifying how long the sort field is.
The type is a word that gives the desired data-type of the field for
sorting purposes:
|
Type
|
Description
|
|
BYTE
|
(unsigned, straight compare)
|
|
INT/INTEGER
|
(two's complement)
|
|
DOUBLE
|
(two's complement)
|
|
REAL
|
(Classic floating-point)
|
|
LONG
|
(Classic floating-point)
|
|
IEEE
|
(IEEE floating-point)
|
|
PACKED
|
(packed-decimal)
|
|
PACKED*
|
(packed-decimal, last nibble unused)
|
|
DISPLAY
|
(zoned-decimal numeric field)
|
|
LOGICAL
|
(unsigned, like BYTE, 2 characters)
|
|
CHARACTER
|
(for Native Language Support)
|
For compatibility with Sort.Pub.Sys, the Key command also accepts
FPOINT as the data-type for IEEE numbers.
Examples
The first example sorts an integer (PIC S9(4) COMP) field which
starts on the 11th byte of the input record. We sort the entire input file
based on one key:
>input bigfile {input
from a disc file}
>key 11,2,int {key
is an integer that starts}
>output outfile { at the 11th byte of Bigfile}
>xeq {create
Outfile and prompt for}
{ more Suprtool commands}
>input discfile {another
input file}
>key 14,4,double,desc {double
integer (PIC S9(9) COMP)}
>output ofile2 {sort
input in descending order}
>exit
The following examples show the various data-types and combinations
that are available with the Key command:
>key 1,10 {byte
data-type}
>key 1,10,desc {descending
sort sequence}
>key 11,4,double {I2
or J2, S9(9) COMP}
>key 1,6;11,4,ieee {X6
string and an E2 field at byte 11}
>key 21,6,packed
{P12,
S9(11) COMP-3}
>key 21,6,packed* {P12,
S9(10) COMP-3, wasted byte}
Notes
The command name, Key, is
optional. Any command that starts with a numeric character is assumed to be a
Key command. The Verify command shows all of the current key fields, and the
Reset command cancels them. If no sort fields are defined prior to the Xeq or
Exit command, Suprtool performs a copy, not a sort.
Send commands to Suprlink.
LINK [ suprlink-command ]
Switching into
Suprlink
If you enter Link with no
parameters, Suprtool executes Suprlink.Pub.Robelle. Suprlink then prompts you
for commands, just as it does when you run Suprlink from MPE. When you exit
Suprlink, you are returned to Suprtool.
>link {invoke
Suprlink}
SUPRLINK/Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1988-2001
+input invoices by cust-no {Suprlink
prompts for commands}
+link customer
+output invcust
+exit {do
Suprlink task and return to Suprtool}
>
Passing Commands
to Suprlink
You can send commands directly to Suprlink by specifying the
Suprlink command as part of the Suprtool Link command. Suprlink executes the
command and returns to Suprtool. Suprlink does not execute its task until it
receives an Xeq or Exit command.
>link input invoices by cust-no
>link link customer {send
"link customer" to Suprlink}
>link output invcust
>link exit {exit
from Suprlink (not Suprtool)}
Notes
You can use the Suprtool2
interface and the Link command to "call" Suprlink. See the Suprcall
User Manual for a complete example of how to use the interface to pass commands
to Suprlink.
The List command is used
to produce formatted listings of the selected records. You may specify the List
command, or the Output command, or both, or neither. If List is used instead of
Output, Suprtool sets the Output to $null, so that only a listing is produced.
LIST [ OCTAL|HEX|DECIMAL ] [ CHAR ] [ NOREC ] [
LABELS ]
[
RECORD ] [ DUPLEX ] [ ONEPERLINE ] [ LP ]
[
NONAME ] [ NOSKIP ] [ STANDARD ] [ DEVICE name
]
[
DATE format ] [ TIME format ] [ PCL format ]
[
LEFTJUSTNUM ] [ RIGHTJUSTNUM ]
[
TITLE "string" ] [ HEADING
"string" ["string" ...]]
(Default: Octal/Char or "Formatted")
If Suprtool knows about the fields in the input source (e.g., because
you have used the Extract command), the list records are formatted with field
names, and internal binary data-types (e.g., integer) are converted to ASCII.
You cannot combine the Ask or Query,Num output-options with the List command.
Here is a typical use of List: to find any entries in the m-customer
dataset that do not have a valid value for cust-status.
>base store,5,READER {input
from a database}
>get m-customer {read
this dataset}
>if cust-status<>10,20,30,40 {the
only valid values}
>list {print
bad entries}
>xeq
You can override the
defaults with a specification in the List command (e.g., List Hex,Char). If the
input source is not self-describing and no Extract command is specified, the
default output format is Octal,Char, which also shows both input and output record numbers.
Decimal Places
The List command formats
numbers using the implied number of decimal places. For example, the following
Suprtool commands format the unit cost with two decimal points. We specify the Rightjustnum keyword,
because numbers with decimal points are hard to read if they are left
justified:
>item cost,decimal,2 {two
implied decimal points}
>list rightjustnum {numbers
right justified}
>xeq { with decimal points}
Listing Record
Numbers
The Norec keyword prevents the
printing of the input and output record numbers. The input record numbers are
not printed if Output xxx,Data is used and the file is sorted.
Listing User
Labels
The Labels keyword causes user
labels to be dumped in the format specified. The default format is Octal,Char.
If Set Userlabels is Off, the user labels are not printed.
Listing One
Field per Line
Suprtool normally attempts
to list more than one field on every line of list output. The Oneperline keyword causes
every field to be shown on a different line.
Listing without
Field Names (Noname)
When Suprtool knows the
record structure of the output file, it shows the name of each output field.
The Noname keyword causes the field names to be suppressed. By only extracting
a few fields, it is possible to fit the listed output for each record on one
line.
Suppressing
Blank Lines Between Records
By default, Suprtool prints a blank line
between each record. The Noskip keyword removes this blank line. If you combine the Noskip, Norec,
Noname, and Title options when extracting a few fields, Suprtool can produce a
simple report.
Numeric
Justification (Leftjustnum and Rightjustnum)
The List command normally
left justifies all numeric fields. Specifying List Standard causes all numeric
fields to be right-justified, unless you override the default with the
Leftjustnum keyword.
Use the Leftjustnum or Rightjustnum keyword to specify the alignment of the numbers. The two keywords
are mutually exclusive. The last one that appears on the command line is the
one that is applied.
There are two methods to
select different printing options for a LaserJet and other PCL-compatible
printers. You can permanently set the PCL option for all listings by using Set
List PCL, or you can use the List command to select the PCL option for just one
task. PCL stands for Printer Command Language, which is an HP standard for
printers. The following is a summary of the PCL values:
|
PCL
|
Font
|
Orientation
|
Dimensions
|
|
1
|
Lineprinter
|
landscape
|
175 cols/60 lines
|
|
2
|
Courier
|
landscape
|
100 cols/45 lines
|
|
3
|
Courier "standard"
|
portrait
|
80 cols/60 lines
|
|
4
|
Lineprinter
|
portrait
|
132 cols/80 lines
|
|
5
|
Courier A4 "tight"
|
portrait
|
80 cols/60 lines
|
|
6
|
Lineprinter legal
|
landscape
|
223 cols/60 lines
|
See the Set command for a complete description of the PCL options.
By default, Suprtool assumes that the List output device is not PCL-compatible
(List PCL 0).
If you use the List
command to your terminal with a global Set List PCL value other than zero, your
terminal screen may be cleared. To avoid this situation, you can explicitly
specify the PCL setting along with the device:
>get d-sales
>list serialp,pcl 2
>xeq
A4-Size Paper
Most of the PCL options,
with the exception of PCL 5, were designed and tested with North American
letter-size paper. This is especially true with PCL 5 for A4 paper: it reduces
the horizontal spacing between characters so that 80 columns of Courier output
fits on a single line. In addition, if you add 2000 to a PCL code, Suprtool
adjusts the number of rows and columns for that option to match A4 paper. For
example, to print Landscape on A4 paper, use PCL 2001 instead of PCL 1.
In general, selecting A4 paper gives you more space along the long
side of the paper and less space along the short side. If you are happy with
the way letter-size rows and columns work on A4 paper, simply do not add 2000
to the PCL code. If for some reason you want more columns than provided by
Suprtool (e.g., you are using a PCL-compatible system printer with wider
paper), you can override the size by using a :File command with the Rec=
parameter, as in:
:file suprlist;dev=syslp;rec=-220
Roman-8 vs.
ASCII
The PCL option requests a
Roman-8 character set, but some combination font cartridges only supply the
ASCII character set (half as many characters means twice as many fonts in a
single cartridge). If you ask for Landscape Lineprinter and get Landscape
Courier instead, your Lineprinter font probably has the ASCII character set
instead of the Roman-8 character set. To request an ASCII font, add 1000 to the
PCL code. For example, if you have a Super Cartridge (55 fonts in one!), use
PCL 1001, 1004, and 1006. To select both ASCII and A4 paper, add 3000.
Double-Sided
Printing on LaserJets
The LaserJet IID and IIID
can print on both sides of the paper. The Duplex keyword enables double-sided printing
on these printers.
Specifying a Title in the List command
forces Suprtool to produce a formatted listing with page-headings,
page-numbers, today's date and the current time. If you want just the date and
page numbers, use an empty string. For example,
>list title " "
The following example prints a report on a LaserJet in Landscape
(sideways) mode, using the tiny Lineprinter font, including a page heading with
the title. The physical command line limit is 256 characters. As a result, the
maximum size of the heading is less than 256 characters because the List
command and heading options need to be included in the command line.
>in custs {self-describing
file}
>if status<>10,20,30,40 {the
only valid values}
>set list pcl 1 {select
LaserJet option}
>list title "Invalid CUSTOMER Records"
>xeq {include
title on listing}
Changing the
Date Format
When you select page
headings by specifying a title, each page includes today's date. By default,
this date is formatted as mmm dd, ccyy (e.g., Mar 20, 2000). You can override
this format with the Date keyword. Use the Set command to specify a different default date
format for future List commands (e.g., Set List Date 2). The valid date formats
are as follows:
|
Value
|
Format
|
Example
|
|
0 (default)
|
mmm dd, ccyy
|
Mar 20, 2000
|
|
1
|
yy/mm/dd
|
00/03/20
|
|
2
|
mm/dd/yy
|
03/20/00
|
|
3
|
dd/mm/yy
|
20/03/00
|
|
4
|
dd mmmyy
|
20 Mar00
|
>list title "Example Report" date 3
>xeq {heading
date is in dd/mm/yy format}
Changing the
Time Format
When you select page
headings by specifying a title, each page includes the current time. By
default, the time is in 24-hour format (e.g., 23:02). You can override this
format with the Time keyword. Use the Set command to specify a different default time
format for future List commands (e.g., Set List Time 2). The valid time formats
are as follows:
|
Value
|
Format
|
Example
|
|
0
|
none
|
|
|
1 (default)
|
24-hour
|
23:02
|
|
2
|
AM/PM
|
11:02PM
|
>list title "Example Report" time 2
>xeq {time
will be in AM/PM format}
A Fast Method
for Producing Simple Reports
For self-describing files
and datasets, the Standard keyword is equivalent to List Noname,Noskip,Norec,Rightjustnum with
default column headings. For data files, the Standard keyword is equivalent to
List Octal,Char. In either case, the Standard keyword provides a default title
that describes the input source. You can override the title, date format, time
format, or any other option selected by the Standard keyword, by specifying
them in addition to the Standard keyword. For example,
>get m-customer
>list standard {use
all Suprtool defaults}
>xeq
>get m-customer
>list standard,date 3 {override
the date format}
>xeq
>input mpefile
>list standard,char {override
the format options}
>xeq
>input mpefile
>list
standard,leftjustnum {left
justify numbers}
>xeq
>get m-customer
>list standard,title "Customer List" {override
title}
>xeq
>get m-customer
>list standard,heading " " {no
column headings}
>xeq
Listings with
Subheadings
When using the Title or
Standard keywords, you can also include subheadings with the Heading keyword. You can
specify multiple columns by repeating the string after the Heading option
(e.g., List Heading "First " "Second") or specify the
Heading option multiple times (e.g., List Heading "First ", Heading
"Second"). Being able to specify multiple columns makes it easier to
align column headings when using the Standard keyword. If you specify the
Heading keyword without the Title keyword, a default title is produced.
>get m-customer {read
this dataset}
>extract cust-account {Z8}
>extract name-first
{X10}
>extract name-last {X16}
>extract credit-rating {J2}
>extract cust-status {X2}
>sort name-last
>sort name-first
>list standard,title "Customer List", &
heading
"Account " " First and Last
Names" &
" " "Credit " "Status"
>xeq
By default, the List
command lists lines to $stdlist. There are several methods that you can use to
redirect the output to a specific logical device or to a disc file. You can
also redirect output to an attached printer.
File Suprlist
Suprtool lists lines to
the file Suprlist. You can use a :File command for the Suprlist file to direct
the list output to any line printer (or even to a disc file). The Suprlist file
can have widths of 56 to 256 characters. If PCL is zero, Suprlist defaults to
78 columns wide. If your line printer paper is wider, specify the width using
Rec= on the :File command.
>get m-customer
>:file suprlist;dev=lp;rec=-132 {list
output to LP}
>list
>xeq
If PCL is non-zero, there is no need for Rec= on the :File command.
Suprtool supplies the correct value.
Device LP
Use the LP option to send listings
to the device "LP". If you have specified a :File command for
Suprlist, it overrides the LP option. The LP option assumes that the list
device is 132 columns wide.
User Specified
Device
Use the Device option to specify a specific logical device for the listing. The
device name must appear after the Device option and may be a name or number.
You may specify a remote device by preceding the remote device name with the
system name and a pound sign (#). The Device option assumes that the list
device is 132 columns wide.
>list device LP {same
as List LP}
>list device serialp {send
to device serialp}
>list device Goofy#LP {remote
device LP on Goofy}
>list device Disc {create
disc file "Suprlist"}
When redirecting the Suprlist file to disc, you must remember to add
a disc value to the file equation because the default disc file size for the
Suprlist file is 1,023 records.
>input sales
>:file suprlist=salefile;disc=20000
>list dev disc
>xeq
Listing to
Attached Printer
If you wish to list to a
printer that is attached to your terminal, use List Record. Suprtool uses Record
mode on your terminal or PC to print on the attached printer. To use this
option, you must be using an HP terminal or HP terminal emulator and your data
communication settings must be setup correctly. This option opens a file named
Suprcrt instead of Suprlist.
You can combine this
option with other listing options. You cannot interrupt Record mode with
Control-Y, but you can do a Soft Reset. This unlocks the keyboard and causes
the rest of the output to appear on the screen. You can then stop it with
Control-Y.
Notes
The List operation occurs logically after the sort phase, if any,
and after any Extract, but before the final Output or Put operation. A Reset
turns off the current List options.
For more examples of the List command, see Suprtool Issues and Solutions.
The Listredo command
displays any of the previous 1000 commands.
LISTREDO [ start
[ / stop ] ] [;ABS] [;OUT=file]
[
string ] [;REL]
[
ALL | @ ] [;UNN]
(Default: display previous
20 commands)
(BJ and ,, are short for
LISTREDO)
Commands are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered and the last
1000 are retained. You can display a single command, a range of commands, all
1000, or all the commands whose name matches the string. You can print the
commands with ABSolute line numbers (the default), RELative line numbers
(-5/-4), or UNNumbered. You can write the commands to your terminal or Out to a
temporary file. If you want to redo any of these commands, see Do, Redo, and
Before.
Examples
>listredo 5
>listredo 5/10
>listredo help {print
all Help commands}
>listredo -10 {print
last ten commands}
>listredo ALL {print
entire redo stack}
>listredo purge {print
all Purge commands}
>listredo purge xx {print
all "purge xx" commands}
>listredo @purge {print
all with "purge" anywhere}
>listredo @;rel {print
ALL, relative numbers}
>listredo 1/10;out=*lp {dump
commands to printer}
>listredo @;unn;out=save {write
commands to a file}
Notes
The :Listredo command can be abbreviated to BJ as in Qedit, or to ,,
(comma comma) as in MPEX. You cannot use a semi-colon (;) to combine commands
on the same line.
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent file and can therefore be
used from another session. You can use the Set
redo command to specify a filename to save your redo commands. Please see
the Set Redo command ("Redo" on page 262) for details.
Specify the size of the
input file (for tape files), output file (for datasets), and the sort scratch
file.
NUMRECS size | percentage%
(default: size=10,000 or EOF of input source)
Parameters
When you know that you are selecting a small subset of the entire
input source, use the Numrecs command to reduce the size of the sort scratch
file and, if required, the size of the output file. If you select more than size entries, Suprtool prints a warning
message, and ignores the rest of the input records. However, the output file
will have the records that were selected. Use a percent sign (%) to specify the
Numrecs as a percentage of the input file size. The percentage can range from 1
to 500.
Using Numrecs
for Tape Files
The Numrecs command is
required to read more than 10,000 records from a tape file. Suppose you want to
read a tape file with 30,000 records. You would use the Numrecs command to
increase the size of the output file:
>:file t;dev=tape {define
tape file}
>input *t {specify
Suprtool input}
>numrecs 30000 {make
room for 30000 records}
>output out2 {output
file will have room for}
>xeq { 30000 records}
Reducing File
Sizes
Suppose that the d-sales
dataset contains 100,000 entries, but you use the If command to select 15% of
the entries. We would specify 15 as the percentage
on the Numrecs command to reduce the size of the sort scratch file and the
output file:
>get d-sales {specify
input}
>numrecs 15% {specify
15000 as file size}
>if sales-qty<100 {select
a subset of d-sales}
>sort cust-account {sort
using the dataset path}
>output out2 {output
file will have room for}
>xeq { 15000 records}
MPE Files vs.
Datasets
When you specify a source of records using the Input command (as
opposed to reading a dataset using the Get or Chain command), Suprtool attempts
to duplicate all of the input file's attributes in the output file. This
includes the file limit. For this reason, the Numrecs value is ignored if the
output file limit is smaller than the input file limit. Numrecs is still useful
when reading MPE files to reduce the size of the sort scratch file.
Appending to
Files
When you want to create a
file that you can append to later, you need to use both the Numrecs command and
the Set Squeeze Off command.
>get d-sales
>numrecs 200% {output
file will have extra room}
>set squeeze off {reserve
room between EOF and LIMIT}
>output dsale
>xeq
...
>get d-history
>output dsale,append {dsale
has room for appending}
>xeq
Specify an SQL database to
open. Only one database can be open at a time.
OPEN ALLBASE dbename owner
Allbase Database
Use the Open command to
connect to an Allbase database. You must specify your Allbase dbename and owner. To read data from an Allbase table or view, use the Select
command. Use Set Allbase Rows to specify how many rows for Suprtool to fetch
when it is reading Allbase data.
>open allbase inventory anne
Define the name of the
output file as one of these: a new disc file (default), an existing MPE or KSAM
file (Append or Erase option), * for $stdlist, a back reference to a :File
command (*name), or =Input to sort a file into itself. If you use List, Put,
Update or Total, Output defaults to $null. Output produces the same record
format as the input source (adjusted by Extract commands), unless you override
it with format keywords.
OUTPUT filename format [TEMP] [ERASE | APPEND]
(Default: DATA only,
"new" file)
New Files
The filename is the name of a new MPE disc file to be built by Suprtool
(Output xxx). Unless you use a :File command to specify explicitly the record
length and blocking factor of the new file, Suprtool calculates the record
length itself and chooses a blocking factor to optimize batch access to the new
file.
If Suprtool cannot Save the new file because of a duplicate file
name, you may purge the old file or give the new file a different name. If
Suprtool is running in batch mode, it renames the new file as Outputnn, where nn is the lowest number between 00 and 20 that makes a valid new
file name. The Outputnn file is built
in the same group and account as the duplicate output file and not in your
logon group and account. This prevents problems on private volumes.
In many cases, Suprtool creates the end-of-file and the file-limit
the same. If you intend to append records to the output file, use Set Squeeze
Off to force Suprtool not to reduce the file-limit when closing the output
file.
Suprtool does not create new KSAM files. Use KSAMUTIL or the MPE/iX
:Build command to create the KSAM file, then use Suprtool to load it as an
existing file.
Temporary Files
By default, Suprtool saves
the output file as a permanent file. Use the Temp option to force
Suprtool to save the output file as a temporary file. If the output file
already exists as a temporary file, Suprtool prompts you to purge the existing
temporary file. If you do not want to purge the old temporary file, Suprtool
prompts for a new temporary file name. In batch, Suprtool renames the output
file as the temporary file Outputnn.
Permanent and
Temporary Files
If you have a temporary
file and a permanent file of the same name, Suprtool will attempt to create a
new permanent file.
If your Output command specifies the append or erase options
Suprtool will attempt to output to the temporary file.
Existing Files
The filename is the name of an old disc or KSAM file to erase (Output
xxx,erase) or to append to (Output xxx,append). Output xxx,erase does not purge
the existing file; it simply overwrites the contents of the file. The original
attributes of the file such as record size, blocking factor, and file limit are
not changed.
If the old file is a KSAM file, Suprtool attempts to add the output
records to the KSAM tree structure. If duplicate keys are not allowed in the
KSAM file, there may be FWRITE errors due to duplicates. The treatment of these
is controlled by the Set Ignore command. By default, a duplicate error causes
the extract task to terminate.
Tape or Line
Printer Files
The filename is a back reference to a magnetic tape or line printer
file via a :File command (Output *XX). When sending output to magnetic tape,
you should specify the record size and blocking factor on the :File command.
Use the same :File command (with the same record size and blocking factor) when
reading the tape file.
$Stdlist
Specify output to $stdlist
by a single asterisk (Output *). Use this filename
with the ASCII option for a quick listing of a file or dataset.
Overwriting the
Original File
Use the special filename=Input to specify erasing the
unsorted records by writing the sorted records back into the original input
file. Disc space is saved because a new output file is not required, but this
option cannot be restarted! The =Input option can only be used for sorts to
disc files and KSAM files, not to IMAGE datasets. You can use this feature to
reorganize existing KSAM files by extracting the records you wish to retain,
sorting them into your optimal key sequence, and writing them back into the
same KSAM file.
>in workfeb
>key 1,10
>output=input
Note that typing "input" after the equal sign is optional.
Any name typed after the equal sign is ignored; it is the equal sign itself
that directs Suprtool to overwrite the input file.
Size of the
Output File
Suprtool builds new output
files with a capacity large enough to hold all the input records. You can
determine the capacity (limit) in two ways:
1.
You can make the capacity
larger by specifying a Numrecs command with either a specific value or a
percentage greater than 100.
>numrecs
150%
For IMAGE datasets, you can also reduce the size of the output file using
Numrecs. When the input is not an IMAGE dataset and you select a Numrecs
smaller than the number of records in the input file, Suprtool builds the
output file the same size as the input file. However, it limits the number of
records written to Numrecs.
2.
You can use a :File command to
override Suprtool's choice.
>:file
sales; disc=100000
>output sales
The file is built by Suprtool as it begins the execution phase (when
you type Xeq or Exit). If there is not enough disc space you get a file system
error 46. Use a :File command to choose a smaller file size.
At the end of execution, Suprtool usually reduces the capacity
(limit) to the actual number of records in the output file (EOF) which in turn
reduces the disc space. If you do not want this to happen, use the Set Squeeze Off command.
The format and length of
the output records is determined by which of the following format keywords is selected:
|
Keyword(s)
|
Format
|
|
DATA
|
Default
|
|
ELSE
|
Records not qualified by if condition
|
|
KEY
|
Sort keys only
|
|
NUM
|
J2 record numbers only
|
|
NUM,KEY
|
J2 record numbers plus sort keys
|
|
NUM,DATA
|
J2 record numbers plus data record
|
|
QUERY
|
Self-describing file
|
|
LINK
|
New format self-describing file
|
|
NUM,QUERY
|
Query "numbers" format
|
|
ASK
|
COGELOG ASK select file
|
|
ASCII
|
Convert numeric to ASCII
|
|
DISPLAY
|
Convert numeric to display (zoned-decimal)
|
|
PRN
|
Personal computer format
|
DATA is the default; output records are the same length and format
as the input records.
ELSE tells the output command to output any records to the temporary
ELSE file that do not qualify under a certain if command. If you have a task
that looks for all records with an amount >= 0, then the records <0 will be
written to a temporary file called ELSE. This file can be renamed with a file
equation. The ELSE option cannot be used with num or key or any duplicate
option or command or the Sort command. The ELSE file that gets created will
look like the output file in terms of attributes.
KEY creates output records containing only the sort keys,
concatenated from left to right (major key to minor key).
NUM creates output records of four bytes in length, containing the
double-integer record number of each input record. The record number of the
first record is 1 for IMAGE datasets, 0 for MPE files, and either 0 or 1 for
KSAM files, depending on whether the FIRST=0 option was selected when the KSAM
file was built. The NUM option is not recommended for IMAGE master datasets
because entries in master datasets can migrate. Detail datasets and MPE and
KSAM files are okay.
NUM,KEY creates output records containing the four-byte record
number, followed by the sort key values, concatenated from left to right (major
key to minor key).
NUM,DATA creates output records containing the four-byte record
number, followed by the full data record. This can be useful to create
"transaction" files from detail datasets that will later be updated
back to the database after a processing stage.
QUERY creates an MPE self-describing output file. A self-describing
file has a file code of "SD" in the :Listf command and an actual file
code of 1084. Self-describing files contain information about the structure of
each record in the file. The file label contains the name, type, length, and
offset of each field in the file.
Self-describing files have no provision for repeated fields. These
fields appear with an "unknown" type in the file label. The QUERY
option produces a file that is similar to the file produced by the SAVE command
of QUERY.
The QUERY output option has some major drawbacks. Compound fields
are not handled, date and decimal point information is not saved, and sort
information is not part of the file description. The LINK option produces a
self-describing file that solves all these problems. This option is the
recommended way to generate files for Suprlink. We are also encouraging
third-party software vendors to accept this format.
To convert a self-describing file back into a non-SD file, see
"Suprtool and
Self-Describing Files" on page 69.
NUM,QUERY creates output records in QUERY "numbers"
format. This is an undocumented feature of QUERY that is used by some
application packages. Records in a "numbers" file contain the dataset
number and the record number in ASCII format. A QUERY "numbers" file
is usually used as input to a report program. Substituting Suprtool for QUERY
in these batch jobs should improve the speed.
ASK is a QUERY-replacement tool from COGELOG. ASK creates output
records in ASK select-file format. Suprtool can be used to scan and select
records quickly from a dataset. ASK Version C can produce reports from the
resulting select-file. This option cannot be used with any other Output option.
Recent versions of ASK read self-describing files. For these
versions use the Link option instead of the Ask option.
ASCII converts all binary input fields into their equivalent ASCII
values. All binary fields are right-justified in their fields with a trailing
sign. The sign can be a blank, "+", or "-". Byte fields are
not affected by this option. The size of the ASCII field depends on the format
of the binary field:
|
Field Format
|
Output Size
|
|
I1, J1
|
6 bytes
|
|
I2, J2
|
11 bytes
|
|
I3, J3
|
16 bytes
|
|
I4, J4
|
20 bytes
|
|
K1
|
5 bytes
|
|
K2
|
10 bytes
|
|
E2
|
12 bytes
|
|
E4
|
23 bytes
|
|
R2
|
12 bytes
|
|
R4
|
23 bytes
|
|
Zn
|
n+1 bytes
|
|
Pn
|
n bytes
|
Any fields with implied decimal places (see the Item command) are
formatted with a decimal point in the correct position. Suprtool reserves two
additional positions for each output field that has an implied decimal point.
DISPLAY converts all binary input fields into their equivalent
display values (also known as zoned-decimal). The size of the display field
depends on the format of the binary field:
|
Field Format
|
Output Size
|
|
I1, J1
|
5 bytes
|
|
I2, J2
|
10 bytes
|
|
I3, J3
|
15 bytes
|
|
I4, J4
|
19 bytes
|
|
K1
|
5 bytes
|
|
K2
|
10 bytes
|
|
Pn
|
n-1 bytes
|
|
P*n
|
n-2 bytes
|
The last digit of the number is replaced with a letter corresponding
to positive or negative values. See the following table.
|
Units Digit
|
Positive
|
Negative
|
No Sign
|
|
0
|
{
|
}
|
0
|
|
1
|
A
|
J
|
1
|
|
2
|
B
|
K
|
2
|
|
3
|
C
|
L
|
3
|
|
4
|
D
|
M
|
4
|
|
5
|
E
|
N
|
5
|
|
6
|
F
|
O
|
6
|
|
7
|
G
|
P
|
7
|
|
8
|
H
|
Q
|
8
|
|
9
|
I
|
R
|
9
|
Positive values for I- and J-type fields are converted into neutral
(i.e., no sign) display values. The sign is preserved when converting packed
fields to display.
DISPLAY is not supported for Real or IEEE fields. Byte fields are
not affected by this option. Display fields in the input record are not
converted into display.
Many PC software packages import PRN files (these files are also
called delimited in some PC documentation). A PRN file has quotes around
character-fields and a comma between each field. Binary values are output in
ASCII with an optional leading sign. Not all applications accept PRN files; for
more precise conversion of data, use STExport.
PRN converts each input-field to a fixed-width output-field, filling
with trailing spaces where necessary. All binary values are converted into
their equivalent ASCII value, left-justified in their fields. The sign precedes
the ASCII value for the number and can be missing, "+", or
"-". See the ASCII output-option for the field width of each data-type.
Output fields with implied decimal places (see "Decimal Places" on page 213) are formatted with a
decimal point in the correct position. Like the ASCII option, Suprtool reserves
two extra columns for each output field with implied decimal places.
Lotus 1-2-3 accepts records only up to 240 bytes long. Because the
PRN option leaves room for the maximum value of any field, you may need to
restrict the number of output fields using the Extract command.
While some PC software allows alternate characters to be used to
delimit character fields, Lotus 1-2-3 accepts double quotes only. Since Lotus
1-2-3 rejects character fields that contains a double quote, Suprtool removes all double quotes from character
fields when generating the PRN format. Suprtool removes quotes by replacing
them with a space.
See STExport for a method of including header lines in the file to
be down-loaded.
Examples
One reason to use $stdlist as the output file (indicated by * as the
filename) is to obtain a quick listing of the ASCII fields in the input source.
The following example lists the cust-account, name-last, and name-first fields
of the m-customer dataset and separates them by two spaces:
>base store,5,READER {input
from a database}
>get m-customer {use
the m-customer dataset}
>extract cust-account {account
number will be first}
>extract "
" {two
spaces}
>extract name-last {the
customer's last name}
>extract "
" {two
more spaces}
>extract name-first {the
customer's first name}
>output * {output
the records to $stdlist}
>sort cust-account {sorted
by the dataset's key field}
>exit
The following examples demonstrate other combinations of options on
the Output command. The entire Issues chapter
of the manual should be reviewed for extended examples using the Output
command. Many Output options were intended for specific application areas.
>output newfile
>:file dtape;dev=tape;rec=40,20
>output *dtape
>output ksamfile,key,erase
>output accum,append
>output keyfile,key
>output transf,num,data
>output querynum,num,query
>output $null
If you want to find out
how many records are qualified by some selection criteria, without producing an
output file, send the output to $null. The Out= count on $stdlist, and the JCW
SuprtoolOutCount are both set to the number of qualifying records.
ELSE
While Suprtool does not
have traditional else logic in it's if command you can output all of the
records "discarded" for a given task out to a temporary filed named
ELSE.
This way you can output multiple files for a given task as in:
Notes
The output file must be an
"old", existing file if the Append or Erase option has been
specified. If you use a :File command to force Output to an old file without
specifying one of these options, Suprtool rejects the file.
If the record length of
the output file is not the same as expected by Suprtool, the records are
automatically truncated or expanded with either binary zeros or blanks. If the
blocking factor is not as expected, Suprtool automatically "reblocks"
the records. Thus, Suprtool can be used to reblock disc or tape files
economically into better block sizes in order to save disc space, or to improve
on-line access, or to speed batch access.
Directs output records to
be DBPUT into an IMAGE dataset. Put can be combined with Output to a file, but
if no Output command is entered, Suprtool defaults the output file to $null. It
is your responsibility to ensure that the output records match the format of
the target dataset. The DATA option of the Output command is the only valid
output option when Put is specified.
PUT setname [,database [,mode [,password]]]
(Default: base=Base, mode=1, pass=Creator)
Parameters
If database is not specified, setname
must be a valid dataset of the Base previously opened. You must have write
access to the dataset selected.
If database is included, the specified database is opened. The specified
database can be redefined to reside on another system or in a different
account/group via a :File command. The default open mode is 1 and the default
password is Creator. This Put database is closed after the task is completed,
unlike the database opened with Base. It is possible to copy records from one
database to another with Suprtool.
In session mode, Suprtool
prompts for the password if it is not
included in the command. In batch mode, it is necessary to specify a database
password without the password being echoed on the job stream listing. A special
database password is provided to allow for this. When a question mark
"?" is used as the database password, Suprtool prompts for the
password on the next physical input line without echoing. This occurs in batch
mode or in session mode.
Examples
For the first example, we assume that the D-SALES dataset is
designed to contain a week's worth of transactions. Each night, the transactions
from a week ago are moved to the monthly dataset: D-SALES-MON. The D-SALES and
D-SALES-MON datasets have exactly the same field declarations. The following
Suprtool task would move one day's transactions from D-SALES to D-SALES-MON.
>base store,1,write {requires
write access to database}
>get d-sales {read
the weekly dataset}
>if purge-date=000401 {select
one day's transactions}
>put d-sales-mon {adding
them to the monthly dataset}
>exit
For the next example, we assume that the D-SALES-MON dataset is in a
different database. We prompt for the password for both databases:
>base store,1,? {Suprtool
must prompt for password}
Password > {password
not echoed}
>get d-sales
>if purch-date=000401 {select
one day's transactions}
>put d-sales-mon,ostore,1,? {add
to OSTORE database}
Password > {password
not echoed}
>exit {the
output file defaults to $null}
This example shows how Suprtool can read an MPE disc file and Put
each record in a database:
>input dsales {"dsales"
has exactly the same format}
>put d-sales,store { as the d-sales dataset}
>exit
Improving Put
Performance with Deferred Output
Suprtool uses the standard
Image intrinsic DBPut to add entries from a dataset. This makes tasks with a
Put operation slower than the standard MR/NOBUF reads, but insures structural
integrity of the database and that any Third-Party Indexes are kept in sync.
You can reduce the time needed to Put dataset entries by enabling
deferred output for the Put database. When Set Defer is On and the Put database
is opened in mode-3 (exclusive), Suprtool calls DBCONTROL to notify IMAGE that
disc writes are to be deferred whenever possible. The database creator can
enable deferred output processing for all users of a database with DBUTIL
(enable base for autodefer).
Deferred output can improve the speed of DBPUT significantly, but it
has a major drawback: if the system crashes (i.e., you have a system failure or
a nonrecoverable power failure) while you are in deferred output mode, you must
RESTORE your database from tape. If Suprtool stops due to an error, or if you
abort Suprtool (i.e., break/abort or :abortjob) while the database is opened in
deferred output mode, your database does not have to be restored.
Omnidex
If you are adding records
to a dataset with Omnidex keys, you must have MPE/iX third-party indexing
enabled in your database, or you must run Suprtool with Omnidex's call
conversion facility.
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;xl="xl.pub.disc"
>base store
>input mpefile
>put d-sales {d-sales
has Omnidex keys}
>exit
Notes
If the dataset selected for
output is a master dataset, it is possible that some of the output records may
be duplicate key values. If this happens, Suprtool prints an error message and
terminates the task, unless you have enabled Set Ignore, in which case the
duplicates are counted and reported at the end of the task. Duplicate records
are not written to the output file.
To add individual entries into a dataset, specifying each field
value in ASCII, use the #Add command of Dbedit.
Prints a message on
$stdlist.
Q [ "string" ]
(Default: print a blank
line)
The string of up to 253
characters is printed on $stdlist. The string is truncated to the record width
of $stdlist. In many cases, job streams are limited to 80 or 132 characters.
The string must be embedded in quotes. Either single-quotes (') or
double-quotes (") are permitted. The quotes are not printed on $stdlist.
Use the Q command in usefiles for printing explanations. Put
:COMMENT in usefiles for a nonprinting comment line, then invoke the file with
the USEQ command.
Examples
The Q command is often combined with the Userpause command. The
example is a usefile that provides an explanation of how long a task takes:
>q
>q "We will select all transactions over $10,000. Since"
>q "there are many transactions, this task will take"
>q "some time (usually more than fifteen minutes)."
>q
>userpause "Press any key when you are ready to start."
Enables you to modify and
repeat any of the previous 1000 command lines.
REDO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default: redo the
previous command)
(Comma "," is
short for REDO)
The Redo command allows you to modify the commands before it
executes them. If you don't need to change them, use the Do command. Commands
are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered and the last 1000 are retained. Use
the :Listredo command to display the previous commands. You can redo a single
command, a range of commands, or the most recent command whose name matches a
string.
The Redo command uses MPE-style editing logic (D, I, R, U and >).
The default mode is to replace characters. To delete, type DDDD under the
characters to be removed. To insert, type I under the insertion spot, then the
new characters. To undo your changes, type U. To append to the end of the line,
use >xxx. To delete from the end of the line, use >DD. To replace at the
end of the line, use >Rxxx. And to erase the rest of the line, use D>. If
you prefer Qedit-style editing (Control-D, etc.), use the Before command
instead of the Redo command.
Examples
>listf @.soruce {"source"
is not spelled right}
NON-EXISTENT GROUP. (CIERR
908)
>redo {redo
most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last
command is printed}
our {you
enter changes to it}
listf @.source {edited
command is shown}
{you
press Return}
>listredo all
>redo 5
{redo
5th command in stack}
>redo {redo
previous command}
>redo -2 {redo
command before previous}
>redo 8/10 {redo
8th through 10th}
>redo -10/ {redo
-10 through last}
>redo purge {redo
last Purge command}
>redo purge temp {redo
last "purge temp"}
>redo @temp {redo
last containing "temp"}
Notes
The Redo command can be
abbreviated to a comma, as in MPEX. You cannot use ";" to combine
commands on the same line. The Suprredo file is always a temporary file. To
save more commands, use a :File command on the Suprredo file before you run
Suprtool:
:file suprredo;disc=5000
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
Hpmodify Keys
– Reference
Here are the MPE-style REDO sub-commands:
|
Directive
|
Effect
|
|
i
|
INSERT. If text follows the i, this text is inserted in the
current line starting at the i position.
|
|
r
|
REPLACE. If text follows the r, this text replaces the same number
of characters in the current line beginning at the r position.
|
|
d
|
DELETE. Deletes a character from the current line for each d
specified in the edit line. Note that "d d" does not specify a
range as it does in MPE V but simply deletes one character above each d.
Multiple d's may be followed by an INSERT or REPLACE operation.
|
|
d>
|
DELETE. Deletes to the end of the current line from the position
specified by d>. May be followed by an INSERT or REPLACE operation.
|
|
>
|
APPEND. If text follows the
>, this text is appended to the end of the current line. If a > without
text is positioned beyond the end of the current line, then a simple replacement
is performed instead.
|
|
>d
|
DELETE. Deletes from the end of the current line, right-to-left.
Multiple d's and INSERT and REPLACE strings may be specified after >.
|
|
>r
|
REPLACE. Replaces characters at the end of the command line. The last
(rightmost) character of the replacement string is at the end of the line.
|
|
c
|
CHANGE. Changes all occurrences
of one string to another in the current line starting at the c. The search
string and replace string must be properly delimited. A proper delimiter is a
non-alphabetic character (such as ' " or /). The substitution is
specified as cdelim search-string delim
[replace-string [delim]]. Omitting the replace-string causes occurrences of search-string to be deleted, with no
substitution.
|
|
u
|
UNDO. A single u in column one
cancels the most recent edit of the current line. Using the Undo command
twice in a row cancels all edits for the current line and re-establishes the
original, unedited line. If u is placed anywhere other than column one of the
current line, then a simple replacement is performed. Undo makes sense only
if you have a line on which you have performed some editing that can be
"undone."
|
|
other
|
Simple replacement. Any other character (not i, r, d, d>, >,
>d, >r, c, or u) will be put into the current line at the position
above where it is placed, replacing any existing character. Simple
replacement also occurs for the editing characters i, r, c, or > if they
are not followed by text; or if > appears at or beyond the current end of
line.
|
Hpmodify
Examples
Here are examples of the MPE-style REDO sub-commands in action:
|
Edit
|
Action
|
|
u
|
First occurrence undoes the previous edits. The u must be in column one.
|
|
u
|
Second occurrence undoes all edits on the current line. The u must be in column one.
|
|
rxyz
|
Replaces the current text with xyz starting at the position of r.
|
|
xyz
|
Replaces the current text with xyz starting at the position of x.
|
|
ixyz
|
Inserts xyz into the current line, starting at the position of the
i.
|
|
ddd
|
Deletes three characters, one above each d.
|
|
d
xyz
|
Deletes a single character above the d, skips one space, then replaces the current text with xyz
starting at the position of x.
|
|
ddixyz
|
Deletes two characters, then inserts xyz in the current line
starting at the position of the i.
|
|
d d
|
Deletes one character above the first d, skips two spaces and deletes a second character above the
second d. It does not delete a
range of characters, making it unlike the MPE V version of Redo.
|
|
d d>xyz
|
Deletes a single character above the first d, skips two spaces and deletes to the end of the line beginning
at the second d, and then places
xyz at the end of the line.
|
|
>xyz
|
Appends xyz to the end of the current line.
|
|
>ddxyz
|
Deletes the last two characters from the end of the current line
and then places xyz at the end of the line.
|
|
>rxyz
|
Replaces the last three characters in the current line with xyz.
|
|
>ixyz
|
Appends xyz to the end of the line. In this case, the i command is superfluous, because >
accomplishes the same result. Using >xyz would be sufficient.
|
|
c/ab/def
|
Changes all occurrences of ab to def.
|
|
c"ab"
|
Deletes all occurrences of "ab".
|
|
cxyz
|
Replaces the current text with cxyz, starting at c. Because delimiters have not been
specified (as they were in the previous two examples), this is a simple
replacement with the four characters.
|
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent file and can therefore be
used from another session. You can use the Set
redo command to specify a filename to save your redo commands. See "Redo" on page 262 for details.
Resets aspects of the
current task.
RESET [ ALL | @ | command
[...] ]
(Default:
Delete/Sort/Key/If/List)
Parameters
More than one command can be Reset at once by entering several commands separated by a space or a
comma. If no parameters are specified, Suprtool cancels the previous Sort, Key,
If, Delete, and List commands. The other commands remain unchanged.
If ALL is specified, all of the Input and Output commands are
canceled and database/files are closed. In fact, the only options that are not
reset to the initial condition are Define, Item, and Set options.
Examples
You began to specify a sort, but then you discovered that you
specified the wrong database so you decided to start all over:
>base ostore,5,READER {open
for read access only}
>get d-sales
>sort cust-account
>reset all {oops,
wrong database}
>base store,5,READER {now
we have correct one}
In the next example, you entered an incorrect If command:
>if delivered>000401 {wrong
field used}
>reset if {only
reset the If command}
>if purchased>000401 { and specify it again}
This time both the If command and the Extract commands are
incorrect:
>if delivered>000401 {wrong
field used}
>extract delivered { in both commands}
>reset if,extract {only
reset the If and Extract}
>if purchased>000401 { commands and start again}
>extract purchased,account
Notes
By resetting certain commands, other commands are also
reset. For example, resetting the Base command resets almost all other
commands, except the Define and Output commands. Resetting the Put command
closes the output database when the database for the Put command is different
from the input database. Resetting the Chain, Get, or Input command resets
everything except the Base, Define and Table commands. Resetting the Table
command resets everything except the Base and Define commands. Resetting either
the Define or Item command resets both Define and Item settings.
Specify a select statement
for the currently open SQL database. The select command supports all of the
features of the select command of the open SQL database. Only one select
command can be specified at a time.
SELECT select-command
Allbase sorts data:
>select * from user.account@emp order by ename
Suprtool sorts data:
>select * from user.account@emp
>sort ename
The select-command can
contain any expression or clause that is supported by the SQL database. Some
features (e.g., ORDER BY) may be done faster by Suprtool (e.g., the Sort
command).
Some Select commands can
exceed the 256-character command line limitation. The Select command, however,
can be considerably larger if you use the $read feature of the Select command.
This feature is similar to the If command $read feature and is invoked by
entering the Select command on a line by itself (unlike If, you do not specify
$read explicitly).
>select
-ename,salary,tax_paid
-from scott.employee
-order by ename
-//
>
The Suprtool prompt changes from ">" to "-"
after entering the Select command by itself on a line. The entire command gets
sent to the Select command parser after terminating with two slash marks (//)
or a blank line.
You might realize greater
performance gains with the Select command if you specify only the columns that
you need in your output file for either tables with many items or when you need
only a couple of items from a given table.
The following Select command
>select col1,col2,col3 from user.account@emp
may be faster than
>select * from user.account@emp
Your mileage may vary.
Enables or disables
certain operating options within Suprtool. These options are not reset by Xeq
or Reset commands.
SET ALLBASE ROWS number
SET ARITHMETIC CLASSIC|IEEE
SET BASECLOSE ON|OFF
SET BLOCKSIZE [size]
SET BUFFER [size]
SET CLEANCHAR <string>
SET CURRENCYSYMBOL <string>
SET DATE CUTOFF [number]
SET DATE FORCECENTURY ON|OFF
SET DATE IFYY2000ERROR ON|OFF
SET DATE MAPTOPHDATE8 ON|OFF
SET DECIMALSYMBOL <string>
SET DEFER ON|OFF
SET DUMPONERROR ON|OFF
SET EOFREAD ON|OFF
SET FILECODE number
SET FILENAME
Help|Link|Edit|Hint|Export|Outcount filename
SET FIRSTREC [0|1]
SET HINTS ON|OFF
SET IFCHECK ON|OFF
SET IGNORE ON|OFF
SET ITEMABBREVIATEDATE ON|OFF
SET INTERACTIVE ON|OFF
SET ITEMLOCK <fieldname>
SET LABELLEDTAPEREWIND ON|OFF
SET LIMITS [Mpe ON|OFF] [ReadOnly ON|OFF]
[Tablesize size]
SET LIST DATE number
SET LIST PCL [0|1|2|3|4|5|6]
SET LIST TIME number
SET LOCK [number]
SET NLS [number]
SET NUMBUG ON | OFF
SET OPENMODE [number]
SET ORACLE ROWS number (not supported in Suprtool/MPE)
SET ORACLE INTEGER ON |
OFF (not supported in Suprtool/MPE)
SET ORACLE OPENFIX ON|OFF (not supported in
Suprtool/MPE)
SET ORACE ZERONULL ON | OFF (not supported in
Suprtool/MPE)
SET PATTERN NEW|OLD
SET PREFETCH [number]
SET PRIVMODE ON|OFF
SET PROGRESS Percent [number] Minimum [number]
SET PROMPT character
SET REALMAP ON|OFF (has no effect in
Suprtool/MPE)
SET RECOVER ON|OFF
SET REDO filename
SET SORTFAST ON|OFF
SET SQUEEZE [ON|OFF]
SET STATISTICS ON|OFF
SET SUBSYSTEM ON|OFF
SET SUSPEND ON|OFF
SET THOUSANDSYMBOL <string>
SET USERLABELS ON|OFF
SET VARSUB ON|OFF
SET VARSUBCOMPAT ON|OFF
SET VARSUBDEBUG ON|OFF
SET WARNINGS ON|OFF
SET XLTRIM ON|OFF
Each option is its own Set command. That is, you cannot specify
multiple options in the same command. Instead, use multiple Set commands. For
example, to Set Squeeze Off and to define a PCL device for the List command,
you would specify two Set commands:
>set squeeze off
>set list pcl 1
or
>set squeeze off;set list pcl 1
|
Add system-wide Set commands to the Suprmgr.Pub.Sys configuration
file.
|
When Suprtool starts running, all the options are set to initial
"factory settings". The Suprmgr file may contain Set commands to
override the initial values. Set commands remain set until the end of the
Suprtool run, or until changed by another Set command.
|
Some commands have optional parameters (e.g., the numeric value of
Set Lock). If the command is specified without a value, the default that
Suprtool uses may be different from the program's initial value. When that is
the case, the command description will show the initial value and the
default-when-omitted value.
SET
ALLBASE ROWS number
(Initially: 100)
If you open an Allbase
database, Suprtool reads more than one row at a time when processing the input
source. By default, Suprtool fetches 100 rows at a time. You can vary the
number of rows that Suprtool fetches with Set Allbase Rows. The minimum number
of rows is 1 and the maximum number is 990. You must specify Set Allbase Rows
before entering the Select command.
SET
ARITHMETIC Classic | IEEE
(Initially: depends)
Specify which data-type
Suprtool should use for arithmetic expressions by using Set Arithmetic. The
default is Classic for Suprtool/V, and IEEE for Suprtool/iX and Suprtool/UX.
This option is only supported in Suprtool/iX.
SET
BASECLOSE ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Use Set Baseclose On to
ensure that Suprtool closes your database whenever it exits. The default is for
Suprtool to hold the database open when it suspends (e.g., when returning to
Qedit).
SET
BLOCKSIZE [size]
(Initially & Default:
<none>)
When Suprtool is copying
an MPE or KSAM file, it always attempts to duplicate the record size and
blocking factor of the original file. In all other cases, Suprtool chooses an
optimal blocking factor, but restricts the total block size to 2048 words. When
Suprtool is computing the block size, it always chooses the smallest block size
divisible by 128. Specifying an explicit block size forces Suprtool to pick the
largest block size that can fit in the specified block size and still be
divisible by 128.
Users may wish to add the Set Blocksize command to the Suprmgr file.
Increasing the block size has two potential problems: small files may consume
more disc space, and reading the file buffered requires more memory for the MPE
file buffers. The maximum block size allowed is 8,192 words.
SET
BUFFER [ size ]
(Initially: depends;
Default: no change)
Set Buffer varies the maximum
number of words that Suprtool allocates for input and output buffers. This
buffer size limits the number of data blocks that Suprtool reads at a time.
Suprtool overrides the maximum buffer size specified, if that is
necessary to get the task done. For example, when the blocks size of the file
is greater than buffer maximum specified.
The maximum value is 14,336 words in Suprtool/V and 24,576 words in
Suprtool/iX. The default value used by Suprtool is the largest size that fits
in the available data structures and still allows Suprtool to get the job done.
Using Set Buffer to reduce the size of the buffer reduces the size of the stack
that Suprtool uses for copy operations. Suprtool/V always uses a buffer size of
4096 words when sorting. This leaves the maximum amount of room in the stack
for the sorting operation.
Some utilities that
intercept all file system calls can have problems with the large read/write
requests that Suprtool makes (e.g., some versions of Omnidex and Netbase
versions less than 0.9.4). You can avoid this problem by adding a Set Buffer
command to Suprmgr.Pub.Sys to reduce the default buffer size. Suprtool
automatically detects when a file is considered Netbase remote and adjusts the
buffer size for you. This requires Netbase 0.9.4 version or higher.
SET CleanChar " "
(Default: space)
By default, Suprtool will
replace any of the characters specified in the clean command with a space. You
can specify what character to use to
replace any of the characters that qualify with the following set command:
This will set the character to replace any of the qualifying
"to be cleaned" characters to be a period.
If you want to Clean a field and not replace with any character you
just need to set the clean character in the following manner:
SET CurrencySymbol "$"
(Default: Dollar Sign)
This setting is used to
change the Currency character which is used to edit the data in a field used by
the $Number function. The defined currency symbol(s) is stripped from the field
prior to converting to number, in the
$number function. The CurrencySymbol can be up to four characters.
The default character for the Currency Symbol is the Dollar sign.
SET
DATE CUTOFF [ number ]
(Initially: 10; Default:
00)
Date Cutoff tells Suprtool
what century to use when Suprtool generates the date value from the $date and
$stddate functions. This setting only affects the date values generated by the
$date and $stddate function in the If and Extract commands. This does not
affect user data.
Versions of Suprtool without Set Date Cutoff would assume 19 for the
century for any user-specified $date with a two-digit year.
Now with Set Date Cutoff xx,
Suprtool assumes the following: a value of 20 for the century if the two-digit
year specified in the $date or $stddate functions is less than the value of Set
Date Cutoff; a value of 19 for the century if the two-digit year is greater
than or equal to Set Date Cutoff.
The initial value of Set Date Cutoff is 10. Therefore the default
behavior in $date and $stddate is to treat the two-digit years with values of
00..09 as 2000..2009, and the two-digit years with values of 10..99 as
1910..1999.
|
yy Value in $date
|
With Cutoff 10
|
With Cutoff 25
|
|
00
|
2000
|
2000
|
|
…
|
…
|
…
|
|
09
|
2009
|
2009
|
|
10
|
1910
|
2010
|
|
11
|
1911
|
2011
|
|
…
|
…
|
…
|
|
24
|
1924
|
2024
|
|
25
|
1925
|
1925
|
|
26
|
1926
|
1926
|
|
…
|
…
|
…
|
|
99
|
1999
|
1999
|
We recommend that you always provide a four-digit year when using
$date. However, for reasons of backward compatibility, we introduced Set Date
Cutoff. See "Date ForceCentury" on page 249 for more information.
$Stddate and Set
Date Cutoff
When $stddate has to convert from a date in only a two-digit format,
the conversion to the four-digit date will use the value in Set Date Cutoff.
For example,
>get sales-detail
>set date cutoff 15
>def new-ship-date,1,4,double
>item ship-date,date,mmddyy
>ext order-no / sales-amount
>ext new-ship-date = $stddate(ship-date)
>out salesinfo,link
>xeq
In this example, if any ship-date has a year of 14 or less, then the
century applied to the new-ship-date field will be 20. Ship-dates with a year
of 15 or more will have a century of 19 applied.
SET
DATE FORCECENTURY ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Set Date ForceCentury On
will not allow a yy date to be entered in the $date function, it will force the
user to enter a full ccyy date.
>set date forcecentury on
>item date-field,date,ccyymmdd
>if date-field >= $date(00/12/10)
Error:You must specify the century or Set Date ForceCentury off
The default value for Set Date ForceCentury is off.
SET
DATE IFYY2000ERROR ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
By default Suprtool
considers dates with a two-digit century component from the $date and $today
functions to be invalid when the dates resolve to be greater than 1999 and the
If operation is a relative operation (e.g., greater than or equal to). You can
control whether Suprtool considers this condition an error by using the following
Set command:
>set Date Ifyy2000Error Off
The following example shows what is considered to be an error by the
If command and how the Set command can turn off the error check:
>def a,1,6
>item a,date,yymmdd
>if a >= $today
^
Error: Cannot use a date
beyond 1999 for this format
>set date ifyy2000error off
We have chosen this condition to be an error by default because when
the $today or $date function in the If command resolves a date in a yymmdd
format to a value beyond 1999, the result is not always a useful value. For
example, a December 10, 2000 date in a yymmdd format would have a value of
001210 and comparisons to this value could be logically incorrect.
If you would have included a Delete command in a dataset selection
task, you could have removed all of your records.
SET
DATE MAPTOPHDATE8 ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
This set command will
change any item command reference to phdate to mean phdate8, for assistance in
converting to the newer phdate format found in PowerHouse version 8.19 and
higher.
The set command:
>set date MapToPhdate8 on
only changes the reference to phdate8 in the item command, it does
not change references that already exist in self-describing files nor does it
change the data.
With this setting turned on any Item command reference, such as:
will actually mean phdate8.
SET DecimalSymbol " "
(Default: period)
This setting is used to
change the Decimal character which is used to edit the data in a field used by
the $Number function.
The default character for the Decimal Symbol is a period.
SET
DEFER ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
DEFER requests Suprtool to
use DBCONTROL for faster "deferred-output" when doing Puts in the
output phase or Deletes in the input phase. In deferred output mode, IMAGE
writes are not posted immediately to disc. If the system crashes while you are
in deferred output mode (i.e., you have a system failure or a nonrecoverable
power failure), you must RESTORE your database from tape. If Suprtool stops due
to an error, or if you abort Suprtool (i.e., break/abort or :abortjob) while
the database is opened with deferred output, you do not have to restore the
database.
Set Defer On requires that
the database be opened in mode-3 (exclusive). If you do not open the database
in mode-3, Suprtool prints a warning and does the Put or Delete task anyway
(without calling DBCONTROL). The database creator can also enable deferred
output for all users of a database with DBUTIL (enable base for autodefer).
SET
DUMPONERROR ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
With DUMPONERROR, Suprtool
attempts to produce a formatted listing of records that cause an IMAGE error.
The information printed may include the input record number, the output record
number and the data values of the record. Suprtool uses current options of the
List command to print the data values. If no List command is specified,
Suprtool uses the List defaults.
SET
EDITSTOPERROR ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
An edit mask is limited
to 32 characters in total for both numeric and byte type fields. If data
overflows the edit-mask, by default Suprtool will fill that field with
asterisks. To have Suprtool stop when it encounters an overflow when applying
the edit-mask, just turn on editstoperror:
This will force Suprtool
to stop if there is data left over to place when applying the edit-mask. With
numeric-type fields, leading zeroes do not cause overflow. With byte-type
fields, spaces do not cause overflow.
SET
EOFREAD ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Suprtool's Get command
reads to the highwater mark for detail datasets, and to the capacity of the
dataset for master datasets.
Set Eofread On forces Suprtool to read to the capacity for both
master and detail datasets.
If Set Eofread is used, it must be specified before the Get command.
Hint: Use HowMessy to see the highwater mark of your detail datasets.
SET
FASTREAD [ ON | OFF ]
This command has no
effect on Suprtool for MPE.
SET
FILECODE [ number ]
(Initially: 0; Default: no
change)
When Suprtool writes to an
old file (Output,Append and
Output,Erase are the only cases), it leaves the filecode of the output file
unchanged. When Suprtool creates a new file
with the Output,Ask or Output,Query option, it gives the file a special
filecode (1071 and 1084 respectively). When the input file has a nonzero
filecode, Suprtool carries that filecode over to the new output file. See
"Output Command [O]" on page 229 for details on Output
options such as Ask, Erase, and Query. To convert a self-describing file into a
non-SD file, see "Suprtool and
Self-Describing Files" on page 69.
In all other cases, new files
created by Suprtool have a default filecode of zero. You can specify an
alternate default filecode using Set Filecode.
Specifying Set Filecode forces Suprtool to create the output file
with a specific filecode whenever it was going to use zero. To be effective,
this Set command should be added to the Suprmgr file. To configure Suprtool to
use the filecode 222 on output files, you would add this line to your Suprmgr
file:
This feature is useful for MPEX users who wish to manage Suprtool
output files. For example, to find all of the Suprtool output files you would
do the following:
:run mpex.pub.vesoft
%!listf @.@.@(code='222')
%exit
Of course, you can still use a :File command explicitly to override
the filecode of the output file.
SET FILENAME Help | Link |
Edit | Hint | Export | Outcount filename
You can change six
of the seven built-in file names. The only filename you cannot change is
Suprmgr.Pub.Sys. We recommend that you add these Set commands to
Suprmgr.Pub.Sys. There are six options to Set Filename, one per built-in file
name. SET FILENAME Help | Link | Edit | Hint | Export | Outcount
Examples
In these examples we
assume that you want to move Suprtool and all its files to the Robelle group of
the Dist account. We also assume that you wanted to rename the suprlink program
from Suprlink to Linkprog.
>Set Filename
Help suprhelp.robelle.dist
>Set Filename Link
linkprog.robelle.dist
>Set Filename
Edit dbedhelp.robelle.dist
>Set Filename
Hint suprhint.robelle.dist
>Set Filename
Export stexport.robelle.dist
SET
FIRSTREC [ 0 | 1 ]
(Initial & Default:
depends on file type)
FIRSTREC forces Suprtool
to choose the first record number of the input file to be zero or one. If the
input file is a KSAM file, this option overrides the setting in the KSAM key
file.
This Set option is included primarily for RPG users. Any RPG program
that takes advantage of KSAM record numbers assumes that the record numbers
start at one and not zero, even though the KSAM file itself must be built with
the first record defined as zero (RPG subtracts one before reading from the
KSAM file).
SET
HINTS ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
By default, Suprtool
provides all users with a "hint of the day" each time they enter
Suprtool. These hints introduce people to Suprtool features that they may be
missing. You must have the file Suprhint.Help.Robelle on your system. To
disable hints, put Set Hints Off in Suprmgr.Pub.Sys.
SET
IFCHECK ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
With Set Ifcheck On, the
If command produces an error if any field used in the If command is not
contained entirely within the input file record. For compatibility reasons,
users may wish to disable this error checking by turning Set Ifcheck Off.
SET
IGNORE ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
IGNORE tells Suprtool to
continue processing if there are errors in these situations:
"duplicate-key" errors in writing to a KSAM file or IMAGE master
dataset, "chain-head" errors in deleting entries from an input
dataset or putting records to a detail dataset, a record changed before
Suprtool could delete it, division by zero when doing an If, or invalid numeric
data in an input file when doing an If.
SET
INITEXTENTS ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Set InitExtents setting is
an experimental setting designed to reduce the length of the extent B-tree for
the creation of output files. Turning Set InitExtents on will make the Initial
Extents equal to the maximum number of extents on the creation of an output
file. Keep in mind that that this will increase the size of the chunks that it
may need for large files. Consequently you may experience Out of Disc Space
errors in some cases if large chunks of disc are not available.
SET
ITEMABBREVIATEDATE ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
The specification of the Date format within
the Item command by default expects the entire keyword. For example for the
date format of Calendar, you would have to specify the entire token of
Calendar. If you Set ItemAbbreviateDate On, you would only have to specify CAL
for the Calendar date format.
SET
ITEMLOCK <fieldname>
(Initially: Spaces)
Suprtool supports Item
Level locking thru the Set ItemLock <fieldname> command. The set command
must be specified after the Base and Get/Chain command has been specified and
is only invoked for Delete and Update operations. For example:
!run suprtool.pub.robelle
base order,1,;
get dline
set itemlock item-num
del
out save,link
exit
This field/setting is
reset after each task. Item-Level
locking is not invoked for PUT operations.
There are some cases
where Suprtool needs to use the "@" lock descriptor, when doing a
dblock-mode 5 which is an unconditional Item Level lock but Dbutil show dbname
locks will show it as a Dataset Level lock.
SET
INTERACTIVE ON | OFF
(Initially: depends)
If you run Suprtool from a
session, Set Interactive is On. If you run Suprtool from a batch job or with
Stdin or Stdlist re-directed, Set Interactive is Off. When it is On, Suprtool
waits for answers to questions and continues processing even if there are
errors. When it is Off, Suprtool aborts on any error, assumes the
"correct" answer to any question, and generally acts as if there is
not an intelligent being typing in the command. Suprtool chooses the
"correct" answer, which allows the task to continue. In most cases,
this is the default answer. However, there are cases where Suprtool picks a
different answer from the default. For example, an "output
filename,erase" command has a default answer of "no," but with
Interactive Off, Suprtool uses the answer "yes."
However, if you run Suprtool on a Remote Session that was created
from a batch job, Set Interactive is On even though you are NOT interactive. If
you wish to have proper batch error processing, your first command after :Run
Suprtool should be Set Interactive Off. Set Interactive Off is also useful when
automating on-line tasks with usefiles:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=4; &
info="set
interactive off;use usefile"
SET
LABELLEDTAPEREWIND ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
With certain versions of MPE/iX, the rewind
operation (fcontrol 5) failed on SCSI DAT drives. Before Suprtool can read the
data on a tape, it must read the labels first. That means the tape must be
returned to the BOT. If the tape does not rewind properly, you can turn this
off with Set Labelledtaperewind Off.
SET LIMITS [MPE ON|OFF]
[READONLY ON|OFF] [Tablesize size]
(Initially CM: MPE ON,
ReadOnly OFF, Tablesize 1 megabyte)
(Initially NM: MPE ON,
ReadOnly OFF, Tablesize 2,047 megabytes)
When Set Limits MPE is
Off, you cannot execute any MPE
command (e.g., :Purge). This is an irreversible option -- once disabled, it
cannot be enabled again by the user. This option also applies to MPE commands
executed inside Dbedit and Suprlink.
Table Size
The Table command allows you to load large tables. Once these tables
reach the size of real memory on your machine, performance starts to degrade.
Setting Tablesize restricts the total amount of table space to the specified
number of megabytes. We suggest leaving at least one megabyte of real memory
for MPE.
It is not necessary to enter both parameters in order to change one.
>set limits tablesize 2 {MPE
ability unchanged}
Due to internal restrictions in the CM version of Suprtool, the
maximum Tablesize is fifteen megabytes. The NM version of Suprtool is
restricted to 2,047 megabytes per table. We recommend that you set the
Tablesize to be around 50% of your total memory.
Read Only
Suprtool normally allows any user with the proper access
capabilities to add, update and delete records to a database. To prevent users
from accidentally updating their database, we provide the following setting
within Suprtool:
The ReadOnly setting, once turned on, cannot be turned off for the
current run of Suprtool. This disables all commands that potentially change
data for the specified database.
If Set Limits ReadOnly is enabled, the following commands from
within Suprtool and Dbedit will not be processed and will return an error:
Suprtool
·
Delete
·
Put
·
Update
Dbedit
·
Add
·
Change
·
Delete
·
Modify
You can Set Limits Readonly on the command line using the Info
String and Parm option. For example the following command file can be used to
restrict who has write access to a given database. In this example only the Mgr
user is allowed write access:
IF HPUSER = "MGR" THEN
run Suprtool.pub.robelle
else
run
suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=8;info='set limits readonly on'
endif
SET LIST option value
Use Set List to configure default values for the List command. You
can configure the default date, time, and format for LaserJet listings.
SET
LIST Date number
(Initially: 0)
When you select page
headings with the List command by specifying a title, each page includes
today's date. By default, this date is formatted as mmm dd, ccyy (e.g., Mar 20,
2000). Use Set List Date to specify a different default date format for future
List commands (e.g., Set List Date 2). The valid date formats are as follows:
|
Value
|
Format
|
Example
|
|
0 (default)
|
mmm dd, ccyy
|
Mar 20, 2000
|
|
1
|
yy/mm/dd
|
00/03/20
|
|
2
|
mm/dd/yy
|
03/20/00
|
|
3
|
dd/mm/yy
|
20/03/00
|
|
4
|
dd mmmyy
|
20 Mar00
|
SET
LIST PCL [ 0|1|2|3|4|5|6 ]
(Initial & Default: 0)
Use Set List PCL to
configure the default format for LaserJet listings. This option defines the
List device as a PCL device and indicates the orientation and font for the
report. Set List PCL affects only the List command; it is ignored by the Output
command. PCL stands for Printer Command Language, which is an HP standard for
printers. The LaserJet is one of the first PCL devices to be released by HP.
By default, Suprtool assumes that your List output device is not
PCL-compatible (List PCL 0).
PCL 1. To print the Suprtool List output in Landscape mode (across the wide
part of the paper) with the tiny Lineprinter font (16.66 pitch or 8 lines per
inch), you should do the following (this setting prints 175 columns per line):
>:comment Maximum of 175
columns with this font
>set list pcl 1
>:comment You will need
LaserJet with proper font cartridge
>list device laser123
PCL 2. To print the listing in Courier font, Landscape mode, 6 lines per
inch, and 100 columns wide, use:
>set list pcl 2
>list device laserjet
PCL 3. This option selects the "standard" Portrait orientation
with the Courier font of the LaserJet (80 columns across by 60 lines). You
would use Set List PCL 3 when you insert a Font cartridge that overrides the
default font (e.g., 92286F cartridge).
PCL 4. Selects Portrait orientation and Lineprinter font of the L cartridge
(and others). This option prints 132 columns across the page by 80 lines.
PCL 5. Prints 80 columns on A4 paper by slightly narrowing the space
between columns.
PCL 6. Prints tiny letters in Landscape mode on legal-size paper. This
gives you 223 columns per line.
The PCL options, with the exception of PCL 5, were designed and
tested with North American letter-size paper. Suprtool can adjust the number of
rows and columns for each option to match A4 if you add 2000 to the PCL code.
You can also select the ASCII character set (instead of the default Roman-8
character set) by adding 1000 to the PCL code. See "List Command [L]" on page 219 for more details.
Here is a complete table of the PCL codes:
|
PCL
|
L/P
|
Font
|
A4 paper Rows x Columns
|
Letter-size Rows x Columns
|
Notes
|
|
1
|
L
|
lp
|
58 x 188
|
60 x 175
|
|
|
2
|
L
|
courier
|
43 x 110
|
45 x 100
|
|
|
3
|
P
|
courier
|
64 x 77
|
60 x 80
|
"standard"
|
|
4
|
P
|
lp
|
85 x 128
|
80 x 132
|
|
|
5
|
P
|
courier
|
64 x 80
|
60 x 80
|
A4-squeeze
|
|
6
|
L
|
lp
|
60 x 223
|
60 x 223
|
legal-size
|
L and P mean Landscape or Portrait orientation.
SET
LIST Time number
(Initially: 1)
When you select page
headings with the List command by specifying a title, each page includes the
current time. By default, the time is in 24-hour format (e.g., 23:02). Use Set
List Time to specify a different default time format for future List commands
(e.g., Set List Time 2). The valid time formats are as follows:
|
Value
|
Format
|
Example
|
|
0
|
none
|
|
|
1 (default)
|
24-hour
|
23:02
|
|
2
|
AM/PM
|
11:02PM
|
SET
LOCK [ number ]
(Initially: 1; Default:
1000)
There are three different
locking strategies that Suprtool uses for the Delete, Put, and Update commands.
A complete discussion of locking is found in the IMAGE section of "Suprtool
Issues and Solutions".
Set Lock 0. Locks the dataset(s) at the beginning of the task and unlocks it at
the end. This option is good for middle-of-the-night tasks that are doing lots
of Puts, Deletes, or Updates.
Set Lock 1 (initial
value). Lock the dataset and unlock it around every
Delete, Put and Update. This takes longer, but provides less database
contention.
Set Lock n. Lock the
dataset every n database transactions (Puts, Deletes, or Updates). This option
is maintained as a compromise between Set Lock 0 and Set Lock 1.
SET
MakeAbsent [ On|Off ]
Set MakeAbsent On, tells
the prefetch module to make pages that are in memory to be released sooner.
This feature is only relevant if prefetch is turned on with a
setting of 1-5, which controls the size of a prefetch. Set MakeAbsent On has no
impact if prefetch is turned off. For
more information on this setting and its impact please read the following
article from our web site at:
http://www.robelle.com/tips/st-performance.html
SET NLS
[number]
(Initially: 0 or
NLDATALANG JCW)
Use Set NLS with MPE files
to specify the language to be used for sorting Character-type fields (see
"Native Language Support" on page 73). The number corresponds to an NLS language;
you cannot use the NLS language name. Suprtool uses the value of the NLDATALANG
JCW to set the default NLS language. The common language numbers are:
|
Number
|
Language
|
|
00
|
Native-3000
|
|
01
|
American
|
|
02
|
Canadian-French
|
|
03
|
Danish
|
|
04
|
Dutch
|
|
05
|
English
|
|
06
|
Finnish
|
|
07
|
French
|
|
08
|
German
|
|
09
|
Italian
|
|
10
|
Norwegian
|
|
11
|
Portuguese
|
|
12
|
Spanish
|
|
13
|
Swedish
|
SET
Numbug [ On|Off ]
The $number function
had a bug whereby it would add on two zeroes and or bad data if the input
number did not have a decimal point. We have fixed the bug so that the number function no longer adds the two digits
on the end in error.
However, some users
worked around this issue by doing the following:
>extract target =
$truncate($number(conv-field) / 100)
Since some users, used
this work around, the fix to the $number function will then return incorrect
results. Therefore, we added the set numbug command to have Suprtool revert
from the correct behaviour to continue to have the bug.
By default, Suprtool
will just convert the number and not add on the data at the end, however, if
you have used the work around then you
can add the command:
to the script directly
or globally in your suprmgr file.
SET
OPENMODE [ number ]
(Initial & Default: 1)
By default, Suprtool opens
databases in mode-1 when the mode is omitted from the Base command. Using Set
Openmode, you can specify an alternate mode for the Base command. A common
choice would be Set Openmode 5, so that Suprtool would allow only read-access to
the database (disabling the Delete command, for example).
SET
ORACLE ROWS number
(Not supported in MPE)
This option is not
available in the MPE version.
SET
ORACLE OPENFIX ON|OFF
(Initially: OFF)
This option is not
available in the MPE version.
SET
ORACLE INTEGER ON|OFF
(Initially: OFF)
This option is not available in the MPE version.
SET
ORACLE PassShift ON|OFF
(Initially: OFF)
This option is not available in the MPE version.
SET
ORACLE ZERONULL ON|OFF
(Initially: OFF)
This option is not available in
the MPE version.
SET
PATTERN NEW | OLD
(Initially: NEW)
Prior to Suprtool version
3.1, there was no method of checking for the "@", "#",
"?", or "~" characters in a pattern. Version 3.1 introduced
a new pattern-matching routine, adding an escape character "&",
and two new reserved characters "^" and "!". Old Suprtool
tasks that look for the specific characters &, ^, or ! will not work with
the new pattern-matching routine. Users who are concerned about this can add
the following command to their Suprmgr.Pub.Sys file:
SET
PREFETCH [ number ]
(Initially: 0; Default: no
change)
Suprtool can read data
directly from disc into memory with multirecord NOBUF reads. However, Suprtool
is often slowed down on MPE/iX while waiting for the file system to satisfy its
read requests. Suprtool can increase its throughput by using prefetch on MPE/iX
and instructing MPE/iX's memory manager to read the data from disc to memory
ahead of time. This way, Suprtool doesn't have to wait when it needs the data
because the data it is already in memory.
The Set Prefetch command tells the memory manager how far ahead of
Suprtool it should fetch data. Setting this number too low won't give the
memory manager sufficient time to get the data into memory before Suprtool
needs it. Setting the number too high may mean that on a busy system the data
will be overwritten before Suprtool gets a chance to use it.
Due to changes in MPE memory management in more recent versions of
MPE, performance improvements from prefetching data has decreased and in some
cases, such as systems with a large amount of memory, prefetching shows little
or no performance gain and may impact other users. It is for this reason that
we have changed the default value to zero, or off.
In short our advice at this stage is for you to try different values
of prefetch and see if you see performance improvements with some key tasks,
however since we are not seeing the performance gains we did 15 years ago, when
prefetch was implemented we are turning it off.
Suprtool/iX ignores the Set Prefetch value when reading from a
remote file or database, or from a KSAM/V, KSAM/XL, circular, or RIO file. Set
Prefetch is ignored by Suprtool/V.
SET
PRIVMODE ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
Suprtool requires
privileged mode to quickly scan IMAGE datasets. You can force Suprtool to read
a dataset using DBGET by turning Set Privmode Off, but Suprtool runs about five
times slower. You must specify Set Privmode Off before using the Base command.
To enable fast serial reading, turn Set Privmode On and reopen the database
with the Base command. This feature is intended for cases where bugs in MPE are
causing Suprtool to fail.
SET PROGRESS Percent [ number ] Minimum [ number ]
(Initial & Defaults:
Percent 5, Minimum 10000 (MPE/V) 50000 (MPE/iX))
The Set Progress command
is used to turn the Suprtool progress report feature on or off. The PERCENT
value specified tells Suprtool by which percentage increment to report the
progress messages of any given input or output phase. The allowed range for set
progress is from 0 to 25, the default is every 5 percent. If the PERCENT
parameter is not specified, then the next parameter is considered to be the
PERCENT value. This is to remain compatible with some earlier pre-release
versions of Suprtool.
The MINIMUM value is the minimum number of records that an input
file must have in order for the progress reports to be printed out. If the
MINIMUM value is set to 15000, then the input file must have at least 15000
records or else progress messages are not printed out for the entire task. This
value allows the user to turn off progress messages when reading smaller files.
The default value for the Suprtool/V version of Suprtool is 10000 records, and
the default value for the Suprtool/iX version of Suprtool is 50000 records. To
always print progress messages, just set the minimum value to 0.
Suprtool does not produce any progress messages under the following
conditions:
1.
Set Progress is zero.
2.
Output is to $stdlist via the
Output * or List commands.
3.
Chain command has been
specified.
4.
The number of records from the
input source is less than the minimum value.
Suprtool checks whether or not to print a progress message at the
end of each buffer (for NOBUF/MR reads). Consequently, not all progress
increments are reported for small files or datasets.
Suprtool reports the phase that it is in: whether input phase, sort
phase, output phase or combined input/output phase (not sort).
The content of the progress messages is as follows:
·
Percentage complete
·
Phase and the total number of
records processed
·
Delta-Sec(Min) - the time
elapsed from the previous message
·
Wall-Sec(Min) - the total
elapsed time
·
CPU-Sec - the total CPU-Seconds
at this point
When using the record selection feature of the Get and Input
commands, Suprtool cannot be absolutely certain of the total number of records.
Therefore, the percentage calculation is estimated.
SET
PROMPT character
(Initially: > )
PROMPT tells Suprtool
which character to use for prompting. Any special character can be used as the
prompt character. For example:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>set prompt %
%base store,5
SETREALMAP
ON|OFF
(Initially: ON)
This option has no effect in Suprtool for MPE.
SET
RECOVER ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
This option can be used
with an If command, which selects only records with a -1 in the first word, to
extract deleted records from a KSAM file. This is not supported for KSAM/XL
files prior to MPE/iX 4.0. On MPE/iX 4.0 and later, Suprtool can recover deleted
records if you do not build your KSAM/XL files with the reuse option. If you
use the reuse option, Suprtool can only recover deleted records where the space
has not yet been reused.
SET
REDO filename
(Initially: none)
Commands that you enter at
the Suprtool prompt are saved in something called the redo stack. You can
recall commands from the redo stack using other commands such as Before, Do and
Redo. By default, the redo stack is stored in a temporary file but is discarded
as soon as you exit. This means that your redo stack is not preserved accross
invocations of Suprtool.
Set Redo allows you to assign a permanent file as the redo stack.
The redo stack is then available for future Suprtool invocations. To assign
MYREDO as a persistent redo stack, enter:
>set
redo myredo
If the file does not exist, Suprtool creates it. If it already
exists, Suprtool uses it. All the commands you enter from this point are
written to the persistent redo stack. The setting is valid for the duration of
the Suprtool session. As soon as you exit Suprtool, the setting is discarded.
Next time you run Suprtool, you will get the temporary stack.
If the filename is not qualified, the redo stack is created in the
logon group and account. This may be desirable if you wish to have separate
stacks. If you wish to always use the same persistent stacks, you should
qualify the name.
The Verify command shows which stack is currently in use. If it
shows <temporary>, it means Suprtool is using the default stack. Anything else is the
name of the file used on the Set Redo command.
Concurrency
When Suprtool uses the default temporary stack, it is only
accessible to that particular instance of Suprtool. You can run as many
Suprtool instances as you need and each one gets its own redo stack. With
temporary stacks, you will never get into concurrency problems.
If you start using a persistent redo stack, you might start running
into these type of problems. A persistent redo stack can only be used by one
Qedit instance at any one point in time. If you try to use a persistent redo
stack that is already in use, you will get:
>set redo myredo
EXCLUSIVE VIOLATION: FILE BEING ACCESSED (FSERR 90)
Unable to open file for REDO stack
In this situation, Suprtool continues to use the redo stack active
at the time so you can continue to work as normal.
Qedit also has the ability to have permanent redo stacks. It is
advisable to have separate redo stacks for each product, as they will write
commands to each others redo stack if you supply the same filename.
For example if you use the command:
you will have a redo stack called myredo for your Suprtool commands.
If you exit Suprtool and run Qedit and supply the same command set redo command
your Qedit commands will be written to the same file that was used for your
Suprtool commands.
By default your permanent Redo stack will be built to 1000 commands.
If you require a larger redo stack you can specify the size of the redo stack
using a file equation prior to the set redo command.
>:file myredo;disc=10000
>set redo myredo
This will only be in effect the first time that the redo stack is
built, subsequent file commands will not affect the size of the redo file. You
can make the file bigger using tools such as MPEX's %altfile command, or by
building a larger file and copying your current redo stack to the file.
SET
SORTFAST ON | OFF
(Initially: depends)
Suprtool/iX has its own
internal sort routines. These routines are as fast or faster than HP's sort
routines, and do not require as much sort scratch space as HP's routines. Set
Sortfast controls whether Suprtool's internal sort routines are called or
whether HP's sort routines are used. In Suprtool/V, this option has no effect
and defaults to Off. In Suprtool/iX, the Set Sortfast is On by default. In the
unlikely event that problems are experienced with Suprtool's internal sort
routines, HP's sort routines can be enabled with:
SET
SQUEEZE [ ON | OFF ]
(Initial & Default:
<neither>)
Turning Set Squeeze On
forces Suprtool to always truncate the output file limit to the end-of-file
when the output file is closed. Turning Set Squeeze Off forces Suprtool not to
change the limit when closing the output file. By default or by specifying Set
Squeeze (i.e., with no option) forces Suprtool to decide when to truncate the
output limit to the end-of-file.
Suprtool will not squeeze a file limit if the input source is a
file, the output file is not a new file, the output file is KSAM (CM, NM or
KSAM64), or if the Ask or Num query output options were specified. In all other
cases, Suprtool squeezes the file limit down to the EOF.
Set Squeeze Off can be combined with the Numrecs command to automate
job streams in which data is appended to the output file. For example,
>get d-sales
>numrecs 200% {output
file will have extra room}
>output dsale
>set squeeze off {reserve
room between EOF and LIMIT}
>xeq
>get d-history
>output dsale,append {Dsale
has room for appending}
>xeq
SET
STATISTICS ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
STATISTICS causes Suprtool
to print statistics at the end of each task. This can be useful for determining
the effectiveness of Suprtool's Get versus Chain commands.
SET
SUBSYSTEM ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Normally, Suprtool ignores
database subsystem access. Use Set Subsystem On to instruct Suprtool to examine
the subsystem option of the database in the Base and Put commands. Subsystem access
can be restricted to READ or NONE by using DBUTIL. If subsystem access is NONE,
Suprtool does not open the database. If subsystem access is READ, the Suprtool
Put and Delete commands are disallowed and the Dbedit Add, Delete, Modify, and
Change commands are also disallowed.
Once you enable Set Subsystem On, you cannot disable it. This Set
option applies to all databases; you cannot enable it for a specific database.
Using the creator password overrides the subsystem flag and allows full access
to the database. If you wish to take advantage of subsystem access, we
recommend that Set Subsystem On be added to your Suprmgr file.
The following example restricts the STORE database to read access:
:run dbutil.pub.sys {must
be DB creator}
>set store subsystems=read {read
access only}
>exit
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>set subsystem on {check
subsystem access}
>base store
Password [;]? {don't
use creator}
>input infile
{standard
file input}
>put m-customer {Put
will fail because we}
{do
not have write access}
Error: You are not allowed
access to this database
SET
SUSPEND ON | OFF
(Initially: varies)
SUSPEND instructs Suprtool
to suspend after an Exit command.
The default is OFF when Suprtool is :RUN from MPE, when :RUN with
Parm=32, or when invoked from the POSIX shell. Suspend is ON when Suprtool is :RUN
from within another program (e.g., Qedit). In some cases it is desirable to
turn this option OFF to prevent several invocations of Suprtool from being
present at the same time. Users who run Suprtool from within MENU systems or
QUICK may want to turn Suspend Off, or :Run Suprtool with Parm=32.
SET ThousandSymbol " "
(Default: comma)
This setting is used to
change the Thousand character which is used to edit the data in a field used by
the $Number function.
The default character for the Thousand Symbol is a comma.
SET
USERLABELS ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
By default, Suprtool
always copies user labels from the input file to the output file. User Labels
are ignored when no Extract command has been issued and Set Userlabels is Off.
However, if an Extract command is issued and Set Userlabels is Off, Suprtool
still writes the Userlabels. If List Labels is requested, Suprtool prints the
contents of the user labels before listing the data. If Userlabels is Off,
Suprtool does no processing of user labels. To convert a self-describing file
into a non-SD file, see "Suprtool and
Self-Describing Files" on page 69.
SET
VARSUB ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
This option tells Suprtool to resolve any CI
variables in any command. The default value for VarSub is Off for backward
compatibility.
SET VarsubCompat [ ON | OFF ]
(Initially:OFF)
This
command has no effect on Suprtool for MPE.
SET
VARSUBDEBUG ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Set VarsubDebug on will
print out the line after the variable substitution has occurred. This setting
only works if Set Varsub is on and Set varsubdebug is on.
setvar outfile &
:"/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901"
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
SUPRTOOL/iX/Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1981-2007.
(Version 5.4 Internal) TUE,
OCT 30, 2007, 2:58 PM Type H for he
>set varsub on
>set varsubdebug on
>in file1sd.suprtest
vd:in file1sd.suprtest
>output !outfile,link,temp
vd:output
/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123
vd:2345678901,link,temp
The output is formatted
into 74 byte chunks and printed with a preceding “vd:” so the “substituted”
line is clear.
SET WARNINGS ON | OFF
(Initially: ON)
Suprtool normally prints
warning messages out to $stdlist. You can turn off these messages when you are
running from batch by issuing a Set Warnings off command. If you are simulating
batch mode with the Set Interactive Off command, you must do the Set Warnings
off after the Set Interactive Off.
The default for this setting is On.
SET Xltrim ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Suprtool will now release
the disc space between EOF and the FLIMIT if Set Xltrim is on and Set Squeeze
is either not set or Off. This releases the disc space after the EOF but leaves
the Flimit alone. Set Squeeze on will still close the file such that the Flimit
will be the same as the EOF.
The default for this setting is Off.
Specifies the next sort
key via an IMAGE field name, or a field in a self-describing file, or a Defined
field. See "Key Command [K]" on page 216 for sort keys specified
by explicit byte position. Up to 20 Sort and Key commands can be specified per
extract task. The first key entered is the major sort key.
SORT field [(subscript)] [DESCENDING]
(Default: Ascending order)
Field
The field specified must
be an IMAGE data item that is a field of the input source, or a defined field,
or a field from a self-describing file.
Subscript
If the field is a compound
item (e.g., 2X25), the first sub-item is the default if no subscript is specified. You can sort on any sub-item by specifying
the subscript. For example,
>sort address(2) {sorts
on 2nd sub-item}
Descending vs.
Ascending Order
By default, sorts are done
in ascending order. Descending specifies
that the field is to be sorted in descending order.
Examples
The most common use of the Sort command is to specify a sort field
of a database field. You may use the Key command to specify all sorts. We
recommend that the Sort command be used wherever possible. If the structure of
your database changes, your Suprtool tasks still work if sort fields are
specified with the Sort command:
>base store,5
>get d-sales {input
from an IMAGE dataset}
>sort cust-account {primary
sort field}
>sort purch-date,desc {newest
transactions first}
>output dsales {write
the sorted records to an MPE disc file}
>exit
In the next example we sort an MPE file. We create a field using the
Define command. Rather than using the Key command, we use the Sort command to
specify the sort field. If the MPE file changes, only the Define command must
be changed:
>input dinvent {input
is from an MPE file}
>define a,11,2,int {"A"
is an integer that starts}
>output outfile { at the 11th byte of Dinvent}
>sort a {sort
the input records by the "A" field}
>exit
With the =dataset form of
the Input command, we can have even greater flexibility to use the Sort
command. We assume that the MPE file Mcust has the same structure as the
m-customer dataset. We sort the file using the first of the two street
addresses in m-customer:
>base store,5,READER {open
for read access only}
>input mcust=m-customer {same
format as m-customer}
>sort street-address {a
repeated field, but only}
>exit { the first address is used}
Notes
The Verify command shows
all of the current Sort command values and the Reset command cancels them. If
you have not defined any sort fields before the Xeq or Exit command, Suprtool
performs a copy only, no sort.
It is important to note
that if the field being sorted is the result of a $function, then you may not
be sorting on the value of the field after the function has transformed the
field. For example the following task may not give you the result you expect:
>base store,5
>get d-sales
>def
cust-accountx,1,6,byte
>ext cust-accountx =
$edit(cust-accout,"zzzz99"
>sort cust-accountx {sorting
on transformed field before it has value from function}
>dup none keys
>output dsales
>exit
In this instance you will not be sorting on cust-accountx as
transformed by the $edit function, but rather the first six bytes of d-sales.
Therefore it is important to note when you are using extract to transform a
field, you will not be sorting on that transformed value.
Therefore the way to do the transformation would be to either divide
into two tasks or if you can logically sort on the field before the
transformation in order to achieve the result, so the task could be:
>base store,5
>get d-sales
>def
cust-accountx,1,6,byte
>ext cust-accountx =
$edit(cust-accout,"zzzz99"
>sort cust-account {Note
sorting on source field}
>dup none keys
>output dsales
>exit
or if two tasks are necessary:
>base store,5
>get d-sales
>def
cust-accountx,1,6,byte
>ext cust-accountx =
$edit(cust-accout,"zzzz99"
>output tempsales
>xeq
>in tempsales
>sort cust-acctx
>dup none keys
>output dsales
>exit
Builds a table of values
for testing in the If or Chain commands. There can be up to ten different
tables. The Table command does not work with real-type keys.
TABLE tablename, itemname, table-keyword,
table-values
Tables are used by the $lookup function of the If command and as
input to the Chain command. The table keywords are Item, File, and Sorted. The
total amount of table space is restricted by Set Limits Tablesize. Use the
following scheme to select input records based on many data values:
1.
Load a table with the values
you are interested in.
2.
Use the $lookup function of the
If command to search the table.
3.
Or, use the table with the
Chain command to read a selected set of key values.
To add a value for an item to a table, use:
TABLE tablename, itemname, ITEM, value [,value]
When you start entering
the values for a table, you must enter all the values for that table before
starting another table. Once you switch to another table, the previous table is
"closed" and you cannot enter anymore values into it.
Parameters
tablename
Any identifier name up to sixteen characters long. This name can be
the same as the name of a Define field or database itemname, but we recommend
that you choose a unique name.
itemname
An item from the database specified in the Base command or a Define
field. This cannot be a real-type item.
value
A specific value that must
match the type of the item. String
values are extended with blanks to the length of the item.
Examples
Suppose that you wanted to look for several part numbers. You could
use the following If command:
>if part =
"12345","67890","39201","92308","14892"
You could also load a table with the part numbers:
>table part-table,part,item,"12345"
>table part-table,part,item,"67890"
>table part-table,part,item,"39201"
>table part-table,part,item,"92308"
>table part-table,part,item,"14892"
and use a different If command:
>if $lookup(part-table,part)
Sometimes you need to look for all records that do not have any of a set of values,
>if part <>
"12345","67890","39201","92308","14892"
You would use the same Table commands, but a slightly different If
command,
>if not $lookup(part-table,part)
Values with
Decimal Places
If the itemname for the table has implied
decimal places, the Table command accepts decimal points and scales input
values. For example,
>item cost,decimal,2 {two
implied decimal points}
>table cost-table,cost,item,10,10.5,10.75
>if $lookup(cost-table,cost)
>out out3
{select
records for 1000, 1050, and 1075}
>xeq
You may need to look for
hundreds of part numbers. The Table command accepts the table values from a
file. The file must contain lookup values in exactly the same format as the
itemname which describes the data. Duplicates are eliminated as they are loaded
into the table. For a table consisting of values from a file use:
TABLE tablename,
itemname, FILE | SORTED, filename
[,HOLD][,DATA(field1,field2,field3…)]
Parameters
itemname
The item determines the data-type and length of the key values in
the table. By default, you can only load a table from a file when the item is
the first field in the file. If you load a Table from a self-describing file,
Suprtool first checks for the field in the self-describing file.
FILE vs. SORTED
The File option assumes that the file of table values is not sorted.
Sorting a large file of values is slow. If the file is already sorted, use the
Sorted option: Suprtool checks the records to make sure they are in ascending
order.
filename
A valid MPE file name.
Hold
By default, the Xeq
command resets all tables. Use the Hold option when using the same table in
more than one extract task. When Hold is specified, the Xeq command does not
reset the table. Hold applies to individual tables, not all tables.
>table part-table,part,file,partin,hold
Data
The Table command allows
for data to be loaded along with matching key values.
>table
partab,part,file,partin,data(cost,desc)
You can specify up to 20 data fields as long as the total size of
the key fields and data does not exceed 256 bytes. The Table file must be
Self-Describing to use the data option.
When loading data into a table, Suprtool will eliminate the
duplicate entries based on the key value, so some data values may not be loaded
into the table.
For information on how to retrieve data from the table, please see
the Extract command, or the Examples section of the Table command.
Examples
If all of your part
numbers are in the file Partin, you use:
>table part-table,part,file,partin
>if $lookup(part-table,part)
The following example uses Suprtool to create a file of customer
numbers that are in arrears. This file is then used to select the orders for
these customers from the d-sales dataset. Instead of serially reading the file,
we use the Chain command to take advantage of existing IMAGE search fields. The
cust-account
item occurs in both datasets. When the table is loaded,
Suprtool obtains the cust-account
field information from the self-describing custacct
file.
>base store,5
>get m-customer
>if
cust-status="30" {customers
in arrears}
>out custacct,link {self-describing
output for the Table command}
>xeq
>table cust-table,cust-account,file,custacct
>chain d-sales,cust-account=cust-table
>output dsales
>xeq
The next example sorts selected records from the d-inventory
dataset. Because the output file is not a self-describing file, we must use the
Extract command to make the key-field the first field in the file. We use this
file to load a table and select the records from the m-product dataset.
>get d-inventory
>if
on-hand-qty<10
{select records}
>ext product-no {product-no
must be first}
>ext on-hand-qty {other
fields follow}
>ext last-ship-date
>sort product-no {sort by key value}
>out invent {later,
use this file in the Table command}
>xeq
>get m-product {contains
product description}
>table product-table,product-no,sorted,invent
>if $lookup(product-table,product-no)
>sort product-no
>output mproduct
>xeq
The next example shows how to select part numbers from flat file
parts, using the file Partin. We use the Define command to define where the
part-no field is in the record. This example assumes that the Part numbers are
in the first six bytes of each file.
>input parts
>def part-no,1,6 {define
part-no}
>table part-table,part,file,partin {product-no
must be first}
>if $lookup(part-table,part-no) {other
fields follow}
>out somepart {output
to a file}
>xeq
Suprtool can load up to ten tables, either from separate files or
the same file. The following example assumes that the files are
self-describing.
>input customer
>table cust-table,custno,file,custfile
>table zip-table,zipcode,file,custfile
>if $lookup(cust-table,custno) and $lookup(zip-table,zipcode)
>output newcust,link
>xeq
Keep in mind that using multiple tables may be more memory intensive
and require more resources.
Data Example
Your boss comes to you
with a list of new prices for certain parts and asks you to update the
Part-Master dataset.
Just load the new prices into a Table, index by the product number
(prodno),then Extract the price field from each record and replace it with a
$lookup on the table. Here is the code:
>table
newprices,prodno,file,bosslist,data(price)
>get part-master
>if
$lookup(newprices,prodno)
>update
>extract price =
$lookup(newprices,prodno,price)
>xeq
We do the If $lookup to select only the parts which have new prices,
then do Extract with $lookup to replace the existing price with a new one. The
Update command forces a database update on each selected record and must come
before the Extract command.
If you did not do the If $lookup then the price field would contain
zeroes for those fields that did not have a matching record.
Notes on CM /
MPE/V
The Xeq command clears any
tables that are not held. Suprtool uses extra data segments to store the table
values. You may not be able to load huge tables because of a lack of system
resources (e.g., DST entries). To reduce the number of extra data segments
Suprtool needs, you should configure the maximum extra data segment size to
32,764 words, using SYSDUMP on MPE V or SYSGEN on MPE/iX.
Searching huge tables is CPU-intensive. If you do this on-line, it
seriously affects other users. While it is possible to load tables as large as
15 megabytes, we suggest that you make sure that there is enough real memory to
hold the table. Remember that MPE takes at least one megabyte of real memory on
Classic HP e3000s. Set Limits Tablesize restricts the maximum size of tables,
so you can limit the total amount of table space to a specified number of
megabytes.
In order to accomodate some large tables you may need to increase
the value of Maximum number of XDS per process. The maximum value of this
setting is 255 and can be changed using SYSDUMP on MPE V or SYSGEN on MPE/iX.
Notes on NM /
MPE/iX
The Xeq command clears any
tables that are not held. Searching huge tables is CPU-intensive. If you do
this on-line, it seriously affects other users. While it is possible to load a
table as large as 2047 megabytes, we suggest that you make sure that there is
enough real memory to hold the table.
The Table command rejects RIO, KSAM, and CIR files when using the
Sorted option.We do this because we cannot guareentee that we will get the
records back in the correct order for anything other than standard files.The
error returned when trying to use the Sorted option with one ofthese files is
shown below:
Error: Unable to open the
table file
SUPRFILEINIT Error 7
File is KSAM, variable-length, or undefined-length
Translate command allows
you to specify a From and To-character in decimal notation, which then can be
subsequently used in the $translate function.
Translate
“^from:^to” TOUNREAD TOREAD
The Translate command also
has two special keywords to fill the
translation
table to
help scramble data in byte-fields from readable to unreadable and
back again to readable.
>in nametest;list;xeq
>IN NAMETEST.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
NAME = Neil Patrick Armstrong
IN=1, OUT=1. CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=1.
>in nametest
>translate tounread
>ext name=$translate(name)
>list;xeq
>IN NAMETEST.NEIL.GREEN (0) >OUT $NULL (0)
NAME = Mtxo Kpecxrz Ocndeclmv
IN=1, OUT=1. CPU-Sec=1. Wall-Sec=1.
Totals specified fields in
the selected input records. Totals can be written to $stdlist (default), a
file, or to the List device.
TOTAL field [(subscript)] [decimal-places]
$file filename [ APPEND | ERASE | TEMP ]
$file
$list
(Default: subscript=first sub-item, decimal-places=0)
Parameters
Each totaled field must be an IMAGE field name, or a
field from a self-describing file, or a Defined field. Total specifies that a
total value for the field be printed after processing the records. There does
not have to be any output file (i.e., it can be $null) for a total to be
printed. There can be up to 15 totaled fields.
The subscript is valid only for compound items. If no subscript is specified, the first field
of a compound item is totaled. The decimal-places provides a decimal point when the
final total is printed. If the Item command specifies the number of implied
decimal places, the decimal-places parameter
is not needed. The values within each field are assumed to be aligned.
$File Options
By default, totals are
written to $stdlist. Use the $file option to have the totals written to a file
or to the List device. When writing to a file, the default is to create a new
file. If Suprtool cannot save the file, it produces an error. The Append,
Erase, and Temp options are the same as in the Output command.
The file specified in $file must have a minimum record size of 48
bytes.
If you want the totals written to the end of the List device (the
output of the List command), specify $list as the $file file name. All other
options are ignored when $list is specified.
To write totals to the output file, use Total $file xxx,Append,
where xxx is the name of your output file. You also need to turn Set Squeeze
Off (otherwise, there will not be room for the totals). Appending totals to the
output file only works if the output file is a disc file.
Examples
The first example prints
the totals for a single field.
>in file1
>def total-field,1,5
>total total-field
>xeq
Totals (TUE, OCT 10, 2000,
4:30 PM):
TOTAL-FIELD
611105+
The next example is identical to the previous one, except that we
qualify the total with the number of decimal places.
>in file1
>total total-field,2
>xeq
Totals (TUE, OCT 10, 2000,
4:31 PM):
TOTAL-FIELD 6111.05
The previous example specified the number of decimal places by using
the Total command. The next example is the preferred way to specify decimal
places because it qualifies the cust-bal
field with two decimal places for all Suprtool
commands. This example also totals two fields (note that you need two Total
commands) and shows how to total individual fields using subscripts.
>base test
>get dorder
>item cust-bal,decimal,2
>total cust-bal(1)
>total cust-bal(2)
>xeq
Totals (TUE, OCT 10, 2000,
4:32 PM):
CUST-BAL(1) 143598.16
CUST-BAL(2) 155399.73
All the examples so far have shown the totals being written to
$stdlist. The next example writes the totals to the file totfile.
>base store
>get d-sales
>total sales-tax
>total sales-total
>total $file totfile
>xeq
To write the totals to the end of a Suprtool listing, use the $file
option with $list as the file name. This example writes the totals to the end
of the simple Suprtool report:
>base store
>get d-inventory
>list standard
>total unit-cost
>total $file $list
>xeq
Sort Break
Totals
Please refer to the
Duplicate command on how to generate sort break totals.
Notes
Totals are formatted and
displayed in a form that is understood by people. If you want to return total
values to a program, see the Calling
Suprtool user manual.
You cannot combine the Total command with the Total option of the
Duplicate command.
The Total command prints out a date and time stamp on the title
line. This is for audit purposes.
Update one or more
noncritical fields in an IMAGE dataset.
UPDATE [ CIUPDATE ]
Specify the fields to be updated and their new values with the
Extract command. The Update command must be specified after the Chain or Get
command, but before the Extract command(s). You can update part of an IMAGE
field by defining the part you are interested in updating and then using the
defined field name in the Extract command. The Update command can change values
in critical fields (IMAGE search or sort fields). To update critical fields,
you must specify the Ciupdate option, and CIUPDATE must be On or Allowed in the
database.
Example
This example selects all inventory items with a unit-cost less than
$10.00 and increases the unit-cost by five percent.
>get d-inventory {input
dataset}
>item
unit-cost,decimal,2 {implied
decimal places}
>if unit-cost <
10.00 {selection
criteria}
>update {Update
must come before Extract}
>extract unit-cost = & {calculate
the new …}
unit-cost * 1.05 {…
unit-cost value}
>xeq
This next example selects all inventory items with a part number of
12345677 and changes it to 12345678.
>get d-inventory {input
dataset}
>if product-no =
12345677 {selection
criteria}
>update ciupdate
>extract product-no = 12345678 {new
unit-cost value}
>xeq
You can set CIUPDATE by using the DBUTIL Utility. To set CIUPDATE on
just run Dbutil and use the Set command:
:run dbutil.pub.sys
>>set dbname ciupdate=on
>>exit
Notes
The only commands that can be combined with Update are selection
commands (e.g., the If command). The following commands are not allowed:
Delete, Duplicate, Key, List, Output, Put, Sort, or Total. You cannot update
critical fields in master datasets. Update does not work with MPE or KSAM
files.
If you are updating a packed or display field, remember that
Suprtool uses unsigned values for non-negative numbers unless you add a leading
plus sign to the number. See "Packed and Display
Constants" on page 155 for more details.
Specifies a file of
commands to be executed as a group.
USE[Q] filename
Database Date
Items
A usefile makes your task
easier by allowing common commands to be specified once in an external file. A
common reason for usefiles is to isolate Define and Item commands for a
database in one place. This makes future changes easier and prevents mistakes.
In this example, we isolate all Item commands for dates from our database in a
Suprtool usefile.
>use store.suprtool
define delivered,deliv_date
define purchased,purch_date
item delivered ,date ,yymmdd
item purchased ,date ,yymmdd
Dataset Field
Definitions
In the store database, the
street-address is a 2X25 item. Suppose that you always wanted to refer to the
first and second part of the address with different names. The following usefile
would access the m-customer dataset and define the two necessary fields:
>use mcust.suprtool
get m-customer
define street-address-1,street-address(1)
define street-address-2,street-address(2)
Info= and the
Base Command
Our final example shows
how to embed a database password in a usefile using the "?" password
in the Base command.
>use store5.suprtool {hint:
"5" is the open-mode}
base store,5,? {"?"
means read password from usefile}
Password? {reads
password from usefile, but no echo}
Quiet Execution
By default, Suprtool displays the commands in a usefile as they are
executed. The quiet option is not used in the examples above so that you could
see the actual commands inside each usefile. Suprtool can execute commands quietly using the Useq command:
>useq store.use {no
commands are listed}
You can also combine the Use command with Info=. In the following
example, we specify the store database and execute the usefile with our Item
commands:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle;parm=4; &
info="base
store.db.mis,1,?;useq store.suprtool.mis"
In this example we open the database in mode-1, but the user is
prompted for the database password. In a job stream, the database password
would be the first line after ":run suprtool". We then quietly
execute all the Item commands for the store database (from the file
Store.Suprtool.Mis).
Nested Usefiles
Usefiles may be nested. In other words, a usefile may use another
usefile to a depth of ten files. For example if the contents of the Usedef
usefile has a references to Useext, both usefiles would be executed:
>in dsales
>use usedef
define delivered,deliv_date
define purchased,purch_date
item delivered ,date ,yymmdd
item purchased ,date ,yymmdd
use useext
ext cust-account
ext deliv-date
ext product-no
ext product-price
ext purch-date
ext sales-qty
ext sales-tax
ext sales-total
>xeq
Care must be taken when entering Use commands with a stacked command
after a usefile reference. For example, if you enter
use usedef;def j,1,6,byte
the Define command will not be executed until after the Usedef and any other nested Use commands are finished.
Notes
The usefile may be an Editor /KEEP file,UNN or a Qedit workfile, but
no more than 256 characters per record will be processed. For compatibility
with Qedit, Useq can be abbreviated to UQ.
If a Use file ends with an ampersand, Suprtool will assume that you
are continuing the current command on the next line, outside of the use file.
The Userpause command
prints a prompt message on the screen and waits for the user to press a key.
USERPAUSE [ "string" ]
(Default: read without a
prompt)
Prints the string and
waits for any key. Leading spaces in the string are printed.
Examples
In this example, we have a usefile that displays a message and then
waits for the user before starting the task.
>q
>q "We will select all transactions over $10,000. Since"
>q "there are many transactions, this task will take"
>q "some time (usually more than fifteen minutes)."
>q
>userpause "Press any key when you are ready to start."
Displays the
specifications that you have entered so far.
VERIFY [ ALL | @ | VERSION | command [...] ]
(Default: Input, Output,
Sort, Numrecs, changed Set values)
Parameters
More than one command can be verified at once by entering several command names separated by a comma or a
space. The format of the Verify output is organized into columns wherever
possible.
For Verify All, Suprtool prints all of the information concerning
the current invocation of Suprtool, including the value of the Set options and
the Suprtool version number.
For Verify Version, Suprtool prints out the version information.
Verify with no parameters prints the current values for Chain, Get,
Input, Output, and Key or Sort commands. It also prints those Set options which
are not currently at their default setting.
Examples
>v
>verify
>verify input {current
input file}
>verify if {selection
criteria}
>verify all {all
current options}
>verify version {version
number of Suprtool}
Suspends entry of commands
and begins the extract from the input source.
XEQ
Notes
After the Xeq, Suprtool
processes the task and accepts commands to specify another task. Compare this
with the Exit command, which stops Suprtool after processing the input. After
an Xeq command, all parameters of Suprtool are reset to their initial values,
except any database that is left open, the Set options, and the Defined fields
even though their calculated offsets are not guaranteed to be correct for the
next file processed.
Examples
>base cust
>get m-customer
>output mcstfile
>xeq {copies
m-customer to Mcstfile}
>get d-customer
>output dcstfile
>xeq {copies
d-customer to Dcstfile}
>exit {terminate,
no task to do}
{last
Xeq could have been Exit}
Evaluates an expression
and prints the result in one of several formats.
=expression [,O | D | B | H | A | # | % |
$]
Any command that begins with an equal sign (=) is treated as an expression to be evaluated. An
expression consists of numbers and operators, followed by an optional display
format.
The operators can be addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication
(*), division (/), or exponentiation (**). The value of the expression is
printed immediately on $stdlist.
=20+15 {add
two numbers together}
Result=35.0
=20*15 {multiply
the same numbers}
Result=300.0
=20-15 {subtraction}
Result=5.0
=20/15 {divide,
print precise result}
Result=1.33333333333
=20**15 {20
raised to the 15th power}
Result=.327680000000E+20
Order of
Evaluation
Unlike most programming languages, the calculator always evaluates
the calculation from left to right. This is similar to an electronic
calculator, where each keystroke is operated on immediately. You can use
parentheses to force the calculator to evaluate the expression in a different
order.
=14+16+15/3 {compute
an average}
Result=15.0
=14+16+(15/3) {add
14, 16, and the result of 15/3}
Result=35.0
=14+((16+15)/3) {add
16 + 15, divide by 3, then add to 14}
Result=24.3333333333
Percentages
A number in the calculator expression
may be followed by a percent sign (%). The calculator assumes that you want
to qualify the number as a percentage.
=125*5% {what
is 5% of 125}
Result=6.25
=125+125*5% {add
5% of 125 to 125}
Result=12.5
=125+(125*5%) {oops,
we needed to change the order}
Result=131.25 {this
looks like the answer we wanted}
The last two examples show the importance of the order in which
calculator evaluates the expression. We needed to use parentheses to force
calculator to evaluate our expression in
the correct order.
Display Formats
A calculator expression may
be followed by a comma and a display letter. The default is decimal (#) and the
options are hex ($ or H), octal (% or O), double (D), ASCII (A) and binary (B).
With these options, the result is treated as a 32-bit integer.
=10,o {standard
octal format}
Result=%000012
=-10,o {negative
number in octal}
Result=%37777777766
=100,h {hexadecimal}
Result=$0064
In Double format, calculator prints the double result as two octal
numbers (the way they appear in DEBUG). The first number represents the
high-order 16-bits and the second number represents the low-order 16-bits.
=10,d {treat
result as two 16-bit octal words}
Result=%000000 %000012
=1000000000,d {high-order
16-bits are no-zero}
Result=%035632 %145000
=-10,d {note
negative value, 2's complement}
Result= %177777 %177766
In ASCII format, up to four characters are printed in Hex, Decimal,
and ASCII display format.
=$2020,a
Result=$2020: 32,32 :"
"
=%20161 %72145,a
Result=$2071: 32,113:" q"
$7465:116,101:"te"
In binary format, the high-order 16-bits are examined. If these bits
are not zero, they are printed as two groups of eight bits. A one (1) means
that the bit is on and a zero (0) means that the bit is off. The low-order
16-bits are always printed as two groups of eight bits.
=10,b {high-order
16-bits suppressed}
Result=%(2)00000000 00001010
=-10,b {note
negative value, 2's complement}
Result=%(2)11111111 11111111 %(2)11111111 11110110
=1000000000,b {high-order
16-bits are non-zero}
Result=%(2)00111011 10011010 %(2)11001010 00000000
Input Format
The calculator supports different input formats for numbers. Octal
values are prefixed with a percent sign (%) and hex values with a dollar sign
($). An ASCII string of up to 4 characters is entered in quotes. The result of
the last calculation is referred to using #.
=%12 {octal
12 or decimal 10}
Result=10.0
=%12,o {octal
input and octal display format}
Result=%000012
=$10
Result=16.0
=%177766 {octal
number that is really negative}
Result=-10.0
="abcd",h
Result=$61626364
=#,a {use
result of last calculation}
Result=$6162: 97,98 :"ab"
$6364: 99,100:"cd"
Programmers who make use of the MPE DEBUG software are often
frustrated with the format that Double Integer numbers are printed. DEBUG
prints them as two octal numbers. Calculator accepts two octal numbers as input
and prints the result in standard decimal format.
=%35632 %145000 {treat
as one double integer value}
Result=1000000000.0
=%177777 %177766 {negative
double integer value}
Result=-10.0
Calculator Help
It may be difficult to remember all of the various options that the
calculator offers. For this reason, you can obtain a short description of the
calculator by entering the following:
=? {?
gives help}
{prints
a summary of = functions}
Suprtool prints two types of messages: errors and warnings. In both
cases Suprtool is letting you know that it has encountered a condition of which
you may want to be aware.
This appendix describes both kinds of messages and gives a partial
list of warning messages.
Errors are defined as
conditions which immediately prevent Suprtool from continuing, or which allow
it to complete a task and then stop, because continuing would likely cause
undesirable or erroneous results.
When Suprtool detects a serious error condition such as a syntax
error in a command, a file system error, or a sort error, it prints an error
message. For example,
Error: Unknown command name,
try HELP
Error: Unable to open
>OUTPUT file
Finding Errors
Automatically
If you have software that
scans spool files for error conditions, have it look for
"Error: ".
Batch vs. Interactive Mode
In batch mode, Suprtool
aborts when an error message is printed, setting the JCW (job control word) to
FATAL. This causes the rest of the job to flush (unless a !CONTINUE was in
effect) and prevents subsequent job steps from using the results of the failed
Suprtool run. In interactive mode, Suprtool prints the error message and
prompts for the next command.
File System Errors
When a file system error
occurs, Suprtool prints the MPE error message and asks if you want to see a
full File Information Display. When Suprtool asks a question that requires a
yes or no answer, "Y", "OUI", "JA", and
"SI" are accepted as "YES", and any other answer is
considered "NO".
If the output file is too
small to hold all the selected input records, an error occurs and Suprtool
terminates the extract task. In fact, any error during processing terminates
the current task (exceptions: a "chain-head" delete error, a
duplicate key value error, or bad data with an If command when Set Ignore is
On). If Suprtool cannot Save the output file, it goes through a recovery
procedure (see Output command).
Arithmetic Trap Abort
If Suprtool should Abort
with Parm=99x, an error has been detected in the Arithmetic Trap Routine. This
should never happen, so please report it to Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
NUMRECS exceeded; some
records not processed.
You specified a Numrecs and have reached it. This condition is
considered an error if the input is from a source other than disc.
Command entered is not a
valid Suprtool command.
and
MPE access has been
disabled. See Set Limits command.
Normally, commands that are not valid Suprtool commands are passed
off to the operating system. If access to the O/S has been disabled via the Set
Limits command, these commands are no longer passed off. If the user does not
precede the command with a colon, we assume that the invalid command was meant
for Suprtool. If a colon precedes the command, we assume that the command was
meant for the operating system. On HP-UX systems an exclamation mark can be
used in place of a colon.
Output-ASCII not allowed
with Duplicate None Keys
Not all processing options are allowed in all combinations. The
ASCII option of the Output command, which reformats the output record, does not
work with Duplicate None Keys. Dup None Keys assumes that the output record has
the same data definitions as the input record.
Xxxx is not the search
field of Yyyy
This message is issued by
the Chain command when the search field specified (Xxxx) is not an index into
the dataset (Yyyy). The field specified must be a TurboIMAGE search field or an
MPE/iX third-party index.
When Suprtool detects an
unusual situation that it should bring to your attention, it prints a nonfatal
warning message. For example,
Warning: No input data
specified
Warning: DATABASE must be
RESTORED if System Crashes
The following list explains the most common warnings.
New entries were added to
the dataset.
Suprtool may have ignored some dataset entries.
or
The number of dataset
entries was reduced.
Suprtool may have included some deleted dataset entries.
These two warnings let you know that while Suprtool was processing
your task, other users added or deleted entries to the dataset.
Suprtool checks the dataset entry count before and after, and warns
you if it has changed. Suprtool allows concurrent changes, but warns you when
it happens. If you cannot accept multiple access, you must open the database
exclusively (mode-4). If you consistently receive the warning about new dataset
entries for a particular dataset, you should consider using Set Eofread (see
the discussion under the Set command).
In many cases you can ignore these messages, but sometimes it
indicates a serious problem with the current task. You may use Control-Y to
stop the task from processing.
>OUTPUT has different
record size.
The record size of the output file being written to has a different
record size from the data being written by Suprtool. The size may be bigger or
smaller.
This usually occurs when the file being written to is an existing
file, or when a :File command is used to specify the record size explicitly.
When Suprtool builds the output file for itself, it always uses exactly the
record size needed to hold the output record.
If the output file size is smaller, your records are truncated. If
the output file size is larger, your record is padded with blanks or binary
zeros, depending one whether the file is ASCII or binary.
Output=Input task is not
recoverable from this point.
This message is printed at the point that the input file has been
re-initialized to accept output from the sort scratch file. If this task is
aborted after this message prints, the data from the input file will be lost.
>OUTPUT file may be too
small.
This message is printed whenever the number of input records
(NUMRECS) exceeds the available number of output records. This often occurs
when appending records to an existing file. If you have an If command, Suprtool
does not know how many records will be selected. It assumes the worst case,
that possibly ALL records will be selected.
Not all sort fields were
extracted.
The sort information will not be written to the output Link file.
This warning occurs when you >output filename,link and are
sorting by a field, but the field is not included in the list of extracted
fields. Suprlink cannot use the file, but it may be a perfectly valid file for
other applications.
NUMRECS exceeded; some
records not processed.
You specified a Numrecs and have reached it.
Record selection in
effect, percentage calculation is estimated.
You specified a Get or Input with record number selection and the
percentage complete is estimated.
Welcome to STExport
Welcome to STExport for MPE Version 5.4. STExport converts fields in
a self-describing input file into an output file that can be imported into
different applications.
Summary of the STExport commands:
|
Before
|
FLoating
|
Quote
|
Verif
|
|
CLean
|
Form
|
REDO
|
Xeq
|
|
Columns
|
HEAding
|
Reset
|
XML
|
|
DAte
|
HElp
|
Set
|
Zero
|
|
DElimiter
|
HTML
|
Sign
|
=expression
|
|
DO
|
Input
|
Spaces
|
:OS command
|
|
Escape
|
LISTREDO
|
SPaces
|
|
|
Exit
|
Output
|
Use
|
|
The minimum abbreviation of each command
is shown in capital letters.
STExport is installed as part of the Suprtool installation process.
See the "Installing Suprtool" chapter of the Suprtool User Manual for more details on how to install both
Suprtool and STExport.
STExport requires an external file for the Help command. STExport
dynamically changes this file name, but you can use a :File command to override
STExport's choice.
Default File Names
If you are running STExport on MPE V/E or
MPE/iX, STExport finds the name of the STExport program file name (e.g.,
stexport.Pub.Robelle). STExport uses this name to determine the name of the
other built-in file names. If STExport cannot call the procinfo intrinsic
(e.g., this intrinsic doesn't exist on MPE V/R), it assumes you are running
stexport.Pub.Robelle.
Account Name
The account name for all built-in files
is the same as the one where STExport is running (e.g., if you :run
stexport.Pub.Dev, the help file for STExport is stexport.Help.Dev).
Group Name
STExport examines the group name where
STExport is running to determine the group name for the built-in file names. If
the group name is Pub, STExport assumes help files are in the Help group. The
same assumption is made for any group name where the first three letters are
not Pub. When STExport is run from a group that starts with Pub (e.g., Pub),
STExport assumes the help files have the same suffix (e.g., help).
Examples
Here are a few examples of the names that
STExport would use for the STExport help file:
|
STExport Program File Name
|
STExport Help File Name
|
|
stexport.Pub.Robelle
|
stexport.Help.Robelle
|
|
stexport.Pub.Robelle
|
stexport.Help.Robelle
|
|
stexport.Pub.Account
|
stexport.Help.Account
|
|
stexport.PubRob.Account
|
stexport.HelpRob.Account
|
|
stexport.Robelle.Dist
|
stexport.Help.Dist
|
Changing Built-In File Names
You can use a :File command to tell
STExport where the help file is located. Your :File command must use the file
name that STExport dynamically assigned to the help file. For example, if
STExport is called STExport.Robelle.Dist, you would use this :File command:
:file
stexport.help.dist=stephelp.robelle.dist
To access STExport, type the following command:
:run
stexport.pub.robelle
STExport/Copyright
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1996-2001
(Version 5.4)
$
After a short pause, STExport takes over
your terminal and prints out some identifying information. You will notice that
your command prompt has changed to "$", telling you that you have
made it into STExport. STExport expects you to type command lines, ending each
one with Return.
Normally, you enter a series of commands. These commands specify the
Input file, the Output file, and the formatting options. Finally, you enter an
Xeq or an Exit command. This begins the actual STExport task.
If you entered the Exit command, STExport
finishes the current task, then returns you to the operating system or the
program that ran STExport.
$EXIT
End of program
:BYE
If you entered the Xeq command, STExport
finishes the current task, then prompts you for another task. This continues until
you enter the Exit command. If you wish to terminate STExport immediately
(perhaps you are confused), enter Exit Abort. This terminates the STExport
program immediately, without attempting any task.
If you run STExport within Qedit or Select, you can retain the
STExport process and quickly re-activate it later.
:run
qedit.pub.robelle
/:r
stexport.pub.robelle
$...
$exit
STEXPORT.PUB.ROBELLE
is still alive. Okay to HOLD ? Y
/...
/:activate
STEXPORT.PUB.ROBELLE
$...
$exit
Program Held. Use :ACTIVATE/:RUN;HOLD to re-run.
/...
You
can access STExport from within the Suprtool program using Suprtool's Export
command. Suprtool then runs STExport for you. All of STExport's commands are
available to you in Suprtool. When passing STExport commands through Suprtool,
you must preface each STExport command with Export.
For example,
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
>base customer
>get m-customer
>sort cust-no
>output
invoices,link
>xeq
>export input
invoices
>export sign
none {send "sign none" to
STExport}
>export output
invfile
>export exit {exit from STExport (not
Suprtool)}
Refer to the Export command in the Suprtool Commands chapter of the
Suprtool user manual for more information.
If you
want to prevent STExport from executing any MPE commands (e.g., :Purge), you
Run STExport with Parm=8192. This feature is automatically invoked by
Suprtool's Export command, when Set Limit MPE Off has been specified inside
Suprtool.
:run
stexport.pub.robelle;parm=8192
Some
users find that they Exit from STExport inadvertently. For STExport to get user
approval on Exit, Run STExport with Parm=64.
:run
stexport.pub.robelle;parm=64
$e
Okay to exit [no]:
$
If you
run STExport from within HPDesk (and some other programs), STExport suspends on
Exit but HPDesk does not notice. The next time you run STExport you will get a
new copy of STExport. Eventually you will have many suspended copies of
STExport hanging from HPDesk, consuming system resources. Running STExport with
Parm=32 forces STExport to terminate on Exit rather than suspend.
:run
stexport.pub.robelle;parm=32
STExport sets the system job control word (JCW) to a fatal state
when STExport fails in a batch job. STExport sets only the high-order bit of
the JCW. That is, it adds 32,768 to the existing JCW value. HP subsystems use
the other bits of the JCW, so STExport does nothing to them.
STExport operates in session mode or batch mode. In batch usage, any
"error" message causes STExport to quit, setting the Job Control Word
to flush the remainder of the JOB. Warning messages do not cause an abort.
In batch mode, STExport does not prompt
for missing information as it does in session mode. Instead, it attempts to
choose the alternative that has the least chance of destroying valid data. For
example, if the Output file is a duplicate file name in batch mode, STExport
saves the new Output file with a "made up" name (OUTPUTnn, where nn
is from 00 to 20), prints a warning message, and aborts.
|
Value
|
Function
|
|
32
|
don't suspend, terminate completely
|
|
64
|
check with user before Exiting
|
|
8192
|
don't allow MPE commands
|
Values may be combined by adding them together. For example, Parm =
96 means "check with me before exiting, then when I do actually exit,
terminate STExport completely instead of suspending".
When STExport closes the output file, it sets a JCW named
STExportOutCount with the number of output records. This is the same number reported in the total
line (i.e., OUT=). You can use this JCW
to control job stream execution by checking if the SprlinkOutCount JCW is
non-zero. I there are more than 65,535 output records, STExport sets
STExportOutCount to 65,535.
You can use the :Showjcw command to see
the value of a JCW. For values greater than 16K, Showjcw displays either the
word WARN, FATAL or SYSTEM followed by some digits. These words correspond to
the following values:
WARN 16384
FATAL 32768
SYSTEM 49152
Add the value of the word to the number
that appears with it for the true value of STExportOutCount. For example,
:showjcw
STExportoutcount
STEXPORTOUTCOUNT =
WARN8616
16384 + 8616 =
25000
The MPE/iX :Showvar command can also be
used to see the value of a JCW. Showvar displays the full, correct number
(e.g., 25,000) up to the maximum of 65,535.
STExport also sets two other JCWs: STExportOutCount1 and STExportOutCount2. These communicate the full OUT= value to the
STExport2 interface.
On MPE/iX, when STExport closes the output file, it also sets a
variable namedSTExportFullCount with the number of output records. This is the same number reported in the total
line (i.e., OUT=). The advantage of the
variable is that if more than 65,535 records are written to the output file,
the value of the STExportFullCount variable is not truncated.
Use
STExport to produce a formatted output file that can be used to import data into
databases and applications. Other databases have different requirements for the
format of input data. You will have to experiment with the various STExport
formatting options to find a format that your particular database tool accepts.
STExport reads one input file and formats each input record into one
record in the output file. The Input file must be a self-describing file (use
the Output-Link option in Suprtool).
Dates and Decimal Places
Use Suprtool's Item command to specify date formats and the number
of implied decimal places when you create the self-describing file. STExport
uses this information to correctly format the information in the output file.
See Appendix A for a complete example of how to use Suprtool's Item command and
Output-Link option to create an input file for STExport.
Each STExport formatting command applies to all fields of a specific
data-type (i.e., you cannot specify formatting field by field, only by type).
For example, all numeric-type fields can be formatted the same.
The main data-types that STExport
identifies are
|
Byte-Type:
|
STExport assumes that character
information is stored in byte-type fields. By default, all byte-type fields
are surrounded by quotes and trailing spaces are removed.
|
|
Numeric-Type:
|
The numeric data-types are integer,
logical, floating-point, packed, and display. STExport converts the internal
representation of each data-type into a string of ASCII digits. By default, all
numeric-type fields have a leading sign and are variable length. Where
appropriate, numeric-type fields are converted with a decimal point.
|
|
Floating-Type:
|
All commands that affect numeric-type
fields also affect floating-type fields. In addition, you can use the
Floating command to specify the format and decimal places for floating-type
fields (i.e., Classic or IEEE floating-point numbers).
|
|
Date-Type:
|
If a field has a date format, STExport
does extra formatting. By default, dates are formatted into yyyymmdd (e.g.,
20001125).
|
Use
the following table to determine which command applies to which data-type:
|
Command
|
Data-Type
|
|
Date
|
date-type
|
|
Floating
|
floating-type
|
|
Quote
|
byte-type
|
|
Sign
|
numeric-type
|
|
Spaces
|
byte-type
|
|
Zero
|
numeric-type
|
Many of STExport's commands, such as the formatting commands above,
once set will retain their settings between tasks. Several other non-formatting
commands will also retain their settings:
|
Command
|
|
Columns
|
|
DElimiter
|
|
HEAding
|
|
HTML
|
Each command and its options will remain
in effect between any STExport task, unless specifically turned off.
For example, if a previous task has had
custom Headings set with the Heading and Heading Add options, the Headings will
remain in effect for each subsequent task until a new Heading option is
entered.
On average, STExport is three-to-five times slower than Suprtool.
This is the price we pay for having all of STExport's formatting features.
You can make STExport faster by doing the
following:
1.
Pre-select only the records you
need with Suprtool. The fewer records STExport has to process, the faster it
runs.
2.
Use Suprtool's Extract command
to select only the fields that you need to import in your final application.
The fewer the number of fields in the input file, the faster STExport can
format each record.
STExport is able to substitute any CI variables from any command
line source, whether through interactive, use file or batch input.
In order to use this feature, issue the
following Set command:
Variable Substitution is not on by
default for backward compatibility.
Batch
Since the Streams facility (under default
setups) will replace any "!" found in the first column of a job
stream. Anytime you want to specify an entire line thru Variable Substitution
you will need to leave a space before the variable is specified.
!setvar input
"i dfile by message-no"
!run
stexport.pub.robelle
$set varsub on
$ !input
Notes
For MPE commands some variables will be
resolved twice when passed off to MPE, which will give different values for a
variable.
Setting variables at the CI level:
MPEXL:setvar x 10
MPEXL:setvar y
"!!x"
MPEXL:showvar [xy]
X = 10
Y = !x
Setting variables within STExport
$set varsub on
$setvar a 10
$setvar b
"!!a"
$showvar [ab]
A = 10
B = 10
Because Stexport does one level of
variable substitution prior to the command being passed off to MPE, setting
variables in Stexport that involves other variables will give different results
from MPE. We recommend that you set the variables prior to running Stexport, or
that you temporarily turn off variable substitution with the Set Varsub Off
command.
$set varsub off
$setvar a 10
$setvar b
"!!a"
$showvar [ab]
A = 10
B = !a
$set varsub on
When you run STExport, it prompts for
commands on $stdlist with a "$" character and reads command lines
from $stdinx. STExport commands contain a command name followed by one or more
parameters, and are patterned after the same commands in Suprtool.
In this chapter, we describe the STExport
commands in alphabetical order. Following each command name in brackets is the
minimal abbreviation for the command. For example: [I] for Input and [O] for
Output.
You may shorten the command to the first letter of the command name.
You may enter the letters in either
uppercase or lowercase, because STExport upshifts everything in the command
line except literal strings within quotes ("abc") and file names.
These two commands are identical:
Comments may appear at the end of any command line, when they are
surrounded by braces. Many of the examples in this manual show comments at the
end of each command line. You can enter a comment as the only item in a
STExport command line. When continuing command lines, the comment can appear
before or after the continuation character.
${ format reals
with two decimal places. }
$input invoices
$floating fixed 2 {Floating option}
$output invfile {produces the file we
want}
$exit
STREAMX is a product from VESOFT that permits you to build flexible
job streams. STREAMX contains a complete programming language with loops,
prompts, and parameter substitution. A problem arises when trying to enter
comments into a Suprtool batch job that will be submitted with STREAMX.
Suprtool uses the {...} pair to delimit comments. STREAMX uses these same
characters for expressions.
You cannot change Suprtool's comment
character, but you can change the {...} characters in STREAMX. The following
example shows how to change the STREAMX expression characters from {...} to
~...~:
!job
example,user.acct
::setbraces ~~
!run
stexport.pub.robelle
$input invoices {Input file to format}
$floating fixed 2 {Option for floating-point numbers}
$output invdata {Produces the file we want}
$exit
!tell
~hpjobname~,~hpuser~.~hpaccount~;Example done.
!eoj
STExport
also accepts MPE commands, with or without a colon.
For commands that are the same in both
STExport and MPE, STExport executes the MPE command only if you type the colon.
For example:
$help {you get STExport help}
$:help {you get MPE help}
STExport/iX
executes any MPE command (e.g., Run), UDCs, and command files. Caution: programs that suspend, instead
of terminating, are not killed by the HPCICOMMAND intrinsic.
STExport's Input and Output commands
accept a file name in either MPE or POSIX format. File names starting with
"/", "./", or "../" are treated as POSIX file
names. All other file names are assumed to be MPE file names. MPE file names
are upshifted and POSIX file names are not. POSIX file names are limited to a
maximum of 240 characters. Here are some examples of POSIX file names:
:hello
david,mgr.dev,david
:CHDIR SUBDIR
:run
stexport.pub.robelle
$input ./file
$verify input
/DEV/DAVID/SUBDIR/file
Any command line beginning with an equal sign (=) is treated as a
calculator expression. This feature can be used to do other calculations
without the need of an electronic calculator.
You can obtain a short description of the
calculator by entering the following:
=? {? gives a summary of =
functions}
For a detailed description of the
calculator and its options, see the Suprtool manual.
You can interrupt a STExport task with the Control-Y key (hold down
Control while striking Y). STExport responds by telling you how far it has
gotten (IN=, OUT=, etc.), and asking if you wish to stop. Hit the Return key to
continue or type YES to stop the
task.
Repeat any combination of the previous 1000 command lines, with or
without editing.
BEFORE [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
redo previous line)
(BQ=redo
without change)
The Before command allows you to modify
the commands before it executes them. If you don't need to change them, use BQ
or Do.
The Before command uses Qedit-style
control characters for modifying the commands. The default mode is to replace
characters. To delete, use Control-D; to insert, use Control-B. If you prefer
HP-style modify (D, R, I, and U), use the Redo command instead of Before.
Examples
$listf
@.soruce {'source' is not spelled
correctly}
NON-EXISTENT
GROUP. (CIERR 908)
$Before {redo most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last command is printed}
our {you enter changes to it}
listf @.source {the edited command is shown}
{you press Return}
$listredo -10/
$before 5 {redo 5th command in stack}
$bef 8/10 {redo 8th through 10th}
$b listf {redo last Listf command}
$b listf temp {redo "listf temp" command}
$b @temp {redo last containing
"temp"}
$before -2 {redo command before previous}
$before -5/-2 {redo by relative lines}
Modify Operators
If you wish to change any characters within the line, the modify
operators are the regular Control Codes used in Qedit:
·
Any printing characters replace
the ones above.
·
Control-D plus spaces deletes
columns above.
·
Control-B puts you into
"insert before" mode.
·
Control-A starts appending
characters at the end of line.
·
Control-A, Control-D, plus
spaces, deletes from the end.
·
Control-T ends Insert Mode,
allowing movement to a new column.
·
Control-G recovers the original
line.
·
Control-O specifies "overwrite"
mode (needed for spaces).
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent
file and can therefore be used from another session. You can use the Set redo command to specify a filename
to save your redo commands. Please see the Set Redo command for details.
Specifies what characters to clean from a byte type field.
CLEAN [ SPECIAL | <string> <range> ]
(Default:
None)
STExport will automatically clean all the
byte type fields for a given SD file. To define what characters that need to be
replaced you use the clean command with the character you want to clean in
quotes. Since most of the characters that you will need to clean are
unprintable, you can enter the decimal equivalent of the character. This is
denoted by entering the "^" character in quotes preceding the decimal
number of the character you wish to clean.
You can set the character with the
command set cleanchar as shown below.
$ in mysdfile
$clean
"^9","^10","^0","^7"
$set cleanchar " "
$out myexport
$xeq
Since the Cleanchar is by default set to
space, the above task could simply be:
$in mysdfile
$clean
"^9","^10","^0","^7"
$out myexport
$xeq
The SPECIAL keyword automatically defines
Clean characters of Decimal 0 thru to Decimal 31.
$in mysdfile
$clean special
$out myexport
$exit
You can also specify a range of
characters with the following syntax:
$in mysdfile
$clean "^0:^10"
$out myexport
$exit
The above task would clean all byte type
fields of any characters from Decimal 0 (Null) to Decimal 10. (Line Feed)
You can have the Clean function clean the field, and instead of
replacing with a space, STExport will essentially shift characters to the left
by Setting the CleanChar in the following manner:
STExport will pad the field that was
cleaned with the appropriate amount of characters with a space at the end of
the field.
Specify whether fields are formatted into variable- or fixed-length
columns.
COLUMNS FIXED | NONE
(Default:
None)
Most PC software expects imported data to
be in variable-length columns. Other database systems prefer data to be aligned
in fixed columns. Use the Columns command to specify whether the output file
has variable- or fixed-length columns.
Output File
The Columns command also affects the format of the Output file. If
you specify Columns None, the output file will have variable-length records. If
you specify Columns Fixed, the output file will have fixed-length records.
Specify a specific date-format for all dates.
DATE NONE | date-format
[ "separator" ]
INVALID
ASTERISKS | NULL | "string"
(Default:
yyyymmdd Invalid Asterisks)
Use the Date command to specify an output
format for dates. Use the Invalid option to specify how invalid dates should be
formatted in the output file. The advantage of the None option is that it
formats all dates, whether they are valid or not. If you select a date-format, the default Invalid option
replaces invalid dates with asterisks "*".
STExport must know which fields are dates
and the format of each date. Use Suprtool's Item command and Output,Link option
to specify the date information.
Date Format
The date-format can be one
of:
·
ccyymmdd
·
yyyymmdd
·
ddmmyyyy
·
mmddyyyy
·
yymmdd
·
ddmmyy
·
mmddyy
·
aammdd
STExport converts each date field from
its internal date format into the format that you specify.
Separator Character
By
default, STExport formats all dates without a separator between the day, month,
and year. Specify your own separator by enclosing it inside quotes after you
specify the date format. The separator must be one character long. For example,
to specify dates in ddmmyyyy format with a slash separator, use
To specify dates in yymmdd format with a
dash separator, use
Oracle Dates
Oracle dates contain both the date and the time. STExport formats
the date, but not the time. If you specify Date None, Oracle dates will be
treated as byte-type fields. Since Oracle dates actually contain binary data,
the output is often unusable by other applications, unless you specify a
specific date-format.
Invalid Dates
By
default, all invalid dates are formatted as asterisks. STExport treats any date
that does not have a valid century, year, month, or combination (e.g., February
29, 2000) as invalid. You can specify how you want STExport to format invalid
dates by using the Invalid option of the Date command.
If you specify,
STExport will produce a zero-length field
if you specify Column Variable and spaces if you specify Column Fixed. If you
want to specify an explicit string for all invalid dates, do so after the
Invalid option. For example,
will cause STExport to produce a string
of five percent signs for any invalid date.
Example
First, use Suprtool to create the input
file with the appropriate date attributes:
>get d-sales
>item deliv-date,date,mmddyyyy
>item purch-date,date,mmddyyyy
>output dsales,link
>xeq
Then use STExport to read the dsales
file. Specify Date ddmmyyyy "-" which causes all valid dates to be
formatted in day-month-year format with a dash as the separator:
$input dsales
$date ddmmyyyy "-"
$output dexport
$xeq
Specify the format for the decimal place in numeric fields.
DECIMAL PERIOD | COMMA
(Default:
Period)
|
The fields in the input file must have
been created with decimal places, using Suprtool's Item command.
|
The Decimal
command specifies what separator will be used to indicate the decimal place
in numeric fields. In North America, the custom is to indicate the decimal
place in numbers with a period (.). Outside North America, the custom is to
indicate the decimal place with a comma (,). If the decimal place indicator
is incorrect, it is harder to import files into other applications.
|
The Decimal command does not apply to
floating-point fields.
Specify a delimiter, if any, that appears between each field in the
output record.
DELIMITER NONE | COMMA | TAB | SPACE | "string"
(Default:
Comma)
Use Delimiter Comma to create an output
file in "comma-delimited" format (this is common for PC database
applications). Use Delimiter Tab to tell STExport to insert the tab character
between fields, instead of a comma.
If you have selected Columns Fixed, you
will likely want to remove the delimiter by specifying Delimiter None. If you
want some white space between fixed-length columns, specify Delimiter Space
instead.
String Parameter
You can put anything inside quote characters to specify your own
Delimiter. For example, Delimiter " , " would insert a space, a
comma, and another space between each field in the output record. You can use
either single- or double-quote characters to specify the delimiter (e.g.,
Delimiter " " and Delimiter ' ' are the same). The maximum length of
the delimiter string is three characters.
The Do command repeats (without changes) any of the previous 1000
commands.
DO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
repeat the previous command)
Commands are numbered sequentially from
one as entered; the last 1000 of them are retained. Use the :Listredo command
to display the previous commands. You can repeat a single command (do
5), a range of commands (do
5/10) or the most recent command whose name matches a
string (do list). If you want to modify the
commands before executing them, use Redo or Before.
Examples
$listredo
$do {do previous command again}
$do 39 {do command line 39 again}
$do 5/8 {do command lines 5 to 8 again}
$do input {do most recent Input command}
$do -2 {do command before previous}
$do -7/-5 {do by relative line number}
$do 5/ {do command lines 5 to "last"}
Notes
The Do command cannot be abbreviated.
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent
file and can therefore be used from another session. You can use the Set redo command to specify a filename
to save your redo commands. Please see the Set Redo command for details.
Specifies what character to escape the defined Delimiter, Quote or
End of Line character.
ESCAPE DELIM |
QUOTE | EOL |"string"|
(Default:
None)
Many SQL importers allow you to add an
escape character in front of characters that may mean something else to the
import program. For example if the import program thinks that the delimiter
character is a comma, the importer may treat a comma in an address field as an
indication to move to the next field, which will throw of the import.
Some import programs, will treat the next
character as data as opposed to a delimeter if the character is preceded by an
escape character, such as a slash. Thus when the field is analyzed by STExport
the data that originally started as:
"Niagara Falls,Ontario, Canada"
would be transformed to be:
"Niagara Falls/,Ontario/, Canada"
This function will not work on fixed
columns and can be invoked with the escape command:
escape delimeter quote eol "/"
The above command will take the defined
delimeter, quote and Eol and escape with a "/", if found in any byte type field.
Exit STExport in one of three ways. By default, perform the current
task, if any, then leave STExport. Users are often frustrated when they exit
STExport after specifying part of a task and STExport starts processing the
task. To avoid this situation, use the Abort or Suspend options to exit STExport
conveniently without executing the current task.
EXIT [ ABORT | SUSPEND | XEQ ]
(Default:
Xeq)
Typing Exit with no parameters means Exit
Xeq. STExport recognizes special command names which specify both the Exit
command and an exit option (e.g., ES means Exit Suspend).
Cancels
the current operation and terminates STExport. The Exit command without
parameters always attempts to perform the task currently specified, while Exit
Abort cancels the task and terminates immediately. Should STExport be executed
as a son process, Exit only suspends STExport, while Exit Abort actually
terminates the process.
Examples
$:comment. You began to specify an input file, stopped
for
$:comment. coffee, and decided to cancel the task
$:comment. upon your return.
$input invoices
... coffee break ...
$exit abort {cancel the task and
terminate}
End Of Program
When running STExport as a son process (e.g., from Qedit), it would
be nice to suspend STExport without executing the current task. Exit Suspend
does this. After returning to STExport, all specifications for the current task
are still in effect.
Examples
:run
qedit.pub.robelle
/:run stexport.pub.robelle
$input invoices
$floating fixed 2 {start specifying options}
$exit suspend {return to Qedit without an
Xeq}
STEXPORT.PUB.ROBELLE
is still alive. Okay to HOLD ? Y
/...
/:activate STExport
STEXPORT.PUB.ROBELLE
$output invdata {continue specifications}
$xeq {execute the current task}
To
perform the current task, you can either use Xeq (which leaves you inside
STExport, ready to define another task) or Exit Xeq (which leaves STExport when
done with the task).
After the STExport task completes, STExport either terminates, or
suspends and awakens a father process (i.e., :Run from within Qedit). Exit Xeq
is the default option (i.e., specifying exit starts execution of the current
task).
Examples
:run
stexport.pub.robelle
$exit {no input was specified}
:run
stexport.pub.robelle
$input invoices
$floating fixed 2
$output invdata
$exit {format and stop}
Specify
the format and the number of decimal-places for floating-point fields.
FLOATING DEFAULT |
FIXED
decimal-places |
SCIENTIFIC
decimal-places
(Default:
Default)
By default, STExport formats
floating-point fields (classic floating-point or IEEE floating-point) into
either a fixed number or into scientific notation. Which notation STExport
chooses, depends on the value of each field in each input record. You can force
STExport to choose either scientific or fixed notation and the number of
decimal places for all floating-point numbers. You cannot specify these options
for a specific field or make them different for 32-bit versus 64-bit
floating-point numbers.
Fixed Format
Use Floating Fixed to force all floating-point numbers to appear in
a fixed format. You specify the maximum number of digits to the right of the
decimal point. If you specify Floating Fixed, STExport does not remove trailing
zeros from the formatted numbers. If you specify Columns Fixed, all
floating-point values will be aligned along the decimal point.
Scientific Format
Use Floating Scientific to force all floating-point numbers to
appear in scientific notation. You must specify the number of digits to the
right of the decimal point. The Scientific option formats the number with all
significant digits to the right of the decimal-point followed by the exponent
(e.g., "0.47832E-10").
Notes
Both the Fixed and Scientific options
attempt to round the number to the specified number of decimal-places within
the maximum width for each floating-point data-type. If STExport cannot format
a floating-point field in the specified number of decimal-places, the number
appears as asterisks "****".
Display the fields in a self-describing file.
FORM [filename]
If no file name is specified, the fields
in the input file are displayed. The display shows the field type and field
length in IMAGE notation. An I1-field is a single integer. Packed-fields show
the number of nibbles (subtract one to obtain the number of digits). Byte and
zoned-decimal fields show the byte length.
When showing the form of a
self-describing file, STExport shows the byte offset of each field after the
subcount, type, and sublength. The first field always appears at offset one.
There are two types of self-describing
files. One type is produced with Suprtool's Query output option. You produce
the other type with the Link output option. The Form command shows the internal
self-describing version number, enabling you to tell the difference.
A.00.00 - Query Output Option
Compound fields have a question mark for
the type, and the length is the number of bytes in the field. Sort information
about the file is missing. Here is an example form listing:
$form custfile
File: CUSTFILE.EXAMPLE.ROBELLE (SD Version A.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CHARACTER X5
1 {length is five bytes}
ZONED Z5 6
{room for
five digits}
INTEGER I1
11 {single integer}
DOUBLE I2
13 {double integer}
PACKED P6
17 {room for five digits}
QUAD I4 20
{eight-byte
integer}
REPEATINT ?6
28 {compound field}
LOGICAL K1
34 {single logical}
DBLLOG K2
36 {double logical}
Limit: 10000 EOF: 15
Entry Length: 44 Blocking: 64
B.00.00 - Link Output Option
These self-describing files contain
information about how the file was sorted. Compound fields are handled
correctly, so the Form command shows compound fields just as you would see them
in IMAGE. The Item command in Suprtool identifies the date format or the number
of decimal places of an item. The Link output option saves the date and decimal
attributes as part of the field description:
$form custfile
File:
DATAFILE.EXAMPLE.ROBELLE (SD Version
B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CHARACTER X5
1 <<Sort #1 >>
REPEATINT 3I1
6 {compound field}
DATE J2 12
<<YYYYMMDD>>
DOLLAR P6
16 << .2 >>
Limit: 10000 EOF: 15
Entry Length: 16 Blocking: 64
Formout File
The Form command writes all output to the file Formout. This file
defaults to $stdlist. You can redirect this file to a line printer or a disc
drive. If you redirect the Formout file to a disc file, Suprtool assumes a
temporary file by default.
>:file
formout;dev=lp
>form custfile {writes to line printer}
>:file formout;dev=disc
>form invfile {writes to temporary file}
Specify a heading, if any, that appears as the first record of the
output file.
HEADING NONE | FIELDNAMES |
string | ADD string | COLUMN string
(Default:
None)
When importing data into other
applications the first line of the import file is often treated as field names
or headings. Use the Heading command to specify what STExport should write as
the first line of the output file.
Field Names
If you
specify Heading Fieldnames, STExport creates a default heading. This heading is
constructed by using the field name of each field in the input file. The
Fieldname option uses the formatting options that apply to byte-type fields to
determine the final format (e.g., the Quote command).
STExport produces multiple field names
for compound fields. For compound fields, the repeat count is used to determine
the number of field names. The repeat count is appended to the field name,
starting with one, until all the field names have been generated.
User Specified Heading
You
can specify your own heading line by doing:
Because the maximum length of an STExport
input line is 256 characters, you may not be able to specify a long heading
with a single Heading command. Use Heading Add to add additional strings to
your heading:
Heading "Account" {Note no Add in first string}
Heading Add
"First Name "
Heading Add "Last
Name "
Heading Add "City
"
Heading Add
"State "
If you specify your own heading, STExport
does not attempt to apply any formatting options. If you need each field in the
heading line to be surrounded by quotes and separated by commas, you have to
supply these yourself. For example,
Heading '"Account"' {Note no Add in first string}
Heading Add ','
Heading Add
'"First Name"'
Heading Add ','
Heading Add
'"Last Name"'
Heading Add ','
Heading Add '"City"'
Heading Add ','
Heading Add
'"State"'
Column Headings
It is difficult to get headings right
when you have to specify all the quotes and delimiters with the Heading Add
option. Instead, use Heading Column to specify individual column headings
without having to type formatting information. STExport then uses the current
quote and delimiter settings in the heading.
For example, if you specify:
Heading Column
'Account'
Heading Column 'First
Name'
Heading Column 'Last
Name'
Heading Column 'City'
Heading Column 'State'
and Quote Double and Delimiter Comma are
in effect, then the heading STExport produces will be:
"Account","First
Name","Last Name","City","State"
Notes
You cannot combine the Add and Column
options. You must specify one or the other. If you start with Heading Add and
then later specify Heading Column, STExport erases the heading you created with
Heading Add and starts over with the first column that you specify with Heading
Column. Similarly, if you start with Heading Column, a Heading string or Heading Add will start over
with a new heading.
Show what commands and options are available in STExport.
HELP [ command
| keyword [ ,section ] ]
(Default:
browse through the entire help file)
Command Help
If you specify any parameters, Help first
assumes that you want help on a specific STExport command. If you know the
structure of the help file, you can specify one of the keywords under the
command name.
$help sign {help on the Sign command}
$help
sign,trailing {trailing section of the Sign
command}
Keyword Help
If we cannot find any help in the
"Commands" section of the help file, we assume that you specified one
of the outer-level keywords in the help file. To see this list of keywords,
type help with no parameters. You see a short introduction to STExport and then
a list of keywords. You can specify any of these keywords on the Help command.
You can also specify a subkeyword.
$help
intro,input {input section of
Introduction}
Quick Help - HQ
HQ asks STExport to look under the keyword Quick in the help file.
Quick contains the text from the STExport Quick Reference Guide, offering the
experienced user a quick review of the syntax of any command.
$hq input {quick description of Input}
Notes
If no parameters are specified, Help allows you to browse through
the help file, stexport.Help.Robelle. The Help command uses the Qhelp subsystem
from the QLIB. For "help in help", type "?" when you see
the Qhelp prompt character ("?"). The help file is organized into
levels. To go back to the previous level, press Return. Press F8 to exit the
Qhelp subsystem and return to STExport.
Use HTML to produce Web pages for either Internet or Intranet
applications.
HTML NONE | PREFORMATTED | TABLE |
TITLE
"string" |
HEADING
"string"
(Default:
None)
Web applications expect data in a special
format called the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). Use the HTML option to
request that STExport format the input file into HTML format.
Example
$html table title
"Product Listing"
Maximum Size of HTML Files
Web
browsers often cannot process large documents. The maximum size depends on the
browser, the version of that browser, the operating system it is working on,
and how much physical memory is present on the client machine. We suggest that
you limit your Web pages to less than 1,000 lines and restrict the number of
columns, unless you are certain that your users can handle larger files. This
advice reflects not so much a limitation of STExport, but a limitation of how
Web browsers work.
Preformatted Format
To preserve the columns and spacing of each output line, use the
HTML Preformatted option. This option puts an HTML <pre> tag around all
the data in the input file. Most Web browsers will display preformatted text in
a fixed-width font such as Courier. Therefore, if you specify HTML
Preformatted, you should also select Columns Fixed.
Table Format
Use HTML Table to create output in HTML table format. STExport
creates tables with a border between each column and row. Tables make it easier
to read tabular information, but some older browsers do not support tables.
If you specify HTML Table, all byte-type
fields are left-justified and all other fields are right-justified. If you use
Heading Column or Fieldnames, the column headings are specified with HTML table
heading tags. Most browsers highlight the column headings in some way, such as
bold text centered over the column.
Title
All HTML documents must have a title. By default, STExport uses the
title "This is the Title". You should specify your own title using
the Title option.
Heading
The heading appears before the column headings and data from your
input file. By default, there is no heading. Use the Heading option to specify
your own heading.
Column Headings
If you
specify HTML Table, use the Heading command to specify column headings for HTML
output. The Heading Fieldnames option will produce acceptable column headings,
but it is better to use Heading Column to specify a string for each of the
fields in your input file.
Roman-8 Characters
HP e3000 and HP 9000 computers use the Roman-8 character set. Web
pages must use the ISO-8859-1 character set. The characters in the Roman-8 set
are similar to, but not identical with, the ISO-8859-1 character set.
When formatting byte-type fields,
STExport attempts to convert any Roman-8 input character into the corresponding
ISO-8859-1 character. STExport also
tries to make reasonable conversions such as:
|
Symbol
|
Converted To
|
|
>
|
>
|
|
<
|
<
|
|
&
|
&
|
Those characters that cannot be converted
are dropped from the output. The following characters cannot be converted:
|
Symbol
|
Roman-8 value
|
name
|
|
`
|
169
|
grave mark
|
|
^
|
170
|
circumflex
|
|
~
|
172
|
tilde
|
|
ƒ
|
190
|
function symbol
|
|
ß
|
222
|
beta symbol
|
|
Š
|
235
|
capital-S, Icelandic
|
|
š
|
236
|
small-S, Icelandic
|
|
Ÿ
|
238
|
capital-Y, umlaut
|
Notes
If you specify HTML Table, STExport sets:
·
Quotes None
·
Delimiters None
If you specify HTML Preformatted,
STExport sets:
·
Quotes None
·
Delimiters Space
·
Columns None
In either case, any changes cause
STExport to print a warning to let you know that these options have changed. If
you do want quotes around byte-type fields or delimiters between fields,
specify those options after selecting the HTML option.
Specifies
the primary input file.
INPUT filename
There can be only one Input file per
task. The Input file must be a self-describing file, which should be created by
Suprtool using the Output-Query or Output-Link option. If you want STExport to
format date-fields and implied decimal places, you must use the Output-Link
option of Suprtool when you create the file for input to STExport.
Every record in the input file is
formatted into a corresponding record in the output file. It is best to have
Suprtool Extract only the fields you actually need. Only those fields needed
for import into the final application should be present in the Input file.
The Listredo command displays any of the previous 1000 commands.
LISTREDO [ start
[ / stop ] ] [;ABS] [;OUT=file]
[
string ] [;REL]
[
ALL | @ ] [;UNN]
(Default:
display previous 20 commands)
(BJ
and ,, are short for LISTREDO)
Commands are numbered sequentially from
one as entered; the last 1000 are retained. You can display a single command, a
range of commands, all 1000, or all the commands whose name matches the string.
You can print the commands with ABSolute line numbers (the default), RELative
line numbers (-5/-4), or UNNumbered. You can write the commands to your
terminal or OUT to a temporary file. If you want to redo any of these commands,
see Do, Redo, and Before.
Examples
$listredo 5
$listredo 5/10
$listredo help {print all Help commands}
$listredo -10 {print last ten commands}
$listredo ALL {print entire redo stack}
$listredo @;rel {print ALL, relative numbers}
$listredo purge {print all Purge commands}
$listredo purge
xx {print all "purge
xx" commands}
$listredo @purge {print all with "purge"
anywhere}
$listredo
1/10;out=*lp {dump commands to printer}
$listredo
@;unn;out=save {write commands to a file}
Notes
The Listredo command cannot be
abbreviated, but BJ and ,, (comma comma) are accepted as a short forms.
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent
file and can therefore be used from another session. You can use the Set redo command to specify a filename
to save your redo commands. Please see the Set Redo command for details.
Specifies the Output file.
OUTPUT * | filename [TEMP] [ERASE]
By
default, the Output file is permanent and named "Output". If you
specify Columns None, the output file will have variable-length records. When
Columns Fixed is specified, STExport creates the output file with fixed-length
records.
STExport computes the maximum record size
by computing the maximum length of each formatted field and adding them
together. If the heading line is longer than this, the length of the heading
line is used as the record length. You can use a :file equation to reduce the
record size, but it is not recommended since too short a record size can cause
STExport to fail in the middle of a task.
File Equations
STExport
allows the use of file equations to help ensure a file is built with the
attributes that you require in the output file.
One example of this is when you are
generating HTML output and want to use it with the Apache Web server on MPE.
The Web server needs the files to be bytestream files.
One caveat for this technique with
bytestream files is that you have to specify a disc value greater than or equal
to the total number of bytes that will be written to the file, because by
definition a bytestream file has a record size of only one byte. An example of
this technique is as follows:
:file
x=myhtml;rec=,,b;disc=100000
$in mysdfile
$html table title
"My Web Page"
$out *x
$exit
Stdlist
If the output file name is *, each output
record is written to stdlist. This is useful for trying out different
formatting combinations until you find the one that best fits the application
that you want to import data into. For example,
$input sdfile
$output *
$xeq
$floating fixed 2 {change one option}
$input sdfile
$output *
$xeq {view the result}
$sign none {change a different option}
$input sdfile
$output *
$xeq {and so on}
Specify which quote character, if any, is to be used around
byte-type fields.
QUOTE NONE | DOUBLE | SINGLE
(Default:
Double)
Most software packages expect byte-type
fields to be in one of two formats:
1.
Fixed-column (see the Column
command).
2.
Surrounded by single- or
double-quotes. In this case, you may also need to remove trailing spaces (see
the Spaces command).
No Quotes for Fixed Columns
Use
Quote None to cause byte-type fields to be output as a group of characters. In
many cases, you would combine this option with Columns Fixed.
Single or Double Quotes
By
default, all byte type fields are surrounded by double quotes. Specify single
quotes using the Single option. If a byte type field contains the quote
character specified in the quote command, it is replaced with a space. For
example, if the input was:
and Quote Single had been specified, then
the output would be:
Enables you to modify and repeat any of the previous 1000 command
lines.
REDO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
redo the previous command)
The Redo command allows you to modify the
commands before it executes them. If you do not need to change them, use the Do
command. Commands are numbered sequentially from one as entered; the last 1000
are retained. Use the :Listredo command to display the previous commands. You
can Redo a single command, a range of commands, or the most recent command
whose name matches a string.
The Redo command uses MPE-style editing
logic (D, I, R, U and >). The default mode is to replace characters. To
delete, type DDDD under the characters to be removed. To insert, type I under
the insertion spot, then the new characters. To undo your changes, type U. To
append to the end of the line, use >xxx. To delete from the end of the line,
use >DD. To replace at the end of the line, use >Rxxx. And to erase the
rest of the line, use D>. If you prefer Qedit-style editing (Control-D,
etc.), use the Before command instead of the Redo command.
Examples
$listf
@.soruce {'source' is not spelled
right}
NON-EXISTENT
GROUP. (CIERR 908)
$redo {redo most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last command is printed}
our {you enter changes to it}
listf @.source {edited command is shown}
{you press <return> }
$listredo all
$redo 5 {redo 5th command in stack}
$redo {redo previous command}
$redo -2 {redo command before previous}
$redo 8/10 {redo 8th through 10th}
$redo -10/ {redo -10 through last}
$redo purge {redo last Purge command}
$redo purge temp {redo last "purge temp"}
$redo @temp {redo last containing
"temp"}
Notes
The Redo command cannot be abbreviated.
To save more commands, use a :File
command on the file Stexredo before you run STExport:
file
stexredo;disc=5000
run
stexport.pub.robelle
Cancel the current task.
RESET
Reset closes the current Input file, then
resets the Output file name to "Output". Formatting options are not
reset, only the task-related commands are reset. If you try to reset an
individual command, STExport prints a warning.
Enables or disables certain operating options within STExport. These
options are not reset by Xeq or Reset commands.
SET [CLEANCHAR <string> ]
[MAPPED ON|OFF]
[REDO filename]
[STATISTICS ON|OFF]
[VARSUB ON|OFF]
[VARSUBDEBUG
ON|OFF]
[WARNINGS ] ON|OFF
[XMLTAGCHAR ] "." | "_" | "-"
[ZONEDFIX] ON|OFF
SET
CleanChar <string>
(Initially:
set to space)
Sets
what character is used to replace a Clean character. If you just want to clean
the fields and replace the “bad” character with no character then you need to
set the CleanChar in the following manner:
See the Clean command for more details.
SET
MAPPED ON | OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
Mapped
forces STExport/iX to read the input file using mapped file access. Specifying
this option is an error in STExport/V. If the input is not in memory, the wall
time performance is worse with Set Mapped On, but CPU time performance is
better. You must Set Mapped On before specifying the input file.
SET
REDO filename
(Initially:
unnamed temporary file)
Commands
entered at the STExport prompt are saved in something called the redo stack.
You can recall commands from the redo stack by using other commands such as
Before, Do and Redo. By default, the redo stack is stored in a temporary file
and discarded as soon as you exit. This temporary stack is not preserved across
STExport invocations.
The new Set Redo command assigns a
permanent file as the redo stack, allowing the stack to become available for
future STExport invocations. For example, to assign the Myredo file as a
persistent redo stack, enter
If the file does not exist, STExport
creates it. Otherwise, STExport uses the existing file. All subsequent commands
are written to the persistent redo stack. The setting is valid for the duration
of the STExport session. As soon as you exit STExport, the setting is
discarded. Next time you run STExport, you will get the temporary stack.
If the file name is not qualified, the
redo stack is created in the logon group and account. This may be desirable if
you want to have separate stacks. If you want to always use the same persistent
stacks, you should qualify the name.
The Verify command shows which stack is
currently in use. If it shows <temporary>, then STExport is using the
default stack. Anything else is the name of the file used on the Set Redo
command.
Concurrency
When STExport uses the default temporary
stack, it is only accessible to that particular instance of STExport. You can
run as many STExport instances as you need and each one gets its own redo
stack. With temporary stacks you will never get into concurrency problems.
If you start using a persistent redo
stack, however, you might start running into concurrency problems. A persistent
redo stack can only be used by one STExport instance at a time. If you try to
use a persistent redo stack that is already in use, you will get the following
message:
$Set Redo Myredo
EXCLUSIVE VIOLATION:
FILE BEING ACCESSED (FSERR 90)
Unable to open file
for REDO stack
In this situation, STExport continues to
use the redo stack active at the time and lets you continue working as normal.
Qedit can also have permanent redo
stacks. To prevent products from writing to each other's redo stack, it is
advisable to have separate stacks for each product by giving them different
file names. For example, if you use the command
you will have a redo stack called Myredo
for your STExport commands. If you exit STExport, then run Qedit and supply the
same command Set Redo command, your Qedit commands will be written to the same
file that was used for your STExport commands.
SET
STATISTICS ON | OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
Statistics
causes STExport to print statistics at the end of each task.
SET
VARSUB ON | OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
Setting
Variable Substitution causes STExport to resolve any CI variables in a command
before processing.
SET VARSUBDEBUG ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Suprtool, now has a setting called
Set VarsubDebug on which will print out the line after the variable
substitution has occurred. This setting only works if Set Varsub is on and Set
VarsubDebug is on.
setvar outfile &
:"/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901"
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
SUPRTOOL/iX/Copyright
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1981-2007.
(Version 5.4
Internal) TUE, OCT 30, 2007, 2:58 PM
Type H for he
>set varsub on
>set varsubdebug on
>in
file1sd.suprtest
vd:in file1sd.suprtest
>output
!outfile,link,temp
vd:output
/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123
vd:2345678901,link,temp
The
output is formatted into 74 byte chunks and printed with a preceding “vd:” so
the “substituted” line is clear.
SET
WARNINGS OFF
(Initially: ON)
Suprtool normally prints warning messages out to $stdlist. You can
turn off these messages when you are running from batch by issuing a Set
Warnings off command. If you are simulating batch mode with the Set Interactive
Off command, you must do the Set Warnings off after the Set Interactive Off.
The default for this setting is On.
SET
XMLTAGCHAR "." | "-" |"_"
(Initially: ".")
In XML the tags that surrounded the data can not have any special
characters other than hyphen, underscore and period
("-","_", "."). So STExport replaces any of the
invalid special characters with a "." by default. You can change the
default character To be something else with the following set command:
STExport will only allow the hyphen,
underscore and period to be set with this command.
SET
ZONEDFIX OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Set ZonedFix has been added to fix a zoned field that when converted
to byte, results in "?", meaning that the source field has some
characters that were not expected in a Zoned field. If Set ZonedFix is On
STExport zeroes out the field after an attempted conversion of the field yields
characters that cannot be converted.
The default for this setting is Off.
Specify what should be done with the sign character for numeric-fields.
SIGN NONE | FLOATING | LEADING | TRAILING
(Default:
Floating)
All numeric-type fields, except logical
fields, have a sign. Integer and floating-point fields can have either a space
" " (for positive values) or a negative sign "-". Packed-
and display-type fields can have a space " " (neutral), a plus sign
"+" (for positive values), or a negative sign "-".
Specify Sign None to cause STExport to
completely ignore the sign. If you specify Sign None, no error or warning
message appears if any numeric-types have a negative value.
Leading vs. Floating
If you
specify Columns Fixed, it is easy to see the difference between a leading
versus a floating sign. A leading sign always appears in the same column
whereas a floating sign always appears before the first digit of a number. For
example,
Sign Leading Sign Floating
- 22415 -22415
- 207 -207
- 16600 -16600
- 21910 -21910
- 8411 -8411
- 42 -42
- 16713 -16713
- 7970 -7970
Trailing Sign
Specify Sign Trailing to cause the sign character to appear after
each formatted number. Remember that for many numeric-types the sign for
positive numbers is a space. STExport always leaves room for the sign, even if
it is a space.
Specify whether trailing spaces are to appear in byte-type fields.
SPACES NONE | TRAILING
(Default:
None)
If byte-type fields are surrounded with
quotes (see the Quote command), the Spaces command determines whether trailing
spaces in byte-type fields appear within the quotes. Use Spaces Trailing if you
want to retain all of the spaces in a byte-type field.
Software packages that store
variable-length character data treat trailing spaces as data. Use Spaces None
to remove trailing spaces for data that is imported into these applications.
Specifies a file of commands to be executed as a group.
USE[Q] filename
Examples
A usefile makes your task easier by
allowing common commands to be specified once in an external file. For example,
the following usefile contains all the commands for creating the Invcust file:
$use invuse
input invoices {input file to format}
floating fixed 2 {formatting option}
output invdata {produces the file we want}
exit
STExport prints the lines in the usefile,
including the comment lines. This allows you to include instructions and
reminders in the usefile. In the example above, there were no commands for the
user to enter.
Notes
Usefiles cannot be nested in STExport.
The usefile may be any unnumbered text file or a Qedit workfile, but no more
than 256 characters per record are processed.
By default, STExport displays the
commands in a usefile as they are executed. STExport can execute commands quietly using the Useq command. For
compatibility with Qedit, Useq can be abbreviated to UQ.
Print the definition of the current task.
VERIFY
Verify prints the current Input and
Output files and all export specifications; in other words, it is a Verify All
command.
Perform the current task.
XEQ
Xeq checks that you have specified an Input file and an Output file.
Then it performs the task and creates the Output file. Finally, it closes the
files, ready for you to specify another task or Exit. If you also wish to leave
STExport after completing the task, use Exit instead of Xeq.
Use XML to produce XML Documents for either Internet or Intranet
applications.
XML
VERSION
|2"string"|
DOCTYPE
|2"string" &| filename|
FILE |2"string"|
RECORD |2"string"|
Example
STExport can generate
"well-formed" XML output with just a few commands.
$input file1sd
$xml
$output myxml
$xeq
These four simple commands will generate
the following file that packages such as XMLSpy will consider to be
"well-formed" XML. The result of such an STExport task will look as
follows:
<?xml
version='1.0'?>
<file>
<record>
<CITY>Los
Altos</CITY>
<CREDIT-RATING>100000</CREDIT-RATING>
<CUST-ACCOUNT>4003302</CUST-ACCOUNT>
<CUST-STATUS>20</CUST-STATUS>
<NAME-FIRST>Ralph</NAME-FIRST>
<NAME-LAST>Perkins</NAME-LAST>
<STATE-CODE>CA</STATE-CODE>
<STREET-ADDRESS>Room
655</STREET-ADDRESS>
<STREET-ADDRESS>Los
Altos
040033022</STREET-ADDRESS>
<ZIP-CODE>93002</ZIP-CODE>
</record>
</file>
Notes
By default STExport will add the simplest
version tag at thebeginning of the file, then it inserts a <file> and
matching </file> at the beginning and the end of the file. Then STExport
encloses each record from the input file in a <record> and
</record> tag. Finally, the Self-Describing tags are added around each
field's data values and edited appropriately.
Naturally users would want options to
customize and specify the various options and tags themselves, in order to
generate a file that is acceptable to their tools.
Version
You can specify the "version"
tag at the beginning of the XML file with the following command:
xml version "?xml version='1.0'
encoding='ISO-8859-1'?"
STExport will put the "<"
and ">" around what is specified in the version string.
Doctype
A Document Type Declaration can be made
at the beginning of the file via the !DOCTYPE specification. This typically
tells whatever tool that is parsing the xml file where the DTD for the file
resides.
In STExport you can specify simple
one-line doctype specs with the following command:
xml doctype '!DOCTYPE address-book SYSTEM
"address-book.dtd"'
This will write the doctype specification
at the top of the output file, directly after the XML version specification.
More complicated and lengthy doctype specifications
can be implemented by using the filename option, whereby STExport will append
the contents of a named file directly after the version specification. The
syntax can be simply:
File
You can customize the "file"
tags with the following command commands:
STExport will put the "<"
and ">" around what is specified in the File string.
Record
You can customize the "record"
tags with the following command commands:
STExport will put the "<"
and ">" around what is specified in the Record string.
Example
You can enter multiple XML commands per
task to set the XML options you require.
$in file1sd
$xml version "?xml version='1.0'
encoding='ISO-8859-1'?"
$xml file "Orders" record
"Details"
$out myfile
An example of the output generated by the
above commands is as follows:
<?xml version='1.0'
encoding='ISO-8859-1'?>
<Orders>
<Details>
<CITY>Los Altos</CITY>
<CREDIT-RATING>100000</CREDIT-RATING>
<CUST-ACCOUNT>4003302</CUST-ACCOUNT>
<CUST-STATUS>20</CUST-STATUS>
<NAME-FIRST>Ralph</NAME-FIRST>
<NAME-LAST>Perkins</NAME-LAST>
<STATE-CODE>CA</STATE-CODE>
<STREET-ADDRESS>Room
655</STREET-ADDRESS>
<STREET-ADDRESS>Los Altos 040033022</STREET-ADDRESS>
<ZIP-CODE>93002</ZIP-CODE>
</Details>
</Orders>
Tags
In XML the tags that surrounded the data
can not have any special characters other than hyphen, underscore and period
("-","_", "."). So STExport replaces any of the
invalid special characters with a "." by default.
You can change the default character to
be something else with the following set command:
STExport will only allow the hyphen,
underscore and period to be set with this command.
Quotes
All of STExport's XML command options
(version, doctype, file and record) allow for a string to be passed via
surrounding quotes. The quotes may be either single or double, but keep in mind
that if the string is to contain double quotes, then you should surround the
entire string with single quotes.
Specify whether leading zeros are to appear in numeric fields.
ZERO NONE | LEADING
(Default:
None)
Use Zero None to force all numeric fields
to have leading zeros removed. If a numeric field has implied decimal places,
STExport always formats the number with at least one digit to the left of the
decimal place, even if it is zero.
Use Zero Leading to force all numeric
fields to be zero-filled. In this case, Sign Leading and Sign Floating both
cause the sign to appear in the same place (in front of the leading zeros).
In this example we show you how to use Suprtool and STExport. We
start with an IMAGE/SQL dataset, identify the fields that are dates and the
number of implied decimal places in other fields. We then produce a
self-describing file using the dataset as input and show the default output
from STExport.
We also show you how easy it is to
migrate data from MPE files and databases to an Oracle database.
The Form command displays the fields in a
dataset or a self-describing file. For files, this information is stored in the
user labels of an MPE file and is not accessible with other tools. Use the Form
command to obtain the record layout of STExport input files.
Sales File
We will be formatting data from an
IMAGE/SQL sales dataset that has the following form:
>form d-sales
Database:
STORE.DEMO.ROBELLE
D-SALES Detail Set 5
Entry: Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1 (!M-CUSTOMER)
DELIV-DATE J2 9
PRODUCT-NO Z8 13
(M-PRODUCT)
PRODUCT-PRICE J2
21
PURCH-DATE J2 25
SALES-QTY J1 29
SALES-TAX J2 31
SALES-TOTAL J2
35
Capacity: 602 (14) Entries: 8
Highwater: 8 Bytes: 38
Dates and Decimal Places
We use Suprtool's Item command to
identify which of the fields in the d-sales dataset are dates and which fields
have implied decimal places:
>item
deliv-date ,date ,yyyymmdd
>item
purch-date ,date ,yyyymmdd
>item product-price
,decimal ,2
>item
sales-tax ,decimal ,2
>item
sales-total ,decimal ,2
Salefile
We now produce a file called
"salefile" using Suprtool's Output,Link option. The Link option
produces a self-describing file, complete with the date and decimal-place
information:
>get d-sales
>output
salefile,link
>xeq
>form salefile
File: salefile (SD Version B.00.00)
Entry:
Offset
CUST-ACCOUNT Z8
1
DELIV-DATE I2 9
<<YYYYMMDD>>
PRODUCT-NO Z8 13
PRODUCT-PRICE I2
21 << .2 >>
PURCH-DATE I2 25
<<YYYYMMDD>>
SALES-QTY I1 29
SALES-TAX I2 31
<< .2 >>
SALES-TOTAL I2
35 << .2 >>
Limit: 108 EOF: 8
Entry Length: 38 Blocking: 107
Notice how the Form command correctly
identifies which fields are dates and which fields have implied decimal places.
STExport uses this information to format the file.
STExport Output
We then use STExport to read the
self-describing Salefile to produce our sample output on stdlist. To
demonstrate how dates are handled, we insert a separator in each date field:
:run
stexport.pub.robelle
$input salefile {self-describing input file}
$date yyyymmdd "-" {dates with a dash separator}
$output * {output to stdlist}
$xeq
10020,1993-10-05,50511501,98.31,1993-10-01,0.02,27.53,224.15
10003,1993-10-15,50511501,98.31,1993-10-15,0.01,13.76,112.07
10003,1993-10-15,50512501,145.62,1993-10-15,0.01,20.39,166.00
10003,1993-10-15,50513001,192.20,1993-10-15,0.01,26.91,219.10
10016,1993-10-21,50521001,24.59,1993-10-21,0.03,10.33,84.11
10016,1993-10-21,50532001,139.85,1993-10-21,0.01,19.58,159.42
There are no byte-type fields in the
input file, so all fields are converted from their internal numeric
representation to a string of digits. All date fields were converted from their
internal yyyymmdd format to the external yyyymmdd format with a dash separator
between day, month, and year. All fields with implied decimal places have been
converted with a decimal point.
Load Data Into Oracle
If you need to load the export file into
an Oracle database, you can use Oracle's own SQL*Loader. Files created with
STExport can be processed immediately with SQL*Loader. Suppose we want to load
the data extracted in Salefile. We would use STExport to format the information
and store the results in Expsale.
:run
stexport.pub.robelle
$input salefile {self-describing input file}
$date yyyymmdd "-" {dates with a dash separator}
$output expsales {output to a file}
$xeq
If the Oracle database resided on an HP
9000, we would need to transfer Expsale. How you transfer the file is not
important as long as it gets there in the same format, including line
separators. Also note that the file should have an extension. SQL*Loader
expects a .dat extension by default.
The Oracle table should have all the
necessary columns. To create a table with the fields in Salefile, you could use
the following:
create table
sales_details (
CUST_ACCOUNT dec(8),
DELIV_DATE date,
PRODUCT_NO dec(8),
PRODUCT_PRICE dec(8,2),
PURCH_DATE date,
SALES_QTY dec(6),
SALES_TAX dec(8,2),
SALES_TOTAL dec(8,2)
) tablespace USERS;
SQL*Loader requires what is known as a
control file. It contains the load specifications such as the data file, the
destination table, the field delimiter, the text field delimiters and the
column specifications. In this case, the control file (expsales.ctl) looks like
this:
load data
-- Specify input datafile. dat extension is assumed. --
Infile expsales
-- Name of the table where the data is
loaded. --
-- Append new rows to existing data, if
any. --
Append Into Table sales_details
-- Fields are separated by commas --
Fields Terminated By ','
-- Character fields are enclosed in
double-quotes --
Optionally Enclosed By '"'
-- Specify the column names as they
appear --
-- in the data records. --
-- For a Date-type column, specify the input
format --
-- Example:
column Date "YYYYMMDD" --
(CUST_ACCOUNT,
DELIV_DATE date "YYYYMMDD",
PRODUCT_NO,
PRODUCT_PRICE,
PURCH_DATE date "YYYYMMDD",
SALES_QTY,
SALES_TAX,
SALES_TOTAL)
In its simplest form, SQL*Loader is
invoked with the following command:
$ sqlload
userid=username/password
control=expsales.ctl
log=expsales.log
The username
and password are valid Oracle
connect information. SQL*Loader reads the load specifications from the file
specified in the control keyword. It
writes operation information and statistics to the file specified in the log keyword. It also creates a number of
files to report data problems etc. SQL*Loader has many other options to control
the load task. Refer to the appropriate Oracle documentation for details.
To achieve maximum speed, STExport/V stores all the necessary
information in the HP e3000 stack. This limits the size of input and output
records and restricts the number of fields per file. Users should be aware of
these limits before attempting to use STExport with extremely complicated
databases. STExport/iX stores information in a simulated HP e3000 stack, so all
the limits apply to both STExport/V and STExport/iX.
Delimiter - Maximum Length - 3 Bytes
The delimiter must appear between every field in the output record.
To help avoid exceeding the maximum output record length, the maximum delimiter
length is three characters.
Input File - Maximum Record Size - 4096 Bytes
We
recommend that you use Suprtool's Extract command to minimize the input record
size.
Input File - Maximum Block Size - 8192 Bytes
By
default, Suprtool restricts the maximum block size to 4,096 bytes. You can use
the Set Blocksize command to increase this size up to 16,384 bytes (8192
words). If you increase the maximum blocksize, it is likely that Suprtool will
produce an output file that STExport cannot read.
Input File - Maximum Fields - 255
If you
must have more than 255 fields, use Suprtool's Define and Extract commands to
extract several fields as one contiguous series of bytes.
Output File - Maximum Record Size - 4096 Bytes
When formatting many fields, it is possible to produce large output
records. Once again, using the Extract command to minimize the size of the
input records will avoid large output records.
The
total length of the Heading line in the output file is also restricted to 4096
bytes.
Welcome to version 5.4 of Dbedit for MPE,
a module of Suprtool that permits people to add, change, list, or delete
individual records or "chains" of records from an IMAGE/3000
database. Dbedit is useful for debugging applications, for quickly prototyping
systems, and for the data entry of simple applications.
The functions of Dbedit are similar to QUERY, but the commands and
operations are more consistent and logical. Because Dbedit is a part of
Suprtool, you can hold Suprtool as a suspended process from within other
software (e.g., Qedit) with the database open. This facilitates fast process
switching when you need to examine a test database.
You enter Dbedit via the Edit command of
Suprtool. Once in Dbedit, you cannot use the Suprtool commands (while in
Suprtool you cannot use the Dbedit commands). Certain commands are the same in
both Dbedit and Suprtool (e.g., Use, Before, and Set). The Before command works
independently and each software module saves its own last command.
1.
Most Dbedit commands require you to have opened the database using
the Base command of Suprtool. Dbedit does not have a Base command.
2.
Dbedit does not work with any
files other than IMAGE/3000 datasets.
3.
You cannot switch to another
database while in Dbedit. Instead, you must Exit, do a Base command in
Suprtool, then Edit.
4.
The maximum size of any individual
data item is 80 bytes (i.e., 5X80 is acceptable, but X100 is not).
5.
Only datasets whose search
fields are compatible with Dbedit can be accessed (i.e., no K5 search fields).
There
are five major functions in Dbedit:
|
Command
|
Function
|
|
ADD
|
Add new entries to a dataset.
|
|
CHANGE
|
Change a master search value in all
related datasets.
|
|
DELETE
|
Delete entries from a dataset.
|
|
LIST
|
List the value of entries in a dataset.
|
|
MODIFY
|
Modify specific fields of an entry from a
dataset.
|
Suprtool was designed to be as fast as possible, while Dbedit was
designed to have as many features as possible. Dbedit does no special
optimizations. It uses the standard IMAGE intrinsics to do all of the accesses
to the database. Dbedit does not use the fast sequential access method of
Suprtool, but Dbedit usually works only with a few records within your database
at one time.
Dbedit arranges the list of fields in a dataset different from QUERY
or Suprtool. The QUERY ADD command prompts for the each field in the dataset in
the order they were declared in the IMAGE schema. In Dbedit, the order of field
lists is changed using the following algorithm:
1.
The search field for a master
dataset or the primary search field for a detail dataset appears first.
2.
Any other detail search fields
appear second.
3.
Any sort fields appear third.
4.
All other non-search and
non-sort fields that are compatible with Dbedit appear last.
5.
Where a non-compatible field
would appear in a list, Dbedit replaces it with a compatible field from the end
of the list.
Example:
The following example shows the
difference between QUERY and Dbedit. We add an entry to the d-inventory dataset
of the Store database. In this dataset, supplier-name is the primary search
field and product-no is another nonprimary search field.
QUERY/3000
>add d-inventory
BIN-NO =>>1201
LAST-SHIP-DATE =>>
OH-HAND-QTY =>>
PRODUCT-NO =>>2001001
SUPPLIER-NAME =>>STD Ribbons
UNIT-COST =>>
DBEDIT/SUPRTOOL
#add d-inventory
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
PRODUCT-NO >2001001
BIN-NO >1201
LAST-SHIP-DATE >
ON-HAND-QTY >
UNIT-COST >
Dbedit uses the following locking strategy. The Add command locks
one dataset (using DBLOCK, mode-3) after all of the field values have been
entered. The Modify and Delete commands do the following:
1.
After all of the field values
have been entered, the dataset is locked.
2.
The records are re-read using
DBGET, mode-4 for details or DBGET, mode-7 for masters.
3.
The re-read record is compared
with the original record. If they are not the same, no update or delete is
done.
4.
The record is updated or
deleted. When a search field or a sort field is changed with the Modify
command, the record is deleted and added again.
5.
The dataset is unlocked.
The Change command locks the entire
database while all key values are being changed. In all cases, the DBLOCK
is done unconditionally. This means that Dbedit always waits for other locks to
be released (possibly holding up your terminal).
If you
use Suprtool's Item command to specify implied decimal places for an item,
Dbedit scales all input values according to the number of implied decimal
places. When listing records, fields with implied decimal places are formatted
with a decimal point. For example,
>item
unit-cost,decimal,2 {two implied decimal pts.}
>edit
#add
d-inventory:unit-cost
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD Ribbons
PRODUCT-NO >2001001
UNIT-COST >10.50
SUPPLIER-NO = 5051
PRODUCT-NO = 50513001
UNIT-COST = 10.50
|
Type ? to get a description of the
field.
|
When Dbedit
prompts for field values, you can type a question mark to obtain a
description of the field. If the field has implied decimal places, the field
description will include the number of decimal places (e.g., << .2
>> for two implied decimal points).
|
Starting with MPE/iX 4.0, IMAGE was enhanced to have a new feature:
critical-item update. This feature allows programs to change critical fields in
detail datasets (search fields and sort fields) by using DBUPDATE. Prior to
critical-item update, programs had to use DBDELETE and DBPUT to change critical
fields.
By default, IMAGE databases have
critical-item update disabled. It is enabled using the HP DBUTIL program.
Enabling critical-item update allows Dbedit's Change command and
Modify;Updatekey to execute much faster. There are two choices in DBUTIL for
enabling critical-item update:
1.
Set CIUPDATE = On.
2.
Set CIUPDATE = Allow.
The first option turns on critical-item
update for all programs. The second option allows user programs (like Dbedit)
to enable critical-item update as needed. The second option is the safest,
since some programs depend on IMAGE giving an error when they attempt to change
a critical field.
When you run Dbedit, it prompts for commands on Stdlist with a
"#" character and reads command lines from Stdin. Dbedit commands
have a command name followed by one or more parameters separated by semicolons,
colons, and commas. Semicolons are NOT
used to combine several commands on the same line as in Suprtool.
This chapter describes the Dbedit
commands in detail. The commands are presented in alphabetical order. Each
command name is followed by the minimal abbreviation for the command, in
brackets. For example: [F] for File and [FO] for Form.
You may shorten command names to any substring that uniquely defines
the command. For example, Add can be shortened to AD or A, since there are no
other commands that start with "A". Form, however, can be abbreviated
only to FO, since there is a File command, abbreviated F, in Dbedit.
>base
store.pub,5
>edit
#l m-customer;all {list}
#e {exit}
You may enter letters in either uppercase
or lowercase, because Dbedit upshifts everything in the command line. These two
commands are identical:
#LIST M-CUSTOMER
#list m-customer
The maximum physical command
line is 256 characters. You may enter commands on multiple input lines by
putting an "&" continuation character at the end of the line. The
maximum total command length is 256
characters. Multiple commands cannot be placed on one input line. The
separating semicolon, colon, or comma in commands is REQUIRED, not optional.
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
>base store.pub,5 {open the database in Suprtool}
>edit {enter Dbedit}
#list m-customer {use all of the defaults}
#list
m-customer;all {list all records in
m-customer}
#exit {return to Suprtool}
If you press Control-Y during an operation, Dbedit responds by
printing a blank line and stopping the current operation.
Comments
may appear at the end of any command line, when they are surrounded by braces.
Many of the examples in this manual show comments at the end of each command
line. You can enter a comment as the only item in a Dbedit command line. You
can also enter comments after field values.
# { List all related records for a
specific supplier. }
#list
m-supplier;related {Must include
Related keyword}
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD Ribbons {supplier to search for}
If you want to include a brace as part of
an x-type field, you must precede the brace with the Dbedit escape character
"[". For example, to search for the supplier "{STD
Ribbons}", you would use:
#list
m-supplier {include braces in the name}
SUPPLIER-NAME >[{STD Ribbons}
Dbedit
interprets any command line beginning with a colon (:) as an MPE command. Only
the commands that MPE allows in "break" are allowed in Dbedit. This
feature can be used to establish :File commands for the SUPRLIST file, to show
the time, and to include :COMMENT lines. For example:
#:comment Modify
M-CUSTOMER records
#modify m-customer
#exit
Dbedit/iX
will execute any MPE command (e.g., Run), UDCs, and command files. Caution: programs that suspend, instead
of terminating are not killed by the HPCICOMMAND intrinsic.
Any command line beginning with an equal sign (=) is treated as a
calculator expression. You may use this feature to compute data entry values
without the need of an electronic calculator.
=2745*1.33
Result= 3650.85
The examples in this manual use the
revised STORE database described in the IMAGE/3000
Handbook.
In the Change, Delete, List and Modify commands, Dbedit first
prompts you for search
criteria and then processes the records you have
selected. Search criteria are any or all of the search and sort fields of the
file. Dbedit asks for the value of the primary search field first, unless you
override the prompt ordering with the KEY option. For detail datasets, it then
asks for match values for the other search fields and sort fields. You may
press the Return key to any of these prompts to indicate that you don't care
what values these fields have.
When Dbedit finishes processing the
records you select, it recycles and prompts you for the next set of search
criteria. You may press the Return key at this point to exit from the command
and return to the # prompt.
The
major commands (File, List, Add, Delete, Modify, and Change) have a similar
parameter structure, consisting of the command name, then an optional file part and an optional option part. A space separates the file part from the command name, and a
semicolon separates the option part
from the file part. The general
format of these commands is
#command
[file] [;options]
The file parameter consists of an IMAGE/3000 dataset name followed
by an optional list of field names. If the file
part is missing, Dbedit uses the previous file. The general format of the
file parameter is
#command
[file] [:fieldname,...]
Even when you use field names, Dbedit
will add the search fields to the field list. In the Add command, Dbedit
assumes default values for noncritical fields that are missing, but will prompt
for the search fields and sort fields (they are required).
#add
d-inventory:bin-no {assume defaults for all but
BIN-NO}
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
PRODUCT-NO >105391
BIN-NO >10
In this case you will not be prompted for
LAST-SHIP-DATE, ON-HAND-QTY, or UNIT-COST.
In the Modify command, you can specify a
set of fields to modify. Dbedit will not prompt you for new values for any
other fields. For example:
#mod
d-inventory:unit-cost {only modify UNIT-COST}
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
{prompt
for search value}
PRODUCT-NO >105391 {prompt for another one}
Enter new values (or
<return> to leave as is):
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD Ribbons {prints the search value}
PRODUCT-NO >105391 {prints the other one}
UNIT-COST >500 {prints existing value}
{prompts for new value}
In this case you will not be prompted for
BIN-NO, ON-HAND-QTY, or LAST-SHIP-DATE.
When working on a single dataset, it is
only necessary to specify the dataset name in the first command. For example:
#list d-inventory
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
#list {use the previous file
parameter}
SUPPLIER-NAME >//
The file parameter and the
options must be separated by a
semicolon.
#command
[file] [;option...]
The available options are:
numeric-value, All, Key, Limit, Related, UNder, UPdatekey
These options qualify the operation of
the File, List, Modify, Change, Delete, and Add commands. Some options only
apply to one command. Options can be combined and can be abbreviated. When more
than one option is specified, each option must be separated by a semicolon.
#list
d-inventory;key=product-no;under
PRODUCT-NO >
Commands
normally cycle, prompting for new search values or new entries, until you press
Return or Control-Y. However, if you specify a numeric-value after the semicolon, the command only prompts you numeric-value number of times. For
example, if you only want to do one List function, you would enter:
#list
d-inventory;1 {only prompt for SUPPLIER-NAME
once}
The All option works only with the List, Modify, or Delete commands.
When All is specified, every record in the specified file is processed
sequentially. You can stop the scan by pressing Control-Y.
The Key option overrides the primary search field. Dbedit prompts
for the primary search field first. Often, this is not the value that you know.
You can use the Key option to force Dbedit to prompt you for another search
field. For example:
#list
d-inventory {use defaults}
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD Ribbons
PRODUCT-NO >
#list
d-inventory;key=product-no {use PRODUCT-NO}
PRODUCT-NO >105391
SUPPLIER-NAME >
The Limit option controls the number of entries allowed per key
value. This option is only useful for the Add command. Dbedit limits the number
of entries for the first field in the field list to the Limit value specified.
For example,
#add
d-inventory;limit=2 {two records per supplier}
#add
d-inventory;limit=2;key=product-no
{two records per product}
The Related option is for finding or deleting related records. It
applies only to Delete and List. If you use Related when Listing an entry in a
master dataset, Dbedit prints the specified master entry and then prints all
detail entries with the same search value in all datasets that are linked to
the master dataset by an explicit path. If you use List Related with a detail
dataset, Dbedit prints the specified detail entry, followed by the master entry
for each search field in the detail.
You can only Delete Related from a master
dataset. Dbedit shows the master entry. After confirming the deletion, Dbedit
deletes all entries with the same search value in all related datasets.
Control-Y can be used to interrupt the deletion process.
Dbedit can only use explicitly defined
IMAGE paths to navigate between datasets. User-defined paths are not supported
in Dbedit. When listing related records, Dbedit shows all fields in each
dataset including those that Dbedit normally doesn't support (e.g., X100). The
following example shows how related records are listed, starting with a master
dataset and then its related detail datasets.
#list
m-supplier;related {all related records}
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD Ribbons
The M-SUPPLIER record is listed here.
D-INVENTORY records with a
SUPPLIER-NAME of
STD Ribbons are listed here.
When Dbedit prompts for a value for a field, it prints a series of
underlines. These underlines indicate the maximum field width.
These underlines can be useful, but they
may not work on all terminals. You can disable underlining by using Set
Underline Off. Once underlining is turned off, you may wish to enable it again,
but only for one command. The Under option overrides the Set Underline, but only
for the current command.
The
Updatekey option allows the Modify command to change the value of search and
sort fields (i.e., critical fields). Normally, Modify does not allow any
changes to the search or sort fields. Without the Updatekey option, Modify does
a DBUPDATE of the modified record. If CIUPDATE is Disallowed when you specify
Updatekey and change a critical field, Modify will DBDELETE the existing
record, then DBPUT a new record with the changed values. If CIUPDATE is On or
Allowed in the database, Modify can use DBUPDATE to change the critical fields.
This is much faster than using DBDELETE and DBPUT.
You may enter a subcommand any time Dbedit prompts for the value of
a field. The available subcommands are:
|
Subcommand
|
Purpose
|
|
//
|
stops the current command immediately.
|
|
\\
|
same as // (you may also use the
Control-Y key).
|
|
?
|
describes the current field, including
any implied decimal points.
|
|
<
|
goes back one field to the previous field
in the list.
|
|
<3
|
goes back three fields.
|
|
<<
|
returns to the first field in the list.
|
|
>
|
goes forward one field to the next field
in the list.
|
|
>3
|
goes forward three fields.
|
|
>>
|
skips the rest of the fields in the list.
This is especially useful when Dbedit is prompting you for multiple search
and sort fields and you only want to enter the first.
|
|
'
|
uses blanks for the field (useful in
batch).
|
|
*
|
uses the last value for this field.
|
|
[
|
forces what follows the [ to be a value
and not a subcommand (e.g., [*BOB tells Dbedit to use *BOB as the actual
value instead of interpreting the * to mean "last value").
|
|
@F
|
search for the field F (e.g., @bin-no).
The field can include a subscript (e.g., @street-address(2)).
|
|
=
|
calculator.
|
Examples
#list
m-supplier {we'll stop immediately}
SUPPLIER-NAME >//
#list m-supplier {we will start again}
SUPPLIER-NAME >Standard
Type
PRODUCT-NO >< {re-enter supplier-name}
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
PRODUCT-NO >>> {skips the rest}
#list m-supplier
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
PRODUCT-NO >[>575 {">575" is the part-no}
#modify d-inventory
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
PRODUCT-NO >105391
BIN-NO >@unit-cost {skip to unit-cost}
UNIT-COST >
#modify m-customer
CUST-ACCOUNT >4003302
CITY >@street-address(2) {go to subfield}
STREET-ADDRESS(2) >
Adds new entries to a dataset.
ADD
[file] [;options]
Options: numeric-value|Key|Limit|UNder
If no field list is entered as part of
the file, Dbedit will prompt for all
of the fields in the file. You may
use the ">n" or ">>" subcommands to navigate
quickly through the field list, but you must enter values for all search and
sort fields.
The database password must give you write
access to the entire dataset. The Add command will stop after LIMIT= number of
entries have been added for any one key value. Dbedit checks each search field
value as it is entered. For master datasets the search field value must not
exist. For detail datasets the search field value must exist. To add records
from a disc file, see the Put command of Suprtool.
Repeat any combination of the previous 1000 command lines, with or
without editing.
BEFORE [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
redo previous line)
(BQ=redo
without change)
The Before command allows you to modify
the commands before it executes them. If you don't need to change them, use BQ
or Do.
The Before command uses Qedit-style
Control characters for modifying the commands. The default mode is to replace
characters. To delete use Control-D, and to insert use Control-B. If you prefer
HP-style modify (D, R, I, and U), use the Redo command instead of Before.
Examples
#listf
@.soruce {'source' is not spelled right}
NON-EXISTENT
GROUP. (CIERR 908)
#Before {redo most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last command is printed}
our {you enter changes to it}
listf @.source {the edited command is shown}
{you press <return> }
#listredo -10/
#before 5 {redo 5th command in stack}
#bef 8/10 {redo 8th through 10th}
#b listf {redo last Listf command}
#b @temp {redo last containing
"temp"}
#before -2 {redo command before previous}
#before -5/-2 {redo by relative lines}
Modify Operators
If you wish to change any characters
within the line, the modify operators are the regular Control Codes used in
Qedit:
·
Any printing characters replace
the ones above.
·
Control-D plus spaces deletes
columns above.
·
Control-B puts you into
"insert before" mode.
·
Control-A starts appending
characters at the end of line.
·
Control-A, Control-D, plus
spaces, deletes from the end.
·
Control-T ends Insert Mode,
allowing movement to a new column.
·
Control-G recovers the original
line.
·
Control-O specifies
"overwrite" mode (needed for spaces).
Changes all uses of a specific search field value in all detail
datasets related to a master. This command only applies to master datasets.
CHANGE
[file] [;options]
Options: numeric-value|Key|Limit|UNder
This command changes the search field
value in all related detail datasets. Dbedit can only change values in detail
datasets where there is an explicit IMAGE path. It is up to the user to change
any user-defined paths.
Once this command has started making
changes to the database, it cannot be stopped. Entering Control-Y during the
change will have no effect. Dbedit locks the entire database while all changes
are taking place. The database password must give you write access to all
related datasets that must be changed.
If CIUPDATE is On or Allowed in the database, the Change command
executes much faster.
Example
#change m-supplier
Change Key Value for
File: M-SUPPLIER
Enter Existing Key
Value to Find:
SUPPLIER-NAME >Standard Ribbons
Enter New Key Value to
Replace with:
SUPPLIER-NAME >STD
Ribbons
SUPPLIER-NAME = Standard Ribbons
CITY = San Leandro STATE-CODE = CA
STREET-ADDRESS = 100 Main St.
(2)
ZIP-CODE = 94345
OK to change this
entry [no]: y
Begin changes (be patient) .. .. end
changes!!
Removes entries from a dataset.
DELETE
[file] [;options]
Options: numeric-value|All|Key|Limit|Related|UNder
If you are deleting entries from a master
dataset, all entries from related detail datasets must be removed first. Before
any record will actually be deleted, Delete prints the record and asks you
whether it is okay to delete it; the default answer is NO.
The field list of the file specifies which fields to list
before prompting for verification of the deletion. The ALL option allows you to review all entries in a detail dataset and remove
some or all of them. The database password must give you write access to the
entire dataset. ALL does not work on master datasets; use the Suprtool
>Delete command instead.
You can delete records related to a
master dataset, but not the other way around. Dbedit does not print the detail
records that are deleted. Use the List command with the RELATED option before
doing the deletion.
The Do command will repeat (without changes) any of the previous
1000 commands.
DO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default: repeat the previous command)
Commands are numbered sequentially from 1
as entered and the last 1000 of them are retained. Use the :Listredo command to
display the previous commands. You can repeat a single command (do
5), a range of commands (do
5/10) or the most recent command whose name matches a
string (do list). If you want to modify the
commands before executing them, use Redo or Before.
Examples
#listredo
#do {do previous command again}
#do 39 {do command line 39 again}
#do 5/8 {do command lines 5 to 8
again}
#do list {do most recent List command}
#do show {do last starting with "show"}
#do showjob job {do last "showjob
job" command}
#do @job {do last containing
"job"}
#do -2 {do command before previous}
#do -7/-5 {do by relative line number}
#do 5/ {do command lines 5 to
"last"}
Notes
The Do command cannot be abbreviated.
Leaves Dbedit and returns control to Suprtool.
EXIT
Establishes the current file, field list, and search field.
FILE
[file] [;options]
Options: numeric-value|All|Key|Limit|Related|UNder|UPdatekey
If Set Reset is Off, you can use the File
command to specify the KEY= for the specified file. For example:
#set reset off
#file
d-inventory;key=product-no
will cause all subsequent commands to
prompt for the PRODUCT-NO before the SUPPLIER-NAME. Specifying a new file or options parameter in the Add, Change, Delete, List, or Modify
commands overrides and replaces the current file
and option values.
The Form command displays a description of the items and datasets in
a database. It is similar in format to the FORM command of QUERY.
FORM [ SETS | ITEMS | PATHS
dataset | data-item | filename ]
(Default:
fields in current dataset)
If you request information about a
specific detail dataset, Suprtool will print the path information in DBSCHEMA
format. The path shows the related master dataset and the sort item-name. The
capacity is also shown in DBSCHEMA format. The blocking factor appears after
the capacity in parentheses. If dynamic dataset expansion (a feature of MPE/iX
5.0) has been enabled, the initial capacity and the increment are shown next.
On MPE/iX 5.0 or later, the highwater mark is shown. The record length in bytes
appears last.
When showing the form of a dataset,
Dbedit shows the byte offset of each field after the subcount, type, and
sublength. The first field always appears at offset one. If you have specified
a date format or the number of implied decimal points with the Item command,
these attributes will appear as part of the form listing.
The
QUERY ALL option is not supported.
Example
>base store,5
>item
last-ship-date,date ,yymmdd
>item
unit-cost ,decimal,2
>edit {enter Dbedit}
#form d-inventory
D-INVENTORY Detail
Entry:
BIN-NO J1 1
LAST-SHIP-DATE J2
3
<<YYMMDD>>
ON-HAND-QTY J2
7
PRODUCT-NO Z8
11 (M-PRODUCT)
SUPPLIER-NAME X16
19 (!M-SUPPLIER)
UNIT-COST P8
35 << .2 >>
Capacity: 112 Entries:
3 Entry Length: 19 Blocking: 14
Formout File
The Form command writes all output to the file Formout. This file
defaults to $stdlist. You can redirect this file to a line printer or a disc
drive. If you redirect the Formout file to a disc file, Suprtool assumes a
temporary file by default.
>:file
formout;dev=lp
>form sets {writes to line printer}
>:file
formout;dev=disc
>form
d-inventory {writes to temporary file}
Form Keywords
The Form command shows Items, Paths, and Sets before searching for a
dataset or file with these names. Use a string (e.g., "sets") to
display the form of a dataset or file that matches one of the Form keywords.
Show what commands and options are available in Dbedit.
HELP
[ command | keyword [ ,option ] ]
(Default:
browse through the entire help file)
Command Help
If you specify any parameters, Help first
assumes that you want help on a specific Dbedit command. If you know the
structure of the help file, you can specify one of the keywords under the
command name.
#help list {Help on the List command}
#help list,notes {notes section of the List command}
Keyword Help
If no help is found in the Commands
section of the help file, we assume you specified one of the outer-level
keywords. To see this list of keywords, type help with no parameters. You'll
see a short introduction to Dbedit before the list. Specify any of the
keywords, or a subkeyword, on the Help command.
#help intro {introduction section}
Quick Help - HQ
HQ asks Dbedit to look under the keyword QUICK in the help file.
QUICK contains the text from the Dbedit Quick Reference Guide, offering the
experienced user a quick review of the syntax of any command.
#hq add {quick description of Add}
#hq commands {quick list of command names}
Notes
If no parameters are specified, Help allows you to browse through
the "help" file. The Help command uses the QHELP subsystem to enable
you to move through the file Dbedit.Help.Robelle, which contains most of the
User Manual. For "help in help", type "?" when you see the
QHELP prompt character ("?"). The help file is organized into levels.
To go back to the previous level, press Return instead of a key name. If you
press F8, you will exit the QHELP subsystem and return to Dbedit.
Displays entries from a dataset.
LIST
[file] [;options]
Options: numeric-value|All|Key|Limit|Related|UNder
The field list of the file parameter specifies which fields of
the entry to print (default of course is all of them). Search field values are
not listed, unless they are included in the field list. The ALL option lists all records in the
specified file. The RELATED option prints related records from other
datasets as well as the records you select. The listing is printed to $stdlist,
unless you use Set LP On to specify Suprlist as the output file.
The Suprtool >List command also
displays selected records, with the option of dumping totally in Octal/Char
format. Use >List when you suspect that a dataset contains bad data, or to
select from a large dataset (>List is faster than #List).
#list m-customer
List in File:
M-CUSTOMER
CUST-ACCOUNT >4003302
CITY = Los Altos CREDIT-RATING = 100000
CUST-ACCOUNT = 4003302 CUST-STATUS = 20
NAME-FIRST = Ralph NAME-LAST = Perkins
STATE-CODE = CA
STREET-ADDRESS = Room 655
(2) Century Plaza Building
ZIP-CODE = 93002
#list
m-supplier;related {all related records}
List in File:
M-SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER-NAME >Standard Ribbons
CITY = San Leandro STATE-CODE = CA
STREET-ADDRESS = 100 Main St.
(2)
SUPPLIER-NAME = Standard Ribbons
ZIP-CODE = 94345
Related Records from
the File : D-INVENTORY
Key to path: SUPPLIER-NAME
BIN-NO = 1201 LAST-SHIP-DATE = 840501
ON-HAND-QTY = 296 PRODUCT-NO = 105391
SUPPLIER-NAME = Standard Ribbons
UNIT-COST = 500
The Listredo command will display any of the previous 1000 commands.
LISTREDO [ start
[ / stop ] ] [;ABS] [;OUT=file]
[
string ] [;REL]
[
ALL | @ ] [;UNN]
(Default:
display previous 20 commands)
(BJ
and ,, are short for LISTREDO)
Commands are numbered sequentially from 1
as entered and the last 1000 are retained. You can display a single command, a
range of commands, all 1000, or all the commands whose name matches the string.
You can print the commands with ABSolute line numbers (the default), RELative
line numbers (-5/-4), or UNNumbered. You can write the commands to your
terminal or OUT to a temporary file. If you want to redo any of these commands,
see Do, Redo, and Before.
Examples
#listredo 5
#listredo 5/10
#listredo help {print all Help commands}
#listredo -10 {print last ten commands}
#listredo ALL {print entire redo stack}
#listredo purge {print all Purge commands}
#listredo purge
xx {print all "purge
xx" commands}
#listredo @purge {print all with "purge"
anywhere}
#listredo @;rel {print ALL, relative numbers}
#listredo
1/10;out=*lp {dump commands to printer}
#listredo
@;unn;out=save {write commands to a file}
Notes
The Listredo command cannot be
abbreviated, but BJ is accepted as a short form.
Changes the values of any or all fields in a dataset entry.
MODIFY
[file] [;options]
Options: numeric-value|All|Key|Limit|UNder|UPdatekey
The field list of the file parameter specifies which fields to
modify. When the UPDATEKEY option is
specified, search and sort field values may be changed.
The existing value of each field is
printed before a new value is accepted. Entering a carriage return preserves
the old value. If a new value is entered, it replaces the old value. The ALL option allows you to review and modify
all of the entries in a dataset in serial order.
If CIUPDATE is On or Allowed in the database, the UPDATEKEY option executes much faster.
#modify
m-customer:credit-rating
Modify in File:
M-CUSTOMER
CUST-ACCOUNT >4003302
Enter new values (or
<return> to leave as is):
CUST-ACCOUNT =4003302
CREDIT-RATING =1000.00
2500.00
CUST-ACCOUNT = 4003302 CREDIT-RATING = 2500.00
Prints a message on $stdlist.
Q
[ string ]
(Default: print a blank line)
The string of up to 80 characters is printed
on $stdlist. The string should not be enclosed in quotes unless you want the
message printed in quotes.
You can use Q to include instructions in
usefiles. Use :COMMENT in usefiles for a nonprinting comment line.
Enables you to modify and repeat any of the previous 1000 command
lines.
REDO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
redo the previous command)
The Redo command allows you to modify the
commands before it executes them. If you don't need to change them, use the Do
command. Commands are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered and the last 1000
are retained. Use the :Listredo command to display the previous commands. You
can redo a single command, a range of commands, or the most recent command
whose name matches a string. The Redo command cannot be abbreviated.
The Redo command uses MPE-style editing
logic (D, I, R, U and >). The default mode is to replace characters. To
delete, type DDDD under the characters to be removed. To insert, type I under
the insertion spot, then the new characters. To undo your changes, type U. To
append to the end of the line, use >xxx. To delete from the end of the line,
use >DD. To replace at the end of the line, use >Rxxx. And to erase the
rest of the line, use D>. If you prefer Qedit-style editing (Control-D,
etc.), use the Before command instead of the Redo command.
Examples
#listf
@.soruce {"source" is not
spelled correctly}
NON-EXISTENT
GROUP. (CIERR 908)
#redo {redo most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last command is printed}
our {you enter changes to it}
listf @.source {edited command is shown}
{you press <return> }
#listredo all
#redo 5 {redo 5th command in stack}
#redo {redo previous command}
#redo -2 {redo command before previous}
#redo 8/10 {redo 8th through 10th}
#redo -10/ {redo -10 through last}
#redo purge {redo last Purge command}
#redo @temp {redo last containing "temp"}
Changes certain operating options within Dbedit. Except for LP,
these options are saved when you return to Suprtool and restored if you enter
Dbedit again.
SET [LP ON|OFF
]
[PROMPT character ]
[QUIET ON|OFF ]
[RESET ON|OFF ]
[UNDERLINE ON|OFF ]
[VERIFY ON|OFF ]
SET
LP ON|OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
All
output from the List command is normally sent to $stdlist. When you turn Set LP
to On, Dbedit opens the file Suprlist which defaults to the line printer.
Turning Set LP Off closes the SUPRLIST file and releases it to the spooler.
Dbedit automatically closes the Suprlist file when you return to Suprtool.
SET
PROMPT char
(Initially:
#)
Prompt
tells Dbedit to use a different character for prompting. Any special character
can be used as the prompt character. For example:
>edit
#set prompt %
%list m-customer
SET
QUIET ON|OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
Turning
this option On causes Dbedit to reduce the number of helpful messages that are
printed and to shorten other messages.
SET
RESET ON|OFF
(Initially:
ON)
When
you use the File, List, Modify, Change, or Delete commands you may override the
default order that Dbedit uses to prompt for search fields (using the KEY= option). With Reset On, Dbedit always resets
the KEY= option to the default. With
Reset Off, Dbedit will continue to use the new order of search fields.
SET
UNDERLINE ON|OFF
(Initially:
ON)
When
Dbedit prompts for field values, it prints a series of underlines to show the
field width. Underline Off disables this feature. Users with slow printing
terminals will find Dbedit faster with Underline Off. The Under option may be used to temporarily enable
underlining for a single command.
SET
VERIFY ON|OFF
(Initially:
ON)
When
you are adding new records to a dataset, Dbedit lists the contents of new
records after you have entered all of the field values. Turning Verify Off
causes Dbedit to stop listing new records after they are added.
Specifies a file of commands to be executed as a group.
USE[Q]
filename
Examples
A usefile makes your task easier by
allowing common commands to be specified once in an external file. Usefiles can
also be set up for data entry functions such as adding a new customer into the
database (e.g., add one master entry, add one billto entry, add multiple shipto
entries, and then list the master entry plus RELATED details). For example,
here is a usefile that uses the File command to define a dataset:
file
d-inventory;key=product-no;5 {key and limit}
q You may use the
List, Modify, or Delete
q commands to modify
inventory records. You
q are restricted to at
most five inventory
q records per product
number.
Use the file inside Dbedit:
>base store
>edit {enter Dbedit}
#useq dinvent.use {specify commands from the usefile}
You may use the List,
Modify, or Delete
commands to modify
inventory records. You
are restricted to at
most five inventory
records per product
number.
# {Dbedit prompts for commands}
Quiet Execution
By default, Dbedit displays the commands
in the usefile as they are executed. Dbedit can execute commands quietly using the Useq command:
#useq
store.use {no commands are listed}
Notes
Usefiles cannot be nested in Dbedit. The
usefile may be an EDITOR /KEEP file,UNN or a Qedit workfile, but no more than
256 characters per record will be processed. For compatibility with Qedit, Useq
can be abbreviated to UQ.
Displays the current status of Dbedit conditions.
VERIFY [ ALL | @ ]
[
BASE ]
[
DSET ]
[
SET ]
[
CIUPDATE ]
(Default:
BASE, DSET, CIUPDATE, changed SET values)
Only one item can be verified at a time. The format of the Verify
output is organized into columns. Verify with no parameters prints the
database, the current dataset, and whether critical-item update is enabled or
disabled. It also prints those Set options which are not currently at their
default setting.
Examples
#verify dset {current dataset}
#verify all {print the status of
everything}
Welcome to Suprlink for MPE Version 5.4.
Suprlink is a program that works with Suprtool to add "multidataset"
capability to Suprtool. Rather than take the regular path to multiple datasets
-- random retrieval via IMAGE keys -- with its well-known performance problems,
we have chosen to follow a different path: fast serial extracts plus a very
efficient merge.
Summary of the Suprlink commands:
|
Before
|
Input
|
Redo
|
Xeq
|
|
Do
|
Join
|
Reset
|
=expression
|
|
Exit
|
Link
|
Set
|
:MPE Command
|
|
Form
|
LISTREDO
|
Use
|
|
|
Help
|
Output
|
Verify
|
|
The minimum abbreviation of each command
is shown in capital letters.
Suprlink is installed as part of the Suprtool installation process.
See the "Installing Suprtool" chapter of the Suprtool User Manual for more details of how to install both
Suprtool and Suprlink.
Suprlink requires an external file for the Help command. Suprlink
dynamically changes this file name, but you can use a :File command to override
Suprlink's choice.
Default File Names
If you are running Suprlink on MPE V/E or
MPE/iX, Suprlink finds the name of the Suprlink program file name (e.g.,
Suprlink.Pub.Robelle). Suprlink uses this name to determine the name of the
other built-in file names. If Suprlink cannot call the procinfo intrinsic
(e.g., this intrinsic doesn't exist on MPE V/R), it assumes you are running
Suprlink.Pub.Robelle.
Account Name
The account name for all built-in files
is the same as the one where Suprlink is running (e.g., if you :run
Suprlink.Pub.Dev, the help file for Suprlink is Suprlink.Help.Dev).
Group Name
Suprlink examines the group name where
Suprlink is running to determine the group name for the built-in file names. If
the group name is PUB, Suprlink assumes help files are in the HELP group. The
same assumption is made for any group name where the first three letters are
not PUB. When Suprlink is run from a group that starts with Pub (e.g., Pub),
Suprlink assumes the help files have the same suffix (e.g., Helpnew).
Examples
Here are a few examples of the names that
Suprlink would use for the Suprlink help file:
|
Suprlink Program File Name
|
Suprlink Help File Name
|
|
Suprlink.Pub.Robelle
|
Suprlink.Help.Robelle
|
|
Suprlink.Pub.Account
|
Suprlink.Help.Account
|
|
Suprlink.PubRob.Account
|
Suprlink.HelpRob.Account
|
|
Suprlink.Robelle.Dist
|
Suprlink.Help.Dist
|
Changing Built-In File Names
You can use a :File command to tell
Suprlink where the help file is located. Your :File command must use the file
name that Suprlink dynamically assigned to the help file. For example, if
Suprlink is called Suprlink.Robelle.Dist, you would use this :File command:
:file
suprlink.help.dist=linkhelp.robelle.dist
To access Suprlink, type the following command:
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
SUPRLINK/Copyright
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1988-2001
(Version 5.4)
+
After a short pause, Suprlink will take
over your terminal and print out some identifying information. You will notice
that your command prompt has changed to "+", telling you that you
have made it into Suprlink. Suprlink expects you to type command lines, ending
each one with Return.
Normally, you enter a series of commands.
These commands specify the Input file, the Output file, and the Link file
name(s). Finally, you enter an Xeq or an Exit command. This begins the actual
Suprlink linkage task.
If you entered the Exit command, Suprlink
will finish the current task, then return you to the Operating system.
+EXIT
End of program
:BYE
If you entered the Xeq command, Suprlink
will finish the current task, then prompt you for another task. This continues
until you enter the Exit command. If you wish to terminate Suprlink immediately
(perhaps you are confused), enter Exit Abort. This will terminate the Suprlink
program immediately, without attempting any task.
If you
RUN Suprlink within Qedit or Select, you can retain the Suprlink process and
re-activate quickly later.
:run
qedit.pub.robelle
/:r
suprlink.pub.robelle
+...
+exit
SUPRLINK.PUB.ROBELLE
is still alive. Okay to HOLD ? Y
/...
/:activate
SUPRLINK.PUB.ROBELLE
+...
+exit
Program Held. Use :ACTIVATE/:RUN;HOLD to re-run.
/...
You can access Suprlink from within the Suprtool program, using
Suprtool's Link command. Suprtool will then run Suprlink for you. All of
Suprlink's commands are available to you in Suprtool. When passing Suprlink
commands through Suprtool, you must preface each Suprlink command with Link. For example,
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
>base customer
>get m-customer
>sort custnum
>output
invoices,link
>xeq
>link input
invoices by custnum
>link link customer {send "link customer" to
Suprlink}
>link output
invcust
>link exit {exit from Suprlink (not
Suprtool)}
Refer to the Link command in the
"Suprtool Commands" chapter of the Suprtool user manual for more
information.
You can also use the Suprtool2 interface
and the Link command to "call" Suprlink. See the Suprcall User Manual
for a complete example of how to use the interface to pass commands to
Suprlink.
If you
want to prevent Suprlink from executing any MPE commands (e.g., :Purge), you
Run Suprlink with Parm=8192. This feature is automatically invoked by
Suprtool's Link command, when Set Limit MPE Off has been specified inside
Suprtool.
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle;parm=8192
Some
users find that they Exit from Suprlink inadvertently. For Suprlink to get user
approval on Exit, Run Suprlink with Parm=64.
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle;parm=64
>e
Okay to exit [no]:
>
If you
run Suprlink from within HPDesk (and some other programs), Suprlink will
suspend on Exit but HPDesk will not notice. The next time you run Suprlink you
will get a new copy of Suprlink. Eventually you will have many suspended copies
of Suprlink hanging from HPDesk, consuming system resources. Running Suprlink
with Parm=32 forces Suprlink to terminate on Exit rather than suspend.
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle;parm=32
Suprlink sets the system job control word JCW to a fatal state when
Suprlink fails in a batch job. Suprlink sets only the high-order bit of the JCW
job control word. That is, it adds 32,768 to the existing JCW value. HP
subsystems use the other bits of the JCW job control word, so Suprlink does
nothing to them.
Suprlink operates in "session" mode or "batch"
mode. In batch usage, any "error" message will cause Suprlink to
quit, setting the Job Control Word to flush the remainder of the JOB. Warning
messages do not cause an abort.
In batch mode, Suprlink does not prompt
for missing information as it does in session mode. Instead, it attempts to
choose the alternative that has the least chance of destroying valid data. For
example, if the Output file is a duplicate file name in batch mode, Suprlink
saves the new Output file with a "made up" name (OUTPUTnn, where nn
is from 00 to 20), prints a warning message, and aborts.
|
Parm
|
Purpose
|
|
32
|
don't suspend, terminate completely
|
|
64
|
check with user before Exiting
|
|
8192
|
don't allow MPE commands
|
Values may be combined by adding them together. For example, Parm =
96 means "check with me before exiting, then when I do actually exit,
terminate Suprlink completely instead of suspending".
When Suprlink closes the output file, it sets a JCW named
SuprlinkOutCount with the number of output records. This is the same number reported in the total
line (i.e., OUT=). You can use this JCW
to control job stream execution by checking if the SprlinkOutCount JCW is
non-zero. If there are more than 65,535 output records, Suprlink sets
SuprlinkOutCount to 65,535.
You can use the :Showjcw command to see
the value of a JCW. For values greater than 16K, Showjcw displays either the
word WARN, FATAL or SYSTEM followed by some digits. These words correspond to
the following values:
#WARN# 16384
#FATAL# 32768
#SYSTEM# 49152
Add the value of the word to the number
that appears with it for the true value of SuprlinkOutCount. For example,
:showjcw
Suprlinkoutcount
SUPRLINKOUTCOUNT =
WARN8616
16384 + 8616 =
25000
The MPE/iX :Showvar command can also be
used to see the value of a JCW. Showvar displays the full, correct number
(e.g., 25,000) up to the maximum of 65,535.
Suprlink also sets two other JCWs: SuprlinkOutCount1 and SuprlinkOutCount2. These communicate the full OUT= value to the
Suprlink2 interface.
On MPE/iX, when Suprlink closes the output file, it also sets a
variable namedSuprlinkFullCount with the number of output records. This is the same number reported in the total
line (i.e., OUT=). The advantage of the
variable is that if more than 65,535 records are written to the output file,
the value of the SuprlinkFullCount variable is not truncated.
The
best way to understand Suprlink is to examine the process of writing a report.
Your report program will be written in COBOL, RPG, PowerHouse, or some other
language. Imagine that instead of hunting all over the database with DBFIND and
DBGET to collect your data, you just read a sorted disc file with a big record
containing all the data on a given entity. For example, a sales report might
read a disc file whose records consist of sales transactions plus customer
information. This file has been sorted by customer number and date. If there
are several sales for the same customer, the customer information is just
repeated in each record. The report program reads the records, checks for level
breaks, and formats and prints the records. Suprlink fits into this model of
report programs.
Working from the database to the final
flat file, how do we use Suprtool and Suprlink to produce the desired result?
Obviously, Suprtool can extract the desired fields from the desired records of
the sales detail dataset and put them in a disc file. And Suprtool can extract
the desired fields from the customer master dataset and write them to a second
disc file. What does Suprlink do?
If Suprtool sorts both files by customer,
Suprlink can "link" them together, producing a third file whose
composite record consists of the related fields from both files. This file is
just what we need to feed into the report program.
The tests that we have performed indicate
that this brute force method, which uses serial extracts, sorts, and a merge,
is often significantly faster than the "official" IMAGE method of
chasing down chains and hash synonyms.
The primary Input file, which if doing a link operation is the file
that should have the many or "detail" records. If any of the Link
files contain duplicate records, Suprlink will select one of them to link to
the primary record(s). The Suprlink Output file will have no more records than
the Input file.
The Input file and Link files are created
with the Output xxx,Link option in Suprtool. These files must be sorted by the
same key field in ascending order.
You can have up to seven Link files that are combined with the Input
file. Suprlink merges the Input file and Link files by comparing the key fields
of both files (you can optionally specify a secondary-key). The default is for
Suprlink to exclude any Input records that do not have a matching record in all
Link files. Specifying the Optional keyword on the Link command will force
Suprlink to fill the Output record with default values (spaces and zeros) when
it doesn't find a match in a specific Link file. If you want to link the sales
transaction to both the customer master and the salesman master, it's probably
faster to use traditional methods (e.g., DBFIND and DBGET).
The
Output file will be a self-describing file, containing data extracted from the
Input file and the Link files. Suprlink combines the Input and Link records
together in a fixed way, dropping the duplicated key fields and appending the
remaining fields of each file in the order specified. You control which fields
occur by using the Extract command in Suprtool, but you have no control over
their order. Use the Form command to print out the final record format so that
you can prepare COBOL COPYLIB or PowerHouse QSCHEMA definitions.
The Input file and Link files must be sorted by the same key field.
Their names do not have to be identical, but they must be the same type and
have the same length. Suprlink does not support real- or long-type keys.
Selection logic can be tricky, since it is distributed over
independent Suprtool extract tasks, the Suprlink merge phase, and the final
report program.
Suprtool Selection. You can use the If
command to select which records you want from each dataset. You do have the
option to select key values from one dataset, then load them into a Table and
use $lookup to select related entries in another dataset. It makes sense to use
If on every dataset, since you have another selection possibility when the
files are linked. For example, you might select all customers in California and
all invoices with an amount greater than $2000.
Suprlink Selection. The Input file limits
the scope of the Output file. You cannot have more Output records than you do
Input records, but you can have fewer. When you do a Link to another file, you
have an implied selection criterion. That is, if Suprlink cannot find a record
in the Link file with matching key value(s), the Input record is dropped from
the Output file. If you have seven Link files, the Input record must match all
seven or be dropped. This is the default selection logic. You can override this
for any specific Link file by specifying the OPTIONAL keyword on the Link
command. Only do this is you don't care whether that data exists or not, since
Suprlink will supply default values for those Link fields.
You want to produce a report of all invoices over $2,000.00 for
customers in California. The customer information is in the m-customer dataset,
and the invoice information is in the d-invoice dataset. Here are the steps to
produce this report:
1.
Select and sort the California
customers into the file customer.
2.
Select and sort invoices over
$2,000 into the file invoice.
3.
Because there will often be
more than one invoice per customer, specify the invoice file as input to Suprlink.
4.
Link in the customer file.
5.
Produce your report from the
combined records in the output file.
>base sales {sales database}
>get
m-customer {select all customers...}
>if state =
"CA" {...in California}
>sort custnum {sort and link key}
>output
customer,link {Link output option}
>xeq
We now have a self-describing file with
all the customers from California sorted by the customer number. Next we select
all invoices over $2,000.00 and sort them into customer number sequence:
>get
d-invoice {select all invoices...}
>if
amount>200000 {...over $2,000.00}
>sort custnum {sort and link key again}
>output
invoices,link {remember the link option}
>exit
If we specify the cust file as input, the
Output file will only contain one invoice per customer. Because we want to
produce a report of all the selected invoices, we specify it as the input file:
+input
invoices {driving input file, custnum
is the key}
+link customer {combined with customers}
+output invcust {produces the file we want}
+exit
Each record of the invcust file will have
both the invoice information and the customer information for each invoice of
the Input file (i.e., one record per invoice). What happens if there is no
customer record for a specific invoice? In this case, the invoice record does
not appear in the Output file. To force Suprlink to include these records, use
the optional keyword on the Link command:
+input
invoices {sorted by custnum}
+link customer
optional {don't exclude invoices if...}
+output invcust {the customer information...}
+exit {...is missing}
Suprlink can join files
together that have multiple key records in each file, what has been come to be
know as a many-to-many link. Suprlink has traditionally been able to link an
Input file with many records with the same key to a Link file that has a single
record with the same key value.
The
Join command, will link two files with many key records in both the input file
and the "Linking" file. The syntax of the Join command is exactly the
same as the Link command so a sample task would look as follows:
+input ordhist
+join orders
+output custord
+xeq
The
above task will link multiple records of the file ordhist, to the multiple
records of the file in orders. This assumes that the files are sorted by a
common key. In SQL terms this is known as an Inner Join. An Outer Join, one
where the keys do not necessarily have a match can be achieved by adding the
optional keyword to the Join command:
+input ordhist
+join orders optional
+output joined
+xeq
In
SQL parlance, once again you can achieve both a Left Outer Join and Right Outer
Join by reversing the order of the files, between the input and the join
commands.
To
give you an example of how the Join operation would work consider the following
data. First we have an inventory file with multiple records for the same
product-no. This data is stored in the file dinv:
50512001 {Rest of data}
50512001 {Rest of data}
50512003 {Rest of data}
The
next file will have sales records, once again with multiple key values, this
data is stored in the file dsales:
50512001 {Rest of data}
50512001 {Rest of data}
If
you did the following task assuming both files are sorted by the product-no:
+in dinv
+join dsales
+out invsales
+xeq
The
resulting file would have four records, with the multiple matching dinv and
dsales records. The record layout would have the dinv information first
followed by the dsales information. If you add the optional keyword on the join
command the resulting file would have 5 records. The matching 4 records from
dinv and dsales as well as the dinv record that did not match with the numeric
fields set to zero and the byte fields set to spaces.
Only
one Join operation is allowed per task.
By
default, Suprlink will join files base on the primary sorted key in the
self-describing file. You can specify a secondary key for the files to be
joined on in a similar manner to how the Link command did:
+in orders
+join dsales by order-no
product-no
+out ordsales
+xeq
Select only the records you need, unless the time to load a table of
desired key values, plus the time needed to do $lookup for each record, is
longer than the time to extract and sort the entire dataset. Use the Sorted and
Hold options of the Table command when loading a table. Because of the time
needed to search a large table, it is often faster to extract all of the
records and let Suprlink skip over the ones it doesn't need.
This method does a lot of sorts. Sorting
time can vary depending on system load and available memory, but it increases
dramatically for large records and large datasets. You should try to use
Suprtool's Extract command to reduce the record size, and consider using
Suprtool's If command to reduce the number of records.
Suprlink needs enough disc space to
invert a significant subset of your database, then link it into an Output file.
Although all of the Suprlink files can be job temporary, you still need enough
disc space for the original database, the final Output file, the primary Input
file, and each of the Link files. One of the tradeoffs with this method is more
disc space for faster elapsed time.
From the sales records, retrieve all of
the sales for October, 2000 and append the customer name, salesman code, and
year-to-date sales total to the sales record (these fields are located in the
customer records).
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
>base mybase
>get
sales-detail {or use Chain command}
>extract
customernum,saledate,saleamt,...
>item
saledate,date,phdate
>if saledate >=
$date(95/10/01) and &
> saledate <= $date(95/10/31)
>sort customernum
>sort saledate
>output
sales,link,temp {creates temporary SD file}
>xeq
>get
customer-master {get entire dataset}
>extract
customernum,name
>extract
salesman,ytdsales
>sort customernum
>output
custs,link,temp
>exit
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+input sales {link sales...}
+link custs {...to custs...}
+output repts
temp {...producing REPTS!}
+xeq {...run the task}
+form repts {fields in repts}
+exit
:purge sales,temp {these two files...}
:purge custs,temp {...no longer needed}
:file infile =
repts,oldtemp
:file outfile;dev=lp
:run myprog
:purge repts,temp
Whenever
Suprlink is processing files with packed- or zoned-decimal keys, errors can
occur because of invalid digits in the keys. Suprlink reports the input and
link record numbers with illegal digits and processing stops. You can use
Suprtool to examine input and link records, by using record selection with
Suprtool's input command. A packed-decimal number consists of nibbles (there
are two nibbles in each byte). The last nibble is the sign of the number. The
remaining nibbles must each contain a number in the range 0-9. A zoned-decimal
number must have a valid digit in each byte and end in
"0"-"9", "A"-"R", "{", or
"}".
Consider a common problem easily solved
with Quiz from Cognos: finding all records in a file which have no
corresponding records in a related file. For example, to find all records in an
invoice lines file with no corresponding invoice master record, the following
Quiz code could be written.
>access lines
link to header optional
>select if not
record header exists
>report invoiceno
of lines
>go
This small amount of code, however, can
take a long time to execute, depending on the size of the Lines and Header
files. A Quiz program will usually take longer as new links are added, causing
the size of the record complex to grow.
Suprlink can provide the same
information, possibly in a fraction of the time. The technique as applied to
the same problem requires four steps:
1.
Sort the Lines file by
Invoiceno.
2.
Add a new constant field,
Linkflag, to the Header file and fill it with "Y". Sort by Invoiceno.
3.
Link the two files with
Suprlink using the Optional parameter.
4.
Select the record complexes where
linkflag does not contain a "Y".
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
>base invdb
>get lines
>sort invoiceno
>output
file1,temp,link
>xeq
>get header
>define
linkflag,1,1
>extract
invoiceno,linkflag="Y"
>sort invoiceno
>output
file2,temp,link
>xeq
>link input file1
>link link file2
optional
>link output
file3,temp
>link xeq
>input file3
>if linkflag
<> "Y"
>extract invoiceno
>list standard
>exit
Any invoice line with a corresponding
record in the invoice Header file will have a "Y" in the linkflag
field. Records failing the match will contain the default space.
This technique can easily be adapted for
use as a command file, to minimize the amount of code added to a job stream.
See the "MPE/iX Programming" section of the Suprtool User Manual for ideas about command files.
Suprlink's
input or link files can come from datasets, MPE files or KSAM files. Before
linking either an MPE or KSAM file, you must convert the file into a
self-describing file. Because MPE and KSAM files have no implied structure, you
must use Suprtool's Define and Extract commands to define the structure of the
file.
Suprlink's only requirement is that the
file contain a sort field and some optional data fields. The sort field does
not have to be the first field in the record. The following example
demonstrates how to convert an MPE file into a self-describing file:
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
>input mpecust {regular MPE file}
>def
first-fields,1,10 {fields before the sort field}
>def
sort-field,11,6 {sort field for this file}
>def
last-fields,17,20 {fields after the sort field}
>extract
first-fields {remember to extract all of
the}
>extract
sort-field { fields in the correct order}
>extract
last-fields
>sort
sort-field {must also remember the sort}
>output
sdfile,link {use the Link option}
>xeq
This example would sort the entire MPE
file. To select a subset, you would define more fields and use the If command.
Treat KSAM files exactly the same way. Suprtool does not read KSAM files in
sorted order, so you must remember to specify the sort explicitly when
converting the KSAM file to a self-describing file.
Suprlink cannot create nor write to KSAM
files. You can use Suprtool to load a KSAM file with the output from Suprlink.
Suprlink is able to substitute any CI variables from any command
line source, whether thru interactive, use file or batch input.
In order to use this feature, first issue
the following Set command:
Variable Substitution is not on by
default for backward compatibility.
Batch
Since the Streams facility (under default
setups) will replace any "!" found in the first column of a job
stream. Anytime you want to specify an entire line thru Variable Substitution
you will need to leave a space before the variable is specified.
!setvar input
"i dfile by message-no"
!run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+set varsub on
+ !input
Notes
For MPE commands some variables will be
resolved twice when passed off to MPE, which will give different values for a
variable.
Setting variables at the CI level:
MPEXL:setvar x 10
MPEXL:setvar y
"!!x"
MPEXL:showvar [xy]
X = 10
Y = !x
Setting variables within Suprlink
+set varsub on
+setvar a 10
+setvar b
"!!a"
+showvar [ab]
A = 10
B = 10
Because Suprlink does one level of
variable substitution prior to the command being passed off to MPE, setting
variables in Suprlink that involves other variables will give different results
from MPE. We recommend that you set the variables prior to running Suprlink, or
that you temporarily turn off variable substitution with the Set Varsub Off
command.
+set varsub off
+setvar a 10
+setvar b
"!!a"
+showvar [ab]
A = 10
B = !a
+set varsub on
Quiz
and QTP are part of PowerHouse, a popular fourth generation language sold by
Cognos. You can use Suprtool and Suprlink to improve the performance of
PowerHouse applications. For a complete discussion of how to use Suprtool and
Quiz together, refer to the "Suprtool with Quiz/QTP" section of the Suprtool User Manual.
Suprlink can write to PowerHouse subfiles
that have been created with Quiz or QTP. Subfiles are "self
documenting" files that contain a complete description of the file's
record structure. This information is stored in user labels in the file, and is known as a
"mini-dictionary." When you access the subfile in Quiz, its
description is read from the mini-dictionary. You must ensure that the
PowerHouse subfile description exactly matches
the record layout of Suprlink's output file. Remember that Suprlink will drop
the common "key" fields from the link files.
Step 1: Create the Subfile with QTP
Before running Suprlink, you create an empty subfile with QTP:
:purge invcust
:qtp
>access d-invoice
link custnum to &
> custnum of m-customer
>subfile invcust
keep size numrecs include &
> custnum, invdate, amount, invnum, &
> name, address
>set input limit 0
>go
The subfile must contain all of the
fields that Suprlink will produce in the output file, with the same attributes
(data-type and length) and in the same order. Use the Include option of QTP's
Subfile command to define each of the fields in the correct order.
The numrecs
parameter must be replaced with the number of records that will be created
by the Suprlink run. The default numrecs is
1023 when the input limit is set to 0.
Step 2: Output Erase in Suprlink
Once you have created the PowerHouse subfile, use the Erase option
of Suprlink's Output command to load the file. This will overwrite any data in
the subfile, but it will not touch the PowerHouse mini-dictionary in the user
labels:
+input
invoices {created by Suprtool}
+link customer {sorted by custnum}
+output invcust
erase {created by QTP}
+exit
Step 3: Report with Quiz
The INVCUST file contains the sorted
records for the Quiz report. Quiz knows the structure of this file because of
the initial QTP commands that we used to create the file. Now use Quiz to
generate the report:
quiz
>access *invcust
>report ...
>go
Notes on Subfiles
One of the advantages that Suprlink has
over the link function in PowerHouse is that Suprlink does not require the
"key" field in the link files to be a database key. Because Suprlink
uses a serial-merge approach, its files only need to have a common field with
the same data-type and length. If you do use Suprlink to link files that do not
share a common database key, you need some extra steps to create the PowerHouse
subfile.
Since Suprlink cannot currently write to
NM Ksam files you cannot directly write to PowerHouse indexed subfiles. You can
use Suprtool to load file to the Indexed KSAM file.
Defining Fields in QTP
In our example above, "custnum"
can be used to link the d-invoice and m-customer datasets in QTP because
custnum is an IMAGE key in the m-customer dataset. If custnum was not an IMAGE
key, you could try declaring the record structure for the subfile with the QTP
Define command:
:purge invcust
:qtp
>access d-invoice
>define name
character size 20 = " "
>define address
character size 20 = " "
>subfile invcust
keep size numrecs include &
> custnum, invdate, amount, invnum, &
> name, address
>set input limit 0
>go
You must be careful to ensure that the
data definitions of the Defined fields are correct. Note that you cannot assign
default display specifications (such as Heading or Picture specifications) for
Defined fields in QTP.
Linking Subfiles by Record Number
Another approach, which guarantees that
the subfile will contain the correct data definitions and default display
characteristics, is to create temporary subfiles with QTP for each dataset,
then link them together by record number:
:purge invcust
:qtp
>access d-invoice
>subfile invtemp
size 1 include &
> custnum, invdate, amount, invnum
>set input limit 0
>go
>access m-customer
>subfile custtemp
size 1 include &
> name, address
>set input limit 0
>go
>access *invtemp
link to record 0 of *custtemp
>subfile invcust
keep size numrecs include &
> custnum, invdate, amount, invnum, &
> name, address
>set input limit 0
>go
When you run Suprlink, it prompts for
commands on $stdlist with a "+" character and reads command lines
from $stdinx. Suprlink commands contain a command name followed by one or more
parameters, and are patterned after the same commands in Suprtool.
In this chapter, we describe the Suprlink
commands in alphabetic order. Following each command name in brackets is the
minimal abbreviation for the command. For example: [I] for Input and [L] for
Link.
You may shorten the command name to the first letter of the command
name.
You may enter the letters in either
uppercase or lowercase, because Suprlink upshifts everything in the command
line except literal strings within quotes ("abc"). These two commands
are identical:
The
maximum physical command line is 256
characters. You may enter commands on multiple input lines by putting an
"&" continuation character at the end of the line. The maximum
total command length is 256 characters. The most common reason for continuing
commands is to specify a lengthy Link command with secondary keys.
+input students
+link majors by ssn
cmaj from &
ssn curmajor
+output outfile
+exit
Comments may appear at the end of any command line, when they are
surrounded by braces. Many of the examples in this manual show comments at the
end of each command line. You can enter a comment as the only item in a
Suprlink command line. When continuing command lines, the comment can appear
before or after the continuation character.
+ {link customer records
to invoices. }
+input invoices {sorted by custnum}
+link customer {combined with customers}
+output invcust {produces the file we want}
+exit
STREAMX is a product from VESOFT that permits you to build flexible
job streams. STREAMX contains a complete programming language with loops,
prompts, and parameter substitution. A problem arises when trying to enter
comments into a Suprtool batch job that will be submitted with STREAMX. Suprtool
uses the {...} pair to delimit comments. STREAMX uses these same characters for
expressions.
You cannot change Suprtool's comment
character, but you can change the {...} characters in STREAMX. The following
example changes the STREAMX expression characters from {...} to ~...~:
!job
example,user.acct
::setbraces ~~
!run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+input invoices {driving input file, custnum
is the key}
+link customer {combined with customers}
+output invcust {produces the file we want}
+exit
!tell
~hpjobname~,~hpuser~.~hpaccount~;Example done.
!eoj
Suprlink
also accepts MPE commands, with or without a colon.
For commands that are the same in both
Suprlink and MPE, Suprlink only executes the MPE command if you type the colon.
For example:
+help {you get Suprlink help}
+:help {you get MPE help}
Suprlink/iX
will execute any MPE command (e.g., Run), UDCs, and command files. Caution: programs that suspend, instead
of terminating, are not killed by the HPCICOMMAND intrinsic.
Suprlink's Input, Link and Output
commands accept a file name in either MPE or POSIX format. File names starting
with "/", "./", or "../" are treated as POSIX
file names. All other file names are assumed to be MPE file names. MPE file
names are upshifted and POSIX file names are not. POSIX file names are limited
to a maximum of 240 characters. Here are some examples of POSIX file names:
:hello
david,mgr.dev,david
:CHDIR SUBDIR
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+input ./file
+verify input
/DEV/DAVID/SUBDIR/file
Any command line beginning with an equal sign (=) is treated as a
calculator expression. This feature can be used to compute blocking factors and
do other calculations without the need of an electronic calculator.
You can obtain a short description of the
calculator by entering the following:
=? {? gives help}
{prints a summary of =
functions}
For a detailed description of the
calculator and its options, see the Suprtool manual.
You can interrupt a Suprlink task with the Control-Y key (hold down
Control while striking Y). Suprlink responds by telling you how far it has
gotten (IN=, OUT=, etc.), and asking if you wish to stop. Hit the Return key to
continue or type YES to stop the task.
Repeat any combination of the previous 1000 command lines, with or
without editing.
BEFORE [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
redo previous line)
(BQ=redo
without change)
The Before command allows you to modify
the commands before it executes them. If you don't need to change them, use BQ
or Do.
The Before command uses Qedit-style
Control characters for modifying the commands. The default mode is to replace
characters. To delete use Control-D, and to insert use Control-B. If you prefer
HP-style modify (D, R, I, and U), use the Redo command instead of Before.
Examples
+listf
@.soruce {"source" is not spelled
right}
NON-EXISTENT
GROUP. (CIERR 908)
+Before {redo most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last command is printed}
our {you enter changes to it}
listf @.source {the edited command is shown}
{you press Return}
+listredo -10/
+before 5 {redo 5th command in stack}
+bef 8/10 {redo 8th through 10th}
+b listf {redo last listf command}
+b listf temp {redo "listf temp"
command}
+b @temp {redo last containing
"temp"}
+before -2 {redo command before previous}
+before -5/-2 {redo by relative lines}
Modify Operators
If you
wish to change any characters within the line, the modify operators are the
regular Control Codes used in Qedit:
·
Any printing characters replace
the ones above.
·
Control-D plus spaces deletes
columns above.
·
Control-B puts you into
"insert before" mode.
·
Control-A starts appending
characters at the end of line.
·
Control-A, Control-D, plus
spaces, deletes from the end.
·
Control-T ends Insert Mode,
allowing movement to a new column.
·
Control-G recovers the original
line.
·
Control-O specifies
"overwrite" mode (needed for spaces).
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent
file and can therefore be used from another session. You can use the Set redo command to specify a filename
to save your redo commands. Please see the Set Redo command for details.
The Do command will repeat (without changes) any of the previous
1000 commands.
DO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
repeat the previous command)
Commands are numbered sequentially from 1
as entered and the last 1000 of them are retained. Use the :Listredo command to
display the previous commands. You can repeat a single command (do
5), a range of commands (do
5/10) or the most recent command whose name matches a
string (do list). If you want to modify the
commands before executing them, use Redo or Before.
Examples
+listredo
+do {do previous command again}
+do 39 {do command line 39 again}
+do 5/8 {do command lines 5 to 8
again}
+do link {do most recent Link command}
+do show {do last starting with "show"}
+do showjob job {do last "showjob
job" command}
+do @job {do last containing
"job"}
+do -2 {do command before previous}
+do -7/-5 {do by relative line number}
+do 5/ {do command lines 5 to last}
Notes
The Do command cannot be abbreviated.
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent
file and can therefore be used from another session. You can use the Set redo command to specify a filename
to save your redo commands. Please see the Set Redo command for details.
Exit Suprlink in one of three ways. By default, perform the current
linkage task, if any, then leave Suprlink. Users are often frustrated when they
exit Suprlink after specifying part of a task and Suprlink starts processing
the task. Use the Abort or Suspend options to exit Suprlink conveniently without
executing the current task.
EXIT
[ ABORT | SUSPEND | XEQ ]
(Default:
XEQ)
Typing Exit with no parameters means Exit
Xeq. Suprlink recognizes special command names which specify both the Exit
command and an exit option (e.g., ES means Exit Suspend).
Cancels
the current operation and terminates Suprlink. The Exit command without
parameters always attempts to perform the task currently specified, while Exit
Abort cancels the task and terminates immediately. Should Suprlink be executed
as a son process, Exit will only suspend Suprlink, while Exit Abort will
actually terminate the process.
Examples
+:comment. You began to specify a linkage, stopped for
+:comment. coffee, and decided to cancel the task
+:comment. upon your return.
+input invoices
... coffee break ...
+exit abort {cancel linkage and terminate}
When running Suprlink as a son process (e.g., from Qedit), it would
be nice to suspend Suprlink without executing the current task. Exit Suspend
does this. After returning to Suprlink, all specifications for the current task
are still in effect.
Examples
:run
qedit.pub.robelle
/:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+input invoices
+link customer {start specifying options}
+exit suspend {return to Qedit without an
Xeq}
SUPRLINK.PUB.ROBELLE
is still alive. Okay to HOLD ? Y
/...
/:activate suprlink
SUPRLINK.PUB.ROBELLE
+output invcust {continue specifications}
+xeq {execute the current task}
To
perform the current linkage task, you can either use Xeq (which leaves you inside
Suprlink, ready to define another task) or Exit Xeq (which leaves Suprlink when
done with the task).
After
the Suprlink task completes, Suprlink either terminates, or suspends and
awakens a father process (i.e., :RUN from within Qedit). Exit Xeq is the
default option (i.e., specifying exit starts execution of the current task).
Examples
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+exit {no input was specified}
End Of Program
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+input invoices
+link customer
+output invcust
+exit {link and stop}
Display the fields in a self-describing file.
FORM [filename]
If no file name is specified, the fields
in the input file are displayed. The display shows the field type and field
length in IMAGE notation. An I1-field is a single integer. Packed-fields show
the number of nibbles (subtract one to obtain the number of digits). Byte and
zoned-decimal fields show the byte length.
When showing the form of a
self-describing file, Suprlink shows the byte offset of each field after the
subcount, type, and sublength. The first field always appears at offset one.
There are two types of self-describing
files. One type is produced with Suprtool's Query output option. You produce
the other type with the Link output option. The Form command shows the internal
self-describing version number, enabling you to tell the difference.
A.00.00 - Query Output Option
Compound fields have a question mark for
the type, and the length is the number of bytes in the field. Sort information
about the file is missing. Here is an example form listing:
+form custfile
File:
CUSTFILE.EXAMPLE.ROBELLE (SD Version
A.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CHARACTER X5
1 {length is five bytes}
ZONED Z5 6
{room for
five digits}
INTEGER I1
11 {single integer}
DOUBLE I2
13 {double integer}
PACKED P6
17 {room for five digits}
QUAD I4 20
{eight-byte
integer}
REPEATINT ?6
28 {compound field}
LOGICAL K1
34 {single logical}
DBLLOG K2
36 {double logical}
Limit: 10000 EOF: 15
Entry Length: 44 Blocking: 64
B.00.00 - Link Output Option
These self-describing files contain
information about how the file is sorted. Compound fields are handled
correctly, so the Form command shows compound fields just as you would see them
in IMAGE. The Item command in Suprtool identifies the date format of an item.
The Link output option saves the date format and any decimals as part of the
field description:
+form datafile
File:
DATAFILE.EXAMPLE.ROBELLE (SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CHARACTER X5
1 <<Sort #1 >>
REPEATINT 3I1
6 {compound field}
DATE J2 12
<<YYYYMMDD>>
DOLLAR P6
16 << .2 >>
Limit: 10000 EOF: 15
Entry Length: 16 Blocking: 64
Formout File
The Form command writes all output to the file Formout. This file
defaults to $stdlist. You can redirect this file to a line printer or a disc
drive. If you redirect the Formout file to a disc file, Suprlink assumes a
temporary file by default.
+:file
formout;dev=lp
+form custfile {writes to line printer}
+:file
formout;dev=disc
+form invfile {writes to temporary file}
Show what commands and options are available in Suprlink.
HELP
[ command | keyword [ ,option ] ]
(Default:
browse through the entire help file)
Command Help
If you specify any parameters, Help first
assumes that you want help on a specific Suprlink command. If you know the
structure of the help file, you can specify one of the keywords under the
command name.
+help link {help on the Link command}
+help link,notes {notes section of the Link command}
Keyword Help
If we cannot find any help in the
"Commands" section of the help file, we assume that you specified one
of the outer-level keywords in the help file. To see this list of keywords,
type help with no parameters. You will see a short introduction to Suprlink and
then a list of keywords. You can specify any of these keywords on the Help
command. You can also specify a subkeyword.
+help
before,example {example section of Before
command}
Quick Help - HQ
HQ asks Suprlink to look under the keyword QUICK in the help file.
QUICK contains the text from the Suprlink Quick Reference Guide, offering the
experienced user a quick review of the syntax of any command.
+hq input {quick description of Input}
+hq commands {quick list of command names}
Notes
If no parameters are specified, Help allows you to browse through
the help file, Suprlink.Help.Robelle. The Help command uses the Qhelp subsystem
from the QLIB. For "help in help", type "?" when you see
the Qhelp prompt character ("?"). The help file is organized into
levels. To go back to the previous level, press Return. Press F8 to exit the
Qhelp subsystem and return to Suprlink.
Specifies
the primary input source and the name of the key field by which it is sorted.
INPUT
filename [ BY key-field ]
There can be only one Input file per
linkage task, but up to seven Link files. The Input file should be created by
Suprtool using the Output-Link option and must be sorted by key-field. The key field can be any
type, except for Real or Long. The primary Input file may have more than one
record per key value, and each record may appear in the Output file.
It is best to have Suprtool Extract only
the fields you will actually need, since if any of the Suprtool extracts result
in enormous Output files, the time to do the sort may be prohibitive.
The BY-clause is only necessary when the
Input file has been created using the Suprtool Output-Query option instead of
the Output-Link option. Output-Link adds the sort field information to the
self-describing file, so that you do not have to specify it in a BY clause.
Join the Input file to another Join file, this links files with
multiple key values in both the input file and the Join file.
JOIN
filename [BY
join-keys [FROM input-keys]]
[OPTIONAL
| REQUIRED]
(Default:
REQUIRED)
File Name
The Join file should be created by Suprtool with the Output,Link
option; it should only contain the fields that you actually need in the final
report, plus any sort fields . If you do a :LISTF of the file, it should show
"SD" as the CODE; this means it is self-describing. It contains a
description of its own record structure in some special user labels; this
allows you to refer to the same field names as in the original database and
Suprlink can compute where they occur in the record. For example:
+input sales {Sales is sorted by custno}
+join custfile {key is custno}
+output custsale {Join two files...}
+exit {...into custsale}
Join Keys
Suprlink
allows files to be linked by up to two keys, a primary and a secondary key
field.
By default, Suprlink assumes that the key
field to the Join file is the same key field specified for the Input file. If
the Join key field is different from the Input key field, use the BY-clause to
specify the correct key field:
+input
customer {key-name is custnum}
+join sales by
custno {new name for the same field}
You would also use the BY-clause if the
Link file was created using the Suprtool Output,Query option instead of
Output,Link.
Secondary Keys
Suprlink has an option that allows you to
select which join record you want by matching a second key field in the master.
JOIN filename
BY primary-key secondary-key
This option forces Suprlink to compare
both the primary-key and the secondary-key when comparing an input record to a
join record. For example,
+input ordhist {key-name is cust}
+join orders by cust
prod {Orders contains prod}
This example says that the file Orders is
sorted by both cust and prod fields. The join will occur on those records that
match both keys.
Secondary Input Key
It is possible that the second key field has a different name in the
input file and the Join file. The FROM-clause lets you handle this case:
+input
students {key-name is ssn}
+join orders by ord
prod from orders products
Note that you must specify the Input file
key field as part of the FROM-clause. This example is identical to the previous
secondary key example, but in this case the current major field is called
"products" in the ordhist file and "prod" in the orders
file.
Optional Join
If there are no join records for a given key value of the input
file, that input record is dropped from the output file (this is the default
option, REQUIRED).
To make the join optional, specify the
OPTIONAL keyword. When you use OPTIONAL, and Suprlink does not find a matching join
record in the file, Suprlink fills in the linked fields with default values.
The default for byte-type fields is spaces, for zoned-type the default is ASCII
zeros "0", and for all other types the default is binary zeros. For
example,
+input
custfile {key-name is custno}
+join addrfile
optional {don't drop customers...}
+output custaddr {...if there is no address}
+exit
Link the Input file to another Link file, maximum of seven input
files.
LINK
filename [BY
link-keys [FROM input-keys]]
[OPTIONAL
| REQUIRED]
(Default:
REQUIRED)
File Name
The Link file should be created by Suprtool with the Output,Link
option; it should only contain the fields that you actually need in the final
report, plus any sort fields. If you do a :LISTF of the file, it should show
"SD" as the CODE; this means it is self-describing. It contains a
description of its own record structure in some special user labels; this
allows you to refer to the same field names as in the original database and
Suprlink can compute where they occur in the record. For example:
+input sales {Sales is sorted by custno}
+link custfile {key is custno}
+link addrfile
+output custsale {link three files...}
+exit {...into custsale}
Link Keys
Suprlink
allows files to be linked by up to two keys, a primary and a secondary key
field.
By default, Suprlink assumes that the key
field to the Link file is the same key field specified for the Input file. If
the Link key field is different from the Input key field, use the BY-clause to
specify the correct key field:
+input
customer {key-name is custnum}
+link sales by
custno {new name for the same field}
You would also use the BY-clause if the
Link file was created using the Suprtool Output,Query option instead of
Output,Link.
Secondary Keys
Suppose that you are linking a master to
a detail and the detail can have several entries for each master. Suprlink has
an option that allows you to select which link record you want by matching a
second key field in the master.
LINK
filename BY primary-key secondary-key
This option forces Suprlink to compare
both the primary-key and the secondary-key when comparing an input record to a
link record. For example,
+input
students {key-name is ssn}
+link majors by ssn
cmaj {Students contains cmaj}
This example says that the file Majors is
sorted by ssn and may contain more than one record per student. To select the
desired record for each student, Suprlink matches the students' cmaj against
the cmaj in the link record.
Secondary Input Key
It is possible that the second key field has a different name in the
input file and the Link file. The FROM-clause lets you handle this case:
+input
students {key-name is ssn}
+link majors by ssn
cmaj from ssn curmajor
Note that you must specify the Input file
key field as part of the FROM-clause. This example is identical to the previous
secondary key example, but in this case the current major field is called
"curmajor" in the students file and "cmaj" in the majors
file.
Optional Linkage
If
there is more than one link record with the same key value, Suprlink will
select the first one it finds. You can sort by another value such as date-time
to force a certain record to be first. Please note that this is unlike Quiz,
which does a hierarchical expansion to include every record accessed. If there
are no link records for a given key value of the input file, that input record
is dropped from the output file (this is the default option, REQUIRED).
To make the linkage optional, specify the
OPTIONAL keyword. When you use OPTIONAL, and Suprlink does not find a matching link record
in the file, Suprlink fills in the linked fields with default values. The
default for byte-type fields is spaces, for zoned-type the default is ASCII
zeros "0", and for all other types the default is binary zeros. For
example,
+input
custfile {key-name is custno}
+link addrfile
optional {don't drop customers...}
+output custaddr {...if there is no address}
+exit
The Listredo command will display any of the previous 1000 commands.
LISTREDO [ start
[ / stop ] ] [;ABS] [;OUT=file]
[
string ] [;REL]
[
ALL | @ ] [;UNN]
(Default:
display previous 20 commands)
(BJ
and ,, are short for LISTREDO)
Commands are numbered sequentially from 1
as entered and the last 1000 are retained. You can display a single command, a
range of commands, all 1000, or all the commands whose name matches the string.
You can print the commands with ABSolute line numbers (the default), RELative
line numbers (-5/-4), or UNNumbered. You can write the commands to your
terminal or OUT to a temporary file. If you want to redo any of these commands,
see Do, Redo, and Before.
Examples
+listredo 5
+listredo 5/10
+listredo help {print all Help commands}
+listredo -10 {print last ten commands}
+listredo ALL {print entire redo stack}
+listredo purge {print all Purge commands}
+listredo purge
xx {print all "purge
xx" commands}
+listredo @purge {print all with "purge"
anywhere}
+listredo @;rel {print ALL, relative numbers}
+listredo
1/10;out=*lp {dump commands to printer}
+listredo
@;unn;out=save {write commands to a file}
Notes
The Listredo command cannot be
abbreviated, but BJ is accepted as a short form.
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent
file and can therefore be used from another session. You can use the Set redo command to specify a filename
to save your redo commands. Please see the Set Redo command for details.
Specify the name of the output file and whether it is temporary.
OUTPUT
filename [TEMP] [ERASE] [DATA] [LINK]
By
default, the name of the Output-file is Output. The output file is a permanent,
self-describing file, containing data extracted from the input file and the
Link files. A few application tools may not read self-describing files. In this
case, use the Data option to make the output file a standard MPE file with a
filecode of zero and no user labels.
There are two different types of
self-describing files. The first type is created with Suprtool's Output Query
option. A superior form of self-describing file is produced with Suprtool's
Output Link option. Suprlink creates the output self-describing file in the
same format as the input file. We recommend that you use the same type of
self-describing file for all input and link files.
Output Record Format
The record structure is determined by
Suprlink, but is relatively easy to anticipate. Suprlink starts with all of the
fields of the input file, in order. For each Link file, it appends the fields
of the Link-file to the Output record, in order. Suprlink drops the key fields
from the Link records, since they always contain duplicated data.
If a field name (other than one of the two explicit keys) is
duplicated in several datasets, it will end up duplicated in the final output
file. An example would be a Timestamp field that occurs in every dataset.
Workaround: use the Extract command from Suprtool to take out only the fields
you want, or to rename duplicate fields.
You can verify the format of the
Output-file using the Form command. It shows the field names, length, and
structure, in order. From this display, you can generate an appropriate COPYLIB
or QSCHEMA definition.
Quiz Subfiles
The
Erase option is provided for Quiz users who create an empty subfile using QTP
or Quiz before running Suprtool and Suprlink. See the Suprlink with Quiz/QTP section for details.
Since Suprlink cannot currently write to
NM Ksam files you cannot directly write to PowerHouse indexed subfiles. You can
use Suprtool to load file to the Indexed KSAM file.
Size of the Output File
The output file is built with the same
capacity as the input file. You can reduce the size of the output file using a
:File command.
+:file allsales;
disc=10000
+output allsales
Enables you to modify and repeat any of the previous 1000 command
lines.
REDO [ start
[ / stop ] ]
[
string ]
[
ALL | @ ]
(Default:
redo the previous command)
The Redo command allows you to modify the
commands before it executes them. If you don't need to change them, use the Do
command. Commands are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered and the last 1000
are retained. Use the :Listredo command to display the previous commands. You
can redo a single command, a range of commands, or the most recent command
whose name matches a string.
The Redo command uses MPE-style editing
logic (D, I, R, U and >). The default mode is to replace characters. To delete,
type DDDD under the characters to be removed. To insert, type I under the
insertion spot, then the new characters. To undo your changes, type U. To
append to the end of the line, use >xxx. To delete from the end of the line,
use >DD. To replace at the end of the line, use >Rxxx. And to erase the
rest of the line, use D>. If you prefer Qedit-style editing (Control-D,
etc.), use the Before command instead of the Redo command.
Examples
+listf
@.soruce {"source" is not
spelled right}
NON-EXISTENT
GROUP. (CIERR 908)
+redo {redo most recent command}
listf @.soruce {last command is printed}
our {you enter changes to it}
listf @.source {edited command is shown}
{you press Return}
+listredo all
+redo 5 {redo 5th command in stack}
+redo {redo previous command}
+redo -2 {redo command before previous}
+redo 8/10 {redo 8th through 10th}
+redo -10/ {redo -10 through last}
+redo purge {redo last Purge command}
+redo purge temp {redo last "purge temp"}
+redo @temp {redo last containing
"temp"}
Notes
The Redo command cannot be abbreviated. To save more commands, use a
:File command on the file LINKREDO before you run Suprlink:
:file
linkredo;disc=5000
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
Persistent Redo
Redo commands can be saved in a permanent
file and can therefore be used from another session. You can use the Set redo command to specify a filename
to save your redo commands. Please see the Set Redo command for details.
Cancel the current linkage task.
RESET
Reset closes the current Input-file and
any Link files, then resets the output file name to Output. This is actually a
Reset All command; you cannot reset particular commands as you can do in
Suprtool. If you try to reset an individual command, Suprlink prints a warning.
Enables or disables certain operating options within Suprlink. These
options are not reset by Xeq or Reset commands.
SET [MAPPED ON|OFF]
[REDO filename]
[STATISTICS ON|OFF]
[VARSUB ON|OFF]
[VARSUBDEBUG
ON|OFF]
SET
MAPPED ON | OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
MAPPED
forces Suprlink/iX to read the input and link files using mapped file access.
Specifying this option is an error in Suprlink/V. If the input and link files
are not in memory, the wall time performance is worse with Set Mapped On, but
CPU time performance is better. You must Set Mapped On before specifying the
input file.
SET
REDO filename
(Initially:
unnamed temporary file)
Commands
entered at the Suprlink prompt are saved in something called the redo stack.
You can recall commands from the redo stack by using other commands such as
Before, Do and Redo. By default, the redo stack is stored in a temporary file
and discarded as soon as you exit. This temporary stack is not preserved across
Suprlink invocations.
The new Set Redo command assigns a
permanent file as the redo stack, allowing the stack to become available for
future Suprlink invocations. For example, to assign the Myredo file as a
persistent redo stack, enter
If the file does not exist, Suprlink
creates it. Otherwise, Suprlink uses the existing file. All subsequent commands
are written to the persistent redo stack. The setting is valid for the duration
of the Suprlink session. As soon as you exit Suprlink, the setting is
discarded. Next time you run Suprlink, you will get the temporary stack.
If the file name is not qualified, the
redo stack is created in the logon group and account. This may be desirable if
you want to have separate stacks. If you want to always use the same persistent
stacks, you should qualify the name.
The Verify command shows which stack is
currently in use. If it shows <temporary>, it means Suprlink is using the
default stack. Anything else is the name of the file used on the Set Redo
command.
Concurrency
When Suprlink uses the default temporary
stack, it is only accessible to that particular instance of Suprlink. You can
run as many Suprlink instances as you need and each one gets its own redo
stack. With temporary stacks, you will never get into concurrency problems.
If you start using a persistent redo
stack, however, you might start running into concurrency problems. A persistent
redo stack can only be used by one Qedit instance at a time. If you try to use
a persistent redo stack that is already in use, you will get the following
message:
+set redo myredo
EXCLUSIVE VIOLATION:
FILE BEING ACCESSED (FSERR 90)
Unable to open file
for REDO stack
In this situation, Suprlink continues to
use the redo stack active at the time and lets you continue working as normal.
Qedit can also have permanent redo
stacks. To prevent products from writing to each other's stack, it is advisable
to have separate stacks for each product by giving them different file names.
For example, if you use
you will have a redo stack called Myredo
for your Suprlink commands. If you exit Suprlink, then run Qedit and supply the
same Set Redo command, your Qedit commands will be written to the same file
that was used for your Suprlink commands.
SET
STATISTICS ON | OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
STATISTICS
causes Suprlink to print statistics at the end of each task.
SET
VARSUB ON | OFF
(Initially:
OFF)
Setting
Variable Substitution causes Suprlink to resolve any CI variables in a command
before processing.
SET VARSUBDEBUG ON | OFF
(Initially: OFF)
Suprtool, now has a setting called
Set VarsubDebug on which will print out the line after the variable
substitution has occurred. This setting only works if Set Varsub is on and Set
VarsubDebug is on.
setvar outfile &
:"/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901"
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
SUPRTOOL/iX/Copyright
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. 1981-2007.
(Version 5.4
Internal) TUE, OCT 30, 2007, 2:58 PM
Type H for he
>set varsub on
>set varsubdebug on
>in
file1sd.suprtest
vd:in file1sd.suprtest
>output
!outfile,link,temp
vd:output
/GREEN/SUPRTEST/filename90123456789012345678901234567890123
vd:2345678901,link,temp
The
output is formatted into 74 byte chunks and printed with a preceding “vd:” so
the “substituted” line is clear.
Specifies a file of commands to be executed as a group.
USE[Q]
filename
Examples
A usefile makes your task easier by
allowing common commands to be specified once in an external file. For example,
the following usefile contains all the commands for creating the invcust file:
+use usecust
input invoices {sorted by custnum}
link customer {combined with customers}
output invcust {produces the file we want}
exit
Suprlink prints the lines in the usefile,
including the comment lines. This allows you to include instructions and
reminders in the usefile. In the example above, there were no commands for the
user to enter.
Notes
Usefiles cannot be nested in Suprlink.
The usefile may be any unnumbered text file or a Qedit workfile, but no more
than 256 characters per record will be processed.
By default, Suprlink displays the
commands in a usefile as they are executed. Suprlink can execute commands quietly using the Useq command. For
compatibility with Qedit, Useq can be abbreviated to UQ.
Print the definition of the current linkage task.
VERIFY
Verify prints the current Input, Link,
and Output files; in other words, it is a Verify All command.
Perform the current linkage task.
XEQ
Xeq checks that you have specified an input file and at least one
Link file. Then it performs the linkage and creates the output file. Finally,
it closes the files and resets, ready for you to specify another linkage task
or Exit. If you also wish to leave Suprlink after completing the linkage task,
use Exit instead of Xeq.
The Form command displays the fields in a self-describing file. This
information is stored in the user labels of an MPE file and is not accessible
with other tools. Use the Form command to obtain the record layout of Suprlink
output files.
The following example shows the Form
command listing for an input file, a Link file, and the resulting output file.
We start with an input file of invoices.
+form invoices
File:
INVOICES.TEST.DATA (SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CUSTNUM X8 1
<<Sort #1 >>
DELIVERED I2 9
PRODUCTNUM Z8 13
PRICE I2 21
PURCHASED I2 25
QTY I1 29
TAX I2 31
TOTAL I2 35
Limit: 100 EOF: 100
Entry Length: 38 Blocking: 107
Suprtool produced both the invoice and
the customer file by using the Get, Extract, and Sort commands. The invoice
file was produced with Suprtool's Output Link option. If you had used
Suprtool's Output Query option, the Form command would not have printed any
information about the key fields. The next listing is the customer file.
+form cust
File:
CUST.TEST.DATA (SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CITY X12 1
RATING I2 13
CUSTNUM X8 17
<<Sort #1 >>
STATUS X2 25
FIRSTNAME X10 27
LASTNAME X16 37
STATE X2 53
ADDRESS 2X25 55
ZIPCODE X6 105
Limit: 50 EOF: 50
Entry Length: 110 Blocking: 37
The street address is a compound-field.
If you had used Suprtool's Output Query option, the field would have appeared
with a question mark for the data-type. In that case, you cannot use the field
as a key-field in Suprlink, but the actual data in the field will be processed
and linked correctly. Your final report should be able to read this data just
as if it came from the database. We use Suprlink to combine the invoice and
cust files into one Output-file:
:run
suprlink.pub.robelle
+i invoices by custnum
+l cust
+o invcust
+e
The final Form command shows the record
layout of the Output-file. You would use this file as input to your report
program.
+form invcust
File:
INVCUST.TEST.DATA (SD Version B.00.00)
Entry: Offset
CUSTNUM X8 1
<<Sort #1 >>
DELIVERED I2 9
PRODUCTNUM Z8 13
PRICE I2 21
PURCHASED I2 25
QTY I1 29
TAX I2 31
TOTAL I2 35
CITY X12 39
RATING I2 51
STATUS X2 55
FIRSTNAME X10 57
LASTNAME X16 67
STATE X2 83
ADDRESS 2X25
85
ZIPCODE X6 135
Limit: 100 EOF: 100
Entry Length: 140 Blocking: 29
The various limitations of Suprlink are described here. In general
you need to reduce the number or sizes of fields if you encounter any of these
limits.
Input File - Maximum Record Size - 2048 Words
This
is also the maximum size of an IMAGE entry. We recommend that you use
Suprtool's Extract command to minimize the input record size.
Input File - Maximum Block Size - 4096 Words
By
default, Suprtool restricts the maximum block size to 2,048 words. You can use
the Set Blocksize command to increase this size up to 8192 words. If you
increase the maximum block size, it is likely that Suprtool will produce an
output file that Suprlink cannot read.
Input File - Maximum Fields - 255
Suprlink
restricts the number of fields per file to be 255. If you must have more
fields, use Suprtool's Define and Extract commands to extract several fields as
one contiguous series of bytes.
Link File - Maximum Record Size - 2048 Words
As
with the input file, you should use Suprtool's Extract command to minimize the
link record size.
Link File - Maximum Block Size - 2048 Words
See
the description of the maximum input block size.
Link File - Maximum Fields - 255
See
the description of the maximum number of input fields.
Link File - Maximum Number - Seven
Suprlink
will link one input file with up to seven Link files.
Output File - Maximum Record Size - 4096 Words
When linking many files together, it is easy to produce large output
records. Once again, using the Extract command to minimize the size of the
input and link records will avoid large output records.
Output File - Maximum Fields - 1023
Internal
Suprlink tables that keep track of the output fields are restricted to 1023
entries.
Welcome
to version 5.4 of Speed Demon. For improved performance, call Speed Demon in
your programs instead of DBGET mode-2 to read serially through a large dataset.
There
are a few restrictions to using Speed Demon:
1.
The database must not be open
in mode-3 or mode-7.
2.
You must have read access to all of the fields in the dataset.
3.
The field list cannot be the "same" list (i.e., no
*-list).
4.
The database must be local
(i.e., not on a remote machine).
5.
Entries cannot be updated or
deleted.
6.
On MPE V (or compatibility mode
on MPE/iX), the calling program must not use DB-14 and DB-32 of the data stack.
On MPE V, you install Speed Demon in the System SL (see Installing Speed Demon for
instructions). Speed Demon/V should be about five times faster than DBGET
mode-2.
On MPE/iX, you run your native mode programs with an XL file:
DemonXL.Pub.Robelle. Speed Demon/iX can be slightly slower than DBGET mode-2 or
it can run as much as eight times faster. We are not certain why there is such
a range of performance values. We would be happy to see performance results
from users.
Speed Demon is included as part of
Suprtool. Any licensed Suprtool users can use Speed Demon in their own
application software. Speed Demon cannot be included in software being
distributed to any sites that are not licensed to use Suprtool. Application
software developers who would be interested in integrating Speed Demon into
their products should contact Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
Suprtool
is a program while Speed Demon is a set of callable routines. Application
programs can invoke Suprtool to
extract, select, and sort records from an IMAGE dataset, producing a disc file
as output. Application programs can call Speed
Demon to serially return the individual records of the same IMAGE dataset, one
record at a time.
While Speed Demon lacks Suprtool's
ability to extract fields or select and sort records, it has the advantage that
it delivers the records directly into your program. Speed Demon/V is about 50%
slower than Suprtool, but there is no need to read an output file, as with Suprtool.
Speed Demon/iX runs at the same speed as Suprtool. With Speed Demon, your
application program is responsible for selecting records and sorting them
(e.g., using the SORT verb in COBOL).
Application programs should invoke
Suprtool when they expect to select a small
percentage of the records (i.e., when the overhead of reading the OUTPUT
file will be minimized). Application programs should call Speed Demon when they
expect to select a large percentage of
the records.
Speed Demon will be more difficult to use from 4GLs than from a
regular programming language (e.g., COBOL or Pascal). Remember: each call to
Speed Demon returns a single record and you must build a loop to read and test
them. Some 4GLs do a LOADPROC for every call to the Speed Demon intrinsics
(e.g., Reactor from Speedware). Because LOADPROC is so slow, this eliminates
any benefit from Speed Demon. We would like to hear from any users who have
success using Speed Demon from a 4GL.
Speed Demon/V uses split-stack mode. This
should not concern any normal user, but there are two consequences for
privileged mode users:
1.
You cannot call Speed Demon/V
from split-stack mode.
2.
Do not enable a privileged mode
Control-Y trap handler while calling Speed Demon/V.
Speed
Demon can read data directly from disc into memory using Multi-Rec NOBUF reads.
However, Speed Demon is often slowed down on MPE/iX while waiting for the file
system to satisfy its read requests. Using prefetch on MPE/iX, Speed Demon is
able to increase its throughput by instructing MPE/iX's memory manager to read
the data from disc to memory ahead of time. This way, when Speed Demon needs
the data it is already in memory and Speed Demon doesn't have to wait.
The SPDEPREFETCH JCW tells the memory
manager how far ahead of Speed Demon it should fetch data. Setting this number
too low won't give the memory manager sufficient time to get the data into
memory before Speed Demon needs it. Setting the number too high may mean that
on a busy system the data will be overwritten by something else before Speed
Demon gets a chance to use it.
When reading an input dataset, Speed
Demon/iX prefetches twice the buffer length of data from disc to memory. This
default value of 2 works well, even on small machines. If Speed Demon is
running stand-alone on a fast CPU with a lot of memory, you may wish to
increase the prefetch amount. The maximum value for SPDEPREFETCH is 5 (i.e.,
five times the buffer length). If you don't want Speed Demon to prefetch, you
can specify SPDEPREFETCH 0. This may be required when Speed Demon is operating
with third-party software tools that intercept all file system calls (e.g.,
Netbase from Quest Software).
The SPDEPREFETCH JCW is checked by Speed
Demon/V, but its value has no effect.
There
are two versions of Speed Demon. The Speed Demon/V version is for MPE/V systems
and for compatibility-mode programs on MPE/iX. Speed Demon/V runs in
compatibility mode and must be installed in the system SL. The Speed Demon/iX
version is for native-mode programs on MPE/iX. Speed Demon/iX runs in native
mode and is accessed via an XL file.
Depending on what operating system you
are on (MPE/V or MPE/iX) and what kind of programs will be calling Speed Demon
(compatibility mode, native mode or both), you may end up installing either,
both, or neither version. Read all the instructions carefully.
Before using either version of Speed
Demon, you must build or upgrade the Robelle account and restore all files as
described in the Installing Suprtool chapter
of the Suprtool User Manual.
This procedure is required for MPE/V
systems, and for compatibility mode programs on MPE/iX.
The
Speed Demon/V routines are distributed in the file DemonUSL.Pub.Robelle. The
job stream Demon.SuprJob.Robelle installs the Speed Demon/V intrinsics in the
System SL. This is the only method for installing Speed Demon/V. You also use
this job stream to update Speed Demon/V when you receive a new version, or to
re-install the interface after a MIT update from HP. You will need a small tape
for a new cold load tape to contain the Speed Demon/V segments.
Warning:
You must have created the Robelle account and restored all files as described
in the installation chapter of the Suprtool User Manual. To install Speed
Demon/V into the System SL, follow these steps:
1.
Ensure that no one will use
Speed Demon/V until the installation is complete. No one can be running a
program which uses Speed Demon/V. Stop all jobs and send an operator warning.
:showjob
:warn @;please stop
for 20 minutes
:abortjob #snnn
2.
Stream the installation job. If
MPE prompts for passwords, supply them.
:stream
demon.suprjob.robelle
3.
Speed Demon/V uses the SEGMENTER to add the segments into
SL.Pub.Sys. It then requests a tape ("COLDLOAD") to create a new cold
load tape containing MPE plus the Speed Demon/V intrinsics. Mount a tape with a
write ring and :REPLY. Save this tape and use it for any future cold loads.
4.
If you're installing to an MPE/iX machine, the job does not create a
cold load tape. You must create a system load tape manually.
5.
If everything goes well, Speed
Demon/V prints a final message on the console.
6.
Please save the job listing for
future reference.
Speed Demon/V is now installed and you
should be able to use it in your application programs.
This procedure is for native mode programs on MPE/iX, and is
optional.
You normally access Speed Demon/iX by
specifying XL="DemonXL.Pub.Robelle" when running your program.
Therefore, there may be no need to perform any installation steps for Speed
Demon/iX.
The advantage of leaving Speed Demon/iX
in the Robelle account and always pointing to the XL when you run your
programs, is that when you receive an upgrade of the Robelle account files,
Speed Demon/iX is automatically upgraded with no effort on your part. The
disadvantage is that you must remember to always put the XL= statement on all
Run commands for your programs that use Speed Demon/iX. If you don't want to
change your Run commands, you can copy Speed Demon/iX into your own XL that is
already being searched.
Installing Speed Demon/iX in your own XL
requires that both the account and the group where the XL resides have
privileged mode capability. Calling programs do not have to have privileged
mode capability. The XL can reside anywhere on your system, it does not have to
be in the same account or the same group as your XL file. Here are the commands
to install Speed Demon/iX in your own XL:
:hello user.acct
:linkedit
>xl xl {we assume the XL already exists}
>copyxl
from=demonxl.pub.robelle; replace
>exit
The Replace option is not in all versions
of Linkedit. If your version does not allow Replace, and you already have Speed
Demon in your XL file, you will need to manually purge the existing modules
before copying the new one.
Demonxl can successfully be installed into the System XL file, but
this is not recommended by HP. Demonxl can be combined into an XL file with
other Robelle XL files, except Qcompxl (a part of Qedit).
Alternatively you can specify the XL for
a program to use with the Altprog and Link commands in Linkedit. To add an XL
to a program that you are building with the Link command, you can specify the
following from within Linkedit:
:linkedit
HP Link Editor/iX
(HP30315A.06.14) Copyright Hewlett-Packard Co
LinkEd> link
from=main; to=myprog; xl=demonxl.pub.robelle
To alter an existing program to use the
Demonxl, you can use the Altprog command from within Linkedit:
LinkEd>altprog
myprog; xl=demonxl.pub.robelle
Please see the Linkedit manual for
details about the Link and Altprog commands in Linkedit.
This
procedure is for MPE/V systems and for compatibility mode programs on MPE/iX.
It is not the recommended or supported procedure. See the Speed Demon/V
instructions in the previous section.
We only support Speed Demon/V when it is
installed in the System SL. These are the reasons for this policy:
1.
Speed Demon/V requires
privileged mode. When Speed Demon/V is installed in the System SL, it can
obtain privileged mode for itself while guaranteeing that privileged mode is
not available to the calling program. If Speed Demon/V is installed in a Pub or
Group SL, the calling program is installed in a group and account with
privileged mode.
2.
Some third-party software
intercepts all IMAGE and file system calls (e.g., DBOPEN and FOPEN). Writing
intercept calls is straightforward from a Pub or Group SL, but very difficult
inside the System SL. Emulating all IMAGE and file system calls correctly is
hard, and can introduce problems for Speed Demon/V. By installing Speed Demon/V
in the System SL, we ensure that Speed Demon/V is calling the real IMAGE and
file system intrinsics.
Netbase is a product from Quest software that intercepts IMAGE and
File System calls. Netbase allows any database or file to be automatically
directed to a remote machine. Netbase does not support System SL installation.
For this reason, the only way to make Speed Demon/V and Netbase work together
is to install Speed Demon/V in a Pub SL along with the Netbase software.
Installing Speed Demon/V in a Pub SL requires that both the account
and the Pub group have privileged mode capability. The calling program must be
installed in the same account (it does not have to be in the Pub group) and it
must be run with Lib=P. Here are the commands to modify an existing account
called Dev.
:hello manager.sys
:altacct
dev;cap=...,pm
:hello mgr.dev,pub
:altgroup
pub;cap=...,pm
:segmenter
-buildusl
$newpass,400,8
-auxusl
demonusl.pub.robelle
-copy segment,suprrobelle0
-copy
segment,suprrobelle1
-buildsl sl,400,8
-addsl suprrobelle0
-addsl suprrobelle1
-exit
The previous example shows the capability
list as "cap=...,pm". You must fill in the "..." by
obtaining the existing capabilities for the Dev account and the Pub group. On
MPE/iX, you can use the :listacct and :listgroup commands. On other versions of
MPE, you will need to :run Listdir5.Pub.Sys.
The
steps for installing Speed Demon/V in a group SL are the same as for the Pub
SL, except that you use the actual group name instead of the Pub group. Your
user programs must be installed in the same group as the SL and they must be
run with Lib=G.
Speed
Demon is a set of routines, or intrinsics, that you call from your program. The
Speed Demon/V intrinsics are installed in the system SL. The Speed Demon/iX
intrinsics are installed in an XL. You access Speed Demon by calling these
intrinsics, just as you would the IMAGE intrinsics. There are three primary
intrinsics:
SPDEDBINIT.
Initializes the Speed Demon environment and decides
what dataset to read.
SPDEDBSCAN.
Replaces calls to DBGET mode-2 and returns the same
condition word values (e.g., 0 for okay, 11 for end-of-file).
SPDEDBSHUT.
Cleans up the Speed Demon environment. Before you
can call SPDEDBINIT for another dataset, you must call SPDEDBSHUT.
Suppose
that your program scans the d-sales dataset to produce a report of all d-sales
records with a sales-total greater than $10,000.00. Currently, your COBOL
program looks like this:
05-report-control section.
move false-value to end-of-d-sales-flag.
perform 10-read-and-report
thru 10-read-and-report-exit
until end-of-d-sales.
05-report-control-exit. exit.
10-read-and-report section.
perform 10-10-get-d-sales.
if not end-of-d-sales then
if dsa-sales-total > 10000 then
perform 20-report-d-sales
thru 20-report-d-sales-exit.
go to 10-read-and-report-exit.
10-10-get-d-sales.
call "DBGET" using db-base
db-set-d-sales
db-mode2
db-status-area
db-all-list
db-buffer-d-sales
db-dummy-arg.
if db-end-of-file then
move true-value to end-of-d-sales-flag
else
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 99-image-fatal-error.
10-read-and-report-exit. exit.
You would modify the original code to use
Speed Demon to serially read through the d-sales dataset. The original
report-control section had no initializing paragraph because we assumed that
the d-sales dataset was rewound to the beginning. The modified code must call
SPDEDBINIT before reading the dataset. When we have finished reading the
dataset, we finish off with a call to SPDEDBSHUT.
05-report-control section.
perform 05-05-init-d-sales.
move false-value to end-of-d-sales-flag.
perform 10-read-and-report
thru 10-read-and-report-exit
until end-of-d-sales.
perform 05-20-close-d-sales.
go to 05-report-control-exit.
05-05-init-d-sales.
call "SPDEDBINIT" using db-base
db-set-d-sales
db-mode1
db-status-area
spde-db-control
db-dummy-arg.
if
not db-stat-ok then
perform 98-spde-error.
05-20-close-d-sales.
call "SPDEDBSHUT" using db-base
db-set-d-sales
db-mode1
db-status-area
db-dummy-arg.
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 98-spde-fatal-error.
05-report-control-exit. exit.
The read-and-report section has one
change. Calls to DBGET are replaced with calls to SPDEDBSCAN. If SPDEDBSCAN
fails, we perform a different error section. Note that the parameter list for
SPDEDBSCAN is not the same as for DBGET. Our original program used the @-list,
so we don't need to make any changes to the buffer-d-sales declaration.
10-read-and-report section.
perform 10-10-read-d-sales
if not end-of-d-sales then
if dsa-sales-total > 10000 then
perform 20-report-d-sales
thru 20-report-d-sales-exit.
go to 10-read-and-report-exit.
10-10-read-d-sales.
call "SPDEDBSCAN" using db-base
db-status-area
db-buffer-d-sales
db-dummy-arg.
if db-end-of-file then
move true-value to end-of-d-sales-flag
else
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 98-spde-error.
10-read-and-report-exit. exit.
If the original program used partial
field lists, we would call SPDEDBINIT with mode-2 and pass the field list as
the last parameter. For example,
move
"CUST-ACCOUNT,PRODUCT-NO,PRODUCT-PRICE,PURCH-DATE;"
to db-list-d-sales.
call "SPDEDBINIT" using db-base
db-set-d-sales
db-mode2
db-status-area
spde-db-control
db-list-d-sales.
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 98-spde-error.
To replace the DBGET mode-2 calls with calls to SPDEDBSCAN we did
the following:
1.
Called SPDEDBINIT to initialize
the d-sales dataset.
2.
Replaced calls to DBGET with
calls to SPDEDBSCAN and modified the parameters passed to SPDEDBSCAN.
3.
Performed a different error
section for Speed Demon errors.
4.
Called SPDEDBSHUT to close the
dataset.
SPDEDBINIT
requires a special control record. For COBOL, we suggest that this control
record be placed in the COPYLIB and copied into programs that use Speed Demon.
A common error in using Speed Demon is typing the control record incorrectly.
Use the file Cobol2.Qlibsrc.Robelle instead. You can copy the control record
directly into your COBOL program with the following Qedit commands (use /JOIN
with EDIT/3000):
/add
50.1=cobol2.qlibsrc.robelle 1/20
The definition of the control record,
with the proper initializing values is:
01 spde-db-control.
05
spde-version pic s9(4) comp
value 0.
05
spde-buffer-size pic s9(9) comp value zeros.
05
spde-future pic x(20) value
spaces.
Programs that call IMAGE intrinsics
usually have an error section for fatal IMAGE errors. These sections typically
call DBEXPLAIN and abort the program. When a fatal Speed Demon error occurs,
SPDEEXPLAIN should be called instead of DBEXPLAIN.
98-spde-fatal-error section.
call "SPDEEXPLAIN" using
db-status-area.
call "QUIT" using
\db-status-area\.
98-spde-fatal-error-exit. exit.
To access Speed Demon/iX from a native mode program, you must modify
the :Run command for your program to include an XL file. The following example
shows how you would compile, link, and run a native mode COBOL program that
calls Speed Demon/iX:
:cob74xl
testsrc.demon
:link
:run $oldpass;xl='demonxl.pub.robelle'
In this chapter we describe the Speed Demon intrinsics in alphabetic
order. The parameters to each intrinsic are word arrays (just like IMAGE). You
must include every parameter or pass a dummy variable as a place holder. The
condition code is not returned by any Speed Demon intrinsic.
The status array is the same communications area that you use with
the IMAGE intrinsics. If an error occurs, you should call the SPDEEXPLAIN
intrinsic. The Speed Demon intrinsic does not return exactly the same status
array as DBGET.
Prints a three-line message on $stdlist which describes the results
of a Speed Demon intrinsic call based on information in the status array.
SPDEEXPLAIN
status
Status
The twenty-byte array used to call any
Speed Demon intrinsic which SPDEEXPLAIN will describe. The database and dataset
parameters must not change between the call to the Speed Demon intrinsic and
the call to SPDEEXPLAIN.
The Speed Demon intrinsics can return
many of the standard IMAGE error numbers, but Speed Demon has many of its own.
SPDEEXPLAIN will print the correct error message in either case. Because the
dataset parameter is not passed to the Speed Demon intrinsic, SPDEEXPLAIN may
not be able to print the name of the dataset in the second line of the message.
Initialize Speed Demon, specify what dataset to read, and what field
list to use.
SPDEDBINIT
Database, Dataset, Mode, Status, Control,
List
Database
Database name as returned from DBOPEN
(first two characters must be non-blank).
Dataset
Dataset name or dataset number to read.
You must have full-read access to this dataset.
Mode
SPDEDBINIT can be called in any of four
modes:
|
Mode
|
Function
|
|
0
|
Return
the version number of SPDEDBINIT. All the other parameters are ignored and
Speed Demon is not initialized.
|
|
1
|
Initialize Speed Demon to sequentially
access the dataset of the specified database.
|
|
2
|
Same as mode-1, but allows partial field
lists.
|
|
3
|
Same
as mode-2, but Speed Demon will read to the physical end of the dataset. Use
this mode if your program expects changes to the dataset at the same time
Speed Demon is reading it.
|
Status
If SPDEDBINIT succeeds with mode-0, the
following values are returned in the status array.
|
Word
|
Usage
|
|
1
|
Zero.
|
|
2
|
Major version number.
|
|
3
|
Minor version number.
|
|
4
|
Pre-release version number.
|
|
5-10
|
Zeros.
|
If SPDEDBINIT succeeds with mode-1,
mode-2, or mode-3, the following values are returned in the status array.
|
Word
|
Usage
|
|
1
|
Zero.
|
|
2
|
Entry length of the dataset.
|
|
3-4
|
Buffer size used to read the dataset.
|
|
4-5
|
Number of records that Speed Demon will
read. For mode-3, this is always the capacity of the dataset. For mode-1 and
mode-2, this is the number of entries for master datasets and the highwater
mark for detail datasets.
|
|
7-10
|
Zeros.
|
Control
Special control record that must be
declared and initialized as follows:
01 s7pde-db-control.
05
spde-version pic s9(4) comp
value 0.
05
spde-buffer-size pic s9(9) comp value zeros.
05
spde-future pic x(20) value
spaces.
Normally you won't be changing this
control buffer. You might want to change the spde-buffer-size. This sets the
size of the file system reads and the size of the Speed Demon extra data
segment. The default size is 14,336 words, but you may wish to reduce it.
List
For mode-0 or mode-1 this is a dummy
parameter. For mode-2 or mode-3, this is the field list that corresponds to the
buffer that will be returned by SPDEDBSCAN.
Highwater Mark
When you specify a detail dataset, Suprtool and Speed Demon read
records until the highwater mark. If there is a big difference between the
number of entries in the dataset and the highwater mark, Suprtool and Speed
Demon could take much longer to read the dataset (this is true for all
programs, not just Suprtool and Speed Demon). Because mode-1 and mode-2 calls
to SPDEDBINIT return the highwater mark for detail datasets in the status area
(this is the record limit), you can write your own programs to automate
checking for excessive highwater marks.
Notes
You must call DBOPEN before calling
SPDEDBINIT. This is just like IMAGE -- you cannot call DBGET unless you have
first called DBOPEN.
When you call SPDEDBINIT, Speed Demon
determines how many records to read. For master datasets, mode-1 and mode-2 of
SPDEDBINIT uses DBINFO to obtain the number of entries in the dataset. For
detail datasets, mode-1 and mode-2 of SPDEDBINIT uses the highwater mark for
the dataset. SPDEDBSCAN stops reading the dataset when it has read that number
of entries. If the dataset is changing dynamically, new records might be
missed. Use mode-3 to force Speed Demon to read to the physical end of the
dataset. This mode makes Speed Demon more reliable, but slower when the dataset
is mostly empty.
Read the next entry in the dataset.
SPDEDBSCAN
Database, Status, Buffer, Dummy
Database
Database name as passed to DBOPEN.
Status
If SPDEDBSCAN succeeds, the following
values are returned in the status array. The forward and backward pointers are
not returned.
|
Word
|
Usage
|
|
1
|
Zero.
|
|
2
|
Entry length of the record returned in
buffer.
|
|
3-4
|
Record number of the record read.
|
|
5-10
|
Zeros.
|
Buffer
Array where the values of the record read
are placed. This buffer must correspond to the field list specified in SPDEDBINIT.
Dummy
This is a dummy parameter and it may
contain anything.
Close the Speed Demon environment. This must be done if another
dataset will be read, or to restart at the beginning of the same set. SPDEDBSHUT
will optionally print statistics about the read operation.
SPDEDBSHUT
Database, Dataset, Mode, Status, Dummy
Database
Database name as passed to DBOPEN.
Dataset
Dataset name or dataset number to shut.
This must be the same dataset name or dataset number passed to SPDEDBINIT.
Mode
SPDEDBSHUT can be called in any of three
modes:
|
Mode
|
Function
|
|
0
|
Return
the version number of SPDEDBSHUT. All the other parameters are ignored and
Speed Demon is not closed.
|
|
1
|
Close the Speed Demon environment.
|
|
2
|
Close
the Speed Demon environment and print a summary of the read operation on
$stdlist.
|
Status
If SPDEDBSHUT succeeds with mode-0, the
following values are returned in the status array.
|
Word
|
Usage
|
|
1
|
Zero.
|
|
2
|
Major version number.
|
|
3
|
Minor version number.
|
|
4
|
Pre-release version number.
|
|
5-10
|
Zeros.
|
If SPDEDBSHUT succeeds with mode-1 or
mode-2, zeros are returned in the status array.
Dummy
This is a dummy parameter. It may contain
anything.
Speed Demon includes a program for demonstration and verification.
This program is called Demon.Pub.Robelle. The Demon program requests a field
list to process, and accepts all valid IMAGE field lists (except for *-list
"same list"). You can use this feature to compare the speed of DBGET
to Speed Demon. There are several ways of accessing this program.
If you run the Demon program with no parm-value and no entry-point,
you are prompted for a database and a password. To terminate the program, hit
Return at the database prompt. Demon attempts to open the database with mode-5.
If this succeeds, you are prompted for a dataset name. After prompting for the
dataset name, Demon prompts for a field list. Demon uses SPDEDBINIT to verify
that the dataset name and field list are valid and to initialize Speed Demon.
Speed Demon accepts all valid IMAGE field lists, including partial lists,
except for the same list "*". Demon then prints the entry length and
buffer values returned from SPDEDBINIT.
Next you will be prompted for an output
file name. You may specify any valid MPE file name, or Return for no output.
The Demon program uses buffered I/O to write to the output file. Do not compare
the cpu or wall time of the Demon program with Suprtool, because Suprtool will
always be faster. After the Demon program has read the dataset, the SPDEDBSHUT
statistics are printed on $stdlist.
If you run the Demon program with Parm=1, you will be prompted for a
database, password, dataset, field list, and output file. The difference from
Parm=0 is that the Demon program uses DBGET mode-2 to read the dataset instead
of using Speed Demon. Use Parm=1 to compare the speed of DBGET versus that of
Speed Demon.
Running the Demon program with Parm=3 is the same as Parm=0, but
SPDEDBINIT is called with mode-3. This forces Speed Demon to read to the
physical end of the dataset. Use this feature to compare the speed of
SPDEDBINIT mode-2 versus mode-3.
The
Demon program includes a special entry point for verifying the Speed Demon
version numbers. There are two Speed Demon version numbers: one for SPDEDBINIT
and one for SPDEDBSHUT. The Demon program prints two sets of these version
numbers: one set for the Demon program routines and one set for the System SL.
The Demon program will notify you if Speed Demon has not been installed in the
System SL. For example:
:run
demon.pub.robelle,version
Speed Demon/Copyright Robelle Solutions
Technology Inc.
(Version 5.4)
Demon program Internal Version Numbers:
SPDEDBINIT (Version 5.4)
SPDEDBSHUT (Version 5.4)
Speed Demon System SL Version Numbers:
SPDEDBINIT (Version 5.4)
SPDEDBSHUT (Version 5.4)
Demon/iX does not print the System SL
version numbers. If you are on MPE/iX and have installed Speed Demon/V into the
System SL, you can get the version numbers by running the compatibility mode
version of Demon:
:run
demonCM.pub.robelle,version
This chapter contains working examples of
COBOL and Pascal source code that call Speed Demon. You can copy the examples
from the manual, but typing them from scratch would be tedious and error-prone.
The best way to copy the examples is to take them from the on-line Speed Demon
documentation file. The file is stored in Robelle Qedit format. If you have
Qedit, just Text a copy of Demon.Doc.Robelle and extract the portions that you
are interested in.
If you don't have Qedit, use the Qcopy
program to copy the documentation file to a new file in non-Qedit format, then
use your favorite text editor to edit this file.
:run
qcopy.qlib.robelle
>from=demon.doc.robelle;to=mydemon.source;new
>exit
The
following is an example COBOL program that shows how to call Speed Demon. This
program prompts for a database, database password, dataset, and field list to
process. Because upshifting is so messy in COBOL, you must enter the dataset
name and field list in uppercase. If you want to use the @-field-list, just
specify @ when asked by the sample program.
$control nolist
$control
source,errors=10
identification division.
program-id.
testread.
date-written. May 11, 1990.
security.
Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
remarks.
***********************************************************
*
*
* testread - test spde
intrinsics. *
* *
* version:
1.0 *
* purpose:
*
*
*
* General-purpose program to test Speed Demon. *
*
*
* Demonstrates that you must call DBOPEN before
you call *
* the Speed Demon procedures. *
*
*
***********************************************************
environment division.
configuration section.
source-computer. hp-3000 series 37.
object-computer. hp-3000 series 37.
special-names.
top is new-page.
input-output section.
file-control.
select line-printer assign to
"LINEPRT".
data division.
file section.
fd
line-printer
data record is line-record.
01
line-record pic x(132).
$page
"CONSTANTS"
working-storage section.
01
true-value pic x value
"T".
01
false-value pic x value
"F".
$page
"VARIABLES"
01
line-count pic s9(4)
comp.
01
page-no pic s9(4)
comp.
01
input-line pic
x(80).
88
answer-spaces value
spaces.
01
end-of-db-set-flag pic x.
88
end-of-db-set value
"T".
01
in-record-count pic
s9(9) comp.
01
display-number pic
-zzz,zz9.
$page "image
area"
01
image-area.
05
db-all-list pic
x(2) value "@ ".
05
db-same-list pic
x(2) value "* ".
05
db-null-list pic
s9(4) comp value 0.
05
db-dummy-arg pic
s9(4).
05
db-password pic
x(8).
05
db-mode0 pic s9(4) comp value 0.
05
db-mode1 pic
s9(4) comp value 1.
05
db-mode2 pic
s9(4) comp value 2.
05
db-get-serial redefines db-mode2
pic s9(4) comp.
05
db-mode3 pic s9(4) comp value 3.
05
db-rewind-set redefines db-mode3
pic s9(4) comp.
05
db-get-backwards redefines db-mode3 pic s9(4) comp.
05
db-mode4 pic
s9(4) comp value 4.
05
db-get-direct redefines db-mode4
pic s9(4) comp.
05
db-mode5 pic
s9(4) comp value 5.
05
db-get-chained redefines db-mode5 pic s9(4) comp.
05
db-mode6 pic
s9(4) comp value 6.
05
db-get-previous redefines db-mode6 pic s9(4) comp.
05
db-mode7 pic
s9(4) comp value 7.
05
db-get-keyed redefines db-mode7
pic s9(4) comp.
05
db-status-area.
10
db-cond-word pic s9(4)
comp.
88
db-stat-ok value
zeros.
88
db-end-of-chain value 15.
88
db-begin-of-chain value 14.
88
db-no-entry value 17.
88
db-end-file value 11.
88
db-begin-file value 10.
10
db-stat2 pic s9(4)
comp.
10
db-stat3-4 pic s9(9)
comp.
10
db-chain-length pic s9(9)
comp.
88
db-empty-chain value zeros.
10
db-stat7-8 pic s9(9)
comp.
10
db-stat9-10 pic s9(9)
comp.
$page "db-
variables"
01
db-base.
05
filler pic
x(2) value spaces.
05
db-name pic x(26).
01
db-set pic
x(16).
01
db-list pic x(80).
01
db-set-200 pic
s9(4) comp value 200.
01
spde-control.
05
spde-version pic s9(4)
comp value 0.
05
spde-buffer-size pic s9(9)
comp value zeros.
05
filler pic x(20)
value spaces.
01
db-buffer pic
x(4096).
$page "[00]
MAINLINE"
procedure division.
00-main section.
perform 05-get-parameters
thru 05-get-parameters-exit.
if not answer-spaces then
perform 10-init-testread
thru 10-init-testread-exit
move false-value to end-of-db-set-flag
move zeros to in-record-count
perform 20-read-set
thru 20-read-set-exit
until end-of-db-set
move in-record-count to display-number
display "In=",
display-number.
perform 90-close-files
thru 90-close-files-exit.
00-main-exit.
goback.
$page "[05]
get-parameters"
*
* Prompt for the
database, password, dataset and field list.
*
05-get-parameters section.
perform 05-10-get-database.
if not answer-spaces then
perform 05-20-get-password
if not answer-spaces then
perform 05-30-get-dataset
if not answer-spaces then
perform 05-40-get-field-list.
go to 05-get-parameters-exit.
05-10-get-database.
move spaces to input-line.
display "Enter Database Name".
accept input-line.
move input-line to db-name.
05-20-get-password.
move spaces to input-line.
display "Enter Database
Password".
accept input-line.
move input-line to db-password.
05-30-get-dataset.
move spaces to input-line.
display "Enter Dataset Name (must be
uppercase)".
accept input-line.
move input-line to db-set.
05-40-get-field-list.
move spaces to input-line.
display "Enter @ or Field-List (must
be uppercase)".
accept input-line.
move input-line to db-list.
05-get-parameters-exit. exit.
$page "[10]
init-testread"
*
* Open the database and initialize Speed Demon.
*
10-init-testread section.
perform 10-10-open-base.
perform 10-20-init-spde.
perform 10-30-display-suprinit.
go to 10-init-testread-exit.
10-10-open-base.
call "DBOPEN" using db-base
db-password
db-mode5
db-status-area.
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 99-fatal-error.
10-20-init-spde.
call "SPDEDBINIT" using db-base
db-set
db-mode2
db-status-area
spde-control
db-list.
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 98-supr-error.
10-30-display-suprinit.
move db-stat2 to display-number.
display "Entry Length: ",
display-number.
move db-stat3-4 to display-number.
display "Buffer Size: ", display-number.
10-init-testread-exit. exit.
$page "[20]
read-set"
*
* Read all the records in the dataset.
*
20-read-set section.
perform 20-10-get-next.
if not end-of-db-set then
add 1 to in-record-count
perform 20-20-display-next.
go to 20-read-set-exit.
20-10-get-next.
call "SPDEDBSCAN" using db-base
db-status-area
db-buffer
db-dummy-arg.
if db-end-file then
move true-value to end-of-db-set-flag
else
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 98-supr-error.
20-20-display-next.
* move db-stat3-4 to display-number.
* display "Record# ",
display-number.
20-read-set-exit. exit.
$page "[90]
close-files"
*
* Cleanup by closing the dataset and the
database.
*
90-close-files section.
perform 90-10-close-dataset.
perform 90-20-close-base.
go to 90-close-files-exit.
90-10-close-dataset.
call "SPDEDBSHUT" using db-base
db-set
db-mode2
db-status-area
db-dummy-arg.
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 98-supr-error.
90-20-close-base.
call "DBCLOSE" using db-base
db-dummy-arg
db-mode1
db-status-area.
if not db-stat-ok then
perform 99-fatal-error.
90-close-files-exit. exit.
$page "[98]
supr-error"
98-supr-error section.
call "SPDEEXPLAIN" using
db-status-area.
stop run.
98-supr-error-exit. goback.
$page "[99]
fatal-error"
99-fatal-error section.
call "DBEXPLAIN" using
db-status-area.
stop run.
99-fatal-error-exit. goback.
Calling
Speed Demon from Pascal is more difficult than from other languages due to
Pascal's tighter type-checking on procedure parameters. The following is a
complete example program written in Pascal/V that reads the process dataset
of the menu.qlib database. This example program compiles and runs in native mode
under MPE/iX, but you must make the two changes indicated. Because the buffer
length parameter is not 32-bit aligned, Pascal/iX produces a warning when
compiling the spde_db_control type. Note that the $check_actual_parm$ setting
is left at 2 for the entire program. This is required to prevent parameter type
mismatches between Speed Demon and Pascal.
$list off$
{ $HP3000_16$ <-- Require this compiler option for
MPE/iX}
program
driver(input,output);
type
longint
= integer;
shortint = -32768 .. +32767;{Remove this line on MPE/iX}
type_db_base =
record
db_id
: packed array[1..2] of char;
db_name : packed array[1..14] of char;
end;
type_db_set =
record
name : packed array[1..16] of char;
end;
type_db_status_area = array[1..10] of
shortint;
type_db_mode = array[1..1] of shortint;
type_db_buffer = array[1..46] of shortint;
type_spde_db_control =
record
spde_version : shortint;
spde_buffer_size : integer;
spde_future : packed array[1..20] of char;
end;
type_db_dummy_arg = array[1..2] of shortint;
var
spde_db_control : type_spde_db_control;
db_status_area : type_db_status_area;
db_dummy_arg : type_db_dummy_arg;
db_mode1 : type_db_mode;
db_mode2 : type_db_mode;
db_base : type_db_base;
procedure dbopen;
intrinsic;
procedure dbexplain;
intrinsic;
function proctime :
longint; intrinsic;
function timer :
longint; intrinsic;
$check_formal_parm 2$
$check_actual_parm 2$
procedure
spdedbinit(var db_base : type_db_base;
var db_set : type_db_set;
var db_mode :
type_db_mode;
var db_stat :
type_db_status_area;
var control :
type_spde_db_control;
var dummy : type_db_dummy_arg
); external spl;
procedure
spdedbscan(var db_base : type_db_base;
var db_status :
type_db_status_area;
var db_buffer :
type_db_buffer;
var dummy : type_db_dummy_arg
); external spl;
procedure
spdedbshut(var db_base : type_db_base;
var db_set : type_db_set;
var db_mode :
type_db_mode;
var db_stat :
type_db_status_area;
var dummy : type_db_dummy_arg
); external spl;
procedure
spdeexplain(var status : type_db_status_area
); external spl;
$check_formal_parm 3$
function open_base :
boolean;
var
db_password : packed array[1..8] of char;
mode1
: shortint;
begin
open_base := false;
db_base.db_id := '
';
db_base.db_name := 'menu.qlib; ';
db_password := ';;
';
mode1 := 1;
dbopen(db_base
,db_password
,mode1
,db_status_area
);
if db_status_area[1] <> 0 then
dbexplain(db_status_area)
else
open_base := true;
end (*open_base*);
function init_spde :
boolean;
var
db_set : type_db_set;
begin
init_spde := false;
with spde_db_control do
begin
spde_version := 0;
spde_buffer_size:= 0;
spde_future := '
';
end;
db_set.name := 'PROCESS; ';
spdedbinit(db_base
,db_set
,db_mode1
,db_status_area
,spde_db_control
,db_dummy_arg
);
if db_status_area[1] <> 0 then
spdeexplain(db_status_area)
else
init_spde := true;
end (*init_spde*);
function read_set :
boolean;
var
db_buffer : type_db_buffer;
begin
read_set := false;
spdedbscan(db_base
,db_status_area
,db_buffer
,db_dummy_arg
);
if db_status_area[1] = 0 then
read_set := true
else
if db_status_area[1] <> 11 then
spdeexplain(db_status_area);
end (*read_set*);
procedure test_spde;
var
start_cpu : longint;
start_wall: longint;
in_count
: longint;
begin
start_cpu := proctime;
start_wall:= timer;
in_count
:= 0;
while read_set do
in_count := in_count + 1;
start_cpu := proctime - start_cpu;
start_wall:= timer - start_wall;
writeln('In=',in_count:1);
write('Cpu-time=',start_cpu:1,' ');
write('Wall-time=',start_wall:1);
writeln;
end (*test_spde*);
procedure
complete_driver;
var
db_set : type_db_set;
begin
db_set.name := 'PROCESS; ';
spdedbshut(db_base
,db_set
,db_mode2
,db_status_area
,db_dummy_arg
);
if db_status_area[1] <> 0 then
spdeexplain(db_status_area);
end
(*complete_driver*);
begin (*driver*)
db_mode1[1] := 1;
db_mode2[1] := 2;
if open_base then
if init_spde then
begin
test_spde;
complete_driver;
end;
end.
Speed
Demon returns errors similar to IMAGE. Each error is associated with an error
number. The following are the error numbers, descriptions, and causes that can
be returned by any Speed Demon intrinsic.
-538: SPDEPREFETCH
JCW VALUE n IS LESS THAN ZERO OR GREATER THAN 5
The SPDEPREFETCH JCW determines if Speed
Demon should prefetch data into memory and if so, how far ahead it should read.
A value of zero tells Speed Demon not to prefetch data. Values greater than
five are not allowed. Check the value of the SPDEPREFETCH JCW and set it to an
appropriate number.
-537: FINDJCW
FAILED WITH ERROR# n
A call to the FINDJCW intrinsic failed.
The value of n is the error number
returned from FINDJCW. This error should never occur. If it does, please report
it to Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
-536: ROBELLE
PREFETCH FAILURE ERROR# n
The internal Robelle prefetch module has
returned an error. The value of n is
the prefetch error number. This message is followed by a prefetch error
message. You should report this error to Robelle.
-535: SPEED DEMON
HAS EXPIRED
Your version of Speed Demon has expired.
If you have received a nonexpiring version of Speed Demon/V, be sure to install
it in the System SL. For Speed Demon/iX, make sure that you have restored
DemonXL.Pub.Robelle. If you are using Speed Demon/iX from your own XL file, be
sure to reinstall Speed Demon/iX after restoring the nonexpiring version.
-534: SPDEDBINIT
NOT CALLED
Before calling SPDEDBSCAN or SPDEDBSHUT,
you must call SPDEDBINIT successfully. Make sure that SPDEDBINIT was actually
called and that the condition word returned from SPDEDBINIT was zero.
In Speed Demon/V, this error can also be caused by corrupting the
stack. The Speed Demon intrinsics use two words of the DL-area (DB-32 and
DB-14) to store global information. Setting the first word (DB-32) to zero,
possibly because of a bug, will cause this error.
-533: FLIMIT OF
ACTUAL MPE FILE IS INVALID
SPDEDBINIT verifies that the physical MPE
file that corresponds to the dataset matches the information returned by
DBINFO. SPDEDBINIT computes the number of records in the MPE file as follows:
#records =
(capacity - 1) / blockfactor + 1
where capacity and blockfactor are
reported by the FORM command of Suprtool or QUERY. This number must match the
EOF of the MPE file (you can check this with :listf,2).
This error is usually caused by restoring
a earlier version of the dataset from a backup tape.
-532: INVALID BLOCK
SIZE FOR DATASET: xx
The MPE file corresponding to the dataset
has a block length that is less than the one reported from DBINFO. This can
only happen if the MPE file is corrupted.
-531: INVALID
BLOCKING FACTOR FOR DATASET: xx
The MPE file corresponding to the dataset
has a blocking factor other than one. This can only happen if the MPE file is
corrupted.
-530: INVALID
FILECODE FOR DATASET: xx
This error should never occur. If it
does, please report it to Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
-529: SPEED DEMON
NOT ALLOWED ON REMOTE DATABASES
Speed Demon only works with databases on
the local machine. Check for a :File command specifying the database on a
remote machine.
-528: SPEED DEMON
REQUIRES FULL-READ ACCESS TO THE DATASET
The password used in DBOPEN must grant
read access to the entire dataset passed to SPDEDBINIT. The creator password
always grants full-read access to every dataset.
-527: THE DATASET
CHANGED SINCE CALLING SPDEDBINIT
The dataset name or dataset number passed
to SPDEDBINIT must be the same one passed to SPDEDBSHUT.
-526: INVALID EXTRA
DATA SEGMENT IDENTIFIER
This error should never occur. If it
does, please report it to Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
-525: DATASET IS
ALREADY ACTIVE
You can only use Speed Demon to read one
dataset at a time. Two calls were made to SPDEDBINIT. Make sure that SPDEDBSHUT
is called before calling SPDEDBINIT again.
-524: INVALID DATA
SEGMENT INDEX
This error can only happen in Speed Demon/V. The DL-area of the
stack has been corrupted. Make sure that DB-32 and DB-14 are not used by the
calling program.
-523: UNABLE TO
OBTAIN EXTRA DATA SEGMENT
Speed Demon needs an extra data segment
the length of the buffer size plus a few hundred bytes (the default buffer size
is 28,672 bytes). SPDEDBINIT was unable to allocate this extra data segment.
Either the system is out of resources (e.g., DST table is full) or the maximum
extra data segment size is configured too small.
-522: INVALID
FUTURE PARAMETER
The future part of the control record
does not contain twenty blanks. Make sure that the control record was declared
correctly, and that the correct name was passed to SPDEDBINIT. Verify that the
control record is the fifth parameter of SPDEDBINIT, and be sure that either a
dummy argument or a field list was passed as the last parameter to SPDEDBINIT.
-521: INVALID
BUFFER LENGTH: xxxx
The buffer length of the control record
did not contain a valid value. The minimum buffer size is 4096 and the maximum
is 14,336, unless zero was specified. Make sure that the control record was
declared correctly, the correct name was passed to SPDEDBINIT, verify that the
control record is the fourth parameter of SPDEDBINIT, and be sure that a dummy
argument was passed as the last parameter to SPDEDBINIT.
-520: INVALID
VERSION NUMBER: x
The version number of the control record
did not contain a zero. Make sure that the control record was declared
correctly, the correct name was passed to SPDEDBINIT, verify that the control
record is the fifth parameter of SPDEDBINIT, and be sure that a dummy argument
was passed as the last parameter to SPDEDBINIT.
It is possible for Speed Demon to abort because of an internal
inconsistency. These are called assertion errors and they should be reported to
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. There is one assertion error that can be
caused by problems in the application software.
Each Speed Demon/V intrinsic checks for ten words of room in the
status area. If there is not enough room, Speed Demon/V is aborted with
assertion error number one. If this happens, you should check that the
declaration of the status area is correct. This problem could also be caused by
a large portion of the application stack being wiped out.
Suprtool, including its Suprlink and
Dbedit components, is a utility program, like FCOPY or QUERY. You run it,
either interactively or in a batch job, and feed it commands to define a task
to be done. How would a user application program invoke Suprtool to perform a
desired task? One way would be to use the COMMAND intrinsic to launch a batch
job that ran Suprtool. Unfortunately, the user program would have little
control over when the batch job started or finished.
To solve this problem, Robelle provides
an interface routine that will run Suprtool for a user program, and pass
commands from the program to Suprtool (the same commands you would type into
Suprtool). This routine (procedure, subroutine, intrinsic) allows user programs
to "call" Suprtool. A typical use of this interface would be for a
COBOL program to ask Suprtool to extract a selected subset from a large IMAGE
dataset and write it to a disc file, which the COBOL program would then read
and format into a report.
The interface routine is called Suprtool2
(not Suprtool). User programs written in COBOL, COBOL/iX, FORTRAN, FORTRAN/iX,
Pascal, Pascal/iX, SPEEDWARE, SPL, or TRANSACT can call Suprtool2 and ask
Suprtool to do any of the normal Suprtool tasks such as copy, extract, or sort.
The routine creates Suprtool as a son process.
The user program instructs Suprtool by
calling the Suprtool2 routine repeatedly with Suprtool command lines. When the
first Suprtool command is sent, the interface builds temporary files which will
be used for input and output to Suprtool. When the user program sends an Exit
command in a separate call to the interface, the interface creates Suprtool as
a son process. Finally, the interface prints the $stdlist message file, if so
directed by the user program.
The interface will not invoke Suprtool
until your program passes Exit to it as a command line. The Exit command must be alone and
left-justified in the command line. You may use Xeq to separate multiple tasks,
but none of the tasks will be executed until you pass Exit to the interface. If
you forget the final Exit or put it in the same command line with another
command such as Xeq, your Suprtool tasks will be ignored.
The
user program must pass a special control record to the interface on each call.
For COBOL, we suggest that this control record be placed in the COPYLIB and
copied into programs that require the Suprtool interface. The most common error
in using the Suprtool2 interface is typing the control record incorrectly. Use
the file Cobol.Qlibsrc.Robelle instead. You can copy the control record
directly into your COBOL program with the following Qedit command (use /JOIN
with EDIT/3000):
/add
50.1=cobol.qlibsrc.robelle
The definition of the control record,
with the proper initializing values, is as follows:
01 supr-control.
05
supr-version pic
s9(4) comp value 4.
05
supr-status pic
s9(4) comp.
88
supr-ok value zeros.
88
supr-bad-msgfiles value
1.
88
supr-aborted value
2.
88
supr-create-error value
3.
88
supr-bad-total-type value
4.
05
supr-command-line pic
x(256) value spaces.
05
supr-flags.
10
supr-priority pic x(2)
value spaces.
88
supr-priority-cs value
"CS".
88
supr-priority-ds value
"DS".
88
supr-priority-es value
"ES".
10
supr-maxdata pic s9(9) comp value 0.
10
supr-print-state pic x(2)
value "ER".
88
supr-print-on-error value
"ER".
88
supr-print-always value
"AL".
88
supr-print-never value
"NE".
10
supr-total-type pic x(2)
value "CO".
88
supr-total-cobol value
"CO".
88
supr-total-ascii value
"AS".
10
supr-other-flags pic x(18)
value spaces.
05
supr-totals pic s9(17) sign is trailing
separate character occurs 15
times.
05
supr-out-count pic
s9(9) comp.
05
supr-workspace pic
x(20) value spaces.
Status
The supr-status field returns a 0 if the
command line was sent to Suprtool without incident or one of the error numbers
shown as 88 levels.
Command Line
The supr-command-line can contain any
Suprtool command. Use the same format that you use in typing commands into
Suprtool. You don't need to enter commands as a single string of 256 characters
in a single call to the interface. You may use ";" to send several
commands in one string, or you may use the "&" mechanism to
continue commands.
The final call must have Exit as the
command, alone and left-justified in the command line. The final Exit command
can be in uppercase or lowercase, but cannot be abbreviated. MPE commands can
be passed into the interface and Suprtool will execute them.
Priority
The supr-priority flag should contain one
of "CS", "DS", or "ES". The default is
"DS".
Maxdata
The supr-maxdata contains the Maxdata in
words for Suprtool. The default is 32,000, but you can ask for a smaller stack
using this parameter (e.g., 20,000). There is no problem with reducing Maxdata
when you plan to Sort. However, if you plan to do copies without sorts, you
should send Suprtool a Buffer 4096 command if you reduce Maxdata. Otherwise,
you are likely to get a Stack Overflow abort within Suprtool or the error
message "Unable to allocate buffer in DL area". If you want the
default, this field should contain a 0.
Print State
If the supr-print-state contains
"AL", the output from Suprtool will always be printed on $stdlist. If
the state is "NE", the output will never be printed. If the state is
"ER" or blank, the output will be printed only if Suprtool aborts due
to an error.
Total Type
The supr-total-type determines the format
of the supr-totals array. If you call Suprtool2 from COBOL, you should use
"CO". The COBOL format is display (with leading zeros) and a trailing
sign. If the type is "AS", each total is returned left-justified in
the total field with a leading sign.
Totals
If you specify the Total command as part
of an extract task, Suprtool2 returns the totals in the supr-totals array.
Totals are returned in exactly the same order in which they were specified. If
you are calling Suprtool2 from COBOL, never specify the decimal-precision
portion of the Total command. If your total includes an implied decimal point,
you will have to modify the supr-totals declaration to include an implied
decimal point (e.g., pic s9(15)v99 ...).
If you specify "AS" as the
supr-total-type, each total is formatted as an 18-byte string. In this case,
you should specify the correct decimal-precision in the Total command. The
exponent portion of real totals is truncated by the Suprtool2 interface.
Out Count
After a successful call to the Suprtool2 interface, the
supr-out-count is set to the number of Suprtool output records. The
supr-out-count is only returned after the Suprtool2 call with the Exit command.
Suprtool also puts this count in the SuprtoolOutCount JCW, up to the maximum
JCW value permitted, 65,535.
Workspace
The supr-workspace part of the record
MUST contain spaces before the first call to the Suprtool2 procedure.
You
require PH capability in order to use the Suprtool2 interface. The classic
object code for the interface resides in ST2USL.Pub.Robelle. If your program
aborts with a "Stack Overflow" you should increase the size of
Maxdata. Users who call the interface from FORTRAN programs will have to
increase the Maxdata size. COBOL programmers should wait until they get a
"Stack Overflow".
The interface is installed in SL files.
The following commands demonstrate how to compile and prepare your program to
use the Suprtool interface. This example assumes that the Suprtool2 routine has
been installed in the System SL:
:cobol
example.source
:prep
$oldpass,example.pub;cap=ph
:save example.pub
:run example.pub
Using Lib=
The installation chapter of the manual tells how to install the
interface so that it is available to every program. You can also install the
interface routine in a SL file and run your program with Lib=. Here is an
example of how to add the Suprtool segment from ST2USL.Pub to your existing SL
file.
:run fcopy.pub.sys
>from=st2usl.pub.robelle;to=st2usl.pub;new
>exit
:segmenter
-buildsl
sl.pub,400,4 {fails if you already
have an SL}
-sl sl.pub
-usl st2usl.pub
-addsl suprtool
-exit
:cobol tool2cob.source
:prep
$oldpass,tool2cob.program;cap=ph
:save tool2cob.program
:run
tool2cob.program;lib=p
The MPE :prep command prints a warning
message when you specify cap=ph. You may ignore this message or specify
cap=ia,ba,ph on your :prep command. If your program requires other
capabilities, they should also be specified (e.g., cap=ph,ds).
Warning: The Suprtool2 interface will change over time. The interface
should never be installed directly into a program file. It should only be
installed into SL files.
You require PH capability in order to use
the Suprtool2 interface. The interface is installed in XL files. The following
commands demonstrate how to compile and link your program to use the native
mode Suprtool interface.
:cob85xl
example.source
:link
from=$oldpass;to=example.pub;cap=ph
:run
example.pub;xl='st2xl.pub.robelle'
User XL Files
You can use MPE/iX's Linkedit command to
add the Suprtool2 interface to your own XL file. For example,
:linkedit
-xl xl.pub
-copyxl
from=st2xl.pub.robelle;replace
-exit
:run
example.pub;xl='xl.pub'
The Replace option is not in all versions
of Linkedit. If your version does not allow Replace, and you already have
Suprtool2 in your XL file, you will need to manually purge the existing module
before copying the new one:
:linkedit
-xl xl.pub
-purgexl
module=suprtool.asm
Suprtool2 can successfully be installed into the System XL file, but
this is not recommended by HP. Suprtool2 can be combined into an XL file with
other Robelle XL files, except Qcompxl (a part of Qedit).
By default, the Suprtool2 interface runs Suprtool as
Suprtool.Pub.Robelle with Lib=S. We have provided JCWs that allow Suprtool to
be moved or run with a different library.
Moving Suprtool
To change the location of the Suprtool program file, you must
specify a JCW and use a :File command for the program file:
:setjcw
suprtool2filecommand = 2
:file suprtool =
suprtool.pub.dev
:run example.pub;lib=p
We suggest you add the Setjcw and :File
commands to a logon UDC. This way, every invocation of the Suprtool2 interface
will use the copy of Suprtool in the Pub group of the Dev account.
Previous versions of the Suprtool2
interface accepted a value of 1 for the suprtool2filecommand JCW. In this case,
you must specify a file command for Suprtool.Pub.Robelle. We don't recommend
you do this, since this only works on MPE/iX and not on MPE V.
Lib=
The Suprtool2 interface looks at the
Suprtool2lib JCW for which library to use. The values of this JCW correspond to
the description of the library portion of the flag variable of the create
intrinsic. These values are:
|
JCW Value
|
uses lib
|
|
0
|
Lib=S
|
|
1
|
Lib=P
|
|
2
|
Lib=G
|
|
3
|
<invalid>
|
If the Suprtool2lib JCW does not exist,
the Suprtool2 interface runs Suprtool with Lib=S. To have the Suprtool2
interface always invoke Suprtool with Lib=P, you would use this command:
Slist234 File
Some previous versions of the Suprtool2 interface created a
temporary file called Slist234, which contained the $stdlist from the Suprtool
run. A few programs were written to read this file. By default, the Suprtool2
interface no longer creates this file. If your program needs it, use the
following JCW to force the interface to create and save the Suprtool listing in
the temporary Slist234 file:
To tell the Suprtool2 interface that the Suprtool program has a
lockword you can use the suprtoolfilecommand facility.
file
suprtool=suprtool/secret.pub.robelle
setjcw
suprtool2filecommand = 2
run prog;lib=p
This chapter contains working examples of
source code that calls Suprtool2. You can copy the examples from the manual,
but typing them from scratch would be tedious and error-prone. The best way to
copy the examples is to take them from the on-line Suprtool2 documentation
file. The file is stored in Robelle Qedit format. If you have Qedit, just Text
a copy of Suprcall.Doc.Robelle and extract the portions that you are interested
in.
If you don't have Qedit, use the Qcopy
program to copy the documentation file to a new file in non-Qedit format, then
use your favorite text editor to edit this file.
:run
qcopy.qlib.robelle
>from=suprcall.doc.robelle;to=mysupr2.source;new
>exit
Below is a sample COBOL program named TOOL2COB. It calls the
Suprtool2 interface procedure. The purpose of TOOL2COB is to print selected
item master entries from an inventory database, sorted by item number. The
program uses Suprtool to create a disc file named SELITEM, filled with the
selected item numbers and their descriptions. Then it reads the disc file and
prints a report on the line printer.
The database used in this example is
called INVORY, and the dataset is called INVREC. Here is a QUERY FORM listing
of the dataset:
:run query.pub.sys
>base=invory.data
PASSWORD = >>
MODE = >>1
>form invrec
SET NAME:
INVREC,DETAIL
ITEMS:
ITEM, X8 <<SEARCH ITEM>>
DESCRIPT, X50
WEIGHT, J2
STD-PKG, X12
SELLPRCE, J2
SPUOM, X2
SPLEVEL, 3J2
SPMULTIR, 3J1
CPMULTIR, J1
INDIC, X2
VENDORPR, X6
SUPPNUM, X2
PRCEDATE, X6
CAPACITY: 44200 ENTRIES: 35659
The listing for the COBOL program is:
$control
source,uslinit,errors=15,list
$control debug,bounds
identification division.
program-id.
tool2cob.
author.
Robert M. Green.
date-written.
19 apr83.
date-compiled.
installation.
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
security.
Copyright 1983-2001, Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
remarks.
************************************************************
*
*
* TOOL2COB *
*
*
* FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW: uses Suprtool to extract and print*
*
*
* INPUT:
Invrec set of INVORY database. *
* All items with spec prefix (4 char),
sorted. *
* *
* OUTPUT: print report on LINE-PRINTER *
*
*
* TERMINATED BY: eof or error *
* *
* PREP WITH: cap = ph *
*
*
* REV
,INIT,DATE , REASON: *
* 00,
rmg, 19 Apr83, started first implementation. *
* 01,
djg, 25 Jan84, modified the control record to *
* include the version
number. *
* 02,
djg, 09 Nov87, modified to include totals in the *
* control record. *
* 03,
djg, 10 Aug90, modified for version 4 control rec. *
*
*
************************************************************
$page
"environment division"
environment division.
configuration section.
source-computer. hp-3000.
object-computer. hp-3000.
special-names.
top is new-page.
input-output section.
file-control.
select line-printer
assign to "LINEPRT,UR,A,LP".
select selitem assign
to "SELITEM".
data division.
file section.
fd
selitem
data record is
item-record.
01
item-record.
05
item-number.
10
item-prefix pic x(4).
10
item-suffix pic x(4).
05
item-description pic x(50).
fd
line-printer
data record is line-record.
01 line-record pic x(132).
$page
"constants"
working-storage section.
01
true-value pic
x value "T".
01
false-value pic
x value "F".
01
revision-no pic 99
value 03.
$page "logical
variables"
01
end-of-items-flag pic x.
88
end-of-items value
"T".
$page
"variables"
01
if-command.
05
filler pic x(10)
value
"IF ITEM='".
05
sel-prefix pic x(4).
05
filler pic x(2)
value "' ".
$page "input
area"
01
accept-buffer.
05
input-buf pic x(80).
88
answer-spaces value spaces.
$page "report
layouts"
01
report-record.
05
filler pic x(5) value spaces.
05
report-prefix pic x(4).
05
filler pic x
value "-".
05
report-suffix pic x(4).
05
filler pic x(3)
value spaces.
05
report-description pic x(50).
$page "Suprtool
Control Parameter"
* suprtool control
area
01
supr-control.
05
supr-version pic
s9(4) comp value 4.
05
supr-status pic
s9(4) comp.
88
supr-ok value zeros.
88
supr-bad-msgfiles value
1.
88
supr-aborted value
2.
88
supr-create-error value
3.
88
supr-bad-total-type value
4.
05
supr-command-line pic
x(256) value spaces.
05
supr-flags.
10
supr-priority pic x(2)
value spaces.
88
supr-priority-cs value
"CS".
88
supr-priority-ds value
"DS".
88
supr-priority-es value
"ES".
10
supr-maxdata pic s9(9)
comp value 0.
10
supr-print-state pic x(2)
value "ER".
88
supr-print-on-error value
"ER".
88
supr-print-always value
"AL".
88
supr-print-never value
"NE".
10
supr-total-type pic x(2)
value "CO".
88
supr-total-cobol value
"CO".
88
supr-total-ascii value
"AS".
10
supr-other-flags pic x(18)
value spaces.
05
supr-totals pic s9(17) sign is trailing
separate character occurs 15
times.
05
supr-out-count pic
s9(9) comp.
05
supr-workspace pic
x(20) value spaces.
$page "procedure
division"
************************************************************
* *
* P R O C E D U R E D I V I S I O N *
*
*
************************************************************
procedure division.
00-main
section.
* Ask for selection
criteria.
display "TOOL2COB ",
revision-no.
display " ".
display "Enter 4-character item
prefix to select:".
move spaces to input-buf.
accept input-buf.
if answer-spaces then go to 00-main-exit.
move input-buf to sel-prefix.
* Use suprtool to
build the extract file.
move "AL" to supr-print-state.
move "base invory.data,5,dev" to
supr-command-line.
perform
01-call-suprtool.
move "get invrec" to supr-command-line.
perform
01-call-suprtool.
move if-command to supr-command-line.
perform
01-call-suprtool.
move ":purge selitem" to supr-command-line.
perform
01-call-suprtool.
move "output selitem" to supr-command-line.
perform
01-call-suprtool.
move "extract item,descript" to
supr-command-line.
perform
01-call-suprtool.
move "sort item" to supr-command-line.
perform
01-call-suprtool.
move "exit" to supr-command-line.
perform 01-call-suprtool.
* At this point, the
file "SELITEM" contains the sorted
* data. This file must
be read and printed on the line-
* printer.
open output line-printer.
open input selitem.
move false-value to end-of-items-flag.
perform 02-print-item
until end-of-items.
close selitem.
close line-printer.
00-main-exit. goback.
01-call-suprtool.
call "SUPRTOOL2" using
supr-control.
if not supr-ok then
display "Error: Unable to sort the invrec dataset"
display " "
display "Suprtool interface error
number: ",
supr-status.
02-print-item.
read selitem at end
move true-value to end-of-items-flag.
if not end-of-items then
move item-prefix to report-prefix
move item-suffix to report-suffix
move item-description to report-description
move report-record to line-record
write line-record after advancing 1
lines.
FORTRAN
programmers may use the Suprtool2 interface to invoke Suprtool from within a
FORTRAN program. The control area may be in COMMON or it may be local to one
routine. If the control area is declared local to one routine, then all calls
to Suprtool2 must be from within the same routine. The following example
declares the control area in a common block. One routine initializes the
Suprtool2 control area. The second routine is repeatedly passed command lines
which copy the first 100 lines of catalog.pub.sys to the temporary file
"tempfile". This example program is compatible with FORTRAN 66,
FORTRAN 77/V, and FORTRAN 77/iX.
FORTRAN 66
FORTRAN 66 users may need to increase the
size of Maxdata for your program in order to use the interface. The $HP3000_16
ALIGNMENT$ option is not needed by FORTRAN 66 and if it is not deleted a
warning is produced by the compiler. FORTRAN 66 produces a warning on the line call setjcw, but
this warning may be safely ignored.
FORTRAN 77/V and FORTRAN 77/iX
The example program is valid for FORTRAN
77/V and FORTRAN 77/iX, but you must use the $HP3000_16 ALIGNMENT$ compiler
option with FORTRAN 77/iX. The $HP3000_16 ALIGNMENT$ compiler option is
required for FORTRAN 77/iX, but the option is not needed for FORTRAN 77/V. If
the option is not deleted a warning is produced by the FORTRAN 77/V compiler.
In FORTRAN 77, the suprcommand
variable may be declared as character*256 eliminating
the need for the suprfiller.
$HP3000_16
ALIGNMENT$
program test
character*254 command
call initsuprcontrol
command = "input catalog.pub.sys"
call invokesuprtool(command)
command = "numrecs 100"
call invokesuprtool(command)
command = "output tempfile,temp"
call invokesuprtool(command)
command = "exit"
call invokesuprtool(command)
20 stop
end
C This subroutine initializes the control
record for SUPRTOOL.
C It should be called once at the beginning of
the program.
C
subroutine initsuprcontrol
common /suprtool/ suprcontrol
integer*2 suprcontrol(291)
C
integer*2 suprversion
integer*2 suprstatus
character*254 suprcommand
character*2 suprfiller
character*2 suprpriority
integer*4 suprmaxdata
character*2 suprprintstate
character*18 suprotherflags
character*2 suprtotaltype
character*18 suprtotals(15)
integer*4 suproutcount
character*20 suprworkspace
C
equivalence(suprversion ,suprcontrol(1))
equivalence(suprstatus ,suprcontrol(2))
equivalence(suprcommand ,suprcontrol(3))
equivalence(suprfiller ,suprcontrol(130))
equivalence(suprpriority ,suprcontrol(131))
equivalence(suprmaxdata ,suprcontrol(132))
equivalence(suprprintstate,suprcontrol(134))
equivalence(suprtotaltype
,suprcontrol(135))
equivalence(suprotherflags,suprcontrol(136))
equivalence(suprtotals ,suprcontrol(145))
equivalence(suproutcount ,suprcontrol(280))
equivalence(suprworkspace ,suprcontrol(282))
C
suprversion = 4
suprstatus = 0
suprcommand = " "
suprfiller = "
"
suprpriority = "
"
suprmaxdata = 0
suprprintstate= "ER"
suprtotaltype = "AS"
suprworkspace = " "
C
return
end
C Call the "invokesuprtool"
subroutine for each command line
C that must be passed to SUPRTOOL.
C
subroutine invokesuprtool(command)
character*254 command
common /suprtool/ suprcontrol
integer*2 suprcontrol(291)
C
integer*2 suprversion
integer*2 suprstatus
character*254 suprcommand
character*2 suprfiller
character*2 suprpriority
integer*4 suprmaxdata
character*2 suprprintstate
character*18 suprotherflags
character*2 suprtotaltype
character*18 suprtotals(15)
integer*4 suproutcount
character*20 suprworkspace
C
equivalence(suprversion ,suprcontrol(1))
equivalence(suprstatus ,suprcontrol(2))
equivalence(suprcommand ,suprcontrol(3))
equivalence(suprfiller ,suprcontrol(130))
equivalence(suprpriority ,suprcontrol(131))
equivalence(suprmaxdata ,suprcontrol(132))
equivalence(suprprintstate,suprcontrol(134))
equivalence(suprtotaltype
,suprcontrol(135))
equivalence(suprotherflags,suprcontrol(136))
equivalence(suprtotals ,suprcontrol(145))
equivalence(suproutcount ,suprcontrol(280))
equivalence(suprworkspace ,suprcontrol(282))
C
system intrinsic setjcw
C
if(suprstatus.ne.0) goto 900
suprcommand = command
call suprtool2(suprcontrol)
if (suprstatus.eq.0) goto 900
C display "SUPRTOOL interface failed
with command:"
C display command
call setjcw(-1)
900 return
end
To
call the Suprtool2 interface from a TRANSACT program, you must first define the
Suprtool2 control record. We suggest that the control record be included from
the file Transact.Qlibsrc.Robelle. The TRANSACT definition of the control
record, with the proper initializing values, is as follows:
define(item)
supr-control x(582),init = " ":
supr-version i(4,0,2) = supr-control(1):
supr-status i(4,0,2) = supr-control(3):
supr-command x(256) = supr-control(5):
supr-pri x(2) = supr-control(261):
supr-maxdata i(9,0,4) = supr-control(263):
supr-print x(2) = supr-control(267):
supr-tot-type x(2) = supr-control(269):
supr-other x(18) = supr-control(271):
supr-totals 15 x(18) = supr-control(289):
supr-total 9(17) = supr-totals(1):
supr-tot-sign x(1) = supr-totals(18):
supr-out-count i(9,0,4) = supr-control(559):
supr-workspace x(20) = supr-control(563);
list supr-control;
<< set up initial values >>
let
(supr-version) = 4; << don't change >>
let
(supr-status) = 0; << check after each call >>
move (supr-command) = " ";
move (supr-pri) = " "; <<
"CS","DS","ES"
>>
<<
"DS" is default >>
let
(supr-maxdata) = 0;
move (supr-print) = "ER";<< print on error
only >>
<< "NE" -
never, >>
<< "AL"
- always >>
move (supr-tot-type) = "CO";<<
total type >>
<< "CO"
- cobol, >>
<< "AS"
- ascii >>
move (supr-other) = " ";
move (supr-out-count)= 0;
move (supr-workspace)= " ";
Below is a sample program that uses the
TRANSACT include file to call the Suprtool2 interface. The program uses
Suprtool to find two totals and the output count of selected records from the
sales-hist dataset of the SH database. Be careful not to create commands
greater than 256 characters in length.
SYSTEM SUPREX;
SET(OPTION) NOHEAD;
DEFINE(ITEM)
TOTAL1 I (9,0,4), EDIT = "ZZZZZZZZ^":
TOTAL2 I (9,0,4), EDIT = "ZZZZZZZZ^":
CUSTNO X (6), INIT = "000000";
LIST TOTAL1,
TOTAL2,
CUSTNO;
!INCLUDE(TRANSACT.QLIBSRC.ROBELLE)
DATA(SET) CUSTNO;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "BASE
SH,5,READ";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "GET SALES-HIST";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "DEF
CUST-NO,HIST-KEY[1],6";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "IF
CUST-NO = '" +
(CUSTNO) +
"'";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "TOTAL
CU-PER1-QTY";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "TOTAL
CU-PER2-QTY";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "OUTPUT
$NULL";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
MOVE
(SUPR-COMMAND) = "EXIT";
PERFORM
CALL-SUPRTOOL2;
IF (SUPR-TOT-SIGN(1))
= "-" THEN
LET (TOTAL1) = (SUPR-TOTAL(1)) * -1
ELSE
LET (TOTAL1) = (SUPR-TOTAL(1));
IF (SUPR-TOT-SIGN(2))
= "-" THEN
LET (TOTAL2) = (SUPR-TOTAL(2)) * -1
ELSE
LET (TOTAL2) = (SUPR-TOTAL(2));
DISPLAY
"There are ": SUPR-OUT-COUNT,
EDIT="ZZZZZZZZ^":
"records for customer ": CUSTNO:
"Period 1 Qty this year", COL=5,
LINE: TOTAL1:
"Last year ": TOTAL2;
EXIT;
CALL-SUPRTOOL2:
PROC
SUPRTOOL2((SUPR-CONTROL));
IF (SUPR-STATUS) <> 0 THEN
DISPLAY "SUPRTOOL2 INTERFACE ERROR ", LINE = 2:
SUPR-STATUS, JOIN = 1:
"ON COMMAND:",LINE:
SUPR-COMMAND;
RETURN;
END SUPREX;
This
SPL program invokes Suprtool through the interface routine:
$control
errors=5,main=tool2spl
begin
<<
Copyright 1982-2001
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
name:
tool2spl
purpose:
test the suprtool interface.
prep:
cap = ph
run:
run with parm=2 for print stdlist always.
run with parm=3 to print
stdlist never.
>>
define current'version
= "(Version 0.6)"#;
$page "Global
variables of the tool2spl program"
<< suprtool2 interface layout >>
equate
wl'supr'control = 290
,wl'supr'command'line = 128
,wl'supr'totals = 9
,bl'supr'totals = wl'supr'totals * 2
,max'supr'totals = 15
;
integer array
supr'control(0:wl'supr'control);
integer array supr'version(*) = supr'control(000);
integer array supr'status(*) = supr'control(001);
integer array supr'command'line(*) =
supr'control(002);
byte array b'command'line(*) = supr'command'line;
integer array supr'flags(*) =
supr'control(130);
byte array supr'priority(*) = supr'flags(0);
double array supr'maxdata(*) = supr'flags(1);
byte array supr'print'state(*) = supr'flags(3);
byte array supr'total'type(*) = supr'flags(4);
integer array supr'totals(*) = supr'control(144);
double array supr'out'count(*) = supr'control(279);
integer array supr'workspace(*) = supr'control(281);
equate supr'ok = 0
,bad'msgfiles = 1
,suprtool'aborted = 2
,create'error = 3
;
<< standard global variables for
Robelle SPL programs >>
integer
copy'of'parm << copy of "ACTUAL'PARM"
>>
,actual'parm=q-4 << run ;parm=nn (use in mainline)
>>
,input'length << used only with input defines
>>
;
logical
batch << run in batch mode >>
;
equate
rtn = 13
<< carriage return in ascii >>
,bell = 7
<< ring the bell in ascii
>>
,bl'inbuf = 86
,bl'outbuf = 132
,wl'outbuf = bl'outbuf/2
,wl'inbuf = bl'inbuf/2
;
define
end'if
= end# ,end'else = end# ,end'while= end#
,end'case = end# ,end'do
= end# ,end'proc = end#
,end'subr = end#
,p = begin move outbuf := #
,output=,2;output'(*);end#,err=,2;err'(*);end#
,ask=,2;ask'(*);end#, warn =,2;warn'(*);end#
,trim = while input'length>0 and
inbuf'(input'length-1)=" "
do
input'length:=input'length-1#
,echo = if batch then
begin trim; print(inbuf,-input'length,0);
end#
,input = begin input'length :=
readx(inbuf,-bl'inbuf);
if > then quit(10); echo;
inbuf'(input'length):= rtn;
end#
;
integer array inbuf
(0:wl'inbuf);
byte array inbuf'(*)=inbuf;
integer array
outbuf (0:wl'outbuf);
byte array outbuf'(*) = outbuf;
intrinsic
ascii, aritrap, binary, calendar, clock,
dascii,
dateline, dbinary, debug, genmessage, print,
quit, readx,
terminate, who, xaritrap, xcontrap,
xlibtrap, xsystrap,
setjcw;
<< external definition of suprtool2
routine >>
procedure suprtool2(supr'definition);
array supr'definition;
option external, check 3;
$page "Standard
Robelle Utility Procedures"
procedure output'(
address ) ;
value address; integer address; << in
outbuf >>
begin integer output'length;
<< check length for overflow of buf
>>
output'length := (address-@outbuf)*2;
if output'length > bl'outbuf then begin
print(outbuf,-bl'outbuf,0);
quit(111);
end'if;
print(outbuf,-output'length,0);
end'proc; <<output'>>
procedure ask'
(address);
value address; integer address;
begin integer output'length;
<< check length for overflow of buf
>>
output'length := (address-@outbuf)*2;
if output'length > bl'outbuf then begin
print(outbuf,-bl'outbuf,0);
quit(111);
end'if;
print(outbuf,-output'length,%320);
end'proc; <<ask'>>
procedure
err'(address);
value address; integer address; << in
outbuf >>
begin integer output'length;
integer array errbuf(0:10);
move errbuf:=([8/bell
,8/10]<<lf>>,"ERROR:
");
print(errbuf,5,%320);
<< check length for overflow of buf
>>
output'length := (address-@outbuf)*2;
if output'length > bl'outbuf then begin
print(outbuf,-bl'outbuf,0);
quit(111);
end'if;
print(outbuf,-output'length,0);
print(errbuf,0,0);
end'proc; <<err'>>
procedure
blank(buf,count);
value count;
integer count;
integer array buf;
begin
if count > 0 then begin
buf:="
";
if (count:=count-1)>0 then
move buf(1):=buf,(count);
end'if;
end'proc; <<blank>>
procedure
b'blank(buf,count);
value count;
integer count;
byte array buf;
begin
if count > 0 then begin
buf:=" ";
if (count:=count-1)>0 then
move buf(1):=buf,(count);
end'if;
end'proc; <<b'blank>>
$page "level
1: print'totals"
<< Print the Suprtool2 totals.
>>
procedure
print'totals;
begin
byte array
blank'total(0:bl'supr'totals)
;
byte pointer
supr'totals'
;
integer
total'index
,total'offset
;
logical
first'time
;
b'blank(blank'total,bl'supr'totals);
first'time
:= true;
total'index := 0;
while total'index < max'supr'totals do
begin
total'offset := total'index *
wl'supr'totals;
@supr'totals':=
@supr'totals(total'offset) & lsl(1);
if supr'totals' <>
blank'total,(bl'supr'totals) then
begin
if first'time then
begin
p "Totals:" output;
first'time := false;
end'if;
print(supr'totals(total'offset),wl'supr'totals,0);
end'if;
total'index := total'index + 1;
end'while;
end'proc; <<print'totals>>
$page
"call'suprtool2"
<<
pass a command line to suprtool
>>
procedure
call'suprtool2;
begin
integer length;
subroutine print'int(val);
value val; integer val;
begin
val := ascii(val,10,outbuf');
print(outbuf,-val,0);
end'subr; <<print'int>>
subroutine print'command;
begin
length := 256;
do length:=length-1 until
length<0 or
b'command'line(length)<>" ";
length:=length+1;
print(supr'command'line,-length,0);
end'subr; <<print'command>>
suprtool2 (supr'control);
if supr'status <> supr'ok then begin
p "Suprtool2 interface call has
failed!" err;
print'command;
p "Error number = " ask;
print'int(supr'status);
setjcw(-1);
end'if;
blank(supr'command'line,wl'supr'command'line);
end'proc; <<call'suprtool2>>
$page
"init'tool2spl"
<<
check logon mode, parm values, etc.
see if we can send one command to suprtool.
>>
logical procedure
init'tool2spl;
begin
integer temp;
init'tool2spl := false;
who(temp);
batch := temp.(12:2) = 2;
p "TOOL2SPL/Copyright Robelle
1982-2001"output;
p current'version output;
print(outbuf,0,0); <<blank line>>
blank(supr'control,wl'supr'control);
supr'version := 4;
supr'maxdata := 0d;
move supr'print'state := "ER";
move supr'total'type := "AS";
if copy'of'parm=2 then
move supr'print'state := "AL"
else
if copy'of'parm=3 then
move supr'print'state := "NE";
p "Please hit RETURN for EXIT at end.
Thanks" output;
move supr'command'line :=
":COMMENT Test of Suprtool
Interface";
call'suprtool2;
if supr'status=0 then begin
init'tool2spl := true;
print(outbuf,0,0);
end'if;
end'proc;
<<init'tool2spl>>
$page
"mainline"
copy'of'parm := actual'parm;
if init'tool2spl then begin
<< main loop of program >>
do begin
p ">" ask;
input;
if input'length<>0 then begin
move
b'command'line:=inbuf',(input'length);
call'suprtool2;
end'if;
end'do
until input'length=0 or
supr'status<>0;
move supr'command'line := "EXIT";
call'suprtool2;
if supr'status = 0 then
print'totals;
end'if;
end. <<tool2spl>>
Below is a C program to invoke Suprtool through the interface
routine.
#include
<stdio.h>
#include
<string.h>
/*
DO NOT use int's in this structure, since
they are the wrong size,
and are aligned on 4-byte boundaries, which
will confuse Suprtool2.
*/
struct supr_control
{
short version;
short status;
char
command[256];
char
priority[2];
short maxdata1;
short maxdata2;
char
print_state[2];
char
total_type[2];
char
other_flags[18];
short totals[15][9];
short out_count1;
short out_count2;
char
workspace[20];
} SuprControl;
void suprtool2(
struct supr_control *);
init_st2()
{
int i;
SuprControl.version = 4;
SuprControl.status = 0;
SuprControl.priority[0] = 'C';
SuprControl.priority[1] = 'S';
SuprControl.maxdata1 = 0;
SuprControl.maxdata2 = 0;
SuprControl.print_state[0] ='A';
SuprControl.print_state[1] ='L';
SuprControl.total_type[0] = 'A';
SuprControl.total_type[1] = 'S';
strcpy( SuprControl.workspace, " ");
for (i=0;i<256;i++)
SuprControl.command[i]=' ';
}
call_suprtool2()
{
suprtool2( &SuprControl );
if (SuprControl.status!=0)
{
puts("Suprtool2 interface call has
failed!");
printf("Error number = %d\n",
SuprControl.status );
}
}
assign_cmd( char
*cmd )
{
int i;
for (i=0;i<256;i++)
SuprControl.command[i]=' ';
i=0;
while (*cmd)
SuprControl.command[i++]=*cmd++;
}
main()
{
char cmd[256];
init_st2();
assign_cmd( "verify all");
call_suprtool2();
assign_cmd( "exit");
call_suprtool2();
}
Below
is a Pascal program to invoke Suprtool through the interface routine. The
example as given is for use with Pascal/iX. Note that the $HP3000_16$ compiler
option is set. This is required because Suprtool2's control record uses 16-bit
alignment instead of Pascal/iX's default 32-bit alignment.
For Pascal/V, change the $set nm$ line to
$set 'nm=false'$
{ Example of
Calling Suprtool2 from Pascal }
{ Set 'nm=false' for
MPE V }
$set 'nm=true'$
$list off$
$if 'nm'$
$HP3000_16$
$endif$
program
test(input,output);
const
MaxSuprCmdLen = 256;
type
$if 'not nm'$
shortint = -32768 .. 32767;
(* 16-bit integer *)
$endif$
SuprCmdStr
= string[MaxSuprCmdLen];
SuprTotalStr = packed array[1..18] of char;
SuprControlRec = record
version
: shortint;
status
: shortint;
command
: packed array[1..MaxSuprCmdLen] of char;
priority
: packed array[1..2] of char;
maxdata
: integer;
print_state: packed array[1..2] of char;
total_type : packed array[1..2] of char;
other_flags: packed array[1..18] of char;
totals
: array[1..15] of SuprTotalStr;
out_count
: integer;
workspace
: packed array [1..20] of char;
end;
var
SuprControl : SuprControlRec;
procedure suprtool2(
var control: SuprControlRec );
external spl;
procedure InitST2;
var
i: integer;
begin
SuprControl.version := 4;
SuprControl.status := 0;
SuprControl.priority[1] := 'C';
SuprControl.priority[2] := 'S';
SuprControl.maxdata := 0;
SuprControl.print_state[1] := 'A';
SuprControl.print_state[2] := 'L';
SuprControl.total_type[1] := 'A';
SuprControl.total_type[2] := 'S';
for i:=1 to 20 do
SuprControl.workspace[i] := ' ';
for i:=1 to MaxSuprCmdLen do
SuprControl.command[i] := ' ';
end;
procedure
CallSuprtool2;
begin
suprtool2( SuprControl );
if (SuprControl.status<>0) then
begin
writeln('Suprtool2 interface call has
failed!');
writeln('Error number = ',
SuprControl.status:1 );
end;
end;
procedure ST2Cmd( cmd:
SuprCmdStr );
var i: integer;
begin
for i:=1 to MaxSuprCmdLen do
SuprControl.command[i]:=' ';
for i:=1 to strlen( cmd ) do
SuprControl.command[i]:=cmd[i];
CallSuprtool2;
end;
begin
InitST2;
ST2Cmd( 'in infile;out $null');
ST2Cmd( 'exit');
writeln( SuprControl.out_count );
end.
You
can call the Suprtool2 interface from a SPEEDWARE V.6 or V.7 program. Use the
Supr-Control area to pass commands to Suprtool2.
There are 3 ways to get Speedware to find
the Suprtool2 routine.
1.
Using Designer. In the Operating Options
(OPEO) screen add the XL to Local 4GL Parms. :
XL="ST2XL.PUB.ROBELLE". This is the recommended approach for
SPEEDWARE V.6.
2.
Using Linkedit. Copy the routines into
SPWXL.SPWxxxxx.SPEEDWRE. This is the XL that Speedware provides for this
purpose. This could become a problem as SUPRTOOL2 changes over the years and
the new version is not updated into SPWXL.
3.
Using RUN. Add the XL to the run
command. n.b. If you do this you will also need to include Speedware's database
interface XL called DBMSXL.
:RUN
SPW4GL.SPWxxxxx.SPEEDWRE
;XL="DBMSXL.SPWxxxxx.SPEEDWRE,ST2XL.PUB.ROBELLE"
This is the recommended approach for
SPEEDWARE V.7 and higher.
Below is a sample SPEEDWARE process that
calls the Suprtool2 interface. The program uses Suprtool to read a dataset,
then writes the dataset to a file.
GLOBAL:
SET
TITLE("Calling Suprtool Test");
EXIT;
MENU:
SET WINDOW(ROW=4,COL=4,HEIGHT=15,WIDTH=40);
BRANCH "Copy
D-SALES to file" DO
REPORT-SUPRTOOL2;
EXIT;
REPORT-SUPRTOOL2:LISTING;
SET
TITLE("Calling Suprtool2");
SET WINDOW;
DCL
SUPR-CONTROL FORMAT (TYPE = CHAR, BYTES =582),
SUPR-VERSION FORMAT (TYPE = INT , BYTES = 2, LEN= 4)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[1:2]),
SUPR-STATUS FORMAT (TYPE = INT , BYTES = 2, LEN= 4)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[3:4]),
SUPR-COMMAND-LINE FORMAT (TYPE = CHAR, BYTES
= 256)
REDEFINES (SUPR-CONTROL[5:260]),
SUPR-PRIORITY FORMAT (TYPE = CHAR, BYTES = 2)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[261:262]),
SUPR-MAXDATA FORMAT (TYPE = INT , BYTES = 4, LEN= 9)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[263:266]),
SUPR-PRINT-STATE FORMAT (TYPE = CHAR, BYTES = 2)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[267:268]),
SUPR-TOTAL-TYPE FORMAT (TYPE = CHAR, BYTES = 2)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[269:270]),
SUPR-FUTURE-FLAGS FORMAT (TYPE = CHAR, BYTES
= 18)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[271:288]),
SUPR-TOTALS
(15) FORMAT (TYPE = ZONE, BYTES = 18,)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[289:558]),
SUPR-OUT-COUNT FORMAT (TYPE = INT , BYTES = 4, LEN= 9)
REDEFINES (SUPR-CONTROL[559:562]),
SUPR-WORKSPACE FORMAT (TYPE = CHAR, BYTES = 20)
REDEFINES
(SUPR-CONTROL[563:582]);
(* initial values *)
CALCUL 4 = SUPR-VERSION,
0 = SUPR-STATUS,
'DS' = SUPR-PRIORITY,
'ER' = SUPR-PRINT-STATE,
'AS' = SUPR-TOTAL-TYPE,
' ' = SUPR-WORKSPACE;
CALCUL 'base
store,1,READER' = SUPR-COMMAND-LINE;
CALL SUPRTOOL2 USING SUPR-CONTROL MODIFY;
IF SUPR-STATUS
<> 0 THEN
PRINT 'Error Suprtool', SUPR-STATUS,
SUPR-COMMAND-LINE;
ELSE
BEGIN
CALCUL 'get d-sales;out dsfile' =
SUPR-COMMAND-LINE;
CALL SUPRTOOL2 USING SUPR-CONTROL MODIFY;
END;
IF SUPR-STATUS
<> 0 THEN
PRINT 'Error Suprtool', SUPR-STATUS,
SUPR-COMMAND-LINE;
ELSE
BEGIN
CALCUL 'exit ' = SUPR-COMMAND-LINE;
CALL SUPRTOOL2 USING SUPR-CONTROL MODIFY;
END;
EXIT;
User
programs may "call" Suprlink via the Suprtool2 interface using the
Suprtool Link command. A typical use of this interface would be for a COBOL
program to ask Suprtool to extract selected subsets from two or more large
IMAGE datasets and to use Suprlink to link the two files. The COBOL program
would then read and format the Suprlink output file into a report.
When calling the Suprtool2 interface, you
signal the end of commands and the start of processing by passing the Exit
command. If you specify the Link command with no parameters, the interface
switches to Suprlink. When you have passed all the Suprlink commands, do not
end the Suprlink task by passing Exit. This will end the Suprlink task, but it
will also result in a Suprtool error. There are two solutions to this problem:
1.
Specify a substring of Exit
(for example, E).
2.
Specify all Suprlink commands
with Suprtool's Link command (e.g., Link Exit).
Below
is a sample COBOL program named LINK2COB, which calls the Suprtool2 interface
procedure. Its purpose is to print the notes for a selected product with the
associated company name sorted by serial number. The program uses the Suprtool2
interface to do the following:
1.
Select and sort records from
the notes dataset.
2.
Extract specific fields and
sort the entire Customer dataset.
3.
Use Suprlink to link the Notes
and Customer files into the Notecust file.
The program then reads the Notecust file
and prints a report on the line printer.
The database used in this example is
called Cust, and the datasets are called Notes and Customer. Here is a Suprtool
Form listing of the datasets:
:run
suprtool.pub.robelle
>ba cust.history
>form notes
NOTES Detail
Entry:
SERIAL-NO U4 (!CUSTOMER(SORT-ITEM))
PRODUCT-CODE U2
TEXT-LINE X80
SORT-ITEM K2
Capacity: 75010 Entries: 40459 Entry Length: 45
>form customer
CUSTOMER Master
Entry:
SERIAL-NO U4 <<Search-Field>>
COMPANY-NAME X60
ALTERNATE-NAME X60
CONTACT-NAME X40
CONTACT-TITLE X40
PHONE-NO X20
CONTACT-NOTE X40
ADDRESS 4X40
COUNTRY X12
CUSTOMER-NOTE X40
RELATED-NAME X60
SORTING-SEQ U16
OMNIDEX-SI J2
TIMESTAMP-INIT U16
Capacity: 1499 Entries: 1250
Entry Length: 286
The listing for the COBOL program is:
$control
source,errors=15,nolist
$control debug,bounds
identification division.
program-id.
Link2cob.
date-written.
15 Sep88.
date-compiled.
installation.
Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
security.
Copyright 1988-2001 Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.
remarks.
***********************************************************
*
*
* link2cob *
*
*
* functional overview: Uses Suprtool to extract *
* and print. *
* input:
Notes dataset of the cust database. *
* All notes with a specified
product *
* code and the related customer
name *
* from the customer dataset. *
*
*
* output: print report on line-printer *
*
*
* terminated by: eof or error *
*
*
* prep with: cap = ph;maxdata=15000 *
*
*
* rev#,init,date , reason: *
* 01 ,
djg,15 Sep88, started first implementation.
*
* 02 ,
djg,10 Aug90, version 4 of the control record.
*
*
*
***********************************************************
$page "environment
division"
environment division.
configuration section.
source-computer. hp-3000.
object-computer. hp-3000.
special-names.
top is new-page.
input-output section.
file-control.
select line-printer assign to
"LINEPRT,,,LP".
select notecust-file assign to
"NOTECUST".
data division.
file section.
fd
notecust-file
data record is item-record.
01
notecust-record.
05
notecust-serial-no pic x(4).
05
notecust-product-code pic x(2).
05
notecust-text-line pic x(80).
05
notecust-company-name pic x(60).
fd
line-printer
data record is line-record.
01
line-record pic
x(132).
$page
"constants"
working-storage section.
01
true-value pic x
value "T".
01
false-value pic x
value "F".
01
revision-no pic
99 value 2.
$page "logical
variables"
01
end-of-notecust-flag pic x.
88
end-of-notecust value
"T".
$page
"variables"
01
if-command.
05
filler pic x(17)
value
"IF PRODUCT-CODE='".
05
if-product-code pic x(2).
05
filler pic x(2)
value "'".
$page "input
area"
01
accept-buffer.
05
input-buf pic x(80).
88
answer-spaces value spaces.
$page "report
layouts"
01
report-header.
05
filler pic x(9)
value "Serial : ".
05
head-serial-no pic x(4).
05
filler pic x(2)
value spaces.
05
head-company-name pic x(60).
01
report-detail.
05
rept-text-line pic x(80).
$page "suprtool
control parameter"
$include
cobol.qlibsrc.robelle
$page "procedure
division"
***********************************************************
*
*
* p r o c e d u r e d i v i s i o n *
*
*
***********************************************************
procedure division.
00-main section.
* ask for selection
criteria.
display "LINK2COB ",
revision-no.
display " ".
display "Enter 2-character product
code:".
move spaces to input-buf.
accept input-buf.
if answer-spaces then go to 00-main-exit.
move input-buf to if-product-code.
perform 10-create-notecust-file
thru 10-create-notecust-file-exit.
* Now, the file
"notecust" contains the sorted data.
* This file must be
read and printed on the line printer.
perform 20-produce-report
thru 20-produce-report-exit.
00-main-exit.
goback.
$page "[10] create-notecust-file"
10-create-notecust-file section.
move "base cust.history,5" to
supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
perform 10-10-create-notefile.
perform 10-20-create-custfile.
perform 10-30-link-notefile-custfile.
move "exit" to supr-command-line.
perform 10-90-call-suprtool.
go to 10-create-notecust-file-exit.
10-10-create-notefile.
move "get notes" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move if-command to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "extract serial-no" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "extract product-code" to
supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "extract text-line" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move ":purge notefile" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "output notefile,link" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "sort serial-no" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "sort sort-item,desc" to
supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "xeq" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
10-20-create-custfile.
move "get customer" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move ":purge custfile" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "output custfile,link" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "sort serial-no" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "extract serial-no" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "extract company-name" to
supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "xeq" to supr-command-line.
perform 10-90-call-suprtool.
10-30-link-notefile-custfile.
move "link" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "input notefile by
serial-no"
to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "link custfile" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move ":purge notecust" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "output notecust" to supr-command-line.
perform
10-90-call-suprtool.
move "e" to supr-command-line.
perform 10-90-call-suprtool.
10-90-call-suprtool.
call "SUPRTOOL2" using
supr-control.
if not supr-ok then
display "Error: Unable to call Suprtool2"
display " "
display "Suprtool interface error
number: ",
supr-status.
10-create-notecust-file-exit. exit.
$page "[20] produce-report"
*
* Read the notecust
file which contains the detail records
* from the NOTES
dataset and the company-name from the
* CUSTOMER
dataset. We produce a break on each new
customer
* serial number;
otherwise, we just print the text of the
* note lines.
*
20-produce-report section.
open input
notecust-file.
open output line-printer.
move spaces to head-serial-no.
move false-value to end-of-notecust-flag.
perform 20-10-read-notecust
until end-of-notecust.
go to 20-produce-report-exit.
20-10-read-notecust.
read notecust-file at end
move true-value to
end-of-notecust-flag.
if not end-of-notecust then
perform 20-20-process-record.
20-20-process-record.
if notecust-serial-no <>
head-serial-no then
perform 20-30-print-header.
move notecust-text-line to rept-text-line.
write line-record from report-detail.
20-30-print-header.
move spaces to line-record.
write line-record.
move notecust-serial-no to head-serial-no.
move notecust-company-name to
head-company-name.
write line-record from report-header.
20-produce-report-exit. exit.
You do
not need to do any installation steps in order to use the native mode version
of Suprtool2. These instructions describe how to install the Suprtool2
interface into the System SL on Classic versions of MPE, and on MPE/iX for
access by compatibility mode programs.
The job stream Suprcall.Suprjob.Robelle installs the Suprtool2
interface so that it can be used by any program on the system. Use it either to
update the interface when you receive a new version of Suprtool or to
re-install the interface after a MIT update from HP. You will need a small tape
for a new COLDLOAD tape to contain the Suprtool interface segment. You can also
install the Suprtool2 interface in a pub or group SL (see "Compiling
and Linking on MPE V"
on page 464).
1.
Make sure that the Robelle
account has been created and all files have been restored.
2.
Ensure that no one will use the
interface until the installation is complete. No one can be running a program
which uses the interface. Stop all jobs and send an operator warning.
:showjob
:warn @;please stop
for 20 minutes
:abortjob #snnn
3.
STREAM the installation job.
Supply any passwords requested by the STREAM command.
:stream
suprcall.suprjob.robelle
4.
SUPR2JOB uses the SEGMENTER to
add the Suprtool Interface Library into SL.Pub.Sys.
It then requests a tape ("COLDLOAD") to create a new cold load tape
containing MPE plus the Suprtool interface library. Mount a tape with a write
ring and :REPLY. Save this tape and use it for any future cold loads.
5.
If everything goes well,
SUPR2JOB prints a final message on the console.
6.
Please save the job listing for
future reference.
Suprtool2 is now installed and you should
be able to use it in your application programs.
Suprtool2
returns error numbers in the status parameter of the workspace. For most
errors, a message is also displayed on $stdlist. The following summarizes the
form of Suprtool2 error messages and the error numbers returned.
Messages On $Stdlist
Most Suprtool2 errors result in a message
being displayed on $stdlist. All Suprtool2 error messages start with "ST2
-" making them easier to identify. For example,
Error: ST2 - Caller lacks PH capability
1 - Unable to Access Files
Suprtool2 uses two temporary files called
SInnn and SLnnn. The nnn corresponds
to the process identification number of the calling process. If Suprtool2 is
unable to open, read, write, or close these files, a file system message is
displayed on $stdlist and error #1 is returned.
2 - Suprtool Aborted
If the Suprtool task has any errors,
Suprtool is terminated with the fatal JCW set. In this case, Suprtool2 returns
error #2 to indicate that the requested task failed. If the print-state in the
workspace was set to "ER" (error) or "AL" (always), the
output from Suprtool will be displayed on $stdlist. If the print-state is
"NE" (never), nothing is displayed on $stdlist.
3 - Unable to Create Suprtool Process
The Suprtool2 routine creates the
Suprtool program as a son process. If this fails for any reason, error #3 is
returned. The most common reason for this is forgetting to :PREP or :LINK your
program with CAP=PH. If the Suprtool2filecommand JCW is set to 2, check that the
:File command for Suprtool correctly specifies the name of the Suprtool program
file.
4 - Invalid Total Type
The Suprtool2 control record has a field
to indicate what kind of totals the interface should return. The valid values
for this field are "CO" for COBOL totals and "AS" for Ascii
totals. The total type must be in uppercase. This error is returned when the
control record has been passed a value other than "CO" or
"AS" for the total type.
5 - Unable to Create Suprtool Process
Suprtool2 calls the PROCINFO intrinsic to
obtain the process identification number of the current process. If this
routine fails for any reason, the error number returned from PROCINFO is
printed on $stdlist and Suprtool2 returns error #5.
Batch
Suprtool operates in session mode
or batch mode. In batch, any error
message causes Suprtool to quit. Warning messages do not cause an abort. If an
error occurs, Suprtool sets the Job Control Word to flush the remainder of the
job.
In batch mode, Suprtool does not prompt for missing information as
it does in session mode. Instead, it attempts to choose the alternative that
has the least chance of destroying valid data. For example, if the output file
is a duplicate file name in batch mode, Suprtool saves the new output file with
a "made up" name (Outputnn, where nn is from 00 to 20), prints a
warning message, and aborts. Another example is that of missing database passwords.
In session mode, Suprtool prompts for the password; in batch mode, it uses the
CREATOR password instead.
Pseudo-Batch Tasks
During a canned on-line task, such as passing usefiles to Suprtool,
you can "fool" Suprtool into responding YES to operational questions.
For example, if one of the canned tasks requires Suprtool to output
myfile,erase, then Suprtool asks the question
ERASE all records from this OUTPUT file
[no]?
You can avoid typing "yes" in
response to this question by invoking Suprtool with:
:run suprtool.pub.robelle; &
stdin=$null; info="use filename"; parm=4
Blocksize
The block size of a file is the record length multiplied by the
blocking factor. MPE permits block sizes up to 32,000 words, but Suprtool
restricts the total block size. When copying an MPE file, the maximum block
size of either the input or output file is 14,336 words. If Suprtool detects an
input or output file with a block size larger than 14,336 words, it prints one
of the following error message:
The input blocksize is greater than
14336 words
The output blocksize is greater than
14336 words
Calculator
Suprtool, Suprlink and Stexport and Dbedit treat any line that
begins with an equal sign ("=") as an expression to be evaluated. To
add two numbers together:
>=125+512
Result= 637.0
An expression consists of numbers and
operators. The operators can be addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication
(*), division (/), or exponentiation (**). The value of the expression is
printed immediately.
Any number can be followed by a percent sign (%). The calculator
assumes that you want to qualify the number as a percentage. For example,
>=125*5%
Result= 6.25
A complete description of the Suprtool
calculator is given after the description of the Xeq command.
Chains
A chain is a group of related records in an IMAGE dataset linked by
a key value. The Chain command is used to force Suprtool to use IMAGE
search-paths when reading the input source. The Chain command can also be used
with master datasets, even though master datasets only have one record per key
value.
Control Character
You create a control character by holding down the Control key while
you strike another key. "Y" plus Control generates Control-Y. These
are normally nonprinting characters, but they may do things to your terminal.
For example, Control-G rings the bell.
Suprtool uses control characters for a
number of purposes:
In the Before command, control characters
specify the edit functions: Control-D for delete, Control-B for before, etc.
Control-Y stops execution of the current
Suprtool task. Suprtool prints a status report and asks if you would like to
stop the operation.
Control-H causes the cursor to backspace
one position in the current line.
Control-X cancels the current input line.
Control-S pauses a listing that is
printing too fast for you to read.
Control-Q resumes a listing that you have
paused with Control-S.
Database
A database in Suprtool is an IMAGE/3000 database or an SQL database.
A database is specified in the Base or Open command. Several commands (e.g., Get,
Chain, or Select) do not work until a database has been specified. Some
commands only work with IMAGE/3000 databases and other commands only work with
SQL databases.
An IMAGE database consists of datasets
(files) which in turn consist of fields. An SQL database consists of tables or
views, and each table or view consists of columns. In Suprtool, a column name
can be used anywhere that a field-name is used. The advantage of using a
database is that information about the database is automatically available to
Suprtool.
The Form command shows the database
structure.
Dataset
A dataset is a file within an IMAGE database. The Form command
provides path information in DBSCHEMA format, including entry length and
blocking factor on the dataset description. Use Get dataset to access the data
within a specific IMAGE dataset.
Datasets have an implied structure that
you specify when you create the database. Use the Form command to obtain a list
of fields in the current dataset. Fields are used by other Suprtool commands
and they are described below.
Errors
Errors
are messages printed by Suprtool indicating a fatal problem in the task which
prevents it from completing. In batch mode, errors cause the job to terminate.
Error messages are further described in Appendix A.
Field
A field is a portion of a record. When you access an IMAGE dataset,
this makes Suprtool aware of the IMAGE fields in the dataset. When you access
an SQL database with the Select command, Suprtool is aware of each column name
(fields and columns are synonymous in Suprtool). The Define command allows you
to define new fields or redefine existing fields to have new sizes or
data-types. Use Define to get at bytes of interest within existing fields and
to give them an appropriate name. Then you can refer to the defined field in
other commands (e.g., Extract, If, etc.). The following commands all contain a
field:
>if balance>10000
>sort account
>extract a,b
Filename
A filename is any valid
filename and is used in Suprtool commands to identify the input source, specify
the output destination, or to specify an external file to be accessed in the
Table or Use command. File names may be enclosed in quotes. The following
commands all contain file names:
>input xyz
>output *out
>use supruse
>input "xyz"
MPE/iX File Names
Suprtool
accepts MPE/iX variables in file names. This allows users to create flexible
file names using MPE/iX expressions. This features works in Suprtool/V or
Suprtool/iX, but only when running on MPE/iX. Underscores are not permitted in
variables that are to be substituted for file names. Any Suprtool command that
accepts a file name supports variables in the file name. The following example
creates an MPE/iX variable called 'today' with today's date in yymmdd format.
Suprtool writes the output to a file that starts with the letter P and ends
with today's date:
:setvar today hpyear * 10000 + hpmonth
* 100 + hpdate
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input mpefile
>output P!today
>exit
MPE Command
If
Suprtool does not recognize a command as one of its own, it treats the command
as an MPE command. Examples of MPE commands are LISTF to get a list of your
files; TELL to send messages to other users; SHOWTIME to get the date and time;
SHOWJOB to get a list of other users on the computer, and STREAM to start a job.
>showjob
In Suprtool/V only MPE commands allowed in "break" mode
are allowed. This means that commands such as RUN cannot be executed from
within Suprtool/V. Suprtool/V will not execute any User Defined Commands or
command files. Suprtool/iX can execute any MPE/iX command, UDC or command file.
POSIX File names
Suprtool accepts POSIX file names in any command that accepts MPE
file names. File names starting with "/", "./", or
"../" are treated as POSIX file names. All other file names are
assumed to be MPE file names. MPE file names are upshifted and POSIX file names
are not. POSIX file names are limited to a maximum of 239 characters. Here are
some examples of POSIX file names:
:hello david,mgr.dev,david
:NEWDIR SUBDIR
:CHDIR SUBDIR
:run suprtool.pub.robelle
>input ./file
>verify input
/DEV/DAVID/SUBDIR/file
Strings
Suprtool expects all strings to be surrounded by a pair of single or
double quotes (' or "). When Suprtool knows the length of a field, it pads
strings with trailing spaces. For example,
>define long,1,125 {125 character field}
>extract long="abcef" {Suprtool adds 120 spaces}
>if long="abcde" {Suprtool checks for trailing spaces}
Suprtool accepts the null string. Suprtool
pads it with spaces, so this is an easy way to see if a field is blank:
>if name = "" {if name is blank}
One problem with any tool that accepts
strings is how to include a quote mark inside the string. Suprtool offers two
solutions:
1. Use the opposite quote mark (e.g.,
"don't").
2. Whenever two quote marks appear in a
string, they are treated as a single quote (e.g., 'don''t').
Subscript
A subscript is used to specify one-of-many fields in a repeated
item. Within IMAGE it is possible to specify repeated fields. For example:
costs, 5J2;
The item COSTS consists of five double
integers. You select one element of a compound field by specifying a subscript
in parentheses (the first element is 1, not 0). For example, if you wanted to
select the input records where the second cost was greater than 10000, you
would use:
>if costs(2) > 10000
The (2) portion of the command is the
subscript. The default subscript is the first sub-item for Total, Define, Sort,
and If, but the entire compound item for Extract. Table does not allow
subscripts -- it always uses (1). The If command has another syntax, using up
to three subscripts, allowing you to refer to subfields without Define (see the
If command for details).
Tables
Tables are created with the Table command and they are used for
testing in the If and Chain commands. Tables are used by the $lookup function
of the If command. Use tables when you wish to check a data field for many
different test values. You may also use tables to specify the records to search
for with the Chain command.
Table can also mean a table from an SQL
database.
Third-Party Indexing
In
MPE/iX 4.0, Hewlett-Packard added support for third-party indexing (TPI) to
TurboIMAGE/XL. TPI is a seamless interface to the indexing products of Dynamic
Information Systems Corporation (DISC) and Bradmark Technologies Inc. Their
products, Omnidex and Superdex, respectively offer generic and keyword search
capabilities, through the standard interface in TurboIMAGE/XL.
TPI is only available to users on MPE/iX 4.0 or later. The database
must be indexed using either Omnidex or Superdex, and must be enabled for
indexing using DBUTIL.
If a database has TPI enabled, Suprtool
can take advantage of the generic search capability in the Chain command. The
Form command shows the third-party indexes that correspond to IMAGE fields and
any byte-type indexes that do not correspond to an IMAGE field. MPE
automatically maintains the indexes as Suprtool adds, deletes, and modifies
records.
Warnings
Warnings are messages produced by Suprtool to let you know about
nonfatal conditions that might affect your task. Some common warning messages
and their meanings are described in Appendix A.
Yes or No
When Suprtool asks a question that requires a YES or NO answer,
"Y", "OUI", "JA", and "SI" are accepted
as "YES", and any other answer is considered "NO".
Special Characters
Certain non-alpha and non-numeric characters like > and : have
special meaning within Suprtool. See the descriptions that follow. As well, the
term "special" designates a class of characters in the If command.
* Means $Stdinx / $Stdlist or :File Command
* in the Input command means to read input from $stdinx (MPE only).
* in the Output command means to write the output to $stdlist. * at the front
of a file name points back to an MPE :File command.
>input * {MPE only}
>output *
>:file t;dev=tape {MPE only}
>input *t
= Means "Equals" or Calculate
= in
the If command means "EQUALS":
>if customer = "40832"
= in commands means calculate something:
=10+25
Result= 35.0
= in the Input command means that the
input file has exactly the same format and fields as the specified IMAGE
dataset:
>input acctfile=actrans
= in the Output command means to write the
sorted input file back into itself.
>input myfile; key 1,10
>output=input {MPE only}
< Means "Less Than"
<
in the If command means is one field "less than" another field or
constant value:
>if balance < 10000
By combining < and =, you get
"less than or equals":
>if balance <= 10000
> Means "Greater Than" or "Enter
Command"
>
is used for two purposes in Suprtool:
As the Suprtool prompt character (e.g.,
>Input actrec)
To mean greater than in an If command (e.g., if balance>10000).
Combining > and =, gives >= for "greater than or equal to".
<> Means "Not Equals"
In the
If command, use the two characters <> to mean "not equals":
>if status <> "01"
== Means "Matches Pattern"
In the
If command, use the two characters == when you want to check a field for a
pattern of characters. For example, to select records where the customer name
contains the word "THOMPSON" somewhere, use:
>if name == "@THOMPSON@"
>< Means "Mismatches Pattern"
In the
If command, use the two characters >< when you want to select records
that fail to match a pattern of characters:
>if address ><
"@CANADA@"
@ Means "Match Anything" in a Pattern
The
At-Sign character (@) is used in patterns to indicate that Suprtool should
accept anything in that position. For example:
>if name == "@ROBERT@"
The @ matches <null>
("ROBERT" is a valid match); it matches one character
("ROBERTA" is a valid match); it matches multiple characters
("ROBERT M. GREEN" and "The ROBERT E. LEE" are valid
matches).
# Means Number (in Patterns) or Prompt Character for the
Edit Command
# is
used in patterns to match a single numeric character:
>if type=="REC##" {look for "REC" followed by 2
digits}
# is
used by the Edit command on MPE to prompt for commands:
>edit {MPE only}
#list d-inventory
# is used in the Get and Input commands to read every n-th record
? Means Alphanumeric (in Patterns) or Prompt for Database
Password
? is
used in patterns to match a single alphabetic or numeric character:
>if type=="BASE??"{look
for "BASE" plus 2 alphanumerics}
? is
used in the Base and Put commands to force Suprtool to prompt for the database
password in either session mode or batch mode:
>base store,5,? {prompt for database password}
Password > {password not echoed}
& Means Escape (in Patterns) or Continue Command Line
& is used in patterns to match one of the special pattern
characters. For example, the #-character matches a single numeric character. If
you need to look for the #-character itself, you would specify &# in the
pattern:
>if type=="REC&#" {look for "REC" followed by
"#"}
& is used to continue a command line.
You may enter commands on multiple input lines by putting an "&"
continuation character at the end of the line:
>if status="20" and
& {continue the If command}
state="AZ","CA","OR" {select several states}
: Means O/S Commands or Bit Selection
Colon (:) at the start of a command line indicates an operating
system command:
>:listf
>:ls
Colon (:) is used in the If command for
bit selections:
>define bitfield,1,2,logical
>if bitfield.(4:2)=3
! Means O/S Commands
! at
the start of a command line indicates an operating system command. This only
works on Suprtool/UX.
>!du
>!ls
; Means Multiple Commands
Semicolon (;) is used to string several Suprtool commands together
on a single line:
>input a;output b;xeq {complete "task" is in one line}
, Means a List
Comma (,) in Suprtool commands is used to separate parameters:
>base actrec.data,3 {open the database exclusively}
>key 1,4,double {specify a double-integer key}
>if acct=764523,456732,98765
Commas are optional in some Suprtool
commands (e.g., Output), but are required in others (e.g., Extract).
, is the abbreviation for the Redo
command.
,. is the abbreviation for the Do command.
,, is the abbreviation for the Listredo
command.
" or ' Means String
Quotes
(" or ') are the string delimiters in Suprtool (IF NAME="BOB").
Strings that start with " must end with ".
>if name='BOB' {' is the string delimiter here}
( Means Start Parameter
Left parenthesis "(" is used to specify a subscript (see
subscript below) or to select a specific range of input record numbers. Left
parenthesis always comes with a right parenthesis.
>input actrec.data(10/20) {choose
records 10 through 20}
>total budget(2) {total second repeated field}
) Means End Parameter
Right parenthesis ")" is used to complete a subscript or a
selected range of record numbers. Right parenthesis always comes with left
parenthesis.
% Means Percentage
In the
Numrecs command, use % to indicate the number of output records as a percentage
of the input file size.
>numrecs 10%
/ Means Range of Records
Slash (/) in the Input and Get commands means a range of record
numbers.
>input cat.dog.mouse(1000/2000)
\ Means Range of Fields
Backslash (\) in the Extract command means a range of fields.
>extract account \ rating
, means a list................................................................................ 490
: for O/S commands.................................................................... 489
! for HP-UX commands............................................................. 489
! for O/S commands.................................................................... 489
? (prompt for database password)...................... 112, 220, 489
? means alphanumeric (pattern)............................................. 489
' means string.............................................................................. 490
" means string.............................................................................. 490
"closed" tables............................................................................ 254
( means start parameter.............................................................. 490
) means end parameter............................................................... 490
{ start command line comment............................. 283, 336, 379
} end command line comment............................... 283, 336, 379
@ matches anything................................................................. 488
* means $stdinx / $stdlist / file command........................... 487
*tape, needs =reply................................................................... 193
/ means range of records........................................ 167, 192, 490
\ means range of fields............................................................... 142
& continuation character...................................... 335, 378, 489
& means escape (pattern)......................................................... 489
# as the Dbedit prompt character................................. 335,
488
# changing the prompt character........................................... 356
# matches number....................................................................... 488
# means every n-th record..................................... 167, 192, 489
% means percentage.................................................................. 490
^ means character constant............................................. 140, 175
< means less than....................................................................... 488
<> means not equal to............................................................... 488
= means calculator............................................................ 336,
487
= means equal to......................................................................... 487
= set name parameter............................................... 160,
191, 487
== means matches pattern........................................................ 488
=Input option of Output.......................................................... 214
> changing the prompt character........................................... 246
> is the prompt character.......................................................... 488
> means greater than.................................................................. 488
>< means doesn't match pattern............................................. 488
$abs function..................................................................... 145,
178
$atoe, Extract function............................................................. 160
$Clean function.......................................................................... 120
$Counter function..................................................................... 146
$date function................................................................... 140,
182
$date, how it works..................................................................... 95
$days............................................................................................. 184
$days function............................................................................ 141
$etoa, Extract function............................................................. 160
$file, Total command................................................................. 259
$FindClean function................................................................. 180
$invalid................................................................................. 97,
183
$lookup data, If command................................................. 32, 173
$lookup function....................................................................... 173
$lookup, performance............................................................... 174
$lower................................................................................. 148,
181
$ltrim................................................................................... 148,
181
$null file............................................................................. 219,
220
$null, SQL................................................................................... 174
$number function............................................................. 231,
234
$read function............................................................................. 188
$rtrim................................................................................... 148,
181
$signed function........................................................................ 152
$stddate.............................................................................. 141,
183
$stdinx file.................................................................. 48,
191, 487
$stdlist file........................................................ 48,
207, 214, 487
$Subtotal function.................................................................... 146
$today function................................................................ 140,
183
$today, how it works.................................................................. 95
$Total function........................................................................... 146
$trim..................................................................................... 148,
181
$truncate function............................................................ 145,
178
$upper................................................................................. 148,
181
4096, record size.......................................................................... 75
4GLs...................................................................................... 79,
410
A4-size paper.............................................................................. 205
aammdd date format............................................................. 96,
196
abbreviating commands............................... 107,
283, 335, 378
Abort option on Exit............................................. 135,
296, 384
absolute field definition.......................................................... 121
absolute value function.................................................. 145, 178
accessing Speed Demon........................................................... 417
accuracy in numeric expressions........................................... 177
Add command.................................................................... 111,
342
Add command, locking............................................................ 332
Add Dates.................................................................................... 142
adding records to a dataset..................................................... 220
All option, Dbedit.................................................................... 338
Allbase applications................................................................... 54
Allbase database........................................................................ 212
Allbase date and time.................................................................. 55
Allbase, restrictions.................................................................... 55
alphanumeric string test.......................................................... 179
alternate values................................................................. 173,
254
alternatives to the If command................................................ 171
Analyzing Performance Data.................................................. 103
AND operator............................................................................. 172
appending to a file........................................................... 210,
248
appending, Hpmodify............................................................... 224
application systems..................................................................... 89
APS, date format......................................................................... 196
arithmetic expressions.................................................... 144,
177
arithmetic trap............................................................................. 271
Arithmetic, Set option.............................................................. 230
ascending order................................................................ 200,
252
ASCII option....................................................................... 43,
217
ASK MANMAN date selection............................................ 196
ASK option................................................................................. 216
assertion errors........................................................................... 443
asterisk....................................................................................... see
*
at sign (@) in patterns............................................................. 488
attached printer.......................................................................... 208
backslash..................................................................................... 490
Base command............................................................ 74,
112, 262
Base command, default mode................................................... 243
base name parameter......................................................... 112,
220
Baseclose, Set option............................................................... 230
batch.................................................................... 50,
277, 364, 482
batch job to detect holidays................................................... 187
batch passwords................................................................. 50,
112
Batch vs Interactive.................................................................. 270
Before command............................................. 115,
286, 343, 381
Binary to Ascii, formatted....................................................... 157
bit extracts................................................................................... 176
Blank fill,extract command...................................................... 139
block size..................................................................................... 482
Blocksize, Set option............................................................... 230
BOT and BACKSPACE error................................................ 238
braces...................................................... 108,
283, 284, 336, 379
Bradmark......................................................................................... 89
B-tree support............................................................................. 165
B-trees............................................................................................. 59
Buffer, Set option....................................................................... 230
built-in file names............................................................ 273,
360
BY-part of the Join command.................................................. 390
BY-part of the Link command................................................ 392
byte fields, comparing.............................................................. 179
bytelen parameter............................................................. 121,
200
byteposition parameter................................................... 121,
200
C invocation of Suprtool......................................................... 466
calculator...................................... 109,
267, 285, 336, 380, 483
Calendar intrinsic, date format............................................... 196
calling STExport........................................................................ 137
calling Suprlink............................................................... 202,
473
calling Suprtool.................................................................... 19,
74
Century and Date Cutoff.......................................................... 186
Chain command.......................................................................... 117
Chain vs. Get speed.................................................................. 103
Chain, Btrees............................................................................... 118
chained access............................................................................ 117
chains............................................................................................ 483
Change command....................................................................... 344
Change command, locking...................................................... 332
changing built-in file names......................................... 273, 360
character constants.......................................................... 140,
175
Chronos................................................................................. 93,
197
CI variables................................................ 75,
78, 250, 314, 399
circular files................................................................................... 64
CIUPDATE, see critical-item update................................... 332
classic real numbers.................................................................. 298
Clean............................................................................................. 231
Clean command................................................................. 120,
312
Clean command, shift left......................................................... 120
Clean command, STExport....................................................... 288
CleanChar.................................................................................... 231
CleanChar, Set............................................................................ 312
Cleaning data.............................................................................. 150
CM to NM KSAM, conversion................................................ 62
COBOL define of P28.............................................................. 132
COBOL example for Speed Demon....................................... 431
COBOL invocation of Suprlink............................................ 473
COBOL invocation of Suprtool............................................ 451
code overflow error................................................................... 189
Cognos, date fields.................................................................... 196
colon....................................................... 109,
284, 336, 379, 489
colon for MPE commands........................................................ 485
column headings, List command.............................................. 44
Column Headings,Html command......................................... 305
Columns command..................................................................... 289
combining commands on same line....................................... 107
comma.................................................................................. 335,
490
command files................................................. 109,
284, 336, 380
command line..................................................................... 335,
378
commands.................................................................. 280,
330, 335
commands, formatting............................................................... 280
commands, multiple................................................................... 107
comments................................................................... 283,
336, 379
Comparing against Key and Data.................................. 32, 173
comparing strings as numbers.................................................. 29
compatibility mode...................................................................... 74
compiling........................................................................... 446,
447
compound items................................................................ 138,
252
condition code........................................................................... 423
configuring Dbedit...................................................................... 50
configuring Suprtool.................................................................. 50
Connect, Oracle Open.............................................................. 243
constants............................................................................ 138,
174
constants in arithmetic expressions............................ 145, 147
constants in the output file..................................................... 138
continuing commands..................................................... 335,
378
control break............................................................................... 260
control characters...................................................................... 483
control record for SPDEDBINIT........................................... 420
control record for Suprtool2................................................... 445
Control-Y................................................. 58,
109, 285, 336, 380
Control-Y problems in Suprtool........................................... 110
conventions................................................................................... 19
convert data for HP-UX.............................................................. 66
Convert Dates to four digits..................................................... 94
convert from binary to ASCII.................................................... 40
converting an SD file......................................................... 70,
373
Converting dates.......................................................................... 97
copying to another database.................................................. 220
count duplicate records........................................................... 130
count parameter................................................................. 167,
192
count qualifying records......................................................... 219
Count, output restrictions...................................................... 132
Counts............................................................................................. 40
creating Suprtool......................................................................... 49
critical fields, changing........................................................... 340
critical-item update............................. 332,
340, 344, 353, 359
data conversion.......................................................................... 152
Data Memory protection trap.................................................... 91
Data option.............................................................. 215,
308, 395
data overflow error.................................................................... 188
database editing......................................................................... 134
database maintenance.................................................................. 58
database parameter..................................................................... 483
database, open mode........................................................ 243,
409
database, opening...................................................................... 112
database, output......................................................................... 220
database, password................................................ 112,
220, 409
database, remote.................................................................. 74,
113
dataset parameter........................................................................ 484
dataset, end-of-file..................................................................... 235
dataset, highwater mark........................................................... 235
dataset, input..................................................................... 117,
167
dataset, locking............................................................................ 57
dataset, output............................................................................ 220
dataset, remote Jumbos................................................................ 60
datasets greater than 4Gb.......................................................... 59
data-types........................................................................... 122,
279
Date command............................................................................. 290
Date command, invalid dates.................................................. 291
Date command, separator character....................................... 290
date constants............................................................................. 182
date format in List............................................................ 206,
240
date format, Date command...................................................... 290
Date Formats, Item Command.................................................... 68
date function of Extract............................................................ 140
date function of If....................................................................... 182
date limits................................................................. 142,
186, 195
Date option................................................................................. 237
date selection....................................................................... 29,
182
date selection by month............................................................. 30
date selection with ASK MANMAN.................................. 196
date selection, specific day........................................................ 29
date selection, today................................................................... 29
Date, Set List.............................................................................. 240
Date, Set option................................................................ 232,
233
Dates and Decimal places........................................................ 279
dates in the output file............................................................. 140
dates, defining............................................................................ 194
dates, relative.............................................................................. 182
dates, select by year..................................................................... 30
Date-types, Suprtool and Powerhouse.................................. 83
days function..................................................................... 141,
184
DB-14.................................................................................. 442,
443
DB-32.................................................................................. 442,
443
DBCONTROL intrinsic....................................... 126,
221, 234
Dbedit............................................................................................. 18
Dbedit performance................................................................... 104
Dbedit, decimal points............................................................. 332
Dbedit, default configuration................................................... 50
DBGET, using............................................................................ 168
DBUTIL.................................................... 89,
126, 221, 234, 486
ddd dates...................................................................................... 197
ddd, date format.......................................................................... 197
Decimal command...................................................................... 292
decimal places...................................................................... 39,
197
decimal places, Chain command............................................. 117
decimal places, constant values............................................. 198
decimal places, Dbedit............................................................. 332
decimal places, defining........................................................... 194
decimal places, Extract command........................................... 139
decimal places, If command...................................................... 176
Decimal Places, Item command................................................. 68
decimal places, List command................................................ 203
decimal places, Table command.............................................. 255
default field filling in Suprlink.................................... 391,
393
default input file.................................................................. 49,
193
default output file......................................................................... 49
default processing..................................................................... 136
Defer, Set option........................................................................ 234
deferred output in IMAGE................................... 126, 221, 234
Define command................................................................ 121,
262
Define commmand, introduction.............................................. 26
definition parameter.................................................................. 121
delete all records warning....................................................... 127
Delete command............................................. 110,
126, 241, 345
Delete command, locking........................................................ 332
Delete command, performance....................................... 104, 126
deleting duplicate records............................................... 36, 131
deleting entries.......................................................................... 126
deleting entries, recovery................................................. 58, 126
deleting non-unique duplicate records................................. 37
deleting records............................................................................ 33
deleting records safely................................................................ 58
delimited output files........................................................ 78,
218
Delimiter command.................................................................... 293
Delimiter, maximum length...................................................... 329
Demon program.......................................................................... 429
Demon.Pub.Robelle.................................................................. 429
Demon.SuprJob.Robelle.......................................................... 413
DemonUSL.Pub.Robelle......................................................... 413
DemonXL.Pub.Robelle............................................................ 421
Desc parameter.................................................................. 200,
252
descending order.............................................................. 200,
252
DISC.................................................................................. 89,
90, 91
disc space..................................................................................... 248
disc space, reduced............................................................. 71,
210
display constants...................................................................... 139
display fields, maintaining the sign..................................... 152
Display option........................................................................... 217
distributed systems............................................................ 74,
113
division by zero............................................................... 145,
177
Do command................................................... 128,
294, 346, 383
documentation.............................................................................. 19
double quotes............................................................................. 309
double-sided printing.............................................................. 205
downshifting strings................................................................ 148
Dumponerror, Set option............................................... 110, 234
Duplicate and non-SD files.................................................... 131
Duplicate command................................................................... 129
duplicate field names................................................................ 395
duplicate key, KSAM error..................................................... 110
duplicate keys, order of sort...................................................... 70
duplicate output file name......................................................... 50
Duplicate records...................................................... 34,
129, 221
duplicate records, only............................................................... 35
duplicates, removing................................................................ 129
duplicates, saving..................................................................... 129
duplicating files........................................................................... 49
dynamic dataset expansion..................................................... 163
dynamic date selection............................................................. 186
EBCDIC conversions............................................................... 160
EBCDIC tapes............................................................................... 72
Ecometry installation................................................................. 23
Edit command............................................................................. 134
Edit strings................................................................................. 155
editing databases....................................................................... 134
EditStoperror, Set option........................................................ 235
EDSdate....................................................................................... 196
Else clause of the IF command................................................ 171
else file.......................................................................................... 219
Else option.................................................................................. 215
end-of-file, IMAGE................................................................... 235
endrecord parameter......................................................... 167,
192
Eofread, Set option.................................................................... 235
equal to sign............................................................ 191,
483, 487
Erase option of Output................................................... 376,
395
erasing files........................................................................ 213,
214
error block size........................................................................... 482
error messages in Suprtool............................................ 270, 484
error messages, Speed Demon................................................. 441
error messages, Suprtool2....................................................... 480
error recovery, Suprtool........................................................... 110
error, code overflow.................................................................. 189
error, data overflow................................................................... 188
error, FLIMIT different.............................................................. 168
error, record changed................................................................... 58
escape character.......................................................................... 175
Escape command, STExport.................................................... 295
Euro currency symbol.............................................................. 140
example of Suprlink................................................................... 369
example replacement of DBGET............................................. 417
Exit command........................................ 135,
266, 296, 320, 347
Exit command, importance of.................................................. 444
Exit command, Suprlink................................................. 384,
403
exit with verify........................................................... 48,
276, 363
exiting from batch jobs............................................................. 135
Export command............................................................... 137,
276
Export, using from Suprtool................................................... 276
Expressions................................................................................. 171
Extract command................................................................. 42,
138
Extract command performance................................................. 104
Extract command, decimal places........................................... 139
Extract from a Table................................................................... 151
Extract from Table............................................................. 255,
257
Extract functions and Sort....................................................... 253
Extract functions Duplicate.................................................... 132
extracting a range....................................................................... 142
extracting bits............................................................................. 160
extracting dates.......................................................................... 140
extracting records...................................................................... 171
fast sorting..................................................................................... 71
Fastread, Set option.................................................................. 235
FCOPY program........................................................................... 64
Fflush tool................................................................................... 105
field list........................................................................................ 331
field parameter................................................ 121,
138, 259, 484
field type...................................................................................... 200
Fieldname, Heading command................................................ 301
file access........................................................................................ 63
File command.............................................................................. 348
file equations, output command............................................. 308
file name parameter........................................................... 191,
213
file name, duplicated in batch................................................... 50
file names, built-in........................................................... 273,
360
file parameter, Dbedit................................................................ 337
file record length........................................................................ 219
file system error.......................................................................... 270
Filecode, Set option.................................................................. 235
filename parameter...................................................................... 484
files, same name................................................................. 192,
213
filling unmatched join fields.................................................. 391
filling unmatched link fields.................................................. 393
finding data based on a dataset................................................ 31
finding data based on a file........................................................ 31
finding invalid dates................................................................ 183
Firstrec, Set option............................................................. 92,
236
fixed columns.............................................................................. 309
fixed-length, output file........................................................... 289
flattening an SD file..................................................................... 70
FLIMIT different error............................................................... 168
FLIMIT greater warning.......................................................... 168
Floating command..................................................................... 298
floating sign................................................................................ 316
floating-point numbers............................................................ 298
Form command................................................ 162,
299, 349, 386
Form command, default............................................................. 165
Form command, keywords.............................................. 166,
349
formatting commands................................................................ 280
Formout file..................................................... 165,
300, 349, 387
FORTRAN invocation of Suprtool...................................... 455
four-digit years............................................................................. 93
fourth-generation languages.................................................. 410
FROM-part of Join command.................................................. 390
FROM-part of Link command................................................. 393
FSERR 45.................................................................................... 114
generic search............................................................................. 486
Get command............................................................................... 167
Get command failure.................................................................. 114
Get command, how many records.......................................... 168
Get vs. Chain speed.................................................................. 103
greater than (>)........................................................................... 488
group SL...................................................................................... 416
hanging session, magtape input............................................ 193
Heading command..................................................................... 301
heading, HTML option............................................................ 304
heading, maximum length........................................................ 329
Help command................................................ 170,
273, 303, 350
Help command, Suprlink................................................ 360,
388
Highlights 5.2.............................................................................. 22
Highlights 5.3.............................................................................. 22
Highlights 5.4.............................................................................. 21
Highlights5.1.02......................................................................... 22
highwater mark................................................................. 168,
426
highwater mark, reading to..................................................... 235
holding tables for re-use.......................................................... 255
holiday detection in batch jobs............................................ 187
how many records to read........................................................ 168
how to run................................................................................... 417
how to run, Suprtool................................................................... 24
HowMessy Loadfile.................................................................... 70
HowMessy program.................................................................. 168
HPCalendar, date....................................................................... 197
HPCalendar,date format........................................................... 196
HPDesk program....................................................... 48,
276, 364
Hpmodify editing, examples................................................... 224
HTML command......................................................................... 304
HTML files, maximum size....................................................... 304
IEEE numbers............................................................................. 298
If $lookup.................................................................................... 173
If command................................................................................... 171
If command performance............................................................ 104
If command too long, use $read.............................................. 188
If command too long, use Table.............................................. 254
If command, combining with Chain...................................... 118
If command, decimal places...................................................... 176
If command, prompting for values.......................................... 189
if then else.................................................................................... 219
Ifcheck, Set option..................................................................... 237
Ignore, Set option............................................................ 110,
237
illegal digits (packed or zoned)............................................ 372
IMAGE applications.................................................................. 55
Image, B-Trees............................................................................... 59
IMAGE, Ciupdate option....................................................... 332
IMAGE, end-of-file................................................................... 235
Info= on every activation........................................................... 47
Info= usage........................................................................... 46,
262
Initextents, Set option.............................................................. 237
initializing a field...................................................................... 138
input choices................................................................................. 53
Input command........................................................ 191,
306, 389
input file....................................................................................... 279
input file, maximum block size...................................... 329, 407
input file, maximum fields............................................... 329, 407
input file, maximum record length................................ 329, 407
input files..................................................................................... 367
input key fields................................................................. 306,
389
installation........................................................................ 413,
479
Installation instructions, tape.................................................. 23
Installation instructions, web.................................................. 23
Installing........................................................................................ 23
installing interface into MPE................................................ 479
installing on MPE/iX.............................................................. 414
installing Speed Demon.......................................................... 413
installing STExport.................................................................. 273
installing Suprlink................................................................... 360
Interactive, Set............................................................................ 238
interface routine......................................................................... 479
interface to Suprtool.................................................................... 19
interrupt.............................................................................. 285,
380
intrinsics...................................................................................... 423
introduction to Dbedit............................................................ 330
introduction to Speed Demon................................................ 409
introduction to STExport........................................................ 279
introduction to Suprlink......................................................... 367
invalid dates............................................................... 97,
183, 291
Invalid dates, $stddate............................................................. 141
Invalid Dates, Extract command............................................ 141
invalid stack marker abort....................................................... 110
ISO-8859-1 characters, HTML output................................ 305
Item command........................................................... 194,
237, 262
Itemlock, Set................................................................................ 237
JCW, SuprtoolOutCount........................................................... 50
Job Control Word..................................................... 49,
277, 364
Join................................................................................................... 18
Join command.............................................................................. 390
Join Example............................................................................... 369
join key fields............................................................................. 390
J-type fields, SD files................................................................... 70
Julian dates.................................................................................. 197
Julian day number...................................................................... 141
JulianDay data format............................................................... 196
Jumbo dataset error.................................................................... 113
Jumbo datasets.............................................................................. 59
Key command.............................................................................. 200
key fields, input file......................................................... 306,
389
key fields, join file..................................................................... 390
key fields, link file..................................................................... 392
Key option.................................................................................. 215
Key option, Dbedit................................................................... 338
KLONDIKE............................................................................... 105
KSAM , re-organization............................................................. 61
KSAM files................................................................. 60,
191, 213
KSAM files with lockwords..................................................... 65
KSAM files, linking................................................................. 373
KSAM, locking............................................................................ 60
KSAM, order of sort.................................................................... 70
KSAM, recovering deleted records...................................... 246
KSAM, reuse................................................................................. 63
KSAM, self-describing............................................................... 69
KSAM/V files................................................................................ 61
KSAM/XL, loading faster.......................................................... 62
KSAM/XL, MPE/iX 4.0 and later........................................... 62
labelled tapes....................................................................... 72,
238
landscape output....................................................................... 240
Large Datasets.............................................................................. 59
Large File Datasets...................................................................... 60
LaserJet............................................................................... 204,
240
leading sign................................................................................ 316
less than (<)................................................................................. 488
LFDS............................................................................................... 60
Limit option, Dbedit................................................................ 339
limits within STExport............................................................ 329
limits within Suprlink............................................................. 407
Limits, Set.................................................................................... 238
line printer................................................................................... 214
Link................................................................................................. 18
Link command......................................................... 202,
363, 392
Link file, maximum block size................................................ 407
Link file, maximum fields......................................................... 407
Link file, maximum number of................................................. 407
Link file, maximum record length.......................................... 407
link files in Suprtool................................................................... 70
link key fields............................................................................. 392
Link option................................................................................. 216
Link vs. Query.............................................................................. 67
Linkedit....................................................................................... 447
linking files................................................................................. 368
linking programs.............................................................. 446,
447
list clears screen......................................................................... 204
List command.................................................................... 203,
351
list device.................................................................................... 207
list to Suprlist............................................................................ 207
List, Char option....................................................................... 203
List, Column Headings............................................................ 207
List, Date default....................................................................... 240
List, Date option....................................................................... 206
List, Decimal option................................................................. 203
List, Duplex option.................................................................. 205
List, Heading option................................................................ 207
List, Hex option......................................................................... 203
List, Labels option................................................................... 204
List, Leftjustnum option......................................................... 204
List, Noname option................................................................. 204
List, Norec option..................................................................... 203
List, Noskip option.................................................................. 204
List, Octal option...................................................................... 203
List, Oneperline option........................................................... 204
List, Record option................................................................... 208
List, Rightjustnum option...................................................... 204
List, Standard option............................................................... 206
List, Time default....................................................................... 241
List, Time option....................................................................... 206
List, Title option....................................................................... 205
listing.............................................................................................. 42
listing formats............................................................................. 203
listing labels............................................................................... 204
listing one per line.................................................................... 204
listing with subheadings........................................................ 207
listing without field names..................................................... 204
listing, producing simple reports......................................... 206
listing, suppressing blank lines........................................... 204
Listredo command......................................... 209,
307, 352, 394
literals in the output file.......................................................... 138
loadfile, HowMessy produces.................................................. 70
loading a dataset.......................................................................... 39
Lock, Set option................................................................. 57,
241
locking, each transaction........................................................... 57
locking, IMAGE....................................................... 57,
241, 332
locking, KSAM input................................................................. 60
locking, KSAM output.............................................................. 60
lockwords.................................................................................... 449
lockwords on files....................................................................... 65
long expressions........................................................................ 188
Lotus 1-2-3................................................................................. 218
low values................................................................................... 175
lower-case.......................................................................... 148,
181
LP device..................................................................................... 208
LP, Set option............................................................................ 356
MACS, date format..................................................................... 196
mailing labels................................................................................ 45
maintenance of databases........................................................... 58
MakeAbsent, Set option.......................................................... 242
mapped file access in STExport.............................................. 312
mapped file access in Suprlink............................................... 398
Mapped, Set option......................................................... 312,
398
master dataset expansion.................................................. 59, 163
match pattern............................................................................... 488
maximum block size in Suprtool............................................ 482
maximum delimiter length........................................................ 329
maximum heading length......................................................... 329
maximum input block size.............................................. 329, 407
maximum input record length........................................ 329, 407
maximum link block size.......................................................... 407
maximum link fields................................................................... 407
maximum link files..................................................................... 407
maximum link record length.................................................... 407
maximum output fields.............................................................. 408
maximum output record length..................................... 329, 408
maximum size, HTML files....................................................... 304
MDX....................................................................................... 59,
163
means range of fields................................................................. 490
measuring performance............................................................. 104
message files.................................................................................. 64
missing comma, error....................................................... 145,
147
MIT update.................................................................................. 413
mixed case comparisons........................................................... 181
mode parameter.................................................................. 112,
220
mode-0 returns version number.................................... 425, 428
mode-2 prints statistics........................................................... 428
mode-3 concurrent database access...................................... 425
Modify command........................................................................ 353
Modify command, locking....................................................... 332
modulo operator............................................................... 144,
177
moving STExport around........................................................ 273
moving Suprlink around......................................................... 360
moving Suprtool around......................................................... 448
MPE commands.................................... 109,
284, 336, 379, 485
MPE commands, disabling access..................... 238, 276, 363
MPE files........................................................................................ 63
MPE files with lockwords........................................................ 65
MPE files, linking..................................................................... 373
MPE V performance................................................................... 102
MPE XL........................................................................ see
MPE/iX
MPE, restricting..................................................... 238,
276, 363
MPE/iX and Speed Demon............................................ 414,
421
MPE/iX commands.............................. 109,
284, 336, 380, 485
MPE/iX file names..................................................................... 484
MPE/iX variables........................................................................ 75
MPE/iX, performance......................................................... 74,
102
MPE/iX, prefetch.............................................................. 244,
410
multidataset access...................................................................... 18
multiple commands per line................................. 107, 335, 489
multiple output files................................................................. 219
multiple search values.............................................................. 254
native language support................................................... 71, 242
native mode, performance........................................................... 74
negative value............................................................................ 152
Netbase............................................................................... 231,
415
network services................................................................. 74,
113
NLS option, Set command....................................................... 242
no quotes..................................................................................... 309
NOBUF/MR access..................................................................... 63
non-collating dates................................................................... 186
nonprinting characters............................................................. 175
non-SD Files and duplicate.................................................... 131
not equal to (<>)........................................................................ 488
NOT operator.............................................................................. 172
NS/3000................................................................................ 74,
113
Nuggets........................................................................................ 105
null values................................................................................... 175
Num option................................................................................. 215
Num,Data option....................................................................... 216
Num,Key option........................................................................ 216
Num,Query option.................................................................... 216
number function......................................................................... 154
number sign (#) in patterns..................................................... 488
Numbug........................................................................................ 243
Numbug, Set option.................................................................. 243
numeric bytes, Suprtool........................................................... 176
numeric constants...................................................................... 174
numeric conversion, If command............................................ 177
numeric expressions.................................................................. 144
numeric justification................................................................. 204
numeric string test..................................................................... 179
Numeric to Byte conversion................................................... 155
numeric truncation.................................................................... 178
Numeric-value option, Dbedit............................................... 338
Numrecs command..................................................................... 210
numrecs parameter................................................................. 71,
72
offset parameter........................................................................... 121
Omnidex............................................. 89,
90, 127, 221, 231, 486
OmniQuest..................................................................................... 91
Open command........................................................................... 212
option parameter, Dbedit......................................................... 338
optional command name........................................................... 201
optional Join option................................................................. 391
optional Link option............................................................... 393
OR operator................................................................................. 172
Oracle date format...................................................................... 197
Oracle dates....................................................................... 193,
290
out of disc space.................................................................. 71,
210
output choices.............................................................................. 53
Output command..................................................... 213,
308, 395
Output file format............................................................. 215,
289
output file name duplicated............................................. 50, 482
Output file size........................................................................... 214
output file, maximum fields...................................................... 408
output file, maximum record length............................. 329, 408
output file, Suprlink................................................................. 368
output filecode........................................................................... 235
output format............................................................................... 325
output limits with Count and Total..................................... 132
output record format.................................................................. 404
Output, Append option........................................................... 213
Output, ASCII option....................................................... 43,
217
Output, ASK option................................................................. 216
Output, Data option.............................................. 215,
308, 395
Output, Display option........................................................... 217
Output, Else option.................................................................. 215
Output, Erase option................................................................ 213
Output, Key option.................................................................. 215
Output, Link option................................................................. 216
Output, Num option................................................................. 215
Output, Num,Data option....................................................... 216
Output, Num,Key option........................................................ 216
Output, Num,Query option.................................................... 216
output, number of records................................................... 50, 51
Output, PRN option................................................................. 218
Output, Query option.............................................................. 216
Output, Temp option................................................................ 213
overflow....................................................................................... 132
overpunches, not used............................................................. 174
overview of Dbedit................................................................... 330
overwriting files........................................................................ 214
packed constants....................................................................... 139
packed fields, maintaining the sign...................................... 152
packed-decimal fields............................................................... 123
packed-decimal, illegal digits................................................ 372
page headings in List............................................................... 205
parameters, Dbedit commands................................................ 337
parentheses........................................................................ 172,
490
Parm= values for STExport...................................................... 277
Parm= values for Suprlink....................................................... 364
Parm= values for Suprtool......................................................... 51
Parm=0 in Speed Demon.......................................................... 429
Parm=1 in Speed Demon.......................................................... 429
Parm=16 in Suprtool................................................................... 49
Parm=3 in Speed Demon.......................................................... 430
Parm=32 in STExport............................................................... 276
Parm=32 in Suprlink................................................................ 364
Parm=32 in Suprtool................................................................... 48
Parm=4 in Suprtool..................................................................... 46
Parm=64 in STExport............................................................... 276
Parm=64 in Suprlink................................................................ 363
Parm=64 in Suprtool................................................................... 48
Parm=8 in Suprtool..................................................................... 47
Parm=8192 in STExport.......................................................... 276
Parm=8192 in Suprlink........................................................... 363
Pascal example for Speed Demon........................................... 436
Pascal invocation of Suprtool............................................... 468
password in batch.............................................................. 50,
112
password parameter......................................................... 112,
220
password upshifted................................................................... 112
paths, IMAGE detail datasets................................................ 117
pattern matching..................................................... 180,
244, 488
pausing for user.......................................................................... 264
PC files.................................................................................. 78,
218
PCL option, Set List....................................................... 204,
240
percent sign....................................................................... 483,
490
Performance Eloquence............................................................ 235
performance issues..................................................................... 102
performance of Dbedit............................................................... 331
performance of Speed Demon.................................................. 104
performance of STExport.......................................................... 280
performance of Suprtool........................................................... 104
Performance, Suprlink.............................................................. 371
performance, when sorting...................................................... 103
permanent and temporary files................................................ 213
permanent and tempory files................................................... 192
Permanent redo........................................................ 246,
312, 398
Persistent redo........................................................ 246,
312, 398
personal computers...................................................................... 78
PHdate option, Item command............................................... 196
positive value............................................................................. 152
POSIX file names....................................................................... 485
PowerHouse.................................................................................. 79
PowerHouse applications......................................................... 79
PowerHouse dates.................................................................... 196
PowerHouse define of P28..................................................... 132
PowerHouse subfiles............................................... 80,
375, 395
Prefetch............................................................................... 242,
410
preformatted, HTML option.................................................... 304
prep, segmenter........................................................................... 446
Printer Command Language................................................... 240
printer, attached to terminal.................................................... 208
printing reports................................................................... 43,
207
privileged file violation................................................. 114, 169
Privmode, Set option................................................................ 245
PRN option.......................................................................... 78,
218
processing selections................................................................. 53
progress messages..................................................................... 245
prompt character......................................................................... 488
Prompt, Set option........................................................... 246,
356
prompting using Quiz................................................................ 88
pseudo-batch tasks................................................................... 482
pub SL.......................................................................................... 415
Put command............................................................ 110,
220, 241
Put command, performance............................................. 104, 221
Q command......................................................................... 222,
354
Qedit program................................ 79,
115, 275, 286, 297, 343
Qedit program and Suprlink................................ 362, 381, 385
Qedit program as parent process.................................... 47, 136
Qhelp................................................................ 170,
303, 350, 388
QSCHEMA definitions.............................................................. 85
QShow............................................................................................ 86
QTP vs. Quiz................................................................................. 81
QTP, PowerHouse.................................................................... 375
QUERY "numbers" format....................................................... 216
Query All option not supported........................................... 349
Query option.............................................................................. 216
QUERY program.......................................................................... 92
Query vs Link............................................................................... 67
question mark, database password.............................. 112, 220
question, delete all records..................................................... 127
Quick help...................................................... 170,
303, 350, 388
Quick: generating Suprtool commands................................. 88
Quiet, Set option....................................................................... 356
Quiz report writer............................................ 79,
375, 393, 395
quote characters......................................................................... 174
Quote command.......................................................................... 309
quotes, double............................................................................ 309
quotes, none................................................................................ 309
quotes, single............................................................................. 309
random sampling.............................................................. 167,
192
range of fields.............................................................................. 142
range, extracting......................................................................... 142
read only mode........................................................................... 238
reading datasets............................................................................ 55
record changed error.................................................................... 58
record format, output................................................................... 42
Record Mode, List option....................................................... 208
record number selection................................................. 167, 192
record number, IMAGE............................................................ 167
record number, KSAM.............................................................. 192
record number, MPE................................................................. 192
record number, Output............................................................. 215
record number, XSORT............................................................. 236
records, not qualifying............................................................. 219
records, number of qualifying................................................. 219
Recover, Set option................................................................... 246
redo command.......................................... 27,
223, 310, 355, 396
Redo, number of commands.................................. 223, 310, 396
Redo, Set................................................................... 246,
312, 398
reduced output........................................................................... 240
Reflection....................................................................................... 79
Related option, Dbedit............................................................ 339
relative dates............................................................................... 182
relative dates, notes.................................................................. 185
relative field definitions.......................................................... 121
remote database................................................................. 112,
169
remote systems..................................................................... 74,
113
remote systems FOPENs......................................................... 114
removing bad characters.......................................................... 288
removing spaces............................................................... 148,
181
repeated fields............................................................................. 175
repeated fields, Extract command........................................... 139
repeating commands.................................................................... 27
reports............................................................................................. 43
Reset command........................................................ 226,
311, 397
Reset, Set option........................................................................ 356
Resolving Variables................................................. 78,
314, 399
restrictions in Dbedit............................................................... 330
restrictions in Speed Demon.................................................. 409
RIO files.......................................................................................... 64
Roman-8 characters, HTML output...................................... 305
Roman-8 vs. ASCII.................................................................... 205
RPG, programming language.................................................... 92
run parameters............................................................................. 448
running STExport...................................................................... 275
running Suprlink....................................................................... 362
running Suprtool......................................................................... 46
running totals............................................................................... 41
scientific format.......................................................................... 298
SD files............................................. 25,
see self-describing files
SD Files, restrictions.................................................................. 68
SD KSAM files............................................................................. 69
SDUnix........................................................................................... 66
search criteria.............................................................................. 337
Select by list of values................................................................ 30
Select command.......................................................................... 227
Select command, Allbase rows............................................... 230
Select command, Oracle rows................................................. 243
Select menu processor.............................................. 47,
275, 362
Select performance..................................................................... 227
Select, Long commands............................................................ 227
selecting multiple values........................................................ 173
selecting records........................................................................ 171
selecting records, database........................................................ 27
selection by date........................................................................ 182
selection criteria........................................................................... 28
selection logic............................................................................ 368
selection using arithmetic....................................................... 177
self describing files, field name limit....................................... 67
self-describing file format............................................... 325, 404
self-describing files........................ 66,
67, 131, 162, 216, 368
self-describing KSAM files....................................................... 69
semicolon..................................................................................... 335
semicolon means multiple commands................................... 489
separator, dates........................................................................... 290
serial vs. chained read....................................................... 56,
117
session............................................................................................ 79
session mode............................................................................... 482
Set Allbase.................................................................................. 230
Set Arithmetic............................................................................. 230
Set Baseclose.............................................................................. 230
Set Blocksize.............................................................................. 230
Set Buffer...................................................................................... 230
Set command, Dbedit................................................................ 356
Set command, STExport............................................................ 312
Set command, Suprlink............................................................. 398
Set command, Suprtool............................................................. 228
Set CurrencySymbol................................................................. 231
Set Date........................................................................................ 233
Set Date Cutoff........................................................... 94,
186, 232
Set Date Forcecentury....................................................... 94,
233
Set DecimalSymbol................................................................... 234
Set Defer........................................................... 104,
126, 221, 234
Set Dumponerror.............................................................. 110,
234
Set EditStoperror....................................................................... 235
Set Eofread................................................................................... 235
Set Fastread................................................................................. 235
Set Filecode................................................................................. 235
Set Firstrec............................................................................ 92,
236
Set Hints...................................................................................... 236
Set Ifcheck.................................................................................... 237
Set Ignore........................................................ 110,
221, 237, 271
Set Itemabbreviatedate............................................................. 237
Set Labelledtaperewind........................................................... 238
Set Limits..................................................................................... 238
Set List PCL...................................................................... 204,
240
Set Lock................................................................................ 57,
241
Set LP, Dbedit............................................................................ 356
Set Mapped........................................................................ 312,
398
set name parameter......................................... 117,
167, 191, 220
Set NLS........................................................................................ 242
Set Openmode............................................................................. 243
Set Oracle..................................................................................... 243
Set Prefetch.................................................................................. 244
Set Privmode............................................................................... 245
Set Progress................................................................................ 245
Set Prompt, Dbedit.................................................................... 356
Set Prompt, Suprtool................................................................ 246
Set Quiet, Dbedit....................................................................... 356
Set Recover.................................................................................. 246
Set Reset, Dbedit....................................................................... 356
Set Sortfast................................................................................... 247
Set Squeeze.................................................................................. 248
Set Statistics, STExport........................................................... 313
Set Statistics, Suprlink............................................................ 399
Set Statistics, Suprtool............................................................ 248
Set Subsystem............................................................................. 248
Set Suspend................................................................................. 249
Set ThousandSymbol................................................................ 249
Set Underline, Dbedit.............................................................. 357
Set Userlabels............................................................................. 249
Set VarSub................................................................................... 250
Set Varsub, STExport...................................................... 314,
399
Set VarsubCompat..................................................................... 250
Set VarSubDebug...................................................... 78,
314, 399
Set Verify, Dbedit...................................................................... 357
Set Warnings.............................................................................. 250
Set Warnings, STExport.......................................................... 314
Set Xltrim..................................................................................... 251
Set XMLtagchar, STExport..................................................... 314
Set ZonedFix, STExport........................................................... 315
SICOGNOS................................................................................. 164
SICOGNOS, Superdex................................................................ 89
Sign command............................................................................. 316
signed function.......................................................................... 152
simple tasks, file........................................................................... 25
single quotes.............................................................................. 309
SL, group..................................................................................... 416
SL, pub......................................................................................... 415
SL, system.......................................................................... 413,
415
slash character............................................................................ 490
Slist234 file................................................................................. 449
Software Research Northwest....................................... 105, 197
son process........................................................ 49,
135, 296, 384
sort break totals......................................................................... 260
Sort command.............................................................................. 252
sort information not retained.................................................. 131
sort keys....................................................................................... 368
sort speed.............................................................................. 71,
103
sort, count...................................................................................... 41
sort, descending........................................................................... 33
sort, multiple keys....................................................................... 33
sort, subtotal................................................................................. 41
Sortfast, Set option.................................................................... 247
sorting datasets................................................................... 56,
252
sorting files................................................................... 39,
70, 200
sorting records,database............................................................ 33
sorting, 4096 record size........................................................... 75
Sortscr file...................................................................................... 71
Spaces command......................................................................... 317
spaces, removing.............................................................. 148,
181
SPDEDBINIT control record................................................. 420
SPDEDBINIT intrinsic........................................................... 425
SPDEDBINIT version number.............................................. 430
SPDEDBSCAN intrinsic........................................................ 427
SPDEDBSHUT intrinsic........................................................ 428
SPDEDBSHUT version number........................................... 430
SPDEEXPLAIN intrinsic...................................................... 424
SPDEPREFETCH JCW........................................................... 410
special characters....................................................................... 487
special string test...................................................................... 179
specifying input................................... 117,
167, 191, 306, 389
Speed Demon................................................................................. 18
Speed Demon error messages.................................................. 441
Speed Demon performance....................................................... 104
Speed Demon vs. Suprtool...................................................... 410
speed of IMAGE extracts.................................................. 56, 409
speed under MPE/iX................................................................ 409
SPEEDWARE invocation of Suprtool............................... 470
SPL invocation of Suprtool................................................... 461
splitting strings......................................................................... 148
splitting strings, unprintables.............................................. 149
spool file errors.......................................................................... 270
SQL database, Allbase rows.................................................. 230
SQL database, Oracle rows..................................................... 243
SQL database, Select command.............................................. 227
SQL database, specifying........................................................ 212
SQL database, structure........................................................... 164
Squeeze, Set option................................................................... 248
SRN, Chronos date............................................................. 93,
197
St2xl.Pub.Robelle........................................................................ 74
startrecord parameter....................................................... 167,
192
Statistics, Set option............................................. 248,
313, 399
status area........................................................................... 423,
443
stddate function................................................................ 141,
183
STExport...................................................................... 18,
137, 218
STExport summary..................................................................... 273
STExport task............................................................................. 275
Stexport.Pub.Robelle............................................................... 137
STExportFullCount.................................................................. 278
STExportOutCount................................................................... 277
STREAMX................................................................ 108,
284, 379
string constants................................................................ 174,
490
string constants, Extract command....................................... 139
string conversion...................................................................... 147
string expressions..................................................................... 178
string of digits.............................................................................. 29
string replacement, Hpmodify................................................ 224
string truncation........................................................................ 148
string, as a delimiter.................................................................. 293
string, heading command......................................................... 301
strings........................................................................................... 485
sub totaling................................................................................... 41
subcommands, Dbedit.............................................................. 340
subfiles, PowerHouse....................................................... 80,
375
subscript parameter................................................ 138,
259, 486
subscript parameter, character................................................ 175
subscript parameter, Define..................................................... 121
subscript parameter, numeric.................................................. 175
substrings.................................................................................... 175
subsystem access....................................................................... 248
Subsystem, Set option.............................................................. 248
subtotals............................................................................... 40,
130
Subtract Days............................................................................. 142
sum of field values..................................................................... 259
summary of STExport................................................................ 279
summary of Suprlink................................................................. 367
Super Cartridge.......................................................................... 205
Superdex................................................................................ 89,
486
Supr2job job stream.................................................................. 479
Suprcall........................................................................................... 19
Suprcall.Suprjob.Robelle........................................................ 479
Suprhint.Help.Robelle............................................................. 236
Suprlink....................................................................... 18,
202, 216
Suprlink performance................................................................ 104
Suprlink, using from Suprtool............................................... 363
Suprlink.Pub.Robelle.............................................................. 202
SuprlinkFullCount................................................................... 365
SuprlinkOutCount.................................................................... 364
Suprlist file................................................................. 44,
207, 356
Suprmgr file.................................................................................... 50
Suprtool in Suprlink............................................. 368,
390, 392
Suprtool package......................................................................... 17
Suprtool performance................................................................ 104
Suprtool vs. Speed Demon...................................................... 410
Suprtool, program file name.................................................... 448
Suprtool2....................................................................................... 19
Suprtool2 error messages........................................................ 480
Suprtool2 installation.................................................... 447,
479
Suprtool2 routine............................................................ 137,
202
Suprtool2 routine, MPE/iX...................................................... 74
Suprtool2filecommand............................................................. 448
SuprtoolFullCount variable..................................................... 51
SuprtoolOutCount JCW................................................... 50,
446
Suspend option on Exit........................................ 135,
296, 384
Suspend, Set option.................................................................. 249
suspending STExport............................................................... 276
suspending Suprlink................................................................ 364
suspending Suprtool.................................................................. 48
system parameter........................................................................ 113
system SL........................................................ 413,
414, 415, 479
system XL file.................................................................... 414,
448
table and $lookup................................................................. 30,
31
Table command........................................................................... 254
Table command, decimal places.............................................. 255
Table Data option...................................................................... 255
Table, $lookup examples......................................................... 256
Table, Data example................................................................... 257
table, HTML option.................................................................. 304
tables............................................................................................. 486
tables in Chain command......................................................... 117
tables, holding between Xeqs................................................ 255
tables, maximum size.............................................. 238,
257, 258
tape files............................................................. 72,
191, 192, 214
tape files of large size................................................................ 210
tapes, EBCDIC format................................................................. 72
tapes, labelled............................................................................... 72
tapes, multivolume....................................................................... 72
target field.................................................................................... 144
task, locking.................................................................................. 57
task, Suprtool......................................................................... 24,
53
temporary files..................................................................... 65,
213
third-party indexing........... 89,
127, 162, 164, 221, 271, 486
Third-party indexing, chain.................................................... 119
ThousandSymbol, Set option................................................. 249
time format in List............................................................ 206,
241
Time, Set List.............................................................................. 241
title, HTML option................................................................... 304
titles, List command.................................................................... 44
today function of Extract......................................................... 140
today function of If.................................................................... 183
Total command............................................................................ 259
Total Examples........................................................................... 259
Total, output restrictions........................................................ 132
totaling........................................................................................... 41
totaling duplicate records....................................................... 130
totals to a file..................................................................... 259,
260
totals to a program..................................................................... 132
TPI.......................................... 89,
164, see third-party indexing
TPI-keys......................................................................................... 89
trailing sign................................................................................ 316
TRANSACT................................................................................... 91
TRANSACT invocation of Suprtool.................................... 458
trimming spaces................................................................ 148,
181
truncate function.............................................................. 145,
178
truncation, numeric................................................................... 178
truncation, strings..................................................................... 148
TurboIMAGE................................................................................ 57
two-digit years...................................................................... 94,
95
type parameter.......................................................... 121,
122, 200
UDCs.............................................. see
User Defined Commands
Under option, Dbedit............................................................... 339
Underline, Set option............................................................... 357
Undo edit, Hpmodify................................................................ 224
unsigned value........................................................................... 152
Update command.............................................................. 241,
261
Update command, performance............................................... 104
Update from a Table................................................................... 255
Updatekey option, Dbedit...................................................... 340
Updating records......................................................................... 34
upper-case.......................................................................... 148,
181
upshifting strings...................................................................... 148
Use command........................................... 47,
262, 318, 358, 401
Use command with If $read..................................................... 189
User Defined Commands.................... 109,
284, 336, 380, 485
user labels............................................................................... 65,
73
user labels in SD files................................................................. 70
user program calls Suprlink.................................................... 473
User Prompting............................................................................ 77
user specified heading.............................................................. 301
Userlabels, Set option.............................................................. 249
Userpause command.................................................................. 264
Using Speed Demon................................................................. 420
value tests.................................................................................... 172
variable length strings................................................... 147, 178
variable substitution........................................ 75,
77, 281, 374
Variable Substitution, Set option......................................... 250
variable, SuprtoolFullCount.................................................... 51
variable-length, output file..................................................... 289
variables in file names.............................................................. 484
Varsub, Set option........................................................... 314,
399
VarsubCompat, Set option...................................................... 250
Verify command.................................... 253,
265, 319, 359, 402
Verify, Set option....................................................................... 357
Version entry point................................................................... 430
version numbers......................................................................... 430
VESOFT.................................................................... 108,
284, 379
VESOFT, God program............................................................ 114
warning messages............................................................ 271,
487
warning, delete all records...................................................... 127
warning, FLIMIT greater......................................................... 168
warning, using DBGET........................................................... 168
Warnings..................................................................................... 250
when to use Suprtool.................................................................. 56
wide listings............................................................................... 207
wider columns............................................................................... 44
Xeq command, STExport................................................. 297,
320
Xeq command, Suprlink.................................................. 384,
403
Xeq command, Suprtool.................................................. 136,
266
Xeq option on Exit................................................. 136,
297, 384
XL file.................................................................................. 414,
421
Xltrim............................................................................................ 251
XML, STExport.......................................................................... 321
XSORT................................................................................... 92,
236
Year 2000.................................................................................... 233
Year 2000 testing...................................................................... 101
yes answer to questions................................................. 270, 487
yes response in pseudo-batch................................................ 482
yyymmdd date format................................................................ 196
Zero command............................................................................. 324
zoned constants......................................................................... 139
zoned-decimal, illegal digits.................................................. 372
Z-type TPI-keys............................................................................ 89